School of Science

NAROK UNIVERSITY
ACCREDITATION REPORT VOLUME 2
CURRICULUM
DECEMBER 2012
1
SCHOOL OF SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE: CHEMISTRY PROGRAMME
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Department of Chemistry, in accordance with the general objectives of the University offers a
programme of studies which it feels would satisfy the needs and aspirations of the society from
which its students are drawn. The programme is sufficiently flexible to permit and encourage
students to develop interest in relevant fields and specialist option topics which are specifically
oriented towards industrial applications and the overall pattern of employment of chemistry
graduates.
The degree program consists of four years with two semesters in each year. Written and in some
cases practical examinations are given at the end of each semester. The first year is spent on basic
science courses. In the second year, the student starts to orient towards physical sciences. The third
and fourth years are devoted to an intensive study of theoretical and experimental chemistry
courses and allow for a certain amount of specialist option courses. Laboratory practices
throughout the study years, industrial attachment and guided research project is aimed at
developing the graduates' practical skills. This programme hopes to provide graduates not
only with a specialized knowledge of the subject but also a mind which has been trained and
exposed to well established scientific and technological procedures.
The Department also offers basic courses and service courses for education science,
Information sciences and natural resource science oriented schools.
2.0 Philosophy of the programme
With the ever-changing needs of the global economy, demands in science also changes. For any
technology to succeed, trained personnel are needed to sustain it through academic rigour,
partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Chemistry programme is
designed to respond to the dynamic demands of the world.
3.1 Rationale of the Programme
The department of Mathematics and Physical Science designed the Chemistry curriculum with
the flexibility to accommodate emerging challenges. Chemistry students at Narok University
combine theory with practice, gaining skills that produce results and improve technology in a
morally upright and ethical way. In class, students get the latest in both theory and practical
applications from dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are complemented with handson laboratory experience.
3.11 Needs assessment/ market survey/ situation analysis

Science, technology and innovation has been identified as a central plank for Kenya's
development and a foundation for vision 2030. To drive the attainment of vision 2030,
scientists would need to be trained. Accordingly Chemistry as a fundamental science would be
crucial to the achievement of the outlined vision
3.12 Justification of the programme
The Chemistry program is designed to empower students with the experimental and
Computational tools necessary in industry and allied fields such as medical and environmental
Chemistry, water quality assessment, Renewable energy, and Chemistry education among
others. Chemists are required in Kenya to address the skills gaps in emerging energy areas like
petroleum prospecting and processing.
3.2 Goals of the Programme
The Chemistry programme is aimed at:
i) Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of Chemistry and
acquisition of the necessary skills in order to use their knowledge in Chemistry in a
wide range of practical applications.
ii) Developing creative thinking and the power of imagination to enable graduates work in
research in academia and industry for broader application.
iii) Accommodating their relevant fields in allied disciplines and to allow the graduates of
Chemistry to fit into an inter-disciplinary environment.
iv) Relating the training of Chemistry graduates to the employment opportunities within the
country.
v) To equip students with a good understanding of the principles of Applied Chemistry,
aspects of which will be at the leading edge of knowledge.
vi) To produce Chemistry graduates with the necessary skills for team work in an industrial
and scientific research environment.
3.3 Expected learning outcomes of the programme
a) Knowledge and understanding
The Chemistry programme enables students develop competencies required to:
i) Solve problems in Chemistry and offer relevant solutions using appropriate tools.
ii) Know the environmental and social impact of a Chemists activities
iii) Understand business and management techniques relevant to a Chemist
b) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge
At the end of the programme should be able to:
i) Execute and critically analyze results of an investigation and make logical
conclusions.
ii) Use scientific principles in solutions of problems relevant to a Chemist
iii) Analyze experimental data in Physics Chemistry.
3
iv) Use computers in the treatment of results

v) Prepare research proposals and write reports
3.4 Mode of Delivery of the programme
The programme will be delivered mainly through face to face contact with students. In
situations of a distance approach of course delivery, students would be required to have
access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory experience.
3.5 Academic regulations
3.5.1 Admission requirements
To be admitted into the B.Sc. Programme in the Faculty of Science, a candidate must:
i) Meet the minimum University admission criteria
ii) Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
following Cluster of subjects:
CLUSTER A
CLUSTER B
BIOLOGY
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
GEOGRAPHY
OR MATHEMATICS
PHYSICS
GEOGRAPHY
MATHEMATICS AND ONE OTHER SUBJECT FROM GROUP III
3.5.2 Course requirements
Class attendance/Attachment
Students must satisfy class attendance requirements spelt out in the University
examination regulations besides attending a 3-month mandatory attachment at the end
of the third year of study.
3.5.3 Student Assessment policy/Criteria
The General University Examination Regulations and the special examination regulations set by
the school of Science shall apply. End of semester exams are written within 3-hour period. The
weighting for each course is as follows:
(a) Theory Courses
Continuous assessment tests (CATs)
End of semester exam; A written paper of 3 hours duration
(b) Theory and Laboratory based Courses
Continuous assessment tests
Continuous assessment of lab. Exercises
End of semester exam. A written paper of 3 hours duration
30%
70%
20%
20%
60%
3.5.4 Grading system

The grading system of courses and degree classification shall be the same as those contained in
the common rules and regulations for undergraduate examinations of 2010 of Narok University
found in section 5.3 .
3.5.5 Examination regulations
Examinations will be governed by the common rules and regulations for undergraduate
examination regulations of 2010 of Narok university.
3.5.6 Moderation of Examinations
The external examiner shall be involved in the moderation of examination question
papers and marked scripts. In addition the external examiner may assess research project
reports and may participate in the oral examination of a candidate. Internal examiners will
also be required to moderate examinations before being taken to the external examiner.
3.5.7 Graduation Requirements
To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Physics, a student shall satisfy all the university
requirements pertaining to the degree. Students shall take all the units offered in the first,
second, third and fourth year of study.
3.5.8 Classification of degrees
The classification will be done as stated in the Narok University common rules and regulations
for undergraduate examinations.
3.5.9 Regulations for Project work
A student registered in accordance with the regulations will be required to pursue his/her
project under the guidance of the supervisor appointed by the departmental board.
Final year project assessment will be based on performance in oral presentations and a formal
written report. Oral presentation will be done before a departmental board. The departmental
board will be allowed to ask questions and may contribute to the assessment of the candidate.
The duration of the oral presentation shall be limited to within 40 minutes. After the oral
presentation the board of examiners shall compile the scores and determine the average score
which shall be entered as the final mark in the project. The scoring shall be split as shown
below:
Assessment on the candidate's work and on the
submitted Project Report
70%
Oral examination
30%
3.6 Course evaluation
Direct assessment is through a range of in-semester tests that include, written examinations,
assignments, homework, laboratory reports and/or quizzes. Final year project assessment is
based on performance in oral presentations and a formal written report.
The maintenance of standards will be achieved by both internal and external moderation of
examinations. Above all the overall assessment process will be subject to external examiner
scrutiny who will provide benchmarking to international standards.
The different teaching methods are assessed as follows:
Lectures (those that are delivered mainly by lectures) will be examined primarily by end of
semester closed-book examinations, but will include an element (up to 30%) of continuous
assessment. The latter may be taken from worked problem sheets, laboratory reports, tutorial
lessons, tests, quizzes, essays or small project exercises. However most of the problem sheets
supporting lectures will be formative as also may be some laboratory reports and essays
(particularly at the lower levels). Some of the lecture courses may be examined primarily or
completely by assignments, where the nature of the course is unsuitable for assessment by
examination,
3.7 DURATION AND STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME
YEAR I
Course
CHE
IRD
IRD
BOT
PHY
MAT
ZOO
Semester I
Cod
e
110
100
101
110
110
110
110
YEAR I
Course Cod
e
CHE
111
IRD
102
IRD
103
BOT
111
PHY
111
MAT
111
ZOO
111
Title
Units
Basic Chemistry I
Communication Skills
Quantitative Skills
Basic Botany I
Basic Physics I
Basic Calculus I
Basic Zoology I
TOTAL UNITS
4
3
3
3
4
3
3
22
Semester II
Title
Units
Basic Chemistry I
Communication Skills II
National Development
Basic Botany II
Basic Physics II
Geometry and Elementary Applied Mathematics
Basic Zoology II
TOTAL UNITS
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
23
YEAR II
Course
CHE
CHE
MAT
MAT
MAT
STA
COM
IRD
code
210
211
210
212
214
110
210
200
YEAR II
Course code
CHE
212
CHE
213
CHE
214
MAT
211
MAT
213
STA
111
YEAR III
Course
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
MAT
CHE
IRD
code
310
311
312
313
314
314
315
305
Semester I
Title
Atomic Structure and Bonding
Basic Analytical Chemistry
Calculus
Linear Algebra I
Vector Analysis
Basic Statistics
Basic programming
State, society and development
TOTAL UNITS
Semester II
Title
Basic Organic Chemistry
Basic Thermodynamics and Phase Equilibria
Biochemistry
Calculus and Analytical Geometry
Linear Algebra II
Probability and statistics
TOTAL UNITS
Units
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
25
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
18
Semester I
Title
Chemistry of s- and p-Block Elements.
Methods of Chemical Analysis I
Chemistry of Aromatic compounds
Surface and Colloid Chemistry
Chemical Thermodynamics and Phase Equilibria
Ordinary Differential Equations
Alicyclic and Heterocyclic Chemistry
Entrepreneurship and Small Businesses
TOTAL UNITS
Units
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
25
YEAR III
Course code
CHE
316
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
COM
COM
Title
Analytical Techniques in Structure
Determination I
317
Chemical Kinetics
318
Organometallic and coordination Chemistry
319 Stereochemistry and conformational Studies
320 Industrial Chemistry I
321 Organic Spectroscopy
322
Industrial Attachment
325E Computer Applications II
318 Data Base Systems
TOTAL UNITS
YEAR IV
Course code
CHE
410
CHE
411
CHE
412
CHE
413
CHE
414
CHE
420
IRD
400
YEAR IV
Course code
CHE
415
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
Semester II
416
417
418
419
420
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
3
3
30
Semester I
Title
Transition Metal Chemistry
Methods of Chemical AnalysisII
Chemistry of Natural Products
Environmental Chemistry
Quantum Chemistry
Research Project
Project Development Applications
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
21
Semester II
Title
Analytical Techquenics in structural
Determination II
Organic Synthesis
Bio-inorganic Chemistry
Industrial Chemistry II
Electrochemistry
Research Project
TOTAL UNITS
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
18
ELECTIVE COURSES
Course
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
CHE
code
422E
423E
424E
427E
428E
416E
417E
425E
421E
Title
Polymer Chemistry
Medicinal Chemistry
Radio and nuclear Chemistry
Current Topics in Chemistry
Liquid Crystals
Photo Chemistry
Statistical Thermodynamics
Chemical Reactivity and Mechanism
Introduction to Group Theory
Units
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
3.8 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

YEAR ONE
CHE110-Basic Chemistry
4 UNITS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; the atomic structure, stoichiometry,
chemical equilibria and electrochemistry.
Expected Learning outcomes of the course
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the
introductory concepts of;
atomic structure,
stoichiometry,
chemical equilibria and
electrochemistry.
Course content
The atom: Daltons atomic theory. Atomic number number. Nuclides and isotopes.
Relative atomic mass. Atomic structure: electronic configuration and the periodic table.
Stoichiometry: Avogadros number and the mole concept, molar mass, molarity,
empirical and molecular formulae, calculations of percentage composition from
9
experiments and data. Chemical equilibria: Reversible chemical reaction, equilibrium

constants and their dependence on concentration and pressures, Le Chatelierss principle.
Ionic Equilibria: Ionization of water, acids, bases and salts. pH and buffer solutions.
Theory of acid/base indicators. Solubility and solubility products. Factors affecting
solubility. Electrochemistry: Electrochemical processes, half reactions, standard cells
and electrode potential, electromotive force of a cell
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and practical Experiments.
Instructional Materials/Equipment:
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Laboratory glassware and chemicals etc.
Course Assessment:
The course will be assessed in two parts:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

which will normally contribute 30% of the total mark
Examination shall normally contribute 70% of the total mark
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluation by head of department and self evaluation.
Core reading material for the course
Inorganic Chemistry by Vogel.
Recommended reference materials
1.
Graham H & John H. (2004). Chemistry in Context.5th edition.
2.
James E.B (1975). General Chemistry: Principles and structure.
CHE111-Basic Chemistry II
3 UNITS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; Simple organic molecules: structure,
classification, nomenclature, isomerism and basic reactions.
10
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of;
the introductory concepts of structures of organic molecules,
empirical and molecular formulae determinations,
homologous series,
IUPAC nomenclature for organic molecules,
existence of structural and geometric isomerism, and
basic reactions of these compounds .
Course content
Organic chemistry is of vital importance to the petrochemical, pharmaceutical, polymer
and textile industries, where a prime concern is the synthesis of new organic molecules
and polymers. Knowledge of the structure, functionality, and reactivity of organic
molecules is critical for the understanding of numerous and disparate phenomena, from
biological and biochemical processes (enzyme-substate interactions), to medicine
(pharmaceuticals), to the properties of materials (polymers). This course covers the basic
and fundamental principles of organic chemistry, allowing the student to begin
understanding the language of organic chemists. A broad overview of the properties and
characteristics of organic molecules is provided, and several key reactions and simple
reaction mechanisms are discussed.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Morrison and Boyd, Basic Organic Chemistry
11
2. Graham H & John H. (2004). Chemistry in Context.5th edition.

3. James E.B (1975). General Chemistry: Principles and structure.
4. Organic Chemistry by Vogel.
YEAR TWO
CHE 210: ATOMIC STRUCTURE AND BONDING
(4 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic concepts in quantum chemistry
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course students should be able to:
1. Explain the quantum theory and its applications to atomic molecular structure and
spectroscopy.
Course content
The Bohr atom; dependence of the energy levels of the hydrogen atom on the principle
quantum number. The wave nature of matter and the de Broglies relation. Heisenberg
Uncertainty Principle. Introduction to wave equations of electrons; Schrodinger equation.
Bonn interpretation of the wave function; probability density, normalization. Quantum
numbers including spin; radical and angular functions, charge clouds and orbitals.
Energy levels, electron configurations and the periodic table. Many- electron atoms; need
for Slater effective atomic numbers, penetration and shielding. Covalent and hydrogen
bonds. Construction and use of hybrid orbitals. Valence bond theory and molecular
orbital for simple molecule and ions. Resonance. Linear combination of atomic
orbitals.Molecular orbital theory for H2, He, N2, O2, HF etc. The solid state: Crystal
geometry and structure. Lattice energy calculations. Solvation energies. Born Haber
cycle. Metallic bonding. Insulators, semi-conductors. Defects in crystalline solids. The
bond theory of metals. Complexions, definitions and examples of acids and bases,
coordinate bond. Fajans rules.
Mode of delivery
12
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Harris, Quantitative Chemical analysis. Fourth edition
2. Skoog, West, Holler, and Crouch;. Analytical Chemistry: An Introduction,
Edition
4. A text of Quantitative Chemical Analysis by Vogel
Seventh
CHE 211: BASIC ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to vocabulary and concepts in basic Analytical Chemistry:
preparation and analysis of a sample, the chemical basis and techniques of analysis using
gravimetric and volumetric methods as well as chromatography. You will also learn and
use statistical methods to determine the precision of experimental results.
At the end of the course students should be:
able to demonstrate an understanding of the preparation and analysis of a sample, the
chemical basis and techniques of analysis using gravimetric and volumetric methods as
well as chromatography, and use statistical methods to determine the precision of
experimental results.
Course content
Introduction to nature and scope of analytical chemistry. Principles and practice of
precision measurements in chemistry.
Collection and statistical treatment of data. Types of errors; precision and accuracy.
Distribution of errors: mean, standard deviation, variance, student t-test and confidence
limits.
13
Gravimetric and titrimetric analysis: precipitation, acid-base and oxidation-reduction

equilibria and complexometric analysis.
Separation Tchniques: Such as liquid-liquid extraction, fractional distillation,
crystallization, ion-exchange and chromatography including TLC, paper, column, gas,
liquid and high pressure liquid methods.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Vogels Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, 5th Ed., By G.H. Jefferey,
J. Bassett, J. Mendham, and R.C. Denney, ELBS Longman.
2. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, 7th Ed., By D.A. Skoog, D.M. West and
F.J. Hooler, Sounders College Publishing.
3. Quantitative Analysis, 5th Ed., by R.A. Day, Jr. and A.L. Underwood, Prentice
Hall of India.
4. Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry, 2nd Ed., By S.M. Khopkar, New Age
Publishers.
CHE 212: BASIC ORGANIC CHEMITRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the chemistry of hydrocarbon compounds and their derivatives.
Learning Outcomes:
14

1. Describe the structure (functional groups), properties, reactions and applications of
common hydrocarbon compounds and their derivatives.
Course content
Structural theory. Bonding concepts and shapes of molecules. Structure, synthesis and
reactions of alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, alkyl halides and ethers, amines, aldehydes and
ketones .Carboxylic acids and their derivatives. Functional group chemistry: the hydroxyl
group, ethers, thiols and sulphides.Introduction to the chemistry of nitrogen, sulphur,
phosphorus and silicon compounds. Basic infrared spectroscopy and the identification of
functional groups. Practicals will be on representative reactions in the major subtopics
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
2. Skoog, West, Holler, and Crouch;. Analytical Chemistry: An Introduction, Seventh
Edition
CHE 213: BASIC THERMODYNAMICS

15
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the elements of thermodynamics
Learning Outcomes:
1. Explain the basic concepts in thermochemistry, thermodynamics and quantum
mechanics.
Course content
Properites of gases, kinetic molecular theory of gases, ideal gas laws, deviation from
identity and Van-der Waals equation. Derivation of heat capacities (Cv and Cp) from the
kinetic molecular theory of gases. Liquefaction of gases, Law of corresponding states and
the critical point. Introduction to chemical thermodynamics: systems, states, state
functions, and the equilibrium rate. First law of thermodynamics; internal energy,
enthalpy, constant volume, constant pressure. Pressure, volume, work and reversible
processes. Isothermal and adiabatic expansion and compression of an ideal gas. Heat
capacities and temperature dependence of internal energy and enthalpy.
Thermochemistry; Basic definition of enthalpy changes, heat change involved in chemical
reactions, heats of formation combustion, neutralization and solution. Hesss law.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.
Brown G.I.: Introduction to Physical Chemistry (1987)
16

2. Sharma K.K. and Sharma L.K.: A text Book of Physical Chemistry (1992)
3. Gordon Barrow: Physical Chemistry-Sixth Edition (1996)
4. P.W. Atkins: Physical Chemistry-Fourth Edition (1990)
5. R. Chang: Chemistry (1978)
6. Roy Mcweeny: General Chemistry, 5th Ed.
7. Mark Bishop: An Introduction to Chemistry.
8. Kotz and Purcell: Chemistry and Chemical reactivity second edition.
CHE 214: BIOCHEMISTRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in the chemistry of biological molecules in
living tissues.
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the;
structure and main fuctional groups of biological molecules.
Reaction partways and processes of these molecules
Link between reactions and biological activities.
Course content
Chemistry, structure and function of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins and
nucleic acids, Biological energetic: pathways of glucose, fat and amino acids metabolism.
Biomembrane chemistry, introduction to enyymology. Biochemistry techniques:
preparation of buffers, measurements of pH. Chromatography: Column, paper and gas
liquid chromatography. Electrophoresis, precipitation, colorimetry, spectrophotometry and
flame photometry.
Mode of delivery
17
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Morison and Boyed, Basic organic Chemistry
Edition
Seventh
YEAR THREE
CHE310: CHEMISTRY OF THE s-AND p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; the features and properties of the sand p-block elements and their compounds; oxides, chlorides etc and extractions
1. Able to demonstrate an understanding of the features and properties of the s- and pblock elements and their compounds; oxides, chlorides etc in their periodic and group
trends.
Course content
General survey of the main features of the s- and p-block elements; Oxidation processes
of various elements.
18
Occurance and metallurgy. Some examples of applications of the elements and their
compounds.
Comparative study of the chemistry as illustrated by allotropism; binary compounds,
hydrides, oxides, hydroxides, oxoacids and salts, with comparisons along the periods,
down groups and diagonally.
The borane chemistry. Practical work to include systematic identification of cations and
anions and selected preparative experiments.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.
James E.B (1975). General Chemistry: Principles and
structure.
3. Inorganic Chemistry by Vogel.
CHE311: METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
(4UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; instrumental chemical analysis methods;
various classification of instruments for analys; the instrumental components; the link
with computers.
19

1. Able to demonstrate an understanding of the instrumental chemical analysis methods;
various classification of instruments for analysis; the instrumental
components(amplifiers, transducers etc); the link with computers (interfacing with
computers).
Course content
General methods of analytical chemistry. Introduction to optical, stectral, electrochemical
and chromatographic methods. Application in organic, inorganic and environmental
analysis.
Electrical circuit of analytical instruments: instrument components, operational
amplifiers, digital circuits. Computers in analytical instrumentation.
In each component subject of the course, instruction and practical work on the skills of
handling instruments, acquisition of spectral and an interpretation will be emphasized.
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Laboratory glassware and chemicals
etc.
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Vogels Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, 5th Ed., By G.H. Jefferey,
J. Bassett, J. Mendham, and R.C. Denney, ELBS Longman.
20
2. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, 7th Ed., By D.A. Skoog, D.M. West and
F.J. Hooler, Sounders College Publishing.
3. Quantitative Analysis, 5th Ed., by R.A. Day, Jr. and A.L. Underwood, Prentice
Hall of India.
4. Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry, 2nd Ed., By S.M. Khopkar, New Age
Publishers.
5. Comprehensive Analytical Chemistry, Vol. IA, Edited By C.L. Willson and
D.W. Wilson, Elsevier Publishing Company.
CHE 312: CHEMISTRY OF ALICYCLIC AROMATIC COMPOUNDS

UNITS)
(3
Purpose:
To introduce students to the chemistry of the aromatic compounds
Learning Outcomes:
1. Demonstrate understanding of the chemistry of aromatic compounds and its
derivatives
Course content
Chemistry of benzene and other monocylic aromatic compounds. Sources and their uses,
nomenclature of benzene derivatives, aromatically, special behavior of benzene, Huckels
rule.Non-aromatic and antiaromatic compounds, reactions and mechanisms (electrophilic
and nucleophilic aromatic substitutions). The chemistry of naphthalenes, anthracenes,
enathracens: annules, biphenyls and realted compounds. Nomenclature, reactions and
mechanism ( electrophilic and nucleophilic reactions), structure and stability, aromacity,
properties , chemical and spectroscopic identification methods.Synthesis of small,
medium and large rings.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
21

Staff performance
1. Morison and Boyed, Basic Organic Chemistry
3. Organi Chemistry by Vogel
CHE313: SURFACE AND COLLOIDAL CHEMISTRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; Adsorption: types, adsorption isotherms,
catalysis of adsorption and kinetics; wetting, charge of a surface. Colloids: properties,
kinetics etc
able to demonstrate an understanding of the introductory concepts of Adsorption: types,
adsorption isotherms, catalysis of adsorption and kinetics; wetting, charge of a surface.
Colloids: properties, kinetics etc
Course content
Adsorption of gases and vapours on solids: Physical adsorption and chemisorptions of
gases and vapours on solids. Classification of adsorption isotherms. Isotherm equations:
Langmuir and BET. Determination of solid surface areas. Adsorption energies for
physical adsorption and chemisorptions. Heterogeneous catalysis. Surface and interfacial
tensions, thermodynamics of adsorption. Gibbs equation, micelle formation and
monomolecular films. Contact angles and wetting floatation, detergency and adsorption
from solution.
Charge of surface and electric layer. Electrokinetics: electrophoresis, electro-osmosis, zeta
potential, streaming current and steam potential.
22
Colloidal state: classification, preparation and purification of its systems. Kinetic

properties. Use of ultracentrifuge and osmotic pressure for determination of relative
molecular masses of macromolecule. Optical properties: light scattering and
macromolecular relative mass determination.
Rheology: Phenomenon of rheology viscosity for molar mass determination. Colloidal
stability: co-agulation and its kinetics. Emulsions; types, emulsi-fying agents, emulsion
stability and breaking of emulsions. Forms: stability and antifoaming agents.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.
23
CHE 314: THERMODYNAMICS AND PHASE EQUILIBRIA
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To familiarize the students with the important principles, consequences and applications
of thermodynamics
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the important concepts and consequences of the second and third laws of
thermodynamics.
Course content
Spontaneous processes in isolated systems. Entropy and disorder. Second Law of
thermodynamics. Spontaneous isolated systems. Calculation of entropy for isothermal
processes. Temperature dependence of entropy. Free energy and chemical equilibrium in
multi-phase and multi-component systems. Gibbs and Helmhotz free energy, the pressure
and temperature dependence of Gibbs free energy. Relation of Gibbs free energy to
equilibrium constant. Third Law of thermodynamics. Clausius, Clausius-Clapeyron and
Vant Hoff isochore equations. Phase rule. Phase equilibria, Vapour pressurecomposition
diagrams for liquid mixtures. Properties of solutions. Raoults and Henrys Laws;
azeotropes, eutectics; applications to ideal and non-ideal systems and industrially
important processes incuding distillation and chemical equilibria at high temperatures and
pressures. Distillation colligative properties.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
24

1.
CHE 315: ALICYCLIC AND HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY

HOURS)
(4 CREDIT
Purpose
To introduce the learner to; non-aromatic heterocyclic compounds, 5-, 6- membered
heterocyclic and fused ring heterocyclic compounds.
Name non-aromatic, 5-, 6- membered heterocyclic and fused ring heterocyclic

compounds.
Draw the shapes, conformations and configurations of cyclic molecules.
Describe resonance of heterocyclic compounds.
Describe preparation and chemical reactions of non-aromatic and heterocyclic

compounds.
State the importance of heterocyclic compounds in day todays life.
Course content
- Non-aromatic heterocyclic compounds: nomenclature, Shapes, conformations and
configurations of cyclic molecules; sources of strain in rings; stereochemistry and
reactivity of cyclic molecules; synthesis and unique properties of small-medium rings.
- Heterocyclic compounds: Meaning of heterocyclic compounds, classification,
nomenclature, 5, 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic compounds, their synthesis and
properties, aromatic properties and resonance hybrids, orientations of substitution
reactions.
25
- Condensed ring systems: examples of condensed ring systems, structures, their

synthesis and properties, determination of constitution of condensed ring systems,
electrophilic and substitution reactions.
- General survey of importance of heterocyclic compounds: uses of non-aromatic and
heterocyclic compounds and their derivatives as synthetic intermediates and medicinal
importance.
Mode of delivery (Teaching and learning methodologies)
Course Assessment:

which will contribute 30% of the total mark.
Main examination shall contribute 70% of the total mark.
Staff performance
4.
Soli, P. L. (1980). Organic Chemistry (A Modern Approach). 13 th edition, Sultan
Chand& sons, New Delhi.
2. Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6 th edition, Prentice-Halll,
New Delhi.
CHE 316: ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES IN STRUCTURAL DETERMINATION 1
(3
UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; instrumental structure determination of
simple organic and inorganic molecules and ions respectively; Functional group
indentification etc.
26
able to demonstrate an understanding of the instrumental methods for molecular structure

determination-mass spectrometer; Uv/Vis; FTIR, NMR etc, and the various functional
groups characteristic of various organic cxompounds.
Course content
Fundamental aspects of modern instrumental methods. Nuclear magnetic resonance, ultraviolet; visible spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy and mass spectrometry. The X-ray
spectroscopy .The components of the instruments, selection rules, preparation and
handling of samples of analysis, interpretation of data qualitatively and quantitatively.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Soli, P. L. (1980). Organic Chemistry (A Modern Approach). 13th edition, Sultan
2. Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6th edition, Prentice-Halll,
New Delhi.
3. Morrison and Boyed, Basic organic Chemistry.
CHE 317: CHEMICAL KINETICS
(3 UNITS)
27
Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic principles of chemical kinetics
Learning Outcomes:
1. Express the rate laws for simple reactions.
2. Determine the partial orders and overall reaction orders for simple reactions from
the rate laws
3. State the theories of reaction rates and deduce simple reaction mechanisms from
kinetic studies.
Course content
Reaction Kinetics; elementary and complex reactions, molecularity of elementary
reactions. Introduction to reaction order and rate equations. Order of react5ion , rate of
reaction, reversible reaction. Rate-determining step and reaction on concentration for
zero, first and second-order reversible reactions. Application of Guggenheim and
Swinbourne procedures to first order reactions. Dependece of rate constant on
temperature, activation energy and A-factor determination. Methods of determining rates
and orders of chemical reactions .Qualitative treatment of Boltmann factor, chain
reactions, parallel, consecutive and reversible reactions. The approach to the steady-state
and induction period. Transition state theory of reaction kinetics. Branched chain
reactions and explosions. Catalysis; heterogeneous catalysis, enzyme catalysis (Michaelis
constant), homogeneous catalysis (specific acid, base and general acid-base
catalysis).Mechanism for enzyme catalyzed reactions. Theories of reactions kinetics.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
28

1.
CHE318: ORGANO-METALLIC AND CO-ORDINATION CHEMISTRY (3

UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; co-ordination chemistry and organometallic
compounds. Nomenclature, structure and isomerism, preparation and stability of
complexes. Applications of these compounds
able to demonstrate an understanding of the introductory concepts of Nomenclature,
structure and isomerism, preparation and stability of complexes in co-ordinated
compounds and their applications in a chemical industry.
Course content
Development of co-ordination chemistry. Nomenclature, structure and isomerism in
coordination compounds . preparation and stability of co-ordination complex es. Theories
of metal ligand bonding. Hard and soft acids and bases and their applications. Synthesis,
characterization, bonding and reactivity of organometallic compounds of transition
elements. Brief introduction to metal carbine and carbine compounds. Industrial
applications of organometallic compounds as illustrated by Ziegler-Natta catalysts and in
Fischer-Tropsch process for making gasoline. Role in organic synthesis and biological
systems.
Mode of delivery
29
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
3. Organic Chemistry by Vogel.
CHE319: STEREOCHEMISTRY AND CONFORMATIONAL STUDIES (3 UNITS)

Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic principles of stereochemistry, conformational studies
and reaction mechanisms
Learning Outcomes:
1. Show understanding of basic principles of stereochemistry, conformational
studies and reaction mechanisms
Course content
Stereochemistry: Cirality, prochirality. Stereoisomerism: diastereoisomers, enantiomers.
Optical activity, racemization resolution, absolute configuration, (R) and (S) system
(cahn, ingold and Prelo). Conformational studies: ethane, propane, butane andsubstituted
compounds, the barrier to rotation about C-C bonds, staggered and eclipsed conformers
and their populations, hydrogen bonding, van der Waals and other effects. Substituted
30
cycloalkanes. Stereochemical and other effects in nucleophilic substitution, elimination

and addition reactions. Neighbouring
group participation.Diiasteroseletive and
enantioselective reactions such as reductions, displacements, additions, aldols. Grignard,
wittig and pericyclic reactions. 1,3-sigmatropic rearrangements. Introduction to organic
synthesis polyfunctional compounds, emphasis on selectivity. Functional group
interconversions.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
2. Recommended reference materials
3. 2.Soli, P. L. (1980). Organic Chemistry (A Modern Approach). 13 th edition, Sultan
4. 3 Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6th edition, Prentice-Halll,
New Delhi.
CHE320: IDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY I
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; Pilot plants, and patenting, modern chemical
industry: economics, ceramic industry(glass, cement manufacturig), chemical plants
(sulfuric acid, caustic soda etc)
31

able to demonstrate an understanding of the introductory concepts of the pilot
plant,chemical industry, product production, patenting and marketing. And the dynamics
of profitability and losses plus safety measures.
Course content
Pilot plants. Chemical plant locations. The modern chemical industry from R & D to
manufacture. Economics of the chemical industry. Process selection patents. Basic
industrial inorganic chemistry and the important role of interrelationships between
industrial chemical processes.
Ceramic industries: refractories, glass, Portland cement and calcium carbide. Ceramic
products. Production, uses and detailed analysis of physical or inorganic chemistry
involved in selected important primary chemical processes in the chemical industry such
as sodium chloride, ammonia, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, caustic soda, soda ash, Chlorine
and products based there on.
Processing of fats and oils for edible use and industrial applications. Isolation of meat
based products. Manufactuere of soaps and detergents. Production and isolation of wood
chemicals. The pulp and paper industry. Extraction and purification of metals such as
alluminium production. Locally available raw materials for the chemical industry and
their further processing. Quality transportation, legal and financial aspects of chemical
industry and technology. (Industrial vists essential, industrial attachment desirable).
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
32

1. A textbook of industrial production
4. Inrganic Chemistry by Vogel.
CHE 321: Organic Spectroscopy
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To familiarize the student with modern techniques for identification and structural
analysis of organic compounds
Learning Outcomes:
1. Explain the theory of spectroscopy and interpretation of spectra.
Course content
An introduction to the use of UV-visible, infrared, nuclear magnetic resonance, and mass
spectroscopy for identification and proof of structure of organic compounds. The theory
includes preparation of samples, operation of instruments and accessing the data from the
literature including online sources like Beilstein Crossfire and identification of several
unknown compounds. Introduction to spectroscopy (theory and basic principles);
electromagnetic radiation, absorption spectroscopy, Infrared (IR) spectroscopy; Mass
Spectrometry (MS); ultraviolet (UV) and Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR)
spectroscopy. NMR concepts such as chemical shift scales, relation of chemical shift to
structure, integrals, spin-spin splitting and characteristic functional groups absorptions in
each case will be presented. Solving structure problems in organic Chemistry using
combination of the various spectroscopic techniques will be emphasized. NMR and mass
spectrometry facilities available in Kenya, laboratory sessions
Mode of delivery
33
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.Harris, Quantitative Chemical analysis. Fourth edition
3. Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6 th edition, Prentice-Halll,
New Delhi.
CHE322: INDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; Exposure to the practical applications of
chemistry in industrial product generation; chemical dangers and safety measures
employed.
able to demonstrate an understanding of the practical chemistry in the industry in
translating simple chemical reactions to useful products. Also the emerging trends in
industrial productions and environmental safety measures against pollution.
Course content
At the end of the third year, during the long vacation, students wii be normall required to
spend eight(8) weeks on practical attachment. They will be expected to participate in inthe day to day activities of the organization under the supervision of qualified personel.
Students will be required to maintain a logbook of their daily activities. The
organizations supervisor will regularly assess the logbook. At the conlusion of the
34
attachment, students will be expected to submit a written report, which will be descriptive
and critical analysis of their experience. Final assessment will be based on evaluation of
the studentreport. Those who fail to get suitable attachment must present a seminar paper
on bydepartment or select in extra elective course.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance

2. Skoog, West, Holler, and Crouch; . Analytical Chemistry: An
Introduction, Seventh Edition
FOURTH YEAR
CHE 410: TRANSITION METALS CHEMISTRY
Purpose
35
(3 UNITS)
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; d-block elements: definition, periodic
trends, properties of the elements and their compounds, extractions and industrial
applications.
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of;
the electronic configurations of atoms of the d-block elements (Sc to Zn), and
their
simple ions, from their position in the Periodic Table
the transition metals as d-block elements forming one or more stable ions which
have
incompletely filled d-orbitals
the characteristic properties of the transition elements, such as

i the formation of coloured aqueous ions, and other complex ions
iiVariable oxidation states in compounds.
iii catalysis and induetrial applications
iv. paramagnetism and diamagnetism
the nature of the bonding in complex ions, including the aqua-ions, their shape
and the cause of their colour
stereoisomerism in such complex ions will not be examined
an elementary treatment only is required.
Course content
General methods of analytical chemistry. Introduction to optical, stectral, electrochemical
and chromatographic methods. Application in organic, inorganic and environmental
analysis.
Electrical circuit of analytical instruments: instrument components, operational
amplifiers, digital circuits. Computers in analytical instrumentation.
In each component subject of the course, instruction and practical work on the skills of
handling instruments, acquisition of spectral and an interpretation will be emphasized.
Mode of delivery
36
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1. Inorganic Chemistry by Vogel
2. Chemistry in Context
CHE 411: METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
( 3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in; Advanced instrumental chemical analysis
methods; various classification of instruments for analysis; the instrumental components;
the link with computers.
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the
advanced instrumental chemical analysis methods; various classification of instruments
for analysis; the instrumental components(amplifiers, transducers etc); the link with
computers (interfacing with computers).
Course content
Electrochemical methods; polarography, amperometry, conductometry, and stripping
voltammetry, differential pulse polarographyand absorptive stripping voltammmetry;
potentiometric titrations with ion selective electrode. Chromatography methods:
supercritical fluid chromatography fluid , gel permeation chromatography, capillary zone
electrophoresis, micellar electrokinetic chromatography, liquid and gas chromatography.
Mode of delivery
37
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
CHE 412: CHEMISTRY OF NATURAL PRODUCTS
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to: chemistry of natural products, classes of natural products,
their biosynthetic pathways, isolations, bioactivity and uses of natural products.
Name four classes of natural products.
Describe the origin, chemistry, biosynthesis and biomimetric synthesis of various

classes of natural products including polyketides, terpenoids, alkaloids, steroids
and shikimic acid derivative.
Discuss the importance of biologically active compounds in agriculture and in

medicine.
38
Describe the identification natural products by physical, spectral and chemical

methods.
Course content
- Natural products: Definition of natural products, primary and secondary metabolites
and their importance.
- Secondary metabolites: Examples of various classes, biosynthetic pathway.
- Alkaloids: Occurrence, nomenclature, classification, general isolation methods,
properties and determination of chemical constitution of alkaloids, their
functions.
- Terpenoids: occurrence, classification, nomenclature, general isolation methods,
properties and determination of chemical constitution of terpenoids, their
functions.
- Steroids: Occurrence, classification, general isolation methods, properties and
determination of chemical constitution of steroids, their functions.
- Polyketides: Occurrence, general isolation methods, properties and their functions.
- Bioassay methods: Definition, antimicrobial, antiplasmodial, brime shrimp test, growth
inhibitory activity test and cytotoxicity test.
- Drug discovery process: traditional way, modern processes, extraction of natural
products, bioassay guided fractionation, methods of purification of
compounds and economics exploitation of biological active compounds
- Structure elucidation: by physical, spectral and chemical methods.
- Survey of selected locally available biologically active compounds and their sources.
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and practical Experiments & field
survey.
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
39
1. Gurdeep C. (1990). Organic chemistry of natural products (Vol. II). Himalaya,

Delhi.
2. Soli, P. L. (1980). Organic Chemistry (A Modern Approach). 13 th edition, Sultan
3. Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6 th edition, PrenticeHall, New Delhi.
CHE 413: ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
The course is intended to equip students with a basic understanding of environmental
chemistry
Learning Outcomes:
1. Show understanding of the basic principles of environmental chemistry
2. Acquire knowledge that will help them to understand better the environment they live
in.
Course content
Environmental pollution. Production of oxides of carbon, nitrogen and sulphur from fossil
fuel. Atmospheric and photochemistry of major gases pollutants. Acid rains. Nature and
potential toxicities of particulates and gaseous emissions from the combustion of
petroleum based fuels. Lead fuel additives as potential health hazards. Recent
development in emission control. Impact of agricultural chemicals on terrestrial and
aquatic environment. Persistence of pesticides residues in tropical ecosystems and
template climates. Effects of pesticides residues on food and vitamins B12 complexes.
Non-heme metalloproteins such as cytochromes and ferro/ferridoxins. Metal ion
poisoning by inorganic gases and mechamisms of poisoning. Treatment of poisoning,
nitrogen fixation through metal complexes and nitrogenase. Photosynthesis: chlorophyll,
its structure and function. The role of manganese inphotosynthesis. Anti-cancer drugs.
Diagnostic medicine, bioinorganic activity of technetium, radiopharmaceutical, gold drug.
Mode of delivery
40
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
CHE 414: BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic concepts in quantum chemistry
Learning Outcomes:
1. Explain the quantum theory and its applications to atomic molecular structure
and spectroscopy.
Course content
Particle-wave quality of matter; Operator approach mechanics; Eigen functions and eigen
values; Exact solutions; Particles in a box; Harmonic oscillator; Rigid rotator; variational
method and one electron approximation. Electron spin, antisymmetry; Exicited states,
linear combination of atomic orbitals, molecular orbitals. Huckel treatment for systems;
Bravais lattices; ideal crystals; Dislocations; structural and thermodynamics defects in
ionic crystal.
Mode of delivery
41
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.
CHE 416: CONCEPTS OF ORGANIC SYNTHESIS
(3 UNITS)
Purpose
To introduce the learner to basic concepts in: Organic synthesis, retrosynthetic analysis
and designing an organic synthesis.
State applications of organic synthesis in science.
State the general considerations involved when designing a synthetic route or

disconnecting any given target molecule (TM).
Carry out retrosynthetic analysis of a TM and write its synthesis.

42
Show by means of equations how functional group interconversion is achieved.
Course content
- Concept of organic synthesis: organic synthesis and its application in science,
designing synthesis, theoretical consideration before designing a synthesis, retrosynthetic
analysis, synthons and synthetic equivalents, considerations when disconnecting a TM,
functional groups in organic synthesis
- Methods of forming carbon-carbon bonds I: review of the chemistry of the carbonyl
group, base and acid catalysis of carbonyl group, Aldo condensation, Claisen
condensation, inter- and intramolecular condensation reactions.
- Methods of forming carbon-carbon bonds II: Darzens condensation, Acyloin
condensation, Michael addition reaction, cyclic carbon- carbon bond formation: Robinson
annulation reaction.
- Methods of forming carbon-carbon bonds III: Witting reaction, Diels-Alders
reaction, reactions involving enamines
- Reduction reactions: catalytic hydrogenation, reduction by hydride transfer
reagents, reduction of carbonyl functional group.
- Oxidation reactions: oxidation of alcohol, aldehydes and ketones, Baeyer-Villagers,
oxidation of carbon-carbon double and triple bonds, Ozonolysis of carbon-carbon
double and triple bonds, use of crown ethers in oxidation
- Protecting groups: definition, role and characteristics of protecting group,
protecting the functional groups including alcohol, amine, carbonyl and carboxylic
groups.
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
43

1. Solomon G.T.W and Fryhle B.C. (2011). Organic Chemistry. 10 th edition, John Wiley
& sons, Inc.
3. Morrison R.T and Boyd R.N (1994). Organic Chemistry. 6th edition, Prentice-Halll,
New Delhi.
CHE 418: INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY II
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the reactor chemistry in industrial productions; Agrochemicals,
petroleum, Dyes, Fermentation, Rubber, sugar etc
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course students should be able to: Describe the new ;
Reactors and reactor types, and design

The chemistries of: Agrochemicals, petroleum, dyes, rubber, fermentation, sugar
etc
Course content
Reactions and reactor types in the chemical industry: the batch aspects reactor., the
continuous stirred tank reactor, performance and economic aspects. Reactor design. Effect
of simultaneous and consecutive reactions of the performance of the reactor.
Agrochemicals: Chemistry of fertilizers i.e ingredients, additive and stabilizers processing
of fertilizers, quality control methods, toxicology, packaging and storage.
Petroleum refining including heavy oil and bitumen; cracking. Reforming,
petrochemicals, feedstocks for chemical industry and formation of industrial chemicals.
Industrial organic synthesis including monomers for subsequent polymerization. Design
of specialized polymers.
Dyes: Making matches and bleaches. Fermentation and fermentation based products such
as ethanol and penicillin. Rubber industry. Starch industry. Sugar processing in Kenya.
Effects of chemical plants on the environment, safety and chemical waste management.
Student will be required to visit selected industrial sites.
Mode of delivery
44
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
CHE 419: ELECTROCHEMISTRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the theory of electrochemical processes and activity
Learning Outcomes:
1. Explain the theory of electrochemical processes and the concept of activity and
activity coefficient.
Course content
Condutance of electrolytes, specific resistance and conductance , molar and equivalent
conductance and cell constant. Conductivity: methods of measurements, relation to
diffusion coefficient; measurement of transport numbers; factors affecting ionic mobility;
conductance of strong and weak electrolytes; Debye-Huckel theory; Osanger limiting law,
Kohlrauschs measurements, determination of dissociation constant of weak acids.
Solubility of sparingly soluble salts, electrolysis. Transference number and
conductometric titrations. Electrochemical process, electrode potentials, applications of
45
emf on measurements. Standard cell. Electrochemical cell: sign convection, dependence

of emf on concentration and activity coefficients; emf determination. Nernst equation;
type of electrodes; electrodes; electrode mechanisms, transport limited currents, rotating
disk, mercury drop, analytical applications.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.
CHE 420: RESEARCH PROJECT
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce the students to research techniques
46
Learning Outcomes:
1. Demonstrate acquisition of the basic knowledge of research techniques.
Course content
This is a three unit course where the students are expected to submit a project write up
based on techniques read in books/journals or synthetic work carried out by the student
either in industry or in any other station and discussed with the supervisors. The student
will also be expected to attend and present seminars on research that they have
undertaken under the guidance of materials such as in Jua Kali. Design of operations of
small plants.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
ELECTIVE COURSES
47
CHE 416E: PHOTOCHEMISTRY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic principles of molecular photochemistry
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate the understanding of:
Types of excited states; distinctive properties of excited states

Types of photochemical reactions.
Course content
Einstein law; quantum efficiency, molecular photochemistry; Types of excited states;
distinctive properties of excited states; fluorescence, phosphorescence, internal
convention; intersystem closing; lifetimes; photochemical reactions, unimolecular
reactions of excited state, isomerizations, dissociation, charge transfer; Biomolecular
sensitized reactions, triplet states; Atmospheric reactions applications of photochemical
reaction to the synthesis of naturally occurring systems, food preservation, production of
industrial and health care products.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.Harris, Quantitative Chemical analysis. Fourth edition
48

3. Fumio Toda (2005), Thermal and photochemical reactions in the solid state. Top
Curr. Chem. 254: 1-40
CHE 417E: STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the basic principles of statistical thermodynamics
Learning Outcomes:
1. calculate thermodynamic functions, heat capacities, entropies, and equilibrium
constants
2. Appreciate the role of probability and statistics in the thermodynamics of
molecular systems.
Course content
Dynamic and statistical regularity; Distribution function in a phase space, statistical
equilibrium and fluctuations; Thermodynamic probability; Boltzman-Maxwell
distribution; Properties of distribution functions; Cannocial Gibbs distribution; Statistical
temperatures; Phase and configuration intergrals; Determination of microstates;
Distinguishably of particles; summation of states; Ground canonical distribution; Kinetic
and thermodynamic properties of macrosystems; Ideal and real gases; configuration
intergrals; Theories on liquid; adsorption potential; Equations of state; Solids spheres and
potential box models; Monte Carlo method; Markoff derivation and application in 1- and
2- component system; Atomic nucleus; Forces within nuclei; Theories of nuclear
structure; Radioactive decay; Nuclear reactions; Radiation and matter; Counter; Particle
accelerators; application in nuclear science.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
49

Staff performance
1.
CHE 421E: INTRODUCTION TO GROUP THEORY
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the chemistry of Symmetry of elements and symmetry
operations.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe symmetry and symmetry operations, character tables and application in
bonding.
Course content
Symmetry elements and symmetry operations; Point groups; Character tables; Non
degenerate representations; Matrix ; Degenerate representations; application in chemical
bonding
Mode of delivery
50
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
Edition
CHE 422E: POLYMER CHEMISTRY
Seventh
(3UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the chemistry of polymerization and applications.
Learning Outcomes:
Describe the polymerization process, properties and applications
Describe the role of Ziegler Natta catalysts in polymer characteristics
Course content
Introduction to polymers, classification, morphology and solubility. Polymer molecule,
high polymers, natural and synthetic(linear and brached). Molecular weight degree of
polymerization and monomer requirements. Molecular parameters affecting physical and
51
chemical properties, general structure//properties correlatios. Physical properties and

stereochemistry. Types of polymerization, kinetic aspects of polymerization process
mechanisms: es, rotating sector method. Polymerazation mechanisms: addition and
condensation. Condensation and thermosetting polymers: synthesis of different types,
cross link, density and properties. Bulk thermoplastic polymers. Copolymers, phases
systems and classification. Specifically high performance polymers, polymer stabilization
and degradation. Natural and synthetic fibres. Plastics and resins. Bio-polymer. Molar
mass determination techniques. Spectroscopic techniques. Thermal analysis.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
Edition
CHE 423E: MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY
( 2 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the new Advances in the fields of medicinal chemistry.
Learning Outcomes:
52
Seventh

1. Describe the systematic drug development and rational research.
Course content
History and development of medicinal chemistry; systematic drug development and
rational research; the crowded years of innovation and expansion. Recent research,
selected examples of drug design.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
Edition 3. James E.B (1975). General Chemistry: Principles and structure
Seventh
CHE 424E: RADIOCHEMISTRY AND NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY (2 UNITS)

Purpose:
To introduce students to the structure of the nucleus and radiation chemistry
53
Learning Outcomes:
1. Show basic understanding of the basic principles of nuclear and radiation
chemistry.
Course content
A brief introduction to radioactivity and nuclear reactions. Natural and artificial produced
sources of radioactivity. Different kinds of ionizing radiations and their properties.
Radioactive decay and growth. Determination of half-lives. Interaction of radiation with
matter. Effects of high energy radiations. Biologically permissible doses. Meaurements of
radiation. Applications of high energy radiations. Applications of radiochemistry in
chemistry, industry, biology, medicine, agriculture, environmental health, and pollution.
Tracers in chemical, biochemical and medical applications. Counters, and particle
accelerators. Uncontrolled nuclear reactions as illustrated by atomic bomb and nuclear
reactors. Radiological safety and waste disposal.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
2. Skoog, West, Holler, and Crouch;. Analytical Chemistry: An Introduction, Seventh
Edition
54
CHE 425E: CHEMICAL REACTIVITY AND MECHANISMS
(3 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce the students to the basic principles of organic reaction mechanism as applied
in organic chemistry
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students should be able to:
1. Discuss mechanistic pathways in simple organic chemical reactions
2. Design a mechanism in any Organic chemical reaction.
Course content
Thermodynamics and statistical consideration of chemical reactivity; mechanistic
interpretation of the rate equations; Theoretical approaches to the prediction of chemical
reactivity; Quatum mechanical approach; Frontier molecular orbital approach;The laws of
conservation of orbital symmetry; Application of these theoretical concepts to
nucleophilic substitution reactions and elimination reactions; Allene and carbonyl
derivates, pericyclic reactions; Electrocyclic, cycloaddition, sigmatropic and ene
reactions.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
1.Morrison and Boyed, Organic Chemistry
55

3. Vogells organic chemistry
CHE 427E: CURRENT TOPICS IN CHEMISTRY
( 2 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the new Advances in the fields of chemistry.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the new advances as covered in that period and be able to project in the future
trends.
Course content
Frontier areas of chemistry from the current literature will be covered. Course content
will vary from year to year. Selected topics will include: carbohydrates as synthons for
building complex structures; plants and tissue culture in the production of fine chemicals;
sythetic zeolites and aluminophoshates: their structure, synthesis and use. Molecular
recognition: new techniques in separation processes; advances in nuclear magnetic
resonance spectroscopy; new techniques in enantioselective synthesis; principle and uses
of phase- transfer catalysis; polymer and polymerization techniques.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
56

CHE 428E: LIQUIDS CRYSTALS
(2 UNITS)
Purpose:
To introduce students to the chemistry of liquid crystal compounds
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the shape and classification, properties, applications of liquid crystals.
Course content
Historical background; molecular shape and liquid crystallinity, classification of liquid
crystals, structures, preparations, properties and applications; thermotropic and lyotropic
liquid crystals textures and structure of semetric liquid crystal phases.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
57

58
DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER ANDI INFORMATION SCIENCES

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INFORMATION SCIENCES
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The mission of Narok university college department of computer and Information science
is to produce graduates with practical and intellectual skills appropriate to the needs of the
present and future Kenyan society. In line with the vision 2030 the department ensures
that its students acquire skills and knowledge that will enable them make a positive
contribution to national development. In this context the department will equip the
students with skills appropriate for the transfer of modern information technology.
The Information Science curriculum reflects the multidisciplinary nature of science and
contains diverse courses ranging from basic physical sciences to applied courses in
mathematics, physics, communication, information technology, business and
management, economics and social science.
The curriculum encourages the students to acquire the important skills of self-directed
learning, problem solving and effective communication. The graduate is expected to be
proficient in a variety of setting, which shall include management of computer
information systems, teaching and undertaking research activities.
This curriculum is intended to provide the students with a sound basis for future
postgraduate work.
2.0
PHILOSOPHY OF THE PROGRAMME
With the ever-changing needs of the global economy, demands in science also changes.
For any technology to succeed, trained personnel is needed to sustain it through academic
rigor, partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Information
Science programme is designed to respond to the dynamic demands of the world.
3.1
RATIONALE OF THE PROGRAMME
The department of computer and information science designed the BSC Information
Science curriculum with the flexibility to accommodate emerging challenges. Information
Science students at Narok University combine theory with practice, gaining skills that
produce results and improve technology in a morally upright and ethical way. In class,
students get the latest in both theory and practical applications from dedicated staff and
invited speakers. Lectures are complemented with hands-on laboratory experience.
3.11 NEEDS ASSESSMENT/ MARKET SURVEY/ SITUATION
ANALYSIS
In principle, Information Science is a fundamental science to technology and innovation
and it has been identified as a central plank for Kenya's development and a foundation for
59
vision 2030. To drive the attainment of vision 2030, scientists would need to be trained,
accordingly. Information Science would be crucial to the achievement of the outlined
vision.
3.12
JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROGRAMME
The Information Science program is designed to empower students with skills necessary
to the industry. Also, students who complete the programme can pursue postgraduate
studies.
3.2
GOALS OF THE PROGRAMME
The information sciences program at Narok University is aimed at
3.3
EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE PROGRAMME

By the completion of the prescribed programme, the Narok University College
graduate will be able to:
3.4
Producing graduates who are grounded in the fundamental of information

management and services
Developing graduates with skills to design and manage information
systems
Equip the students to manage libraries and record centres
Relating the training of information science to the employment
opportunities within the knowledge industry
Meet the ever increasing demand of trained personnel information science in

various fields
Have adequate knowledge and skills so as to be able to work independently as
information professionals
Participate in research and development in information sciences
Take up employment in the knowledge industry, research institutions or any
other relevant private or public sector
Venture into entrepreneurship and marketing
Capture process and disseminate information
Maintain the highest professional standards in information technology
Contribute effectively in the industrialization process of the Kenya nation
Adapt to, participate in and acts as agents of change in this age of the
knowledge industry
MODE OF DELIVERY OF THE PROGRAMME

The programme will be delivered mainly through face to face contact with
students. In situations of a distance approach of course delivery, students would be
required to have access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice.
60
3.5
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
3.5.1 ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted into the B.Sc. Programme in the Faculty of Science, a candidate
must:
iii)
Meet the minimum University admission criteria
iv)
Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of Bin the following Cluster of subjects:
CLUSTER A
CLUSTER B
BIOLOGY
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
GEOGRAPHY
OR MATHEMATICS
PHYSICS
GEOGRAPHY
3.5.2
COURSE REQUIREMENTS
examination regulations besides attending a 3-month mandatory attachment at the
end of the third year of study.

The General University Examination Regulations and the special examination
regulations set by the school of Science shall apply. End of semester exams are
written within 3-hour period. The weighting for each course is as follows:
(a)
Theory Courses
30%
70%
(b)
Theory and Laboratory based Courses


61
20%
20%
60%
Examinations will be governed by the common rules and regulations for

undergraduate examination regulations of 2010 of Narok University.
papers and marked scripts. In addition the external examiner may assess research
project reports and may participate in the oral examination of a candidate. Internal
examiners will also be required to moderate examinations before being taken to the
external examiner.
To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Information Sciences, a student shall satisfy
all the university requirements pertaining to the degree. Students shall take all the units
offered in the first, second, third and fourth year of study.
The classification will be done as stated in the Narok University common rules and
regulations for undergraduate examinations.
Final year project assessment will be based on performance in oral presentations and a
formal written report. Oral presentation will be done before a departmental board. The
departmental board will be allowed to ask questions and may contribute to the assessment
of the candidate. The duration of the oral presentation shall be limited to within 40
minutes. After the oral presentation the board of examiners shall compile the scores and
determine the average score which shall be entered as the final mark in the project. The
scoring shall be split as shown below:
Submitted Project Report
70%
Oral examination
30%
Direct assessment is through a range of in-semester tests that include, written
examinations, assignments, homework, laboratory reports and/or quizzes. Final year
project assessment is based on performance in oral presentations and a formal written
report.
The maintenance of standards will be achieved by both internal and external moderation
of examinations. Above all the overall assessment process will be subject to external
examiner scrutiny who will provide benchmarking to international standards.
62

Lectures (those that are delivered mainly by lectures) will be examined primarily by end
of semester closed-book examinations, but will include an element (up to 30%) of
continuous assessment. The latter may be taken from worked problem sheets, laboratory
reports, tutorial lessons, tests, quizzes, essays or small project exercises. Some of the
lecture courses may be examined primarily or completely by assignments, where the
nature of the course is unsuitable for assessment by examination,
3.7 COURSE STRUCTURE

YEAR I
SEMESTER I
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 110
Introduction to Information Technology
INS 111
Computer Applications
INS 112
Introduction to Information Sciences
INS 113
Information Literacy
INS 114
Introduction to Publishing
INS 115
Introduction to Communication and Mass Media
INS 116
Records Management I
INS 117
ICTs in Records and Archives Management I
SEMESTER II
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INF 111
E-Business
INF 130
Structured Programming
INS 120
Organization of Knowledge
INS 121
Human Communication
INS 122
Introduction to Journalism
INS 123
Introduction to Print Production
INS 124
Archives Management I
INS 125
Preservation of Information Materials I
YEAR 2
SEMESTER I
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
UNITS
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
UNITS
63
INS 210
INS 211
INS 212
INS 213
INS 214
INS 215
INS 216
INS 217
Systems Analysis and Design

Operating Systems Theory
Sectoral Information Systems and Services
Classification I
Digital Print Production
The Book Trade I
Office Records Management
Knowledge Management
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
SEMESTER II
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 220
Data Communication Network
3
INS 221
Database Construction and Management
3
INS 222
Principles and Practices of Management
3
INS 223
Cataloguing I
3
INS 224
Repackaging of Information
3
INS 225
Principles and Practices of Marketing Communication
3
INS 226
Records Centre Management
3
INS 227
Professional Organizations in Information Sciences
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
YEAR 3
SEMESTER I
COMMON COURSES
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 301
Web Design and Development
3
INS 302
Research Methods
3
INS 303
Radio and Television Communication
3
INS 304
Preservation of Information Materials II
3
SPECIALIZATION:
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 320
Data Structures and Algorithm
INS 321
Object-Oriented Technology
INS 322
Management Information Systems
64
UNITS
3
3
3
INS 323
3
Software Engineering
TOTAL UNITS 24
LIBRARY AND INFORMATION STUDIES

CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 322
INS 330
Subject Indexing and Thesaurus Construction
INS 331
Marketing of Information Services
INS 332
Open Access and Institutional Repositories
PUBLISHING AND MEDIA STUDIES
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 340
Writing for the Mass Media
INS 341
Newspaper and Magazine Publishing
INS 342
Design and Production in Publishing
INS 343
Online Journalism
UNITS
3
3
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
UNITS
3
3
3
3
RECORDS AND ARCHIVES MANAGEMENT

CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 322
3
INS 350
ICTs in Records and Archives Management II
3
INS 351
Information Security in Records and Archives Management
3
INS 352
Marketing of Records and Archives Services
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
SEMESTER II
COMMON COURSES
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 305
Quantitative Techniques for Information Scientists
3
INS 306
Information, Gender and Sustainable Development
3
INS 307
Electronic Publishing
3
INS 308
Disaster and Risk Management in Information Centres
3
SPECIALIZATION:
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INF 350
Human Computer Interaction
65
UNITS
3
INS 324
INS 326
INS 327
Artificial Intelligence
Computer Organization and Architecture
Information Security and Systems Audit
3
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24

CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 333
Information Needs Analysis and User Studies
3
INS 334
Collection Management
3
INS 335
Strategic Management in Information Environment
3
INS 336
Information Searching and Retrieval I
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 344
Scholarly Journal Publishing
3
INS 345
The Book Trade II
3
INS 346
Principles and Practices of Photography
3
INS 347
Marketing, Sales and Distribution in Publishing
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 353
Health Records Management
3
INS 354
Management of AV Archives
3
INS 355
Digital Preservation
3
INS 356
Management of Electronic Records
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
YEAR 4
SEMESTER I
COMMON COURSES
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INF 410
Project Management
3
INS 401
Leadership and Management in Information Sciences
3
INS 402
Legal and Ethical Aspects of Information
3
INS 403
New Media
3
INS 404
Leadership And Management In Information Sciences
3
INS 408
Research Project
3
SPECIALIZATION:
66
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INF 371
Law, Ethics and Professional Practice in ICT
INF 460
Network Design and Administration
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 430
Classification II
INS 431
Digital Library Management
CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 440
Editorial Title Management
INS 441
Advertising in the Media
UNITS
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
UNITS
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
UNITS
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24

CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 450
Records Management II
INS 451
Archives Management II
UNITS
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24
SEMESTER II
COMMON COURSES
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INF 411
Management of Information and Communication Technology
3
INS 405
Infopreneurship
3
INS 406
Marketing Management
3
INS 407
Freedom of Information and Governance
3
INS 408
Research Project
3
SPECIALIZATION:
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INF 444
Data Mining and Advanced Databases
3
INF 461
Distributed Systems
3
TOTAL UNITS 21
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
67
INS 432
INS 433
Information Searching and Retrieval II

Cataloguing II

CODE
COURSE TITLE
INS 442
Multimedia and Hypermedia
MES 410
Legal and Ethical Issues in the Media
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 21
UNITS
3
3
TOTAL UNITS 24

CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 452
Quality Assurance in Records and Archives Management
3
INS 453
Managing Business Records
3
TOTAL UNITS 21
SEMESTER III
CODE
COURSE TITLE
UNITS
INS 419
Practical Attachment
6
TOTAL UNITS 6
68

INS 110 : INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to give the learners a basic understanding of Information
Technology and describe the applications of Information Technology in the modern
world.
At the completion of this course the student should be able to:
Understand the role and applications of IT in the modern world;
Describe the main categories and characteristics of hardware and software;
Describe the basic parts and functions of a computer system;
Analyze the social impact of Information Technology;
Course content
Definition and concepts of IT. Types of ICTs. Generation of Computers. Categories,
Types and Characteristics of Computers. Computer hardware and software. Functions of a
Computer System. Basic concepts of computer operations, maintenance, data storage and
retrieval. File management. Computer Networks and Communication. Introduction to
Internet Technology. The World Wide Web. The social impact of IT: Social Networks,
Digital Divide. Information Technology Security. Health and Safety Issues in an IT
environment.
Mode of delivery
This is a theory-based course and delivery shall be by lectures and seminars presentations.
Marker boards, projectors, and Computer-based multimedia
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests) which will normally contribute 30% of

the total mark

(i)
French C. S. (2002). Computer Science. W. M. Print Ltd.
69

(ii) Onunga J. (1999): Introduction to Micro-computers and Programming: Information
Systems Academy.
(iii) Szymanski R. A., Szymanski D. P., and Pulschen D. M. (1994): Computers and
Information Systems. Prentice Hall.
INS 111: COMPUTERS APLLICATIONS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to enhance the knowledge and skills of the learners in
various computer applications.
Expected learning outcome of the course
At the end of the course the students should be able to:
Understand and use various computer operating systems;
Work productively using the various computer application/productivity software

including word processors, spreadsheets, database management systems,
presentation graphics and Communication-Internet and E-mail.
Course Content
Practical use of Software Systems: Windows, Linux, Communication Internet and Email. Application Software: Word-processing, Spreadsheets, Database Management
Systems, Presentation Graphics, Browsers and Desktop Publishing.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures and lab work.
Computers, projectors, whiteboards and writing materials.
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment Tests and Project (CATs): 40%

End of Semester Written Examinations: 60%
70

1.
2.
Onunga J. (1999): Introduction to Micro-computers and Programming: Information
Systems Academy.
3.
Szymanski R. A., Szymanski D. P., and Pulschen D. M. (1994): Computers and
INS 112: INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SCIENCES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course introduces learners to the purpose and development of information science as
an academic discipline.
Understand the services provided in information science profession;
Demonstrate how information is transferred;
Create awareness among learners regarding information science profession.
Course Content
Information Sciences: definition of Information and Information Sciences. Characteristics
of information. Role of information in society. Concepts and principles of Information
Sciences. The role and functions of information systems: records and archives centers;
documentation centers; libraries; media centers; publishing firms; bookshops; museums
and information technology sector. Creation, processing, storage, dissemination and use
of information. Information society: nature and characteristics. Information science
professionals and career prospects.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by lectures and seminars
71
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Mac Ewen G.H.(2008).Introduction to information science .New York :McGrawHill
1.
Fundamentals of computing; Rowntree, G. Manchester NCC publications
2.
A Balanced Introduction to Computer Science, David Reed, Prentice
Hall. 2004
3.
Introduction to computers and windows by N. A. Saleemi and Ephraim
Waruhiu, N. A. Saleemi publishers, Nairobi, 2003. Computer Studies, by
Dr. Onunga.
INS 113 INFORMATION LITERACY

HOURS
3 CREDIT
Purpose
This course is intended to equip the learners with knowledge, skills and attitudes that will
enable them use
both print and electronic information sources effectively and ethically.
Explain the importance of information literacy
Apply information literacy standards
Evaluate different sources of information

72
Demonstrate appropriate searching skills
Use information sources ethically.
Course Content
Definition of information literacy. Attributes of an information literate person.
Information literacy standards and programmes. Information literacy and education.
Digital Information Fluency (DIF). Sources of information: primary, secondary, and
tertiary sources. Searching and Access to information sources: catalogues, bibliographies,
indexes. Evaluation of information sources. Ethical use of information sources: copyright
law, plagiarism, citation, referencing.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Miller, C. W.; M. D. Chabot, and T. C. Messina (2009). "A student's guide to
searching the literature using online databases"
1.
Eric Plotnick, "Information Literacy", ERIC Digests, Feb 1999,
ED427777.
2.
Moira Bent (November 2007). "The Seven Pillars of Information Literacy
Original model"
73
INS 114 INTRODUCTION TO PUBLISHING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to equip the learner with the fundamental issues in the book
publishing industry such as the history, the structure, the publishing process and how to
start and manage a publishing business successfully.
Understand the principles and practices of the book publishing business.
Identify and add value to different components of the publishing value

chain.
Start and manage successfully a book publishing business.
Identify and analyze the book publishing markets.
Apply new technology in running and managing the publishing business.
Course Content
Definition of publishing; Historical developments of book publishing; The world book
publishing industry. Book publishing as a social, cultural and economic venture. Issues in
book publishing in Kenya. Indigenous and conglomerate publishing in Kenya. Starting a
publishing firm: types of business ownership, corporate objectives and mission statement,
writing a business plan, types of publishing organisations. Areas of book publishing:
general, non-general. Book genres, digital books; The publishing process: authorship,
editing, design, production, marketing, distribution. Nature and size of the book markets:
producers, buyers, consumers, international book markets. New technology and the future
of the book.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
74

1. Chisholm, Hugh, ed. (2009). "Publishing". Encyclopdia Britannica (11th ed.).
Cambridge University Press.
1.
Epstein, Jason. Book Business: Publishing Past, Present, and Future.
2.
Schiffrin, Andr (2000). The Business of Books: How the International
Conglomerates Took Over Publishing and Changed the Way We Read.
INS 115 INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION AND MASS MEDIA

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to introduce learners to the different contexts of communication
such as intrapersonal, interpersonal, group and mass communication.
Discuss the different contexts of communication.
Apply the different contexts of communication in various communication

environments.
Design effective communication strategies especially in a work environment.
Identify appropriate mass media channels and use them effectively.
Course Content
Forms of communication; sociology of mass communication; the process of mass
communication; media of mass communication (print and electronic); mass
communication systems and institutions; development of mass media systems in relation
to social, economic and political conditions; mass communication theories and models;
the effects of mass communication (attitude and value change, behavioral change, social
learning; law in relation to mass media practices and ethics; introduction to mass
communication research methods.
Prerequisite: N/A
75
Mode of delivery
Delivery shall be by lectures and seminar/group discussions
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Ramey, Carl R. (2007). Mass media unleashed: how Washington policymakers
shortchanged the American public. Rowman & Littlefield. pp. 12. ISBN 978-07425-5570-9.
1.
Kling, Arnold (June 15, 2006). "The Future of Mass Media". Liberty Fund,
Inc.. Retrieved November 29, 2011.
2.
3.
Hartley, J.: "Mass communication", in O'Sullivan; Fiske (eds): Key
Concept in Communication and Cultural Studies (Routledge, 1997).
INS 116 RECORDS MANAGEMENT I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to records management, records
management principles and different approaches to records management.
Demonstrate an understanding of records management and records management

programme
Explain the history and development of records management

Describe the relationship between records management and information
management;
76
State the types and formats of records

Describe the various uses of records
Explain records management models
Explain the different approaches to records management
Demonstrate the knowledge, skills and competencies of records management
professionals
Course Content
Introduction to records management and records management programmes. History and
development of records management. Relationship between records management and
information management. Records types and formats. Uses of records. Records life-cycle
concept: records creation, distribution, maintenance, use and disposition. Records
continuum concept. Approaches to records management (systems and functional). Role of
record creating agencies and archival institutions in managing records. Knowledge, skills
and competencies of records management professionals.
Mode of delivery
The course will be administered through lectures and seminar presentations.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Electronic Recordkeeping Systems Standard (Standard 5), Archives New Zealand
(June 2005)
1.
International Organization for Standardization. (2001). ' 'ISO 15489-1:
2001 Information and documentation Records management. Part 1:
General' ', Geneva: ISO, section 1.
2.
3.
77
INS 117 ICTs IN RECORDS AND ARCHIVES MANAGEMENT I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to the application of ICTs in records
and archives management.
Demonstrate an understanding of ICT application in records and archives

management
Explain historical perspective of ICT application in records and archives

management
Describes the types of ICTs applicable in records and archives management
Explain the uses of ICTs in records and archives management
Identify the benefits and challenges of ICT application in records and archives
management.
Course Content
Introduction. Historical perspective of the application of ICTs in records and archives
management. Types of ICTs applicable in records and archives management. Uses of
ICTs in records and archives management: creation, capture, processing, storage,
maintenance, transmission, use, scheduling and disposal. Benefits and challenges of ICTs
in records and archives management.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

78

1. Electronic Recordkeeping Systems Standard (Standard 5), Archives New Zealand
(June 2005)
1.
2.
Electronic Document and Records Management, Tom Worthington,
Australian National University, from February 2011
INF 111: E-BUSINESS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to equip the learner with the basic knowledge in business aspects
and processes with a view to determining appropriate EBusiness models.
Understand the role of E-Business as a transaction channel in the modern

economy;
Examine the opportunities and challenges of E-Business;
Identify and explain the E-Business models;
Develop an E-Business plan and apply it to a specific business;
Demonstrate a sound knowledge and understanding of basic ICT requirements for
E-business technologies; and
Apply the knowledge in E-business applications.
Course Content
Introduction to E-Business. Characteristics of E-Business. Internet. Intranet. Extranet.
Internet Consumers and Market Research. E-Business Models: Customer (B2C), Interorganizational (B2B) and Intra-organizational domains (C2C), e-transactions and others.
Benefits and limitations of using E-Business models. E-Business applications.
Opportunities and Challenges of E-Business: E-Business Infrastructure and Security;
Platforms for conducting e-business, the security threats; the safeguards. Legal and ethical
issues. Developing an Ebusiness strategy. Emerging issues in E-business. Case Studies
Prerequisite: INS 110: Introduction to Information Technology
79
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Beynon-Davies P. (2004). E-Business. Palgrave, Basingstoke. ISBN 1-40391348-X
1.
Amor, D. (1999). The e-business (r)evolution. Upper Saddle
River: Prentice Hall..
2.
Gerstner, L. (2002). Who says Elephants Can't Dance? Inside IBM's
Historic Turnaround. pg 172. ISBN 0-06-052379-4
3.
Paul Timmers, (2000), Electronic Commerce - strategies & models for
business-to-business trading, pp.31, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, ISBN 0-47172029-1
INF 350 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills for designing,
implementing and evaluating different types of user-interfaces.
80
Explain the role and importance of HCI;

Illustrate the principles and standards of HCI; and
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in the design, implementation and evaluation of
different types of user-interfaces.
Emerging trends in HCI. Case studies: evaluation of existing interfaces, e.g.
computer, mobile phones etc.
Course content
Concepts and Components of HCI; Guidelines, Principles and Theory of HCI; Usability
Heuristics. The analysis of human factors in computing systems; Human Information
Processing; Language Communication; Interaction. Computer System and Interface
Architecture: Input and Output Devices;
Dialogue Techniques; Dialogue Genre; Computer Graphics; Dialogue Architecture. The
Design of Computer Application Interfaces: eg. WYSIWYG, GUI, Menu. Implementation
Techniques. Evaluation Techniques. Human- Machine fit and adaptation: Ergonomics.
Psychological Aspects of the HCI.
Prerequisite: All courses done so far
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, and laboratory work.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests) which will normally

contribute 30% of the total mark

1. Shneiderman B. & Plaisant C. (2005) Designing the User Interface: Strategies for
Effective Human-Computer Interaction. 4th Ed. Boston: Pearson/Addison Wesley
ISBN 0321197860
1. Preece, J, Rogers, Y & Sharp, H (2002) Interaction Design: Beyond Human-Computer
Interaction. New York: Wiley ISBN 0471402494
81
2. Preece, J, Sharp, H, & Rogers, Y. (2002) Beyond Interaction Design. New York:
Wiley ISBN 0471402494
INS 120 ORGANISATION OF KNOWLEDGE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course introduces learners to the area of knowledge organization in different
information environments and the variety of methods used for their retrieval.
Describe the different levels of information
Discuss the rationale for organization of knowledge
Critique different methods used in the arrangement of information packages in

different information environments
Describe standardized metadata descriptors that can be applied in the description

of both print and non print information resources
Distinguish between different information retrieval tools in terms of their

structure, function and application
Demonstrate objectivity in document representation.
Course Content
Nature of recorded information. Information pyramid: data, information, knowledge and
wisdom. Need for organization of knowledge. History of organization of knowledge.
Knowledge organization in different information environments. Representation of
information entities: metadata description and information surrogates. Tools and Systems
for organizing and retrieving information: types, formats and functions. Access and
authority control. Arrangement and display of physical and intangible information
packages. Ethics of knowledge organization. Trends in organization of knowledge
Prerequisites: N/A
Mode of delivery
82

Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Kuhn, D. (2010). The skills of argument. New York: Cambridge
University Press.
1. Fitzgerald, M. A.. "Evaluating information: An information literacy
challenge". School Library Media Research, 2. Retrieved 2012-1028.
2. Duke, N. K. (2000). "3.6 minutes per day: The scarcity of
informational texts in first grade". Reading Research Quarterly 35:
202224.
INS 121: HUMAN COMMUNICATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide learners with insight into the critical role
communication plays in information management and sharing of ideas in an organization
Describe the concept and forms of human communicate
Discuss the concept of non-verbal communication
Participate effectively in a formal committee meeting either as Chair, Secretary or

ordinary member.
Distinguish between various forms of interview and respond appropriately in an

interview.
Identify and describe contemporary problems in human communication.
Course Content
Introduction: concept and definitions. Forms of communication: oral, written and interpersonal communication. Study skills: reading, listening. Writing skills: notes taking,
83
essay and report writing. Speaking skills: effective speaking, public address, the art of
persuasion, conducting interviews, committee meetings, participating in group
discussions and tutorials. Nonverbal communications: non-verbal cues, body language.
Creative thinking: problem anticipation and problem solving. Contemporary problems in
human communication.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Richard Budd & Brent Ruben (2001), Human Communication Handbook.
1. Budd & Ruben, (2008) Approaches to Human Communication.
2. Duke, N. K. (2000). "3.6 minutes per day: The scarcity of informational texts in
first grade". Reading Research Quarterly 35: 202224.
INS 123 INTRODUCTION TO PRINT PRODUCTION 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
The aim of the course is to provide background knowledge and skills on design and
production of publications.
84
Understand the structure of the printing industry.
Appreciate the role and importance of the printing and allied industries in society.
Describe the terminology of type, typography and the different typesetting

systems.
Understand the raw materials used in print production such as paper and Inks.
Acquire knowledge on the origination, production, and binding and print-finishing

processes for letterpress, offset lithography, gravure, flexography and screen
printing methods.
Develop knowledge on the important issues in selecting and working with a

printer.
Course Content
Definition of printing. Role of printing in society. Structure of the printing industry in
Kenya. Type and typography: the alphabet and development of modern typography, type
measurement and terminology, typefaces, typesetting systems, marking proofs. Paper:
paper making, paper characteristics, types of paper, choosing and using paper. Inks: types
of inks, ingredients in making ink, drying characteristics of ink, specifying inks, process
colour inks. Origination for various printing methods: letterpress, offset lithography,
gravure, flexography, screen printing. Binding and print finishing. Working with the
printer.
Prerequisites: N/A
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials/seminars and practicals. The
learner will be given questions to research and present them in class during seminar
sessions.
Course Assessment:


1. Saunders, Gill; Miles, Rosie (May 1, 2006). Prints Now: Directions and
Definitions. Victoria and Albert Museum. ISBN 1-85177-480-7.
85
1. Elizabeth L. Eisenstein, The Printing Press as an Agent of Change, Cambridge

University Press, September 1980, Paperback, 832 pages, ISBN 0-521-29955-1
2. Nesbitt, Alexander (1957). The History and Technique of Lettering. Dover Books.
3. Moxon, Joseph (1683-84). Mechanick Exercises on the Whole Art of Printing (ed.
Herbert Davies & Harry Carter. New York: Dover Publications, 2010, reprint ed.)
INS 124 ARCHIVES MANAGEMENT I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to archives management, archival
programmes and archival principles and practices.
Demonstrate an understanding of archives management and archives management

programme
Explain the history and development of archives management
State the various forms of archives
Identify the various uses of archives
Explain the archival principles and practices
Distinguish between the management of public and private archives
Demonstrate the knowledge, skills and competencies of archives management

professionals
Course Content
Introduction to archives management and archives management programmes. History and
development of archives management. Forms of archives: public, private, business and
migrated. Uses of archives. Archival principles and practices. The management of public
and private archives. Knowledge, skills and competencies of archives management
professionals.
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by lectures, seminar sessions, and
information centers visitations.
86
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Maher, William J. (1992). The Management of College and University Archives..
Metuchen, New Jersey: Society of American Archivists & The Scarecrow Press,
Inc..
1. "archive" The Oxford English Dictionary. 2nd ed. 1989. OED Online. Oxford
University Press.
2. Whitehill, Walter Muir (1962). "Introduction". Independent Historical Societies:
An Enquiry into Their Research and Publication Functions and Their Financial
Future. Boston, Massachusetts: The Boston Athenaeum. p. 311.
INS 125: PRESERVATION OF INFORMATION MATERIALS I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to the preservation of information
materials.
Define the terms and concepts in preservation management
Explain the history and development of preservation management
Describe the nature and characteristics of information materials.
State the constituents of inks and explain how this contributes to deterioration of
information materials.
Identify the agents of deterioration and explain the preventive measures to be put
in place.
Course Content
Introduction: definitions and concepts in preservation management. History and
development of preservation management. Manufacture of paper: Inks: Ink manufacture,
87
types of inks, effects of inks on information materials. Nature and characteristics of

information materials: paper, audio visual (AVs), microforms, digital. Agents of
deterioration: Inherent, external. Preventive and restoration measures.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by lectures, seminar sessions, and
information centers visitations.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Balloffet, Nelly and Jenny Hille. Preservation and Conservation for Libraries and
Archives. (Chicago: American Library Association, 2005)
1. Preservation; Issues and Planning. Edited by Paul N. Banks and Roberta Pilette
(Chicago: American Library Association, 2000)
INS 210: SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills in analyzing
systems with a view to designing new systems.
88
Demonstrate knowledge on structured systems analysis;
Identify and analyze information systems requirements and design specifications;
Consider alternative approaches to systems analysis, in particular object-oriented

techniques;
Demonstrate an ability to synthesize ambiguous and incomplete information, and

arrive at a decision by applying judgment.
Course content
Introduction to systems analysis. Approaches to SAD: SSADM, ETHICS, SSM.
Prototyping: RAD. Costing. Information systems, Project planning and feasibility
analysis, Information gathering, Systems development life cycle, Process modeling, Data
modeling, Process Description, Object modeling, Quality assurance, Documentation,
Designing a new system, Productivity tools, Strategic management.
Prerequisites
1. INS 110: Introduction to Information Technology
2. INS 111: Computer Applications
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and practical exercises.
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. System Analysis and Design,
9780619255107
Course
Technology
Inc.,
2005,
ISBN

1.
Modern system analysis and Design, Prentice Hall, 2005 4Th edition, ISBN
01311454617, by Hoffer J. A., George J. F., Valacich J. S.
89
INS 211 OPERATING SYSTEMS THEORY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learners with an overview of concepts and principles
of operating systems with respect to resource management and controlling users and
software in a computer system.
Understand the fundamental concepts and principles of operating systems;
Describe the functions of operating systems in regards to Memory, Process, File

System and I/O Management;
Understand the various security and protection issues in operating systems; and
Explore the emerging trends in computer operating systems.
Course content
Introduction to Operating Systems. Objectives and Goals of Operating Systems.
Evolution of Operating Systems and Structures. Types of Operating Systems. Processes
and Threads. Concurrency and Synchronization. Virtual Memory. Functions of Operating
Systems: Process Management, CPU and Job
Scheduling, Memory Management, Input/Output Management, File System Management,
Secondary Storage Management. Deadlocks. Security and Protection issues in Operating
Systems. Emerging Trends in Operating Systems.
Prerequisites:
INS 110: Introduction to Information Technology
INS 111: Computer Applications
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
90

the total mark

1. Operating Systems Internals & Design Principles William Stallings.
Prentice Hall of India P.Ltd, New Delhi 110001. 5th Edition.
1. Modern Operating Systems, Second Edition, Andrew S. Tanenbaum, PHI private
Limited, New Delhi, 2008
2. Mandell, Steven, L. (1998). Computers and Information Processing. Cincinnati:
South-Western Publishing Company ISBN 0538682760
3. Linux Learning the Essentials,K.L.James, PHI.
INS 212 SECTORAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES

CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To assist learners in Library and Information Science comprehend the history, role,
services and activities of Sectoral Information Systems in general and also as they relate
to Africa.
Explain the history and development of the various types of sectoral information
systems in Kenya and developing countries at large.
Explain the challenges and opportunities facing sectoral information systems in

Kenya and developing countries at large.
Explain the role of sectoral information systems in development particularly in

developing countries
Explain how ICTs can be employed to improve the provision of information

resources and services in sectoral information systems in Kenya and developing
countries at large.
Course content
Definition of concepts. History and development of libraries in Africa. Library and
Information services (general and specialized services). Sectoral Library and Information
Systems (school, university and college, public, special and national libraries).
91
Optimization of collection development (collection development policies, cooperative

acquisition, resource sharing, inter-lending, Internet). Re-engineering library systems
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures, seminars, research papers, field trips.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Shera, Jesse H. (2009). Foundations of the Public Library: The Origins of the
Public Library Movement in New England, Chicago: University of Chicago Press
1. Zurndorfer, Harriet Thelma (1995). China bibliography: a research guide ...
Google Books. ISBN 978-90-04-10278-1. Retrieved 30 April 2010.
2. Doyle, Lauren; Becker, Joseph (2009). Information Retrieval and Processing.
Melville. pp. 410 pp.. ISBN 0-471-22151-1.
3. Goodrum, Abby A. (2000). "Image Information Retrieval: An Overview of
Current Research". Informing Science 3 (2).
INS 213 CLASSIFICATION 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to provide an in-depth knowledge of the theory of library
classification and provide hands on practice on classifying information materials in
different subject areas.
92
Understand major issues that constitute the basis of bibliographic classification
Become conversant with the concepts and principles of subject determination
Understand the process of classifying an information material
Acquire the ability to analyze information resources for subject content and to
assign classification notation to information resources using Dewey Decimal
Classification Scheme
Develop a classification scheme in any area of study
Develop methods to evaluate various classification schemes and recommend one

for a particular environment
Course content
Classification of knowledge: Principles and processes of classification of information
materials. Characteristics of subject. Subject analysis for classification. Core concepts of
classification and their application. Typology of classification schemes. Approaches to
classification schemes: enumerative; hierarchical and faceted approaches. General
Classification schemes: Dewey Decimal Classification; Library of Congress
Classification Scheme; Universal Decimal Classification Scheme. Special classification
schemes: patent classification; BLIS. Classifying web based resources. Management and
evaluation of classification schemes.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures and practical sessions.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Chan, Lois Mai. Cataloging and Classification: An Introduction, second ed. New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1994. ISBN 978-0-07-010506-5, ISBN 978-0-07-113253-4.
93

INS 214 DIGITAL PRINT PRODUCTION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course focuses on the concepts, procedures and practices of operating a digital print
press.
Understand how to successfully produce work in digital print by using different

digital printing methods.
Understand safety and disposal procedures in digital print production.
Utilize software for digital print file.
Understand how colour is controlled in digital printing.
Course content
Definition and concepts; Digital printing technologies (overview); computer-toplate
(CTP), computer-to-press (direct imaging DI); Digital Prepress (digital photography,
scanners, screening techniques, page description languages; raster image processor (RIP),
workflow integration; color management. Digital
Proofing (technologies used for digital proofing, hard proofing, soft proofing, halftones);
simulation (dot proofing); remote proofing; Evaluation of quality - objective
(colorimetric) and subjective (visual) assessment; image quality attributes, print quality
verification tools, standardization ISO; Variety of applications (customization and direct
marketing, print-on-demand (POD), variable data printing (VDP), distribute-and-print,
remote publishing; 3D printing, Trends in Digital Printing.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials/seminars and practicals and a visit
to printing firms, paper manufacturers and allied industries. The learner will be given
questions to research and present them in class during seminar sessions.
94
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Briggs, Asa and Burke, Peter (2002) A Social History of the Media: from
Gutenberg to the Internet, Polity, Cambridge
2. Tsien Tsuen-Hsuin; Joseph Needham (1985). Paper and Printing. Science and
Civilisation in China. 5 part 1. Cambridge University Press. p. 158,201.
3. Buringh, Eltjo; van Zanden, Jan Luiten: "Charting the Rise of the West:
Manuscripts and Printed Books in Europe, A Long-Term Perspective from the
Sixth through Eighteenth Centuries", The Journal of Economic History, Vol.
69, No. 2 (2009), pp. 409445
INS 215 THE BOOKTRADE 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This module offers a fundamental introduction to topics, methods and forms of scholarly
work within Book Studies. This occurs within the following thematic units: bibliographic
aids and sources; the structure of books and their nomenclature; books as a medium of
communication from a media comparative perspective.
95
Demonstrate understanding of the terminology of book trade
Trace the historical development of book trade in Kenya.
Apply the knowledge acquired on starting and managing a bookshop successfully.
Use various bibliographic tools to select titles for stocking in a bookshop or a

library.
Analyze the various book markets including international markets.
Course content
Definition of the book trade; The world book selling scene; Books and society; Books in
the market place; Wholesaling and retailing in the book trade; the book trade as a cultural
and economic venture; Parts of a book; Book selection and ordering tools; the role of
distributors in the book trade; Issues in book trade in Kenya; The use of technology in the
book trade; the future of the book trade.
Prerequisite: INS 114: Introduction to publishing
Mode of delivery
Delivery shall be by lectures and seminars.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1.
Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for
Machine-readable Bibliographic Descriptions. Paris: Unesco.
1. Wilson, P. (1989). The second objective. IN: The conceptual foundations
of descriptive cataloging, edited by Elaine Svenonius. San Diego:
Academic Press, Inc
2. Khosrow-Pour, Mehdi (2005-03-22). Encyclopedia of Information Science
and Technology. Idea Group Reference. ISBN 1-59140-553-X
96
INS 216 OFFICE RECORDS MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to the management of office records.
Define the office concept and explain the changing role of the office
Explain the role of the office in the management of records
Describe the components of office records management
Apply imaging technology in office functions
Describe the resources required in managing office records.
Course content
Introduction to the office concept: Introduction to office records. Office functions and
services. Changing role of the office. Role of the office in the management of records:
creation, use, distribution, maintenance, disposal. Components of office records
management: Mail and correspondence, e-mail, files, forms, reports and directives. Use of
imaging technology in office functions. Resources required in managing office records
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by Lectures and Seminars
Course Assessment:

the total mark

97

1. "Introducing the Victorian Electronic Records Strategy (VERS)" Justine
Heazlewood (Manager, Electronic Records and Online Access, Public Record
Office Victoria, Victoria, Australia). In D-Lib Magazine Volume 8 Number 3
(March 2011). [ISSN 1082-9873]
2. the International Organization for Standardization ISO_standards 15489-1:2001
Records ManagementPart 1: General
3. Trends in Records, Document and Enterprise Content Management. Whitepaper.
S.E.R. conference, Visegrd, September 28th, 2012 PDF original source of this
Wikipedia article by the German consulting company Project Consult
Unternehmensberatung
INS 217 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce learners to knowledge management in the various information sciences
fields
Explain the role and importance of knowledge management
Relate knowledge management to information management in the various fields

of information sciences
Describe the various types of knowledge
Discuss the organization of knowledge
Discuss the use of ICTs in knowledge management.
Course content
Knowledge management: concepts and definitions; knowledge management and the
knowledge economy. Role and importance of knowledge management. Relationship
between knowledge management and information management: content management,
Records and archives management, library management, information technology and
publishing and media. Types of knowledge: tacit, static, implicit and explicit.
Organization of knowledge: Processes and methods. ICTs and knowledge management.
98
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Sanchez, R (2009) Strategic Learning and Knowledge Management, Wiley,
Chichester
1. "Knowledge Management". www.systems-thinking.org. Retrieved 26 February
2012.
2. Hayes, M.; Walsham, G. (2003). Knowledge sharing and ICTs: A relational
perspective In M. Easterby-Smith and M. A. Lyles (Eds.), The Blackwell
handbook of organizational learning and knowledge management. Malden, MA:
Blackwell. pp. 5477. ISBN 978-0-631-22672-7.
INS 220 DATA COMMUNICATION

CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course introduces the basics of data communication and networking with the aim of
ensuring that learners develop an understanding of the general principles of data
communication networks and how they operate.
99
Demonstrate knowledge of layered approach to data communication,

communication hardware, protocols, as well as network protocol models including
TCP/IP and OSI.
Apply the principles of data communication and networking techniques to analyze

and solve problems in data communication networks.
Identify and act on security threats assciated with data communication networks.
Design and implement a simple network
Course content
Fundamentals of Data Communication Networks: Components, Data and Signal
Fundamentals. Network Models: Layering, OSI, TCP/IP. Transmission Media and Mode.
Transmission Impairments. Internetworking Devices: Bridges, Switches, Routers,
Gateways. Network Types: LANs, MANs, WANs,
Wireless, Mobile. Network Standards: Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI. ATM. Frame Relay.
Error Detection and Correction. Medium Access Control: Channel Allocation: Multiple
Access Protocols. Packet switching and Circuit Switching. Multiplexing: Frequency
Division, Time Division, Statistical Time Division Multiplexing. Network Addressing.
Routing and Congestion Control. Internet Protocols: IPV4/IPV6. Internet Transport
Protocols: User Datagram Protocol, Transmission Control Protocol. Network Security:
DNS, SNMP. Emerging Data Communication Networks Technologies.
Prerequisite:
INS 111: Computer Applications
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
100

1.
Stallings, W. (2008). Data & Computer Communications. Prentice
1.
Tanenbaum, A. S., (2006) Computer Networks. Prentice Hall.
2.
Journal of Parallel Distributed system
3.
Beyda W. (2000).Data Communications. Prentice Hall.
4.
Fitzgerald, J. (1997), Business Data Communications and Networking. London:
Wiley.
5.
Halsal, F. (2000). Data Communication & Computer networks. Pearson Education
INS 221 DATABASE CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT
CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to introduce the fundamental concepts necessary for designing,
using and implementing database systems and applications. It stresses the importance of
database modeling and design, the languages and facilities provided by the database
management systems, and system implementation techniques.
Identify the characteristics of the data base approach
Choose and apply appropriate database modelling techniques to database design
Design and develop a database to solve a specified problem
Course content
Introduction to Databases: Databases and Database uses, Characteristics of the Database
Approach, Advantages of using the DBMS Approach. Database Systems Concepts and
Architecture, Data Models, Schemas and In Three Schema Architecture and Data
Independence. Database Languages and
Interfaces, The Database System Environment. Data Modelling using the ER Model:
using High-level conceptual Data Models for Database Design; Entity Types, Entity Sets,
Attributes and Keys; Relationship Types, Relationship Sets, Roles and Structural
Constraints, Weak Entity Types, ER Diagrams, Naming Conventions and Design Issues.
Notation for UML Diagrams. The Relational Data Model and Relational Database
Concepts: Relational Model Concepts, Relational Model Constraints and Schemas,
Update Operations and dealing with Constraint violations. SQL: Schema definition,
Queries SQL Data definition and Data Types, specifying Basic Constraints in SQL; Basic
Queries in SQL, Insert, Delete and Update Statements in SQL. Database Programming:
Issues and Techniques, Functional Dependencies and Normalization for Relational
Databases; Normal Forms based on Primary Keys; General definitions of First, Second
and Third Normal Forms.
101
Prerequisite:
INF 130: Structured programming
INS 210: System analysis and design
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment: 40 % where 10 % shall be continuous assessment tests,

10 % shall be assignments, and 20 % shall be labs.
Regular Examination at end of semester; 60 %,

1. R. Ramakrishnan and J. Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2002, ISBN: 0-07-232206-3.
2. Elmasri, Ramez and Navathe, Shamkant B. Fundamentals of Database Systems.
5th ed. Addison-Wesley, Reading MA, 2006.
3. Hector Garcia-Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Jennifer Widom. Database
Systems: The Complete Book Prentice Hall. 2002.
4. Michael Stonebraker and Joseph M. Hellerstein. Readings in Database Systems,
3rd Edition 1998.3. Beyda W. (2000).Data Communications. Prentice Hall.
INS 222 PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MANAGEMENT

CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to introduce learners to basic concepts, principles and
practices of managing organizations, information systems and services.
102
Describe the concept and principles of management
Discuss the purpose of management
Describe the functions of management
Describe various management roles
Evaluate a managers performance
Discuss future management trends
Course content
Introduction to management: concept, definition and rationale. Levels of management:
Top management, middle management, first line or supervisory management. Areas of
management: marketing managers, operations managers including information manager,
finance managers, human resource managers. Management functions; planning,
organizing, staffing, directing, controlling. Decision-making as an activity that takes place
within each function. Management roles; interpersonal roles, informational roles, decision
making roles. Management skills; technical skills, human skills, conceptual skills.
Evaluation of a managers performance: effectiveness and efficiency. Future trends;
increased need for vision, problem solving skills, team-building, obsession with quality.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Breeze, J., & Miner Jr., F. (1980, August). Henri Fayol: A New Definition of
Administration. Academy of Management Proceedings, Retrieved March 3,
2012, from Business Source Premier database.
103
1. Almashaqba, Z. S; Nemer Al-Qeed, M (2010). "The Classical Theory of

Organization and it's Relevance". International Research Journal Of Finance &
Economics 41: 6067.
2. Pietri, P. H (1974). "ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION: The
Pioneers". Journal Of Business Communication 11 (4): 36.
INS 223 CATALOGUING I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course introduces learners to concepts, principles and practices of cataloguing
Articulate a basic understanding of the purposes of cataloguing and catalogues
Demonstrate practical experience in cataloguing various sauces of information

materials
Course content
Introduction to cataloguing concepts, principles and purposes. Physical forms of
catalogues and bibliographies: card catalogues, printed books; computer output
microforms; computer databases. History and development of cataloguing codes.
Descriptive cataloguing of information resources. Choice of access points; form of entry
personal names; corporate names and geographic names. Computer-aided cataloguing:
implications for information handling in libraries and information centers. Management
of cataloguing processes.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:
104

the total mark

1. Wilson, P. (2011). The second objective. IN: The conceptual foundations of
descriptive cataloging, edited by Elaine Svenonius. San Diego: Academic Press,
Inc
1. Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for Machinereadable Bibliographic Descriptions. Paris: Unesco.
2. Khosrow-Pour, Mehdi (2005-03-22). Encyclopedia of Information Science and
Technology. Idea Group Reference. ISBN 1-59140-553-X
3. Anglo American Cataloguing Rules (AACR2) schedules
INS 224 REPACKAGING OF INFORMATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course unit is to equip the learner with the knowledge and skills
required in repackaging of information for diverse audience groups.
Discuss the role of information repackaging in satisfying users information needs.
Appreciate the procedures, principles and practices in writing news, feature

stories, editorials, reviews and reports.
Appreciate the procedures, principles and practices in technical writing, book

indexing and abstracting of documents.
Write news and feature stories, editorials, reviews, reports and abstracts.
Course content
Introduction to information repackaging; Identifying the audience information needs;
Information packaging media and formats; Fundamentals of the writing process; Writing
for the mass media: news, feature and editorial writing; Writing reviews: types of reviews,
reviewing procedures and practices; Report writing: types of reports, report planning and
presentation; Technical writing: types of technical writing, technical writing planning,
principles and practices in technical writing; Principles and practices in editing for the
print media; Design of publications; Book indexing and abstracting procedures and
practices; Dissemination channels for repackaged information products
105
Prerequisite: INS 122: Introduction to Journalism.

Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, Group Discussions and
Practical Exercises.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1.
Melissa Elder (January 2011). "Automation: Technologies and Global Markets
BCC00098
1. Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for Machinereadable Bibliographic Descriptions. Paris: Unesco.
2. "icma-group.org". icma-group.org. Retrieved 2012-05-18.
INS 225 PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MARKETING COMMUNICATION

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to familiarize learners with various marketing communications
elements and their application in effective communication of products and services in
business organizations.
106
Describe and apply various marketing communication mix elements and strategies
in the work environment.
Explain the relationship between the product life cycle and advertising campaigns.
Create strong brands and apply branding principles in various media channels.
Match advertising strategies to specific media channels such as radio, TV,

newspapers, magazines and the Internet.
Course content
Meaning of marketing communications; marketing communications mix elements:
Advertising, personal selling, sales promotion, public relations, direct marketing; The
product life cycle and marketing communication mix: pre-introduction/conceptual stage,
the introduction stage, growth stage, maturity stage, decline stage and withdrawal stage;
positioning and integrated marketing communications; brands and branding principles:
creating strong brands, personal branding and career development; employees as most
important customers; Advertising in publishing; advertising in TV; advertising on radio;
advertising in newspapers, magazines, etc.;
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, Group Discussions and
Practical Exercises.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1.
Clow, Kenneth E & Donald Baack. "Integrated Advertising Promotion and
Marketing Communications", 3rd Edition, Upper Saddle River, 2007(6-7).
1.
Hartness, James (1912), The human factor in works management, New York and
London: McGraw-Hill, OCLC 1065709. Republished by Hive Publishing
Company as Hive management history series no. 46, ISBN 978-0-87960-047-1.
107
2.
Mitcham, Carl (2005), "Management", Encyclopedia of science, technology, and

ethics, 3, Macmillan Reference USA, ISBN 978-0-02-865834-6.
INS 226 RECORDS CENTRE MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to impart the learner with knowledge in record centre
management.
Explain the management of record centres, the different types of record centres
and their functions
Discuss record centre buildings
Describe record centre resource needs
Discuss the use of computer technology in record centre
Discuss ways of mitigating disasters in record centres.
Course content
Introduction to record centre management. Types of record centres: public, private (onsite, off-site) and commercial. Record centre functions and activities: records survey,
acquisition, transfer, processing, storage, maintenance, preservation, access, use and
disposition. Record centre buildings: location, design, construction materials, lay-out,
safety and security, environmental control. Record centre resource needs: financial,
human, equipment and supplies. Use of computer technology in record centres.
Mitigating disasters in record centres.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures and Seminars
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

the total mark
108

1.
Ellis, D., Allen, D. and Wilson, T. 2009. Information Science and Information
Systems: Conjunct Subjects Disjunct Disciplines.
1.
Buckland, Michael (2011). What kind of science can information science be?
Journal of the American Society for Information Science and Technology,
published as early view October 2011.
2.
Khosrow-Pour, Mehdi (2005-03-22). Encyclopedia of Information Science
3.
Reichman, F. (1961). Notched Cards. In R. Shaw (Ed.), The state of the library
art (Volume 4, Part 1, pp. 1155). New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers, The State
University, Graduate School of Library Service
INS 227 PROFESSIONAL ORGANIZATIONS IN INFORMATION SCIENCES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to professional organizations in
information sciences and their role in professional development.
Demonstrate an understanding of professional organizations
Describe the nature of professional organizations
Identify the categories of professional organizations in information sciences
Evaluate the role and contribution of these organizations in professional

development.
Course content
Introduction to professional organizations. Nature of professional organizations: Local,
national, regional and International. Categories of professional organizations in
information sciences: Libraries, Records and Archives, Information Technology and
Publishing and Media. Role and contribution of the organizations in professional
development (development of standards and codes of practice, education and training,
research and publications, policy development, information sharing, project funding).
109
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1.
Ellis, D., Allen, D. and Wilson, T. 2009. Information Science and
Information Systems: Conjunct Subjects Disjunct Disciplines.
1.
Buckland, Michael (2011). What kind of science can information science be?
Journal of the American Society for Information Science and Technology,
published as early view October 2011.
2.
3.
Vickery; B. C. (1973). Information Systems. London: Butterworth.
INS 301 WEB DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills in web based
applications design and development.
110
Carry out requirements analysis for the design and development of web based
applications;
Demonstrate an understanding of the use of current tools and technologies in

development of interactive web applications;
Design, code and deploy web applications that address real world problems;
Course content
Overview of the Internet and WWW. Web Environment. Nature of Web design. Webbased applications development process. Web development tools and technologies:
(X)HTML, CSS, Javascript, XML, Java. lient-side scripting. Creating web pages using
(X)HTML, CSS and Javasript. Server-side programming: PHP, JSP, etc. Creating web
graphics: GIFs, JPEGs, PNGs. Multimedia and Interactivity. Testing web-based
applications. Deployment: hosting, choosing an ISP. Maintenance and Evaluation
Prerequisite: INS 110: Introduction to Information Technology
INS 210: System Analysis and Design
INS 220: Data communication.
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures and laboratory work.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment Tests (CATs): 40%


1.
David M. Geary (1997)."Java - Mastering the AWT (Java 1.1)", SUN Soft
Press Publishing, Mountain View.
Deitel and Deitel. (1998)."Java - How to Program", Addison-Wesley Press,
Reading, Mass.,
1.
Jed Hartman and Josie Wernecke. (1996)."The VRML 2.0 Handbook, Building
Moving Worlds on the Web",SGI, Inc. and Addison Wesley, Reading, Mass.
111
2.
3.
Kelly, V. and Eunice F. (2004). Web Design & Development. Charles River
Media Inc.
Larry Wall and Randall Schartz. (1994)."Programming Perl", O'Reilly and
Associates Publishing, Sebastopol, CA.
INS 302 RESEARCH METHODS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners on research methodologies in
information management.
Describe the concept of research

Distinguish between basic research and applied research
Choose a research topic and state aim and specific objectives for the topic
Conduct literature review for a selected topic
Present and analyze research data
Report research findings
Course content
Introduction to research; concept, definition and purpose. Broad categories of research:
basic and applied. Choosing a research topic: identifying and stating the problem(s), aim,
specific objectives, hypotheses and/or research questions, scope, limitations and
significance. Research proposal. Planning and conducting a literature review; benefits of
literature review. Research Methodology: research design, data collection methods and
techniques. Data presentation, analysis and interpretation. Qualitative and quantitative
analysis. Reporting research findings, drawing conclusion and making recommendations.
Components of a research project report: preliminary pages, main body of text and end
matter, bibliography, references and appendices.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
112
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. John W. Creswell (2002). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed
Methods Approaches (2nd Ed). Sage Publications, Inc. ISBN: 0761924426
1. Paul D. Leedy and Jeanne Ellis Ormrod (2004). Practical Research:
Planning and Design (8th Ed.) Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0131108956
2. James E. Ford (2000). Teaching the Research Paper: From Theory to
Practice, From Research to Writing Publisher. The Scarecrow Press, Inc.
ISBN: 0810837773
3. Natalie L. Sproull (2003). Handbook of Research Methods: A Guide for
Practitioners and Students in the Social Sciences (2nd Ed.). The Scarecrow
Press, Inc. ISBN: 0810844869
INS 303: RADIO AND TELEVISION COMMUNICATION3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
The aim of this course is to equip learners with skills and knowledge in radio and TV
communication.
Communicate using radio and television
Write scripts for radio and television broadcast.
Articulate issues on development of radio and television broadcasting in Kenya.
Apply legal and ethical approaches to radio and television broadcast
Course content
Introduction to Radio and Television Communication; Development of Radio and TV
Broadcasting in Kenya; Broadcasting in relation to social, economic and political
conditions; News and News Gathering; Interviewing techniques; Writing for Broadcast
113
Media; Writing and Presenting News; Technologies in Radio and TV News Coverage and
Presentation; Communication theories; Ethical, Legal and Technological Issues in
Broadcasting.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures, seminars/group discussions and field visits.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Carey, James (2007) Communication as Culture, Routledge, New York and
London, pp. 20130
1. Thompson, J., The Media and Modernity, in Mackay, H and O'Sullivan, T
(eds) The Media Reader: Continuity and Transformation., (Sage, London,
1999) pp. 1227
2. Peters, John Durham. "Communication as Dissemination."
Communication asPerspectives on Theory. Thousand Oakes, CA: Sage,
2006. 211-22.
3. Kahn, Frank J., ed. Documents of American Broadcasting, fourth edition
(Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1984).
INS 304 PRESERVATION OF INFORMATION MATERIALS II

CREDIT HOURS
114
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to impart to learners knowledge and skills on preservation of
Explain the different types of formats that constitute information materials
Propose strategies to deal with preservation challenges associated with different

types and formats of information materials
Apply the principles and ethics of conservation management
Explain how to formulate and implement a preservation policy
Evaluate effectiveness of preservation and conservation programmes
Course content
Preservation and conservation of information materials: paper, AV, microforms and
digital. Methods and techniques of preservation management: Preventive, conservation
and reformatting (microfilming, scanning, migration, digitization). Principles and ethics
of conservation management. Preservation policy formulation and implementation.
Establishing and managing a conservation workshop. Evaluation of preservation and
conservation programmes.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Ritzenthaler, Mary Lynn (2008). Preserving Archives and Manuscripts. Chicago:
Society of American Archivists.
115

1. Thompson, J., The Media and Modernity, in Mackay, H and O'Sullivan, T
(eds) The Media Reader: Continuity and Transformation., (Sage, London,
1999) pp. 1227
2. Peters, John Durham. "Communication as Dissemination."
Communication asPerspectives on Theory. Thousand Oakes, CA: Sage,
2006. 211-22.
3. Matthews, Graham (1995). "Surveying Collections: The importance of
Condition Assessment for Preservation Management". Washington, D.C.:
Journal of Librarianship and Information Science 27, no. 4
INS 320 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

HOURS
3 CREDIT
Purpose
This course introduces the candidate to the storage allocation and memory management
techniques that result in efficient algorithm design.
Appreciate the dependence of the efficiency of algorithms on well designed data

structures.
To design and apply appropriate data structures for solving computing problems
To develop computer programs to implement different data structures and related

algorithms
To demonstrate an understanding of the practice of abstraction and the abstract

data type
Course content
Introduction to Data Structures. Memory: variables, pointers, references, records/objects.
Linear Data Structures: Arrays, Linked Lists. Non Linear Structures: Trees; Binary Trees;
BSTs, Heaps; Graphs. Abstract Data Types: lists, stacks, queues, lists, priority queues etc.
Applications: Data Compression; Huffman codes, Sorting; heapsort, treesort; Searching;
Linear Search, Binary Search.
Prerequisite: INF 130 Structured programming
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by lectures, seminars and tutorials.
116
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1.
Dale, Nell, et al (1985). Pascal Plus Data Structures, Algorithms and Advanced
Programming. C. Health and Company.
1.
Harel, D. (1987). Algorithmic: The Spirit of Computing. London: AddisonWesley, Reading.
2.
Sedgewick, R. (1988). Algorithms. London: Addison Wesley.
3.
Thomas, A. S. (1995). Data Softwares, Algorithms and Software Principles to
Computers. London: Addison Wesley.
4.
Weiss Mark Allen (1997). Data Structures and Algorithmic Analysis in C. 2nd
Ed. Pearson Education Asia.
INS 321 OBJECT-ORIENTED TECHNOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce candidates to the writing of programs by reusing of program units or
libraries.
117
To demonstrate an in-depth understanding of Object-Oriented concepts
To demonstrate an in-depth understanding of generic programming
To write programs that makes use of all OOP concepts
Course content
Concepts and Terminology: Objects and Classes, Abstraction and Encapsulation,
Association, Multiplicity, Aggregation, Composition, Generalization, Specialization,
Polymorphism, Cohesion and Coupling, Propagation, Delegation, Messages/Operations
and Methods, Friends. Modelling: UML. Programming: Abstract Data Types; Classes;
Constructors and Destructors, Getters and Setters; Code reuse; Garbage collection,
Composition, Inheritance. Polymorphism; Overloading, overriding, dynamic binding;
Friends. Generic programming: class templates, function templates. Programming using a
state-of-the-art OOP language.
Prerequisite: INF 130 Structured Programming
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Deitel Deitel (2008). Java. How To Program (6th Ed). Prentice Hall India.
1.
Data Structures and Algorithm in Java by Robert Lafore, Second Edition,
Sams Publishers, 2001
2.
Frank Nielson (2009). A concise and practical introduction to programming
algorithms in java. Springer
3.
Programming with Objects: A comparative presentation of Object Oriented

Programming with C ++ and Java by Avinash Kak. Wiley IEEE Press, 2003
118
INS 322 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge of the functional role of
management information systems (MIS) in the business environment.
Explain the role of information systems in decision making;
Align MIS with business processes in order to achieve organizational goals;
Implement information systems security mechanisms; and
Analyze the social and ethical issues related to use of MIS;
Be conversant with emerging issues in application of MIS.
Course content
Fundamentals: system concepts, information systems components, drivers of information
systems, management information requirements, influence on MIS design, problems with
MIS. Organizations and information systems: Characteristics of organizations, impact of
IS on organizations, the digital firm
(e-business, e-commerce); IT infrastructure: Hardware & software platforms;
components, trends; databases, networking fixed & wireless , the Internet: role in the
modern business; Ethical issues in IS: ethical & moral issues in IS, information privacy;
Securing IS: System vulnerabilities, establishing a management framework for security
and control, technologies and tools for security and control;; Emerging trends in MIS:
cloud computing etc
Prerequisite: INS 210 Systems Analysis and Design
Mode of delivery
119
Course Assessment:


1. OBrien, J (1999). Management Information Systems Managing Information
Technology in the Internetworked Enterprise. Boston: Irwin McGraw-Hill. ISBN
0-07-112373-3.
1.
Laudon, Kenneth C.; Laudon, Jane P. (2009). Management Information
Systems: Managing the Digital Firm (11 ed.). Prentice Hall/CourseSmart. p.
164.
2.
Pant, S., Hsu, C., (1995), Strategic Information Systems Planning: A Review,
Information Resources Management Association International Conference,
May 2124, Atlanta.
3.
Laudon, K.,&Laudon, J. (2010). Management information systems: Managing
the digital firm. (11th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall.
INS 323 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills in planning,
designing, implementing and managing software engineering projects.
Select appropriate development methodologies to analyze business problems and

design software solutions
Use available CASE tools to plan schedule and implement software products;
Develop project plans for a software engineering project as part of the teams;
Apply Quality Assurance and standards during software development process.
Course content
Overview of Software Life Cycle development. Software development, specification,
design, software Testing and implementation, verification and validation. Computer aided
software engineering. Software project management: Human factors in software
120
management, software project team organizations, process monitoring, software metrics,

planning and scheduling, maintenance, modification and portability. Software cost
estimation. Software Standards Configuration management. Software evaluation and
reliability.
Prerequisite: INF 130: Structured Programming
INS 320: Data Structures and Algorithms
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Sommerville, I. 2002. Software Engineering. 6th Ed. India: Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
1.
2.
Awad, E.M. 2002. Systems Analysis and Design. 2nd Ed. New Delhi: Galgotia
Publication (p) Ltd.
FitzGerald, J. and A. FitzGerald. 1987. Fundamentals of Systems Analysis:
Using Structured Analysis and Design Techniques. Singapore: John Wiley &
Sons, Inc.
INS 322 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS

Purpose
121
3 CREDIT HOURS
Course content
cloud computing etc
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


0-07-112373-3.
122

1.
164.
2.
May 2124, Atlanta.
3.
INS 330 SUBJECT INDEXING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to equip the learner with the knowledge and skills of indexing
both print and non-print information resources.
Relate the various indexing components and their functionality
Exemplify understanding of the process of indexing
Choose appropriate subject to desirable level of document representation
Assess the application of different types of indexing languages
Generate subject indexes for different environments
Evaluate the effectiveness of indexes
Course content
Introduction: indexing terminologies; elements, functions and characteristics of indexes.
Qualifications, skills, and work environment of indexers. Indexing process: traditional
and contemporary perspectives. Subject analysis and description of print and non-print
records. Indexing languages and systems: types, application and evaluation. Index syntax:
displayed and non- displayed index headings. Indexing policies, Style guides and
specifications: choice and form of entries; typology and layout of indexes; display of
relationship between terms. Index Aids: thesauri, subject headings, classification schemes,
ontology and taxonomy. Moving Picture Experts Groups (MPEG). Computer aided
indexing: human versus machine aided indexing. Quality and evaluation of Index.
.
Prerequisite: N/A
123
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. F. W. Lancaster (2003): "Indexing and abstracting in theory and practise". Third
edition. London, Facet ISBN 1-85604-482-3.
1. Voss, Jakob (2007). "Tagging, Folksonomy & Co - Renaissance of Manual
Indexing?". Proceedings of the International Symposium of Information Science.
pp. 234254.arXiv:cs/0701072.
2. J.D. Anderson (1997): Guidelines for indexes and related information retrieval
devices [online]. Bethesda, Maryland, Niso Press. 10 December 2008.
3. Rowley, J. E. & Farrow, J. (2000). Organizing Knowledge: An Introduction to
Managing Access to Information. 3rd. Alderstot: Gower Publishing Company
INS 331 MARKETING OF INFORMATION SERVICES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is intended to equip learners with adequate skills pertaining to the principles
of marketing to enable them to practice effectively as library/information managers
124
demonstrate an understanding of and apply the principles of marketing as they

relate to information management
analyse the market for a given library/information service
develop marketing strategy or plan for library/information services
to segment the market based on the characteristics of the market
carry out market research to determine the information needs of the users.
Course content
Introduction: marketing definitions and concepts. Marketing as a management tool.
Importance of marketing to a library/information manager. Marketing in commercial vs
the non- commercial sector. Market research and analysis. Developing a marketing
strategy or plan. Market Segmentation. Marketing Mix: product, price, place, place,
promotion, people, process, physical environment, productivity and quality. Monitoring
and reviewing strategies.
.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
the total mark
1. Champneys, Amian L. (2007). Public Libraries. Jeremy Mills Publishing.
125
INS 332 OPEN ACCESS AND INSTITUTIONAL REPOSITORIES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to introduce learners to the definitions, concepts and content
management systems of Open Access and Institutional Repositories and the Challenges
and Economic Models of Open Access Initiatives.
Describe the concepts of open source and open access
Describe content management systems of Open Access and Institutional
Repositories
Discuss the challenges and Economic Model of Open Access Initiatives
Course content
Open source: Definition and Concept. Open access and Ranganathans five laws of
Library Science. Content management systems. Open source initiatives. Open source
software in education. Licensing and sustainability. Digital Repositories: Software;
Sustainability. Challenges and economic models of open access initiatives. Copyright and
open licences. Open Access: Open Access myths, self archiving and Repositories.
Overview and background of repositories. Institutional repositories. Open Access
journals. Open Access Policy and Business Models..
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

126

1. Laurie Taylor and Brendan Riley, Open Source and Academia, Computers and
Composition Online, 2005
1. Kenneth Mentor, Open Access Learning Environments, Online Journal of
Distance Learning Administration, Volume X, Number I, Spring 2007.
INS 340 WRITING FOR THE MASS MEDIA
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course unit is to enable the learner gain knowledge and practical skills
needed in writing for the print, broadcast and online media, public relations, advertising
and Information, Educational and Communication (IEC) campaigns.
Distinguish between writing for the mass media and other forms of writing.
Write news and feature stories, editorials and opinion columns for the print media
in specialized areas of journalism.
Write news copy for broadcast and online media.
Plan and write various communication materials used in public relations and
advertising and Information, Educational and Communication materials for
strategic communication campaigns.
Appreciate the ethics and laws guiding the writing for the mass media.
Course content
Differences between writing for the mass media and other forms of writing; Techniques of
journalistic interviewing; News, feature, editorial and opinion writing; Investigative
writing; Specialized reporting and writing: science and technology; environment, business
and finance; Writing for online media: characteristics of online media, writing structures
for online journalism, differences between writing for the print and online media; Public
relations writing: purpose of public relations writing, writing press releases, media kits
and organizational publications; Advertising copywriting: advertising appeals and
execution styles, advertising copy platform, language and style of copywriting, writing
and evaluating print advertisements, radio and television commercials: Writing
127
Information, Educational and Communication materials for strategic communications

campaigns; law and ethical issues in writing for the mass media
Prerequisite: INS 224: Repackaging of Information;
INS 313: Radio and Television Communication;
INS 441: Advertising in the Media
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by Lectures, Group Discussions and Practical
Exercises.
Course Assessment:


1. Balloffet, Nelly and Jenny Hille. Preservation and Conservation for Libraries
and Archives. (Chicago: American Library Association, 2005)
INS 341 NEWSPAPER AND MAGAZINE PUBLISHING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To provide learners with knowledge of newspaper and magazine writing, projection,
editing, production and distribution.
128
Gain insights into the newspaper and magazine publishing industries.

Understand creative processes of newspaper and magazine publishing.
Conceptualize initial processes involved in newspaper and magazine publishing.
Understand social and cultural perspectives of newspapers and magazines.
Course content
Development of newspaper and magazine publishing in Kenya. Role of newspapers and
magazines as mass media systems. Different genres of newspapers and magazines and
their role in communicating messages. Editorial administration of newspapers and
magazines. Editorial policy. Editing text and illustrations. Principles of design and
production of newspapers and magazines. Marketing and circulation. Legal and ethical
issues in newspaper and magazine publishing. Technological resources in newspaper and
magazine publishing.
Prerequisite: INS 224: Repackaging of Information;
INS 313: Radio and Television Communication;
INS 441: Advertising in the Media
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials/seminars and practicals.
Course Assessment:


descriptive cataloging, edited by Elaine Svenonius. San Diego: Academic
Press, Inc
2. Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for
129
3. Simmons, P. & Hopkinson, A. (eds.) (1992). CCF/B. the common

communication format for bibliographic information, and CCF/F: the common
communication format for factual information. Unesco
INS 342DESIGN AND PRODUCTION IN PUBLISHING 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
The aim of this course is to equip learners with practical skills and knowledge on design
and production of publications by using Desktop Publishing technology (DTP) and
various design elements such as illustrations and colour.
Explain the benefits of design to the society
Design a document that can effectively communicate a message by applying the
various elements
Explain the various types of illustrations and how they are sourced
Explain the various uses and roles colour in design
Explain how a DTP can be established.
Course content
Introduction: definitions of terms, principles and elements of design. Role of design:
historical, in art, culture and society. Designing for a purpose: audience, place of use, size
of design and format. Typography: selection of typefaces and fonts, typeface families,
readability and legibility and impact of
typefaces on design. Layouts: various styles of layouts, symmetric and asymmetric
layouts. Illustrations: types of illustrations, selection and commissioning of illustrations.
Colour: groups of colours primary, secondary and tertiary colours, colour and warm
colours, effects of colour in design. Production: various forms of printing. DeskTop
Publishing (DTP), establishing a DTP unit, selection of hardware and software for a
modern DTP unit.
Prerequisite: INS 214 Digital Print Production
Mode of delivery
130

Course Assessment:


Press, Inc
2. Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for
3. Simmons, P. & Hopkinson, A. (eds.) (1992). CCF/B. the common
communication format for bibliographic information, and CCF/F: the common
communication format for factual information. Unesco
INS 343 ONLINE JOURNALISM
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course aims to equip learners with knowledge and skills on online news broadcast.
131
Explain the key concepts and characteristics of web journalism.
Trace the history of web journalism and the issues that concern its practitioners.
Appreciate the impact of the Internet and the World Wide Web on journalism
practice.
Apply various online journalism techniques and tools for news/information

gathering, production and dissemination.
Appreciate the nature of the Web and the fundamentals of reporting for this
medium.
Develop a web online news product.
Develop an understanding of the standards, ethics and laws affecting online

journalism practice.
Establish the challenges and future trends in online journalism.
Course content
Definition of Web Journalism; Features of Web Journalism; Types of Web Journalism;
Web Journalism Vs. Print Journalism; Advantages and disadvantages of Web Journalism;
History of Web Journalism; Internet and World Wide Web (WWW): Their applications
and impact to journalism practice; Computer-Assisted Reporting (CAR); Web Journalism
applications and tools (Blogging, online social networking sites, podcasting, wikis,
webcasting and mobile journalism) ; Citizen Journalism; Writing and reporting for the
Web; Ethical and legal issues concerning Web Journalism; Challenges and the future of
Web Journalism.
Prerequisite: INS 214 Digital Print Production
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Harcup, Tony (2009), Journalism: Principles and Practice, Thousand Oaks,
California: Sage Publications, ISBN 978-1847872500
132
1.
2.
Campbell, W. Joseph, Getting It Wrong: Ten of the Greatest Misreported

Stories in American Journalism, Berkeley : University of California Press,
2010. ISBN 9780520262096
"Sycophancy and Objective Journalism". Advances in Applied Sociology
(Scientific Research) 2 (3): 159-166. Sep 2012. ISSN 2165-4328.
INS 322 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
Course content
cloud computing etc
Mode of delivery
133
Course Assessment:


0-07-112373-3.
1.
164.
2.
May 2124, Atlanta.
3.
INS 350 ICTs IN RECORDS AND ARCHIVES MANAGEMENT II

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To equip learners with knowledge on ICT application in records and archives
management.
134
Explain the different technologies used in records and archives management
Propose strategies to deal

electronic/digital formats
Explain the use of specific technology applications in records and archives

management
Discuss the legal and policy framework for ICT application in records and
archives management
with
challenges
of
managing
records
in
Course content
Various technologies used in records and archives management: facsimiles, imaging
systems, computer applications, e-mail applications and mobile technology. E-mails,
databases and websites as forms of records. Challenges of managing records in e-mail,
websites and databases. Technology applications in records and archives management:
enterprise management systems, document management systems and electronic records
management systems. Legal and policy framework for the use of ICTs in records and
archives management.
Prerequisite: INS 117 ICTs in Records and Archives Management
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Electronic Recordkeeping Systems Standard (Standard 5), Archives New
Zealand (June 2005)
1.
135
2.

3.
INS 351 INFORMATION SECURITY IN RECORDS AND ARCHIVES
MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce learners to information security in records and archives management.
Explain the concept records security and other related terms and concepts
Identify the need for security classification of records and archives
Explain how to deal with various security threats in records and archives
Design and implement an information security policy for records and archives
Course content
Concept of records security: reliability, accuracy, authenticity, inviolability and integrity.
Security classification of records and archives: open, secret, top secret, confidential,
restricted and classified. Declassification of archives. Access to information and
protection of privacy. Security threats to records and archives: human, technical,
technological, environmental, biological and disasters. Mitigation measures in manual
and electronic environments. Security of buildings, equipment and facilities.
Development and implementation of an Information security policy.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

136

1.
Electronic Recordkeeping Systems Standard (Standard 5), Archives New
Zealand (June 2005)
1.
2.
3.
INS 352 MARKETING OF RECORDS AND ARCHIVES SERVICES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce learners to marketing of records and archives services
Explain the term marketing and other related terms and concepts
Explain the need for marketing of records and archives services
Discuss the various marketing characteristics
Apply various promotional strategies in marketing records and archives
Demonstrate the use of specific resources in the marketing of records and archives
programs
Course content
Concepts in marketing. Need for marketing of records and archives services. Market
characteristics, market segmentation, market targeting, market mix and market audit.
Developing records and archives services marketing plan. Promotional strategies:
awareness creation, user education, exhibitions, lectures, outreach, talk shows,
workshops, symposia, use of print and electronic media, educational programmes, use of
finding aids and other publications, customer care and complaints procedures, online
marketing.
Resources for implementing a marketing programme.
Prerequisite: N/A
137
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Electronic Recordkeeping Systems Standard (Standard 5), Archives
New Zealand (June 2005)
1.
2.
3.
INS 305 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR INFORMATION SCIENTISTS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to enhance learners' ability to perform quantitative analyses,
understand the usefulness and limitations of the methods used and apply the knowledge in
research.
138
Use various research instruments to collect data
Analyze data using various statistical software such as SPSS
Solving Mathematical problems using Algebra and their applications
Use simple graphical techniques to perform preliminary analysis of data;
Course content
Introduction to Probability and Statistics; measures of central tendency and dispersion.
Data collection methods. Data Analysis: descriptive statistics using Computer statistical
software such as SPSS, MINTAB or spreadsheet software. Introduction to algebra:
algebraic expressions, powers, logarithms, multiplication of algebraic expressions of a
single variable, factorization of algebraic expressions. Solving Mathematical problems
using Algebra and their applications. The Use of Matrices. Application of Mathematical
problems to Economic and Business problems.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, group discussions and practical
sessions.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1.
John W. Creswell (2002). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and
Mixed Methods Approaches (2nd Ed). Sage Publications, Inc. ISBN:
0761924426
1.
Paul D. Leedy and Jeanne Ellis Ormrod (2004). Practical Research: Planning
and Design (8th Ed.) Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0131108956
2.
James E. Ford (2000). Teaching the Research Paper: From Theory to Practice,
From Research to Writing Publisher. The Scarecrow Press, Inc. ISBN:
0810837773
139
3.
Natalie L. Sproull (2003). Handbook of Research Methods: A Guide for

INS 306 INFORMATION, GENDER AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to help learners to be able to explain information management
issues as it relates to gender and the environment in sustainable development.
Demonstrate an understanding of key gender concepts, including gender and sex,

gender equality, gender mainstreaming, and practical needs and strategic interests
Explain the use of gender analysis in sustainable development
Demonstrate ways of working from a gender perspective in environment related

activities, research/ projects;
Explain issues and challenges related to gender training in sustainable

development.
Course content
Gender in sustainable development. Information management and gender. Theoretical
frameworks in gender, environment and sustainable development. Policy development
and implementation. World summit on sustainable development. Trends and challenges in
research, policy and training on gender and sustainable development.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, group discussions and practical
sessions.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:
140


1.
James E. Ford (2000). Teaching the Research Paper: From Theory to Practice,
From Research to Writing Publisher. The Scarecrow Press, Inc. ISBN:
0810837773
1.
Paul D. Leedy and Jeanne Ellis Ormrod (2004). Practical Research: Planning
2.
Gender analysis tools: Harvard Framework (access to resources; gender
division of labor; gender and decision-making). Textbooks, Journals, Internet
Sources
INS 307 ELECTRONIC PUBLISHING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course unit is to provide the learner with the knowledge and skills
required in electronic publishing.
Explain the meaning, characteristics and significance of electronic publishing.
Trace the historical developments in electronic publishing.
Evaluate electronic publications.
Describe the core principles, tools and procedure for planning, designing and
managing a website.
Identify the markets for electronic publications and the methods used in
promoting the products to these markets.
Appreciate the impact of the Internet and multimedia on the publishing industry.
Appreciate the ethical and legal issues in electronic publishing.
Course content
Meaning of electronic publishing; Types of electronic publishing and electronic
publications; Characteristics of electronic publishing and electronic products; Advantages
and disadvantages of electronic publishing; Historical developments in electronic
publishing; Analysis and evaluation of electronic publications; Planning, designing and
141
managing a website; Web authoring software and Web Content Management Systems;
Markets and promotional strategies for electronic publications; Impact of the Internet and
multimedia on the publishing industry; Ethical and legal concerns in electronic
publishing.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Computer Lab Practicals, Group Discussions and Practical Exercises.
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Rebecca McPheters, Advertising Age, January 13, 2012.
1.
Preservation; Issues and Planning. Edited by Paul N. Banks and Roberta Pilette
2.
Whitehill, Walter Muir (1962). "Introduction". Independent Historical Societies:
INS 308 DISASTER AND RISK MANAGEMENT IN INFORMATION CENTRES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To equip learners with knowledge and skills of disaster and risk management in
information centres.
142
Explain terms and concepts applicable to disaster management and risk

management
Distinguish between disaster management and risk management
Discuss key stages in disaster management and risk management
Explain the relevance of disaster management and risk management to

information management
Demonstrate how to recover information assets following a disaster
Identify best practice disaster management and risk management models to

safeguard information in information centres.
Course content
Definition of terms and concepts. Distinction between disaster management and risk
management. Stages in disaster management and risk management. Relevance of disaster
management and risk management to information management. Disaster management and
risk management in a manual and electronic information environment. Recovery of
information assets following a disaster. Vital records planning; off-site storage of backups. Disaster management and risk management models.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Alexander, Carol and Sheedy, Elizabeth (2005). The Professional Risk Managers'
Handbook: A Comprehensive Guide to Current Theory and Best Practices.
PRMIA Publications. ISBN 0-766097-0-3.
143
1.
2.
3.
Borodzicz, Edward (2005). Risk, Crisis and Security Management. New York:
Wiley. ISBN 0-470-86704-3.
Morgan, Granger, and Henrion, Max (1992). Uncertainty: A Guide to Dealing
with Uncertainty in Quantitative Risk and Policy Analysis. Cambridge
University Press. ISBN 0-5214274-4-4.
Stoneburner, Gary; Goguen, Alice and Feringa, Alexis (July 2002) (PDF). Risk
Management Guide for Information Technology Systems. Gaithersburg, MD:
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
INF 350 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills for designing,
implementing and evaluating different types of user-interfaces.
Explain the role and importance of HCI;
Illustrate the principles and standards of HCI; and
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in the design, implementation and evaluation of
different types of user-interfaces.
Emerging trends in HCI. Case studies: evaluation of existing interfaces, e.g.
computer, mobile phones etc.
Course content
Concepts and Components of HCI; Guidelines, Principles and Theory of HCI; Usability
Heuristics. The analysis of human factors in computing systems; Human Information
Processing; Language Communication; Interaction. Computer System and Interface
Architecture: Input and Output Devices;
Dialogue Techniques; Dialogue Genre; Computer Graphics; Dialogue Architecture. The
Design of Computer Application Interfaces: eg. WYSIWYG, GUI, Menu. Implementation
Techniques. Evaluation Techniques. Human- Machine fit and adaptation: Ergonomics.
Psychological Aspects of the HCI.
Prerequisite: All courses done so far
Mode of delivery
144

Course Assessment:


1.
Shneiderman B. & Plaisant C. (2005) Designing the User Interface: Strategies for
Effective Human-Computer Interaction. 4th Ed. Boston: Pearson/Addison Wesley
ISBN 0321197860
2. Preece, J, Sharp, H, & Rogers, Y. (2002) Beyond Interaction Design. New York:
Wiley ISBN 0471402494
INS 324 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course provides an overview and introduction to the field of Artificial Intelligence,
machine learning and intelligent agents.
145
Develop an appreciation of the goals, sub-areas, achievements and difficulties of

AI.
Identify and use various knowledge representation techniques
Apply heuristic programming techniques in problem solving
Implement search techniques in problem solving
Write programs using AI programming languages
Develop programs for specific AI application areas
Course content
Introduction to Artificial intelligence and Turings test. Knowledge Representation;
frames, semantic nets, semantic trees, Object oriented representation and heaps. Search
techniques; informed and blind search. Logics; predicate and propositional logic. Fuzzy
logic. ANNs. Introduction to AI programming language. Machine Learning, Intelligent
Agents and natural language processing. Robotics. Expert Systems Development
Prerequisite: INF 130: Structure Programming
INS 321: Object Oriented Technology
INS 320: Data Structures and Algorithms
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by Lectures, field trips, and laboratory
practicals
Course Assessment:


1.
Ian Pratt (2004). Artificial Intelligence. Macmillam Press Ltd.
1.
Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight (1991). Artificial Intelligence. McGraw Hill
Publishers.
2.
Bratko (1997), Programming in prolog (2nd ed.). Addison Wesley.
146
INS 326 COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To describe the constituent parts or building blocks of the computer system visible to
designer or constructor, how they are interconnected and how they interoperate in order to
implement the ISA i.e. level of abstraction above the digital logic level, but below the
operating system level and also to introduce the candidate to the abstract image of a
computing system as seen by a machine language (or assembly language) programmer i.e.
the ISA i.e. a discussion of the important characteristics visible to programmer.
Demonstrate an understanding of basic organization of computer system
Write and debug simple programs using assembly code.
Explain the principles underlying the design and development of computer

systems for a variety of purposes.
Trace the influences of important computing developments (such as

compiler technology, networking, the web, multimedia, safety, security) on
the architecture of computer systems.
Outline the architectural features of a modern computer system.

Course content
Components of a digital Computer. Von Neumann architecture. Processing Unit Design:
Register Set, data path, CPU Instruction Cycle, Control Unit. Memory: The Memory
Hierarchy, Cache Memory, main memory, virtual memory, ROM. I/O Design:
Programmed I/O, Interrupt driven I/O, DMA, Buses, I/O Interfaces. Storage Systems:
Magnetic disk, optical disk etc. Data Representation: Positional Numbering Systems,
Character Codes, Computer Arithmetic; Integer and Floating point representations,
Integer arithmetic, Floating Point Arithmetic. Overview of Instruction Set Architecture
(ISA) and Assembly Language Programming.
Prerequisite: INS 211: Operating Systems Theory
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
147


1.
William Stallings(2008).Computer organization and Architecture ( 8th
Ed.).Prentice Hall
1.
Andrew S. Tanenbaum(2003).Structured computer organization (4th Ed).Prentice
2.
Hwang K.&Briggs,F.A.(1987).Computer Architecture and parallel
processing.New york
3.
John P. Hayes(1998).Computer architecture and organization ( 3rd Ed.) McGrawHill.
4.
Mac Ewen G.H.(1980).Introduction to computer systems .New York :McGrawHill
5.
Nicholas carter adopted by Raj kamal (2006). Computer Architecture
INS 327 INFORMATION SECURITY AND SYSTEMS AUDIT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To enable the candidate appreciate the importance of information and therefore
information security and secure information practices.
Distinguish various malicious software.
Explain how cryptography is used as a tool of defense against theft of information.
Demonstrate an understanding of the basic mathematics for cryptography.
Demonstrate an understanding of the process of information security audit
Describe the current legal issues in information security
Course content
The three goals of a security system. Elementary Cryptography: Substitution Ciphers,
Transpositions (Permutations), Confusion and Diffusion, Kerckhoffs' principle, Basic
Mathematics for Cryptography; symmetric key cryptography, asymmetric key
cryptography. Program Security: Benign Program, Malicious Code; viruses, worms,
Trojan horse. Access Control: Authentication, Authorization. Biometrics. Operating
System security. Legal, Privacy, and Ethical Issues in Computer Security. Fundamental of
auditing, concepts, standards and guidelines for auditing
148
.
Prerequisite: INF 130 Structured Programming
INS 211 Operating Systems
INS 220 Data Communication
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
the total mark
1.
Gallegos, Frederick; Senft, Sandra; Manson, Daniel P.; & Gonzales, Carol
(2004). Technology Control and Audit (2nd ed.). Auerbach Publications. ISBN 08493-2032-1.
1. Lyon, Gordon (2006). "Top 100 Network Security Tools". SecTools.org. Retrieved
2006-08-24.
2. Richard A. Goodman; Richard Arthur Goodman; Michael W. Lawless
(1994). Technology and strategy: conceptual models and diagnostics. Oxford
University Press US. ISBN 978-0-19-507949-4. Retrieved May 9, 2010.
3. Hoelzer, David (1999-2009). Audit Principles, Risk Assessment & Effective
Reporting. SANS Press.
INS 333 INFORMATION NEEDS ANALYSIS AND USER STUDIES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
149
To empower learners with knowledge, skills and attitudes in order to be capable of

conducting empirical user studies using a variety theories and models.
Define key terms and concepts peculiar to user studies
Compare and contrast various forms of user studies
Apply existing theories and models to analyze users information seeking behavior
Choose and use a variety of research methods and strategies to conduct users
information needs analysis.
Implement recommendations derived from user studies
Course content
Introduction: definitions of key terms and concepts user studies, information needs,
information seeking, information seeking behavior, information foraging, information
use. History and development of user studies. Types of user studies information needs
analysis, analysis of information seeking behavior, information use analysis. Contribution
of leading scholars including Roberts Taylor, Herbert Menzel, William J. Pasley and
Roger Kaufman. Methods of conducting user studies including surveys, focus groups,
community mapping and seasonal calendar. Logistical issues process of conducting user
studies, time-frame and budgeting, corporate communication strategy, implementation of
recommendations and outreach activities advisory group.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. System Analysis and Design, Course Technology Inc., 2005, ISBN
9780619255107
150

1. Modern system analysis and Design, Prentice Hall, 2005 4Th edition, ISBN
01311454617, by Hoffer J. A., George J. F., Valacich J. S.
INS 334 COLLECTION MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To empower learners with knowledge and skills to enable them to develop and manage
information resources in libraries.
Categorize information sources based on their intended purpose
Carrying out evaluation of information sources
Justify the transition from collection development to collection management.
To formulate appropriate collection management policies
To conduct information needs analysis
To conform to legal and ethical considerations that impact on collection
management
Course content
Introduction: definition of terms information sources, collection development,
collection, management. Paradigm shift in collection development. Evaluation of
information sources; Information needs assessment. Collection management policies.
Collection management processes; producers, distributors and vendors of information
materials. Legal and ethical issues. Intellectual freedom and collection management.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
151


1. Champneys, Amian L. (2007). Public Libraries. Jeremy Mills Publishing.
INS 335: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT IN THE INFORMATION

ENVIRONMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide learners with a conceptual and theoretical
background to strategic management and the role it plays in information environment for
development and competitiveness.
Describe the concept of strategic management
Describe how strategic management links into senior management
Discuss the essential elements of strategic management
Identify and describe the elements of strategic management in the information
environment
Consider the essential elements against any cultural factors
Highlight the linkages to information management areas
Course content
Strategic management: definition and concept. Framework for managing information for
competitiveness and sustainability. Strategic planning, quality management, performance
evaluation. Role of communication and motivation. Strategic management skills: interpersonal/group skills, teamwork, multitasking, time-management, social/community
152
building skills, systems thinking, cultural fluency, presentation skills and analytical skills.
Strategic management roles: visionary leadership, negotiating to solve problems, thinking
cross-culturally, attracting and building talent and informational roles.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. Lamb, Robert, Boyden Competitive strategic management, Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2004
1. Mintzberg, Henry Crafting Strategy, Harvard Business Review, July/August 2006.
2. Mintzberg, Henry and Quinn, J.B. The Strategy Process, Prentice-Hall, Harlow, 2007.
3. Mintzberg, H. Ahlstrand, B. and Lampel, J. Strategy Safari : A Guided Tour Through
the Wilds of Strategic Management, The Free Press, New York, 2008
4. Markides, Constantinos A dynamic view of strategy Sloan Management Review,
vol 40, spring 2008,
5. Barnard, Chester The function of the executive, Harvard University Press, Cambridge
Mass, 2009
INS 336 INFORMATION SEARCHING AND RETRIEVAL I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
153
To introduce learners to the principles and strategies of information searching and

retrieval
Conduct online searches using a variety of search logic operators
Demonstrate an understanding of different information retrieval systems and their
functions
Evaluate the effectiveness of information retrieval systems
Course content
Introduction: Principles of information retrieval; information retrieval systems and
services, information processing, storage and retrieval models. Internet: intranet, extranet,
and search engines. Types of databases and their structures: Online and offline databases.
Search preparation and strategies: search process, online searching, search logic operators
and their applications, evaluation and use of feedback. Management of search services:
online search services, internet resources, e-resources, Web-based reference service. User
centric interfaces: menu driven, command driven, graphical user interfaces.
Testing and evaluation of information retrieval systems: precision, recall, costs,
specificity, exhaustivity and user response. Status of information retrieval systems in
Kenya.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


154
Future. Boston, Massachusetts: The Boston Athenaeum.
INS 344 SCHOLARLY JOURNAL PUBLISHING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to develop in the learner an understanding of scholarly
journal publishing process and bring out the key considerations in establishing and
managing sustainable scholarly journals in Africa, and Kenya in particular.
Differentiate the various types of journals and articulate the key characteristics of
scholarly journals
Prepare a business proposal for establishing a scholarly journal, clearly proposing

innovative approaches for addressing the constraints of scholarly journal
publishing
Identify and discuss the key considerations and constraints in scholarly journal
publishing
Discuss the impact of new technologies on scholarly journal publishing
Discuss ethical and legal issues that affect scholarly journal publishing
Discuss the challenges faced by scholars, libraries and publishers in the

development of scholarly journal publishing in Africa
Course content
Different types of journals. Establishing a scholarly journal; appointment of editorial and
advisory board, ownership of the journal. Life cycle of scholarly journals. Peer review
Process; appointment of reviewers, ethics in review. Editing scholarly journals; the
language style, the referencing and format styles. Marketing of scholarly journals;
targeting, subscriptions, selling and promotion. Rating, indexing and citation of journals.
Ethical and legal issues in journal publishing. Trends in electronic journal publishing;
open access, institutional repositories. Challenges in acquisition of journals by libraries.
Prerequisite: N/A
155
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. Harcup, Tony (2009), Journalism: Principles and Practice, Thousand Oaks,
California: Sage Publications, ISBN 978-1847872500
1.
Campbell, W. Joseph, Getting It Wrong: Ten of the Greatest Misreported
Stories in American Journalism, Berkeley : University of California Press,
2010. ISBN 9780520262096
2.
"Sycophancy and Objective Journalism". Advances in Applied Sociology
(Scientific Research) 2 (3): 159-166. Sep 2012. ISSN 2165-4328.
INS 345 THE BOOK TRADE II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course aims to equip learners with knowledge and skills in analyzing book markets,
wholesaling and retailing, starting and managing a bookshop and applying e-bookselling
strategies.
156
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding on the structure of the book industry

in Kenya, Africa and the world scene.
Discuss the nature of books as commercial, cultural and intellectual products.
Describe the different types of book markets and how to carry out market analysis.
Discuss the book distribution functions of wholesaling and retailing and the
dynamics of sales management.
Apply the knowledge and skills acquired on starting and managing a bookshop
including using promotion and trade bibliographic tools.
Develop a bookshop web page and sell books on the Internet.
Critically examine the future of book trade with respect to the new developments
such as e-bookselling.
Course content
The book industry in Kenya: History and structure; Books as unique products,
commercial products and intellectual products; The booksellers market: Types of markets
and market analysis; Distribution: Wholesaling and retailing; Dynamics of selling and
factors affecting sales; starting and running (managing) a bookshop: Shop layout and
displays; stock control; records management; cost performance control; terms of trade;
staffing; customer relations; setting up a bookshop web page and selling on the Internet;
promotion: Liaison with publishers sales representatives; book exhibitions and Fairs;
trade bibliographic tools; manual and electronic; professional associations in book trade
and their role; the future of the book trade: e-book selling
Prerequisite: INS 215: The Book Trade I
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Martin, M. D. (Ed.). (1974). Unesco. UNISIST Reference Manual for
Machine-readable Bibliographic Descriptions. Paris: UNESCO.
157
1.
Wilson, P. (1989). The second objective. IN: The conceptual foundations of

Press, Inc
2.

INS 346 PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF PHOTOGRAPHY

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course introduces the learner to the basics of still photography for use in mass
communication.
Explain the basic concepts and uses of photography.
Trace the history of photography and photojournalism.
Select and use appropriate photographic equipment and accessories.
Understand the principles and techniques for photo composition and editing.
Appreciate the roles of the photographer and photo editor.
Understand the ethics and laws guiding photojournalism practice.
Course content
Introduction to photography and photojournalism; Uses of photographs in publications;
History of photography and photojournalism; Photographic equipment and accessories;
Photographic camera handling practices and techniques (Depth of field, depth of focus,
sunlight and electronic flash techniques); Principles for good photo composition;
Photographic film processing and printing; Role of the photographer and photo editor;
Photo story; Computer packages for photo editing; Photo editing techniques (Cropping,
sizing and retouching); Caption writing; Criteria for selecting appropriate pictures for
publications; Digital photography; Photojournalism ethics and laws.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Group Discussions and Group Practical Project (Picture Portfolio).
158

Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Tom Ang (2002). Dictionary of Photography and Digital Imaging: The Essential
Reference for the Modern Photographer. Watson-Guptill. ISBN 0-8174-3789-4.
1. John Hannavy (ed.): Encyclopedia of Nineteenth-Century Photography, 1736 p.,
New York: Routledge 2005 ISBN 978-0-415-97235-2
2. The Oxford Companion to the Photograph, ed. by Robin Lenman, Oxford
University Press 2005
347 MARKETING, SALES AND DISTRIBUTION IN PUBLISHING

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to impart the learner the skills and knowledge of marketing,
selling and distribution of products in a publishing environment.
Explain how marketing is used in publishing and the book trade sector.
Prepare a marketing plan for a publishing or a book selling enterprise.
Prepare and interpret a financial statement for a publishing or a book selling

enterprise.
Understand the management of book distribution management.
Explain emerging issues in the book marketing and distribution sector.
Course content
Introduction; marketing, selling and distribution. Marketing; marketing in publishing,
books as commercial products, marketing strategies and marketing mix, marketing plan.
Promotion; role of promotion, promotion materials and opportunities, forecasting and
planning for a promotional event.
Sales; book selling as a publisher, sales management, sales forecasting, sales team, sales
expansion. Financial management; budgeting, ledger books, trial balance, profit and loss
159
and balance sheet. Distribution; categories of distributors, roles and importance of

distributors, warehousing and stock management, customer relations. Internet as a
marketing tool and other emerging issues.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1.
Chisholm, Hugh, ed. (2009). "Publishing". Encyclopdia Britannica (11th ed.).
1.
Epstein, Jason. Book Business: Publishing Past, Present, and Future.
2.
INS 353 HEALTH RECORDS MANAGEMENT

Purpose
To introduce learners to the management of health records.
160
3 CREDIT HOURS
Explain record keeping practices in health facilities and/or institutions
Explain the types of patient records and other health-related information
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in the use of medical classification schemes

such as international classification of diseases
Be familiar with various medical records issues including legal properties of

medical records and information, ownership, access, confidentiality and security
Be familiar with technology applications in health records management
Course content
Introduction to record keeping practices in health environments such as hospitals and
physician offices. Types of patient records and other health related information.
Introduction to medical classification schemes. International classification of disease
(ICD). Procedures in filing, coding, appraisal, scheduling and disposal of patient records.
Health statistics on attendance and admission of patients. Statistics on bed occupancy and
utility. Morbidity and mortality statistics. Legal properties of medical records and
information: confidentiality and security of patient information. Ownership and use of
medical records. Use of technology in managing health records. Technology and
authenticity issues. Patient access rights to medical care information. Design, control and
use of medical forms, registers and indexes.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
The course will be delivered by lectures and seminars
Course Assessment:


1.
LaTour, Kathleen. Health Information Management: Concepts, Principles, and
Practice. Chicago: AHIMA, 2006.
161
1.
2.
3.
(LaTour, Kathleen M., & Maki, Shirley Eichenwald. (2010). Health information
management concepts, principles, and practice. Chicago, Illinois: American Health
Information Management Association.)(LaTour, & Maki, 2010).
LaTour, Kathleen. Health Information Management: Concepts, Principles, and
Practice. Chicago: AHIMA, 2006
INS 354 MANAGEMENT OF AUDIO VISUAL ARCHIVES

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To impart knowledge and skills on the management of A-V materials
Explain the history of A-V archives
Explain the types and characteristics of A-V materials
Explain the processes in managing A-V archives
Propose solutions to challenges of managing A-V archives
Discuss disaster planning and recovery for A-V archives
Explain role of professional associations in promoting the management of A-V

archives
Course content
Introduction to A-V archives. Definitions and concepts: A-V materials, A-V archives,
sound archives. Film archives. Microforms. Preservation. History of A-V archives. Types
and characteristics of A-V materials. Bormats of A-V materials. Uses of A-V materials.
Management of A-V: survey acquisition, transfer, accessioning, processing, storage and
access, preservation. Standards and best practices in A-V archives management.
Challenges of managing A-V materials: Legal admissibility of A-V records;
confidentiality; copyright; patenting; FOI and privacy. Disaster planning and recovery.
Role of professional associations in promoting management of A-V archives: ICA, FIAT,
IFTA, IASA, FIAF, NFVSA.
Prerequisite: N/A
162
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


Metuchen, New Jersey: Society of American Archivists & The Scarecrow Press, Inc..
1. "Archive" The Oxford English Dictionary. 2nd ed. 1989. OED Online. Oxford
University Press.
2. Whitehill, Walter Muir (1962). "Introduction". Independent Historical Societies: An
Enquiry into Their Research and Publication Functions and Their Financial Future.
Boston, Massachusetts: The Boston Athenaeum. p. 311.
INS 355 DIGITAL PRESERVATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to equip learners with knowledge on issues, strategies and
challenges in preserving digital information materials.
163
Explain the importance of preserving digital information materials
Identify challenges associated with digital preservation
Discuss strategies applicable in digital preservation
Design a digital preservation policy
Course content
Introduction to digital preservation. Definitions and concepts: preservation, digitization,
digital preservation, digital archiving. Scope and meaning of digital preservation: born
digital and reborn/converted digital materials. Guidelines for digitizing records and
archive materials. Digital preservation requirements and strategies: use of hardcopy
media, technology preservation, emulation, migration and encapsulation. Digital
preservation policy. Digital preservation challenges: technological obsolescence,
deterioration of digital media, continuous migration, lack of legislation, policies and
strategies, lack of awareness, lack of collaboration and partnerships and absence of
disaster planning and recovery programmes.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


164

INS 356: MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC RECORDS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To equip learners with knowledge and skills required for the management of electronic
records.
Demonstrate an understanding of the basic concepts and indicate the

characteristics of electronic records
Explain issues that underpin the management of electronic records
Discuss electronic records management models
Design an electronic records management programme and show how it should be

implemented
Discuss components of an electronic records management programme
Course content
Electronic Records and archives: Basic concepts. Characteristics of electronic records.
Electronic record formats. Issues in electronic records: policy, professional, technical,
managerial and cultural. Metadata and electronic records management: importance and
requirements. Overview of electronic records management models (the continuum,
Moreq, ICA, US military, Australian). Establishing an electronic records management
programme: needs analysis, stakeholder analysis, survey of computerized and electronic
records system, analysis of institutional capacity and determining essential resources
(budget, human resources, facilities, equipment etc). Implementing an Electronic Records
Management System. Components of an electronic data and records management
programme: inventorying, file plans, appraisal and scheduling, accessioning, processing,
preservation, arrangement, description and access.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
165

Course Assessment:
the total mark
1. "Introducing the Victorian Electronic Records Strategy (VERS)" Justine Heazlewood
(Manager, Electronic Records and Online Access, Public Record Office Victoria,
Victoria, Australia). In D-Lib Magazine Volume 8 Number 3 (March 2011). [ISSN
1082-9873]
1. the International Organization for Standardization ISO_standards 15489-1:2001
Records ManagementPart 1: General
2. Trends in Records, Document and Enterprise Content Management. Whitepaper.
S.E.R. conference, Visegrd, September 28th, 2012 PDF original source of this
Wikipedia article by the German consulting company Project Consult
Unternehmensberatung
INF 410: PROJECT MANAGEMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge and skills in the management
of informatics projects.
166
Apply general project management competencies to informatics projects;
Apply project management techniques and develop documents related to

informatics project management;
Understand how to apply different life-cycle models to design informatics

projects;
Identify informatics project risks and develop risk mitigation strategies;
Understand how to facilitate learning in and learning from informatics projects.
Use appropriate project management software to create and manage project

resources
Course content
Introduction to project management, Agile development methods, Project management in
informatics Context. Informatics project escalation, Managing project teams, Project
initiation and planning, Project scheduling, Managing project resources. informatics
project cost estimation, Managing informatics project quality, Managing informatics
project risk, Managing Procurement in informatics projects, informatics project execution
and control, Agile verses plan driven project management, Project closure and audit,
Project creation using selected project management sofware: adding task and subtasks to
a project, assigning task duration, tracking task progress, creating relationships, between
tasks; managing resources and assignments, managing costs, critical paths, resolving
resource conflicts, establishing project baselines, project reporting, informatics project
Management Case studies.
Prerequisite: INS 323: Software engineering
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


167
1. Paul C. Dinsmore et al (2005) The right projects done right! John Wiley and Sons,
2005. ISBN 0-7879-7113-8. p.35 and further.
1. Lewis R. Ireland (2006) Project Management. McGraw-Hill Professional,
2006. ISBN 0-07-147160-X. p.110.
2. Martin Stevens (2002). Project Management Pathways. Association for Project
Management. APM Publishing Limited, 2002 ISBN 1-903494-01-X p.xxii
INS 402 LEGAL AND ETHICAL ASPECTS OF INFORMATION

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to equip information science learners basic legal knowledge
to enable them to carry out their work within the confines of the law.
Know how the law in Kenya works

Understand how the law will affect their work as information professionals
Avoid infringing the law in the course of their work.
Refrain from indulging in unethical practices both as learners and later as
information professionals.
Course content
Introduction: definitions of legal terms and concepts. The legal system in Kenya: sources
of Kenya law, and the judicial structure. Kenya Constitution with specific reference to the
Bill of Rights. United Nations Declaration on Human Rights, 1948. Classification of law.
Intellectual property law. Information censorship. Data protection; legal deposit. Freedom
of access to information. Computer and the law. Analysis of information related
legislations in Kenya: Public Archives Act and Kenya National Library Services Board
Act. Kenya Communications Act. Museums Act
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
168
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, field visits, and laboratory
work.
Course Assessment:


2. Ladd, John. "The Quest for a Code of Professional Ethics: An Intellectual and
Moral Confusion." In Deborah G. Johnson (ed.) Ethical Issues Information
Sciece. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2010
1. Ruth Chadwick (1998). Professional Ethics. In E. Craig (Ed.), Routledge
Encyclopedia of Philosophy. London: Routledge
2. Michael Davis , Thinking like an Engineer in Philosophy and Public Affairs,
20.2 (2001)
INS 403: NEW MEDIA
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to equip learners with knowledge and skills on development of
different types of new media and their impact on commerce, governance, social work,
health care and communication.
Discuss the different types of new media.

Trace the evolution from old to new media.
Evaluate the impact of new media on different sectors of the economy.
Understand laws and regulations relating to new media.
Course content
Introduction to new media; Types of new media and their development; Evolution from
old to new media; Impact of new media in commerce, governance, social work,
healthcare, communication; New media and internet services provision; Intellectual
property rights; Policy and regulation; New media and publishing; Developments in new
media.
Prerequisite: N/A
169
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures and tutorials/seminars. The learner will be
given questions to research and present them in class during seminar sessions.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

INS 404: LEADERSHIP AND MANAGEMENT IN INFORMATION

SCIENCES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To Impart to learners knowledge in leadership and management in information science
profession.
Di Explain the history and theories of leadership

Explain leadership qualities and styles
Discuss the ethics and leadership professional codes of conduct
Discuss the essential leadership qualities for information professionals
Identify leadership challenges in the information environment
Demonstrate the need or mentorship in change management and succession
planning in the information profession.
170
Course content
History and theories of leadership. Objectives of leadership. Leadership qualities and
styles. Leadership versus management. Leadership versus followership. Ethics, leadership
professional codes of conduct. Information professionals as leaders and managers.
Essential leadership qualities for information professionals. Leadership challenges in the
information environment. Mentorship in change management and succession planning in
the information profession.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures and tutorials/seminars. The learner will be
given questions to research and present them in class during seminar sessions.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Breeze, J., & Miner Jr., F. (1980, August). Henri Fayol: A New Definition of
Administration. Academy of Management Proceedings, Retrieved March 3,
2012, from Business Source Premier database.
1. Almashaqba, Z. S; Nemer Al-Qeed, M (2010). "The Classical Theory of
Organization and it's Relevance". International Research Journal Of Finance &
Economics 41: 6067.
2. Pietri, P. H (1974). "ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION: The
Pioneers". Journal Of Business Communication 11 (4): 36.
INS 408: RESEARCH PROJECT
6 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
171
The purpose of this project is to provide students with an opportunity to exemplify their
understanding on knowledge acquired through individual assessment and input to specific
field of research.
Demonstrate sound understanding of knowledge acquired in different areas of

study.
Write a research report
Course content
Context of FOI; FOI and good governance; the UN Charter on Human Rights; FOI and
constitutional guarantees; principle of citizens right to know; objectives of FOI; FOI and
records management; citizens right to access information held by government; right of
government to withhold information;
FOI and government accountability; issues pertaining to implementation of FOI including
infrastructure, budgetary allocation, human resources; timelines for information
provision, appeals procedure if one is denied access to information, fees, sanctions,
privacy and confidentiality; FOI and data protection.
INF 371: LAW, ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE IN INFORMATICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to equip the learner with knowledge in law and professional
ethics in informatics.
To identify the various sources of Law in ICT and related areas;
To establish a framework for standards and values by applying ethics in the ICT
environment;
Apply law, ethical principles and professional practices as they relate to the
informatics profession; and
To demonstrate an understanding of the role of Law and Ethics in the informatics

profession.
Course content
Concepts of Law in ICT and related areas; Legal Issues in ICT; e.g. ecommerce, ebanking, e-business, digital signatures; Internet/Cyber Law; Service Provider Liability;
Trademarks on the Internet; Copyright Law, Intellectual Property, Domain Name
Disputes; Web Page Linking and Legal Liability. Privacy and Confidentiality. ICT
172
Policies and Laws; e.g The Kenya Communications (Amendment) Act (2008). Kenya ICT
Policy (2006), The Role of Regulating Authorities, e.g. The CCK. Ethics: Concept of
Ethics. Ethical Issues in ICT, e.g. Cyberethics. Computer Ethics, Netiquette. Ethical
decision making in the network environment. ICT Code of Ethics. Environment and
Health Concerns. Professional Practice: Need for ICT professionalism, The role of World
Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) on online arbitration. Role of ICT Professional
Associations in law and ethics e.g. ACM, IEEE, and CSK. Challenges to ICT Professional
Practice. Strategies to mitigate the difficulties.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and delivery shall be by lectures, talks, and seminars.
Course Assessment:
the total mark
Sciece. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991..
20.2 (2001)
INF 460 NETWORK DESIGN AND ADMINISTRATION 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
This course is designed to provide the learner with knowledge and skills in planning,
design, implementation and management of networks.
173

Demonstrate an understanding of IP addressing schemes;

Illustrate the capability of designing networks for efficient use of bandwidth;
Demonstrate an understanding of how various networking components are
programmed, configured and deployed;
Assign and configure various server roles using various NOS (e.g. mainly Linux.
Mac and Windows platforms);
Provide sufficient security to the system; and
Demonstrate good knowledge of acceptable network administration capabilities.
Course content
Overview of network operating system (NOS). NOS core technologies and
administration. installation and configuration. IP addressing system and subnetting. NIC
IP Binding. Protocols(routing and switching) Routers, gateways, bridges and firewalls
configuration. Design and implementation of data traffics flow in a large enterprise LAN.
Flat or hierarchical design (core, distributed and access) Adding and configuration of
server roles: DNS, DHCP, WINS, web server, mail server, etc. Access rights and
permissions in an enterprise management. Network management and monitoring tools,
analysis and design. Technical requirements, specifications, budgets and staffing.
Prerequisite: INS 220: Data communication
INS 327: Information Security and systems audit
Mode of delivery
This is a practical course and delivery shall be by lectures, field visits, and laboratory
work.
Course Assessment:

Andrew S. Tanenbaum(2004).Distributed environments (4th Ed).Prentice

1. Hwang K.&Briggs,F.A.(2002).introduction to distributed systems.New york
174
2. William Stallings(2007).distributed operating systems ( 5th Ed.).Prentice Hall
INS 430 CLASSIFICATION II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to enhance the learner levels of proficiency in classifying
array of information materials that may be presented in different degrees of subject
complexities.
Understand the principles and practices of the book publishing business.
Explain the functional role of the various components of classification schemes
Analyze subject content of a document
Identify the subject relationships exhibited by variety of information sources
Search and choose appropriate class numbers
Use manuals and tables from the classification schedules appropriately
Assign class numbers from the schedules for both simple and complex subjects
Assign cutter and call numbers
Design a simple classification scheme using different approaches to classification

schemes development
Assess automated applications used in classifying web-based resources
Course Content
Comparison of principles of classification: general versus individual classification
schemes principles. Subject analysis: processes, methods, limitations and significance.
Forms of subject and subject relationships. Challenges in document representation.
General classification schemes such as Library of Congress Classification Scheme (LCC)
and Dewey Classification Scheme: foundation, principles, structure, and MARC
encoding. Choosing appropriate class numbers. Use of schedule tables and manuals.
Assigning cutter and call numbers. Web classification approaches: initiatives, challenges
and prospects.
Prerequisite: INS 213 CLASSIFICATION I
Mode of delivery
Discussions and Hands-on practical number building
175
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Chan, Lois Mai. Cataloging and Classification: An Introduction, second ed. New
York: McGraw-Hill, 1994. ISBN 978-0-07-010506-5, ISBN 978-0-07-113253-4.
MES 410 LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES IN THE MEDIA
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to provide learners with an understanding of the main areas of
law and ethics that have to be taken into account in making decisions to publish or
broadcast material. Learners will also learn formal and informal codes of ethics that
govern activities of media practitioners.
Understand laws relating to defamation, contempt of court, censorship,

copyright and privacy and other laws affecting media practice.
Make judgments about when to seek legal advice before publishing.
Understand key ethical debates as they relate to media practice.
Course Content
Media and the law; Copyright law in Kenya; Books and Newspapers Act; Broadcast and
Telecommunication laws and regulations; Privacy laws, Libel/defamation laws, Contempt
of court; International conventions; issues in the Penal code, Privileges (Qualified and
absolute); Underage reporting; Family reporting; Disaster reporting; Sexual offences
176
reporting; data protection laws, international conventions; individual vs. National good;
emerging legal and regulatory challenges in e-reporting.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials/seminars and practicals. The
learner will be given questions to research and present them in class during seminar
sessions.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Sciece. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991..
20.2 (2001)
INS 452 QUALITY ASSURANCE IN RECORDS AND ARCHIVES
MANAGEMENT
CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is intended to equip learners with knowledge on quality assurance to enable
them manage archives and records effectively.
177
Define terms and concepts pertinent to quality assurance
Explain the history and development of quality assurance
Discuss the application of TQM to records and archives management

programmes
Demonstrate knowledge of quality standards and indicators applicable to

records and archives management
Discuss implications of good or poor quality records and archives services

and programmes for stakeholders.
Course Content
Concept of quality assurance. Development of the concept of quality. Total Quality
Management (TQM): components, quality inspection and quality control. Need for
quality assessment of records and archives programmes. Quality standards and indicators
in records and archives management: ISO certification and standards: types of standards
in records and archives management: records and archives management standards,
preservation standards, media conversion standards, information security standards,
quality standards. Implications of good or poor quality services and programmes for
stakeholders.
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and will be delivered by lectures and Seminars
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Metuchen, New Jersey: Society of American Archivists & The Scarecrow Press,
Inc..
178
1. "archive" The Oxford English Dictionary. 2nd ed. 1989. OED Online. Oxford
University Press.
INS 453 MANAGING BUSINESS RECORDS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is intended to equip learners with knowledge that will enable them to manage
business records effectively.
Explain the nature and types of business organizations
Explain the different corporate structures of business organizations
Demonstrate knowledge of the various forms and types of business records
Demonstrate knowledge of the users and uses of business records
Explain role of record keeping professionals in managing business records
Demonstrate knowledge and skills required in evaluating a business

records management programme.
Course Content
Types of business organizations: public, private and multi-national. Corporate structure of
business organizations. Role and uses of records in business management: social,
economic and political. Users of business records: business community, corporate bodies,
government, professionals, general public. Forms and types of business records:
administrative, Human Resource, financial, legal, tax, banking, insurance, pay-roll,
inventory and business forms. Sources of business information: primary, secondary and
tertiary. Lifecycle of business records. Role of record keeping professionals. Security of
business records: custody, access, use and confidentiality. Evaluation of a business
records programme
Prerequisite: N/A
Mode of delivery
This is a theory course and will be delivered by lectures and Seminars
179
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Beynon-Davies P. (2004). E-Business. Palgrave, Basingstoke. ISBN 1-40391348-X
1.
Amor, D. (1999). The e-business (r)evolution. Upper Saddle
River: Prentice Hall..
2.
Gerstner, L. (2002). Who says Elephants Can't Dance? Inside IBM's
Historic Turnaround. pg 172. ISBN 0-06-052379-4
3.
Paul Timmers, (2000), Electronic Commerce - strategies & models for
business-to-business trading, pp.31, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, ISBN 0-47172029-1
INS 419 PRACTICAL ATTACHMENT
6 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide students an opportunity to exercise their acquired
knowledge and skill in a real working environment over a period of eight weeks under the
supervision of a host and school supervisor.
Write a report on tasks accomplished, assessment of the specific tasks and analysis
of the knowledge acquired in their study to the specific job assignments.
180

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE: STATISTICS WITH COMPUTING
1.0 Introduction
Statistics is an inductive science in which information is extracted from sample data in
order to draw inferences. This most often involves planning experiments to ensure
valid answers to questions are obtained from the sample. Statistics is a subject that
deals with the collection and analysis of data and affects most aspects of modern life. It
is a subject that derives vitality in coping with practical problems, which arises in all
fields of scientific activities. Statistical methods are exclusively used Biological and
Physical Sciences, Agriculture, Business, Finance, Economics, Engineering and many
other fields. It deals rationally and objectively with the uncertainty that accompanies
variation phenomena as highly complex as the interplay of many factors that affect our
environment. Investigators efforts to learn about a specific phenomenon, be response
of a patient to a certain medical treatment or the effectiveness of a particular
instructional program on students learning, are impacted by the presence of natural
variation. The field of statistics is concerned with valid and efficient way to learn more
about these phenomena in the presence of such variation.
The statisticians task is to determine what data to collect, how to collect and how to
analyze. These problems are discussed under design of Experiments and Sample
Surveys. Statistical inference is concerned with inferring what the population is like on
basis of the sample. The link between population and sample is provided by
Probability Theory, which forms an important part of the curriculum. Developing and
assessing statistical models to describe the variation in some response in terms of other
explanatory variables ands applications of these models is discussed.
Other areas in Pure and Applied Mathematics that find applications in statistics include
Calculus, Linear and Abstract algebra, Combinatory, Difference and Differential
equations. Since a statistician requires a background courses in computer programming
and applications are incorporated.
Statistics involves the meaning, justification, utility, use and abuse; its methodology,
ethical and epistemological issues involved in the consideration of choice and
interpretation of data and methods of Statistics.
Statistical literacy is an extremely important skill to develop because in everyday life a
person is constantly exposed to information from surveys and scientific experiments
designed to convey information. But, how can a person tell the accuracy of the
information? How we make sense of the information with which one is presented?
Statistical literacy provides us with the skills to answer these questions.
181

Statisticians use mathematical techniques to analyze and interpret data. In many areas
of the Kenyan economy statisticians are needed to use their skills to facilitate
important decisions to be made.
Statistics program is designed to empower students with the analytical skills and
Computational tools required to make sense out of information without which data
would be meaningless.
The Statistics programme is aimed at:
1. Designing methods for collecting and interpreting data
2. Applying statistical techniques to model relationships between variables and make
predictions
3. Design research system and effectively analyze the resulting data
c) Knowledge and understanding
The Statistics programme enables students develop competencies required to:
iv) Solve problems in Statistics and offer relevant solutions using appropriate
tools.
v) Understand data trends and derive models that provide needed information
vi) Know the environmental and social impact of a Statisticans activities
vii) Understand business and management techniques relevant to a Statistician
d) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge
vi) Execute and critically analyze results of an investigation and make logical
conclusions.
vii) Use scientific principles in solutions of statistical problems.
viii)
Analyze statistical data
ix) Use computers in the treatment of data
x) Prepare research proposals and write reports
The programme will be delivered mainly through face to face contact with
students. In situations of a distance approach of course delivery, students would be
required to have access to computer facilities for a hands-on analysis.
182

To be admitted into the B.Sc. (Applied Statistics with Computing) program, a
candidate must satisfy the minimum University entry requirements. In addition,
candidates must satisfy the following subject cluster: Mathematics
OR Mathematics
Any group II
Physical Science
Any group III
Biological Science
Any from group II/III/IV/V
Geography/Accounts/Commerce
Eligible mature entrants will have either of the following qualifications:
1. Candidates must have passed K.C.S.E or equivalent with a minimum grade of
c+ in the subject cluster
2. KNEC Diploma holders or their equivalent recognized by University who
meet the admission requirements are eligible for admission on credit transfer.
(Pass into first, credit/distinction into second year)
3. Candidates with equivalent qualifications as approved by senate may be
considered
The General University Examination Regulations and the special examination
regulations set by the school of Science shall apply. End of semester exams are
written within 3-hour period. The weighting for each course is as follows:
(a) Theory Courses
30%
70%
(b) Theory and computer-based Courses
Continuous assessment of comp. Exercises
20%
20%

The grading system of courses and degree classification shall be the same as those
183
contained in the common rules and regulations for undergraduate examinations of 2010
of Narok University found in section 5.3 .
undergraduate examination regulations of 2010 of Narok university.
external examiner.
To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Physics, a student shall satisfy all the
university requirements pertaining to the degree. Students shall take all the units offered
in the first, second, third and fourth year of study.
of the candidate. The duration of the oral presentation shall be limited to within 40
minutes. After the oral presentation the board of examiners shall compile the scores and
determine the average score which shall be entered as the final mark in the project. The
scoring shall be split as shown below:
70%
Oral examination
30%
Direct assessment is through a range of in-semester tests that include, written
examinations, assignments, homework, laboratory reports and/or quizzes. Final year
project assessment is based on performance in oral presentations and a formal written
report.
184
The maintenance of standards will be achieved by both internal and external moderation
of examinations. Above all the overall assessment process will be subject to external
examiner scrutiny who will provide benchmarking to international standards.
Lectures (those that are delivered mainly by lectures) will be examined primarily by end
of semester closed-book examinations, but will include an element (up to 30%) of
continuous assessment. The latter may be taken from worked problem sheets, laboratory
reports, tutorial lessons, tests, quizzes, essays or small project exercises. However most
of the problem sheets supporting lectures will be formative as also may be some
laboratory reports and essays (particularly at the lower levels). Some of the lecture
courses may be examined primarily or completely by assignments, where the nature of
the course is unsuitable for assessment by examination.
3.7 Duration and Structure of the programme
The duration of the program shall normally take four academic years
A candidate should take a minimum of at least 21 units or at most 24 units per
semester
In addition to the normal semesters, there are field visits and industrial attachments at
selected industrial, educational or research establishments. The attachment course shall
normally be taken at the end of third year of study
COURSE STRUCTURE
YEAR 1
1ST SEMESTER
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 110
Introduction to Statistical Economics
STA 110
Introduction to Probability and Statistics I
STA 111
Basic Calculus I
MAT 110
Introduction to Computers and Computing
COM 110
Computer Applications I
COM 111
Communication Skills I
IRD 100
Development concepts and Application
IRD 103
Introduction to Statistical Economics
TOTAL
21
185
2ND SEMESTER
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 112
Introduction to Probability and Statistics II
STA 113
Principles of Sample Surveys
STA 114
Computer Applications for Data Analysis
STA 115
Introduction to Mathematics for Finance
MAT 111
IRD 102
Communication skills II
IRD 104
Quantitative skills
TOTAL
21
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 212
Mathematical Statistics I
STA 213
Social and Economic Statistics
STA 214
Operations Research I
STA 215
Introduction to Applied Statistics
MAT 210
Calculus II
MAT 212
Linear Algebra I
COM 201
Computer Applications II
IRD 200
State, Society and Development
TOTAL
24
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 216
Mathematical statistics II
STA 217
Principle of statistical Inference
STA 218
Introduction to time series Analysis
STA 219
Categorical Data Analysis
MAT 213
Linear Algebra II
YEAR II
1ST SEMESTER
2ND SEMESTER
186
MAT 216
Real Analysis
COM 121
Procedural Programming I
TOTAL
21
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 315
Mathematical Statistics III
STA 316
Applied Regression Analysis I
STA 317
Theory of Estimation
STA 318
Computing Methods and Data Analysis
MAT 310
Advanced Real Analysis
MAT 314
IRD 305
Entrepreneurship for Small Business
TOTAL
21
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 319
Sampling Theory and Methods I
STA 320
Design and analysis of Experiments I
STA 321
Testing of Hypotheses
STA 350
Industrial attachment
COM 318
Database Systems
MAT 317
Numerical Analysis I
ANY TWO ELECTIVES
TOTAL
24
YEAR III
1ST SEMESTER
2ND SEMESTER
CORE COURSE
ELECTIVES
187
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 322
Survey Research Methods
STA 323
Introduction to Mathematical modeling
STA 324
Econometric Models
STA 325
Statistical Quality Control Methods
STA 326
Operations Research II
STA 327
Applied Regression Analysis II
STA 328
Applied Statistical Inference
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 418
Applied Time Series Analysis
STA 419
Introduction to Measure and Probability
STA 420
Statistical Demography
STA 421
Statistical Computing
STA 422
Design and Analysis of Experiments II
STA 450
Statistical Consulting Project
IRD 400
Development project Appraisal
TOTAL
21
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 423
Biometry Methods
STA 424
Stochastic Processes
STA 425
Sampling Theory and Methods II
COM 400
Computer Programming II
ANY THREE ELECTIVES
TOTAL
21
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 426
Bayesian Inference and Decision Analysis
YEAR IV
1ST SEMESTER
2ND SEMESTER
CORE COURSES
ELECTIVES
188
STA 427
Survival Models and Analysis
STA 428
Mathematical Application in Finance
STA 429
Applied Multivariate Analysis
STA 430
Non- Parametric and Robust Methods
STA 431
Principles of Actuarial Science
STA 432
Statistics for National Planning
STA 433
Operation Research III
189
21
YEAR 1
STA 110
INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICAL ECONOMICS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to statistical economics
the students should be able to define microeconomics

understand demand and supply
understand macroeconomics
Course content
Scope of economics and its role. Introduction to microeconomics. Demand and supply
analysis, effects of price controls and supply, Elasticity of demand and supply, cost
analysis, Production factors. Introduction to macroeconomics, the role of government in
economics, National income measures, the circular income flow, aggregate demand and
supply. Public sector finance and taxation.
Mode of delivery
1. Lecture. Oral Presentation generally incorporating additional activities.
e.g. Writing on a chalk board, exercises, class questions and discussion or
Student presentation
2. Tutorials: to give the students more attention.
Instructional Material/Equipment: Include course notes, black and white board, chalk,
white-board marker, duster, computer and projector.
Course assessment
1. Written end of semester Examination comprising 70% of the total marks.
2. Continuous Assessment Tests within the semester comprising 30% of the
total marks. (Tests 20%, Assignments 10%)
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluation by head of department and self evaluation
1. Wonnacott, Thomas H., and Ronald J. Wonnacott, 1990. Introductory Statistics for
Business and Economics, 4th ed., Wiley.
190
1. Ullah, Aman, and David E. A. Giles, ed., 1998. Handbook of Applied Economic
Statistics, Marcel Dekker
2. Crum, W. L., 1925. An Introduction to the Methods of Economic Statistics, AW
Shaw Co.
STA 111: INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS I 3 CREDIT
HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to Basic Principles of Probability and Statistics
1. the students should be proficient in representing data graphically and handling
summary statistics, fit a line of best fit to data
2. handling probability distributions including expectation and variance of a discrete
random variable.
Course content
Data: sources, collection, classification and processing. Frequency distribution and
graphical representation of data, including bar diagrams, histograms and stem and leaf
diagrams. Measures of central tendency and dispersion. Skewness and Kurtosis.
Correlation and fitting data to best straight line. Classical and axiomatic approaches to
probability. Compound and conditional probability including Bayes theorem. Concept of
discrete random variables: expectation and variance
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Mann P S. (2000). Introduction to Statistics. John Wiley & Sons Ltd
1. Uppal, S M, Odhiambo R.O, Humphreys H M. Introduction to probability and
statistics. JKUAT Press, 2005
2. G M Clarke & D Cooke. A basic course in statistics. 5th ed, 2004
191
STA 112: INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS II

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To incalculate the principles of statistics for univariate distribution.
1. the students should be able to handle problems involving probability distributions of a
discrete or a continuous random variable
Course content
Random variables: discrete and continuous, probability mass function and density.
Distribution functions. Expectation and variance. Moment and moment generating
functions. Moment generating functions and transformation of variable technique for
univariate distribution. Probability distributions: Bernoulli, binomial, Poisson, Hyper
geometric, uniform, normal, beta, and gamma.
PREREQUISITES:
1. Calculus I
2. Introduction to Probability and Statistics I
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
I Miller & M Miller. John E Freuds. Mathematical Statistics with Application. 7th ed.
Pearsons Education, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
1. Crawley. Statistics: An Introduction using R. John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
192
2. I Miller & M Miller. John E Freuds. Mathematical Statistics with Application. 7th
ed. Pearsons Education, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
3. H J Larsons. Introduction to Probability Theory and Statistical Inference. 3rd ed.
Wiley, 1982
4. P S Mann. Introduction to Statistics. John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2001
STA 113:
PRINCIPLES OF SAMPLE SURVEYS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to principles of sample surveys
Define survey
Understand sampling procedures
Understand estimation of means, totals variance and proportions.
Course content
Scope and uses of sample surveys; Survey types, sample survey design and organization,
Probability, purposeful and quota sampling. Introduction to simple, stratified, systematic,
multistage and PPS sampling procedures. Estimation of means, totals variance and
proportions. Sampling and non- sampling errors, Sources of errors, Management of
surveys
Mode of delivery
1. Lecture. Oral Presentation generally incorporating additional activities. e.g
Writing on a chalk board, exercises, class questions and discussion or
Instructional Material/Equipment:
Include course notes, black and white board, chalk, white-board marker, duster, computer
and projector.
Course Assessment:
193

Wiley, 1982
STA 114
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS FOR DATA ANALYSIS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to computer applications for data analysis
Understand Number systems
Understand numerical solution to linear equations
Use a statistical package
Course content
Computers and data bases. Number systems, Errors and accuracy, Interpolation, Finite
differences, Difference equations, Iterative techniques. Numerical solution to linear
equations. Computer programs for numerical algorithms, Numerical solutions to nonlinear equations. Statistical packages and libraries. Computer graphics, Software packages
Mode of delivery
and projector.
Course assessment
Staff performance
194

Wiley, 1982
STA 115:
INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICS FOR FINANCE

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to mathematics for finance
Expected learning outcomes
Understand linear models
Understand exponential functions
Understand Mathematics of Finance
Define Linear Programming
Course content
Functions and linear models: Functions slope and equations of straight lines, graphing
linear Equations, Linear models, Break- even Analysis: Market Equilibrium. Exponential
and logarithmic functions: Exponential functions and their graphs, Logarithms functions,
filling exponential models. Mathematics of Finance: Simple interest and discount,
compound interest, Geometric series and Annuities, Present Value of an Annuities,
Sinking funds and Amortization, Equations of value; Deferred Annuities; Complex
Annuities. Linear systems and matrices; Linear system; Tableaus; Problem formulation.
Gauss- Jordan method of solving linear systems, solving square linear systems by matrix
Inverse, Leontiefs input- output, model. Linear Programming; The graphical method:
Linear inequalities in two variables, linear programming, Fundamental theorem of linear
programming
Mode of delivery
195
and projector.
Course assessment
Staff performance
i)
Thomas G and Finney R. Calculus and Analytical Geometry (6 th Edition);
Wesley
1.
Albert E. Church (2007); Elements of Analytical Geometry, Kessinger
Publishing
2.
Thomas G and Finney R. Calculus and Analytical Geometry (6th Edition);
MAT 111: GEOMETRY AND ELEMENTARY APPLIED MATHEMATICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To enable students understand the movement of a partial theory of various forms of lines
and curves and the application of algebraic and geometry with calculus.
At the end of the course students should be to:
i)
Identify and find various shapes and equation on Cartesian and polar planes
for example equation of straight lines, circle, ellipse etc
ii)
Describe the movement of bodies via the universe
Course content
Plane analytic geometry, Polar coordinates and polar equations, Lines and
planes, Relative motion , connected bodies, Friction ,moments and couples,
Statics of particles and rigid bodies, centre of gravity , frame works
Mode of delivery
writing boards, writing materials, projectors, handouts etc.
196
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1.
Albert E. Church (2007); Elements of Analytical Geometry, Kessinger
Publishing
2.
Thomas G and Finney R. Calculus and Analytical Geometry (6 th Edition);
Wesley
1. Swikowsky F.W (1975); Calculus with Analysis geometry; Masschuset Prinde
2. Vaebrg Dale (1992); Calculus with Analytic Geometry (4th Edition); Prentice Hall
COM 110:
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND COMPUTING

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to computer systems
At the end of the course the students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of
the basic computer hardware and software.
Course Content
Introduction to computers; definition, History, computer hardware ,Input devices, output
devices, storage devices types (primary & secondary), capacity, CPU organization,
Computer Software:- system software : Introduction to operating systems, Utility
programs, Editors, Compilers, etc. Windows/ MS-DOS Introduction, Application
software: Packages, word processing, PowerPoint, spreadsheet (Instructor to give
practical exercises on the mentioned packages) programming languages: Low- Level, &
High level languages. File organization methods.
Mode of delivery
197

Course Assessment:

the total mark

(iv) French C. S. (2002). Computer Science. W. M. Print Ltd.
(v)
Onunga J. (1999): Introduction to Micro-computers and Programming:
Information Systems Academy.
(vi) Szymanski R. A., Szymanski D. P., and Pulschen D. M. (1994): Computers and
COM 111:
HOURS
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
3 CREDIT
Purpose
To introduce the learners to the most commonly used modern computer application
software
At the end of the course the student is expected to understand and to use the features of:
(1)
Modern word processing software to create and control the layout t of
documents such as essays, reports, theses, letters and CVs.
(2)
Spreadsheets software to organize numerical data, perform calculations on the
data and present the data graphically.
(3)
Database software to design a database to find particular groups of data and
design reports to present selected data in meaningful ways.
198
Course content
The course is designed to cover Ms Word, Ms Excel, Ms Access and Ms
PowerPoint as the major application software.
The course entails manipulation of text that involves keyboarding, editing,
formatting, saving and printing the document e.g. letters, reports, books proposals,
articles etc.
Mode of delivery
The course shall be conducted by a combination of lectures, group/class discussions,
assignments, practical exercise and presentations.
Computers with ms office installed, writing boards, writing materials, and projector.
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment: 40 % where 10 % shall be continuous assessment tests,

10 % shall be assignments, and 20 % shall be labs.

1. http://www.bookboon.com Ms office manuals
4.
5.
A Balanced Introduction to Computer Science, David Reed, Prentice
Hall. 2004
6.
Introduction to computers and windows by N. A. Saleemi and Ephraim
Waruhiu, N. A. Saleemi publishers, Nairobi, 2003. Computer Studies, by
Dr. Onunga.

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to geometry and elementary applied mathematics
199

At the end of the course the student is expected to
Define Plane analytic geometry

Understand Lines and planes
Understand Statics of particles and rigid bodies
Course Content
Plane analytic geometry; Polar coordinates and polar equations. Vectors in two and three
dimensions; Lines and planes; Motion in a straight line; Relative motion connected
bodies; Friction; Moments and Couples; Statics of particles and rigid bodies; Centre of
Gravity; Frame works
Mode of delivery
ASSESMENT
IRD 100: COMMUNICATION SKILLS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Study skills: planning work, organizing and budgeting time resources, filling, critical
thinking; Library skills: understanding library congress classification, utilizing library and
other education resources, collecting and summarizing information, note- taking, notemaking; Listening skills: active listening, predicting lecture structure, understanding
instructions; Reading skills: skimming, scanning, inference and prediction, critical
reading, discipline- specific, reading skills, Interpretations of non- linear text:
constructing and using statistical tables, indices, maps, graphs, Examination skills:
preparing for exams, understanding exams rubrics, writing exams
Teaching Methods
1. Lecture. Oral Presentation generally incorporating additional activities. e.g Writing on
a chalk board, exercises, class questions and discussion or Student presentation
INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT:
and projector.
200
ASSESSMENT
IRD 102:
COMMUNICATION SKILLS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Writing processes: thinking critically/selectively, selecting relevant details, organizing
relevant details logically, writing reports and essays in appropriate academic register,
writing and expanding information: notes, tables, figures, graphs and technical diagrams,
paraphrasing non- linear texts; streamlining writing: avoiding ambiguities, fallacies,
irrationalities, providing supporting evidence, drafting and editing various types of
descriptive, narrative, argumentative, expository essays, quoting, citing, referencing, footnoting, writing bibliographies; speaking skills: effective speaking, public address, the art
of persuasion, conducting interviews, conducting meeting and writing minutes,
participating in group discussions and tutorials, non-verbal communication cues,
presenting papers/reports in tutorials/seminars, seeking clarification, giving and justifying
opinions, agreeing and disagreeing. Research skills: understanding research, types of
research, identifying potential research areas, methods of research, research process.
Teaching Methods
INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT: Include course notes, black and white
board, chalk, white-board marker, duster, computer and projector.
ASSESMENT
IRD 103:
DEVELOPMENT CONCEPT AND APPLICATIONS

3 CREDIT HOURS
The basic concept of development: economic conception, political conception, social
conception, cultural and environmental conception; Objectives of developments: theories
of Development: classical, neo-classical and current theories, Relationship between socioeconomic development, modernization and economic growth, Analysis of contemporary
development in Africa; Philosophical and organizational strategies for development;
Agent of development, management of development recourses.
Teaching Methods
201

ASSESMENT
IRD 104:
QUANTITATIVE SKILLS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Record keeping: ledger, income statement, balance sheet, assets and liabilities, analysis of
simple financial statements: Interest, discounts and commissions; Budgeting: personal
simple business budgets, financial projections; simple investment analysis: cost of capital,
working capital, capital expenditure decision, return of capital invested; Public account:
Revenue and expenditure, balance of payments, balance of Trade, Gross National Project
(GNP), Gross Domestic Project (GDP); Index number: simple determinations and their
uses, concepts of inflation; Taxation: purpose, principal types and calculation of personal
income rates, Value Added Tax (VAT); Stock exchange: stocks, shares, bonds, stock
market ratios, share evaluation; Demography: birth and death rates. Growth rate,
dependency ratio, population trend and projections
Teaching Methods
ASSESMENT
YEAR 11
STA 212: MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To inculcate the principles of statistics for bivariate distribution.
At the end of the course students should be able to handle problems involving Bivariate
probability distributions of a discrete or a continuous random variable
202
Course content
Bivariate probability distributions: discrete and continuous, probability mass function
and density. Bivariate Distribution functions. Joint Marginal and Conditional Distribution.
Stochastic independence. Bivariate Expectation, Bivariate Moment and moment
generating functions and variance. Moment generating functions and transformation of
variable technique for Bivariate distribution. Independence of sample mean and variance
of normal distribution. Regression and Correlation Coefficients for Bivariate Data
Prerequisites:
Introduction to Probability and Statistics I
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Douglas C. Montgomery, George C. Runger. Applied Statistics and Probability for
Engineers. 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2003.
Wiley, 1982
STA 213: SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC STATISTICS
Purpose
To introduce the students to social and economic statistics
Understand product and its measurement
Define index numbers
203
3 CREDIT HOURS
Understand national accounts and their evaluations

Understand financial statistics
Course content
Gross domestic product and its measurement. Index numbers, retail and consumer price
indices, balance of payments and trade Statistics. National accounts and their evaluation.
Financial statistics, credits, Transfers and general income statistics. National development
indicators and economic growth evaluation
Teaching Methods
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Wiley, 1982
STA 214 OPERATIONS RESEARCH I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Introduce to the students the principles of operations research and its applications
At the end of the course students should be able to formulate linear programming
problems and solve linear programming problems applying various techniques.
204
Course content
Formulation of linear optimization models. Convex analysis in
( n-Dimensional
Shape). Linear programming. Formulation and graphical solution. Simplex Method.
Duality and its Economic interpretation. Classical transportation problems and extensions
Prerequisites:
Linear Algebra
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Kanti S, P K Gupta & M Mohan (2007). Opreations Research. Sultan Chand & Sons.
1. G. B. Dantzig, Linear Programming and Extensions, (1983) Princeton University
Press.
2. David Gale, The Theory of Linear Economic Models, (1960) McGraw-Hill.
3. Samuel Karlin, Mathematical Methods and Theory in Games, Programming and
Economics, vol. 1, (1959) Addison-Wesley.
4. James K. Strayer, Linear Programming and Applications, (1989) Springer-Verlag.
5. Nita H, Ravi M & Hardik S Opreations Research
6. Bazaraa, M.S., J.J. Jarvis, and H.D. Sherali. Linear Programming and Network
Flows. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1990.
7. McCarl, B.A. "Degeneracy, Duality and Shadow Prices in Linear Programming".
Canadian Journal of Agricultural Economics. 25,1(1977):70-73.
STA 215:
INTRODUCTION TO APPLIED STATISTICS 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Introduce to the students applied statistics
Understand estimation and hypothesis testing
Understand measurement issues
205
Course content
An introduction to estimation and hypothesis testing in applied Statistics, especially the
medical sciences. Measurement issues, measures of central tendency and dispersion,
probability, discrete probability distributions (binomial and Poisson), continuous
probability distributions (normal, t, chi- square, and F), and one- and two- sample
inference, power and sample size calculations, introduction to nonparametric methods,
one- way Analysis of Variance and multiple comparisons
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Wiley, 1982
STA 216:
MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Introduce to the students advance concepts in mathematical stsistics
Understand multivariate distributions theory
Define chebychevs inequality
Course content
Order Statistics; multivariate distributions theory, marginal and conditional distributions;
Transfer motions of random variables; use of generating; x2 distribution; Distribution of
the sum and ratio of two independent x2 random variate, Student t- distribution for
206
comparison of Two sample means; F- distribution; Distributions of linear and quadratic

functions of Normal variates; Characteristic functions; Chebychevs inequality
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Douglas C. Montgomery, George C. Runger. Applied Statistics and Probability for
Engineers. 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2003.
Wiley, 1982
STA 217 PRINCIPLES OF STATISTICAL INFERENCE I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Introduce to students the principles of statistical inference based on small and large
samples
At the end of this course the students should be able to handle problems involving;
sampling distribution, perform statistical test Probability distributions, , Estimation
Theory, and statistical inference.
Course content
Goals of Statistical investigation and decision problems. Role of sampling distributions in
statistical inference. Random samples and use of random tables. Point and interval
estimates. Inference on population means variance and proportions. Single sample and
two sample tests. Inference based on linear regression and correlation analysis. Analysis
of variance concepts. Categorical data analysis and basic non-parametric tests.
Prerequisites:
207
1. Calculus I
2. Probability and Statistics I,
3. Mathematical Statistics
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. R I Levin & D S Rubin. Statistics for Management 7th ed. Prentice Hall, New
Jersey, 2007.
2. Mik Winsniewski. Quantitative Methods for Decision Makers. 4th E.d. Printice
Hall 2006
Wiley, 1982
STA 218:
INTRODUCTION TO TIME SERIES ANALYSIS 3 CREDIT UNIT
Purpose
Introduce to students time series analysis
At the end of this course the students should be able to:
Define time series analysis
Use simple descriptive methods of analysis
Understand trend and seasonal effects estimation
208
Course content
Objectives of time series analysis. Simple descriptive methods of analysis. Time series
models; Autoregressive (AR), Moving Average (ARMA) models. Time and spectral
domain. Trend and seasonal effects estimation. Indicators, forecasting.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

STA 219:
INTRODUCTION TO COUNT DATA
Purpose
Introduce to students count data
Define categorical response data
Understand probability structure
Understand contingency Tables
3 CREDIT UNIT
Course content
Introduction: Categorical response Data, Sampling models, Inference for a proportion
Two- Way Contingency Tables: Probability Structure for contingency tables, Comparing
proportions in Two- by Two Tables, The odds Ratio, Chi- squared Tests of Independence,
Testing Independence for ordinal Data, Exact Inference for small Samples. Three- Way
Contingency Tables; Partial Association, Cochran- Mantel- Haenszel Methods
Mode of delivery
209

Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Bazaraa, M.S., J.J. Jarvis, and H.D. Sherali. Linear Programming and Network Flows.
New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1990.
2. McCarl, B.A. "Degeneracy, Duality and Shadow Prices in Linear Programming".
Canadian Journal of Agricultural Economics. 25,1(1977):70-73.
MAT 210:
CALCULUS
Purpose
Introduce to students count calculus
Define Taylors theorem
understand functions
Course content
Mean- Value Theorem of differential Calculus; Taylors theorem; Integration; Methods of
integration; Mean- Value Theorem of integral calculus; Functions of several variables;
Partial differentiation ; Multiple integrals
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

210
Thomas, George B., Maurice D. Weir, Joel Hass, Frank R. Giordano (2008), "Calculus",
11th ed., Addison-Wesley
1. Latorre, Donald R.; Kenelly, John W.; Reed, Iris B.; Biggers, Sherry
(2007), Calculus Concepts: An Applied Approach to the Mathematics of Change,
Cengage Learning, p. 2, ISBN 0-618-78981-2,
2. Zill, Dennis G.; Wright, Scott; Wright, Warren S. (2009). Calculus: Early
Transcendentals (3 ed.). Jones & Bartlett Learning. p. xxvii. ISBN 0-7637-59953.,
MAT 212:
LINEAR ALGEBRA I
Purpose
Introduce to students linear algebra
Define R3 as a vector space over R
Understand Planes and lines
Define Spanning sets
3 CREDIT UNIT
Course content
Real number field- axioms (possibly excluding the least upper bound axiom); Vectors in
Two and three- dimensional real space; R3 as a vector space over R; Introduction to real
vector spaces and subspaces: Planes and lines; Notion of linear dependence and
independence, especially as seen in R2 AND R3; Spanning sets, linear transformations and
their matrices (using mainly the standard bases); Kernel and image; matrix addition,
multiplication by scalars; Linear equations and matrices, row- echelon form and its
application to linear equations, rank and inverse. Determinants
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Bretscher, Otto (June 28, 2004), Linear Algebra with Applications (3rd ed.), Prentice
Hall, ISBN 978-0-13-145334-0
211

1. Friedberg, Stephen H.; Insel, Arnold J.; Spence, Lawrence E. (November 11,
2002), Linear Algebra (4th ed.), Prentice Hall, ISBN 978-0-13-008451-4
2. Axler, Sheldon (February 26, 2004), Linear Algebra Done Right (2nd ed.),
Springer, ISBN 978-0-387-98258-8
3. Gelfand, I. M. (1989), Lectures on Linear Algebra, Dover
Publications, ISBN 978-0-486-66082-0
4. Poole, David (2010), Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction (3rd ed.), Cengage
Brooks/Cole, ISBN 978-0-538-73545-2
5. Ricardo, Henry (2010), A Modern Introduction To Linear Algebra (1st ed.), CRC
Press, ISBN 978-1-4398-0040-9
6. Strang, Gilbert (July 19, 2005), Linear Algebra and Its Applications (4th ed.),
Brooks Cole, ISBN 978-0-03-010567-8
MAT 213:
LINEAR ALGEBRA II
Purpose
Introduce to students advance concepts in linear algebra
Define vector space over R
Understand Eigen values and Eigen vectors
Define Cayley-Hamilton theorem
3 CREDIT UNIT
Course content
Vector spaces over R; Linear transformations and matrices, change of basis,
Determinants; Eigen values and Eigen vectors, diagonalization; orthogonal matrices and
isometrics; polynomial; Cayley-Hamilton theorem
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Axler, Sheldon (February 26, 2004), Linear Algebra Done Right (2nd ed.),
Springer, ISBN 978-0-387-98258-8
212

1. Friedberg, Stephen H.; Insel, Arnold J.; Spence, Lawrence E. (November 11,
2002), Linear Algebra (4th ed.), Prentice Hall, ISBN 978-0-13-008451-4
2. Gelfand, I. M. (1989), Lectures on Linear Algebra, Dover
Publications, ISBN 978-0-486-66082-0
3. Poole, David (2010), Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction (3rd ed.), Cengage
Brooks/Cole, ISBN 978-0-538-73545-2
4. Ricardo, Henry (2010), A Modern Introduction To Linear Algebra (1st ed.), CRC
Press, ISBN 978-1-4398-0040-9
5. Strang, Gilbert (July 19, 2005), Linear Algebra and Its Applications (4th ed.),
Brooks Cole, ISBN 978-0-03-010567-8
MAT 216:
REAL ANALYSIS
Purpose
Introduce to students real analysis
3 CREDIT HOURS

Define real analysis
Understand basic set theory finite
Understand numerical sequence series
Course content
Real number system, completeness axiom; Extended real number system; Basic set theory
finite: countable and uncountable sets; Cardinal numbers; Elements of point- set topology
in metric spaces; continuity and uniform continuity; Numerical sequence series
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Abbott, Stephen (2001). Understanding Analysis. Undergradutate Texts in
Mathematics. New York: Springer-Verlag. ISBN 0-387-95060-5.
213
1. Aliprantis, Charalambos D; Burkinshaw, Owen (1998). Principles of real

analysis (Third ed.). Academic. ISBN 0-12-050257-7.
2. Browder, Andrew (1996). Mathematical Analysis: An Introduction. Undergraduate
Texts in Mathematics. New York: Springer-Verlag. ISBN 0-387-94614-4.
3. Bartle, Robert G. and Sherbert, Donald R. (2000). Introduction to Real Analysis (3
ed.). New York: John Wiley and Sons. ISBN 0-471-32148-6.
COM 211:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on the software part of the computer system. It provides an
in depth study on the use of assemblers, compilers and interpreters.
At the end of the course the student should be able to:
Identify hardware and software interface of a system software

Explain the use of assemblers, compilers, loaders and linkers.
Interpret user-level view of operating systems.
Course content
Hardware-software interface, system kernel, system services, system evolution.
Assemblers, compilers, linkers and loaders. System component interfaces. User level
view of operating systems. Assembly language programming.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
214

1. Onunga, John.Introduction to micro-computers and programming.
(1999).Information Systems Academy.
4. Mandell, Steven, L. (1998). Computers and Information Processing. Cincinnati:
South-Western Publishing Company ISBN 0538682760
COM 201: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS AND PROGRAMMING METHODS

Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on the software part of the computer system. It provides an
in depth into programming methods.
Define operating systems

Understand structured programming
Course content
Computer organization, information storage, Problems that computers can solve,
Mainframe and Micro computers, Operating systems, Compiler systems and utilities.
Ordinary and floating- point representation of numbers, Bits, Bytes, Words Character
codes. Structured programming using high level languages such as Pascal and Fortran C,
Program structure: Logical expressions and operations, Mathematical expressions,
Control structures; Functions, Networking
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

215
1.
1.
Onunga J. (1999): Introduction to Micro-computers and Programming:
Information Systems Academy.
2.
Szymanski R. A., Szymanski D. P., and Pulschen D. M. (1994): Computers and
IRD 200:
STATE, SOCIETY AND DEVELOPMENT
Nation, society, state and government: foundation of a nation, state and government; The
concept, objectives and practice of nationalism: classification of state systems, social
stratification and its impact on resources distribution, problems of power, influence,
Foreign aid and development; External trade as a factor or in development
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
YEAR III
216
STA 315:
MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS III
Purpose
The course introduces students to advance concepts in mathematics
Define vectors
Understand covariance matrix and its properties
Understand multinomial distribution
Course content
Random and mean vectors; Covariance matrix and its properties. Linear combination of
random variables; Definition of non- singular multivariate Normal probability density
function; marginal and conditional distributions of subsets. Multinomial distribution.
Distributions of linear functions of a random vector and of quadratic forms. Probability
generating functions of common distributions. Uniqueness theorem. The weak law of large
numbers. Convergence and limit theorems
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

I Miller & M Miller. John E Freuds. Mathematical Statistics with Application. 7th ed.
Pearsons Education, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
Wiley, 1982
STA 316 APPLIED REGRESSION ANALYSIS I
Purpose
217
3 CREDIT HOURS
Introduce to learners the principles and methods of regression analysis and applications in
the field
At the end of this course the students should be able to investigate linear relationship
between variables using correlation and regression analysis
Course content
Simple linear regression: Least squares formulation and, tests of hypotheses on slope and
intercept. Multiple linear regression: model description and assumptions, general linear
model, least squares estimators and their properties, and hypothesis testing in multiple linear
regression. Matrix approach to linear regression. Multiple regression applied to analysis of
variance problems; one way classification two way classifications. Fixed and random effect.
Prerequisites:
Mathematical Statistics I & II
Principles of statistical inference
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Kutner MH, Nachtsheim C J, Neter J. Applied Linear Regression Models.4th E.d. McGraw
Hill. 2004
1. N R Draper, H Smith. Applied regression analysis. New York: Wiley. 1998
2. S Chatterjee, B Price. Regression analysis by example. New York: Wiley. 1999
3. Graybill F A. Regression analysis: Concepts and Applications. Belmont Califonia.
Duxbury Press.1994
STA 317:
THEORY OF ESTIMATION
Purpose
Introduce to learners the theory of estimation
Define MLE
218
Understand Unbiased, Mean square error, consistency, efficiency and Uniformly

Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimate
Understand interval estimation
Course content
Methods of estimation; Maximum Likelihood Method (MLE), method of moments, x2
method, minimum distance and least significant estimation criteria; Unbiased, Mean square
error, consistency, efficiency and Uniformly Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimate
(UMVUE). Sufficiency and completeness. Bayesian estimation. Interval estimation
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Thomas Kailath, Ali H. Sayed, and Babak Hassibi, Linear Estimation, PrenticeHall, NJ, 2000, ISBN 978-0-13-022464-4.
1. Johnson, Roger (1994), "Estimating the Size of a Population", Teaching
Statistics
2. Johnson, Roger (2006), "Estimating the Size of a Population"
STA 318:
COMPUTING METHODS AND DATA ANALYSIS
Purpose
Introduce students to computing methods and data analysis
Use SPSS
Understand data management; methods of data collection
Understand matrix operations
Course content
Introduction to some statistical computer packages for scientist (SPSS), S- PLUS, Statistical
Application Software (SAS), Miritals, Generalized Statistical Package (GENSTAT e.t.c.).
Data management; methods of data collection. Descriptive statistics, t- test. Categorical data
analysis. Generating random observations. Matrix operations. LP solution- simplex method.
Graphical data analysis. Report writing
Mode of delivery
219
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Wiley, 1982
STA 319:
SAMPLING THEORY AND METHODS I
Purpose
Introduce students to computing methods and data analysis
Understand census and surveys
Define surveys
Understand sampling
Course content
Census and surveys; General principles of Sample surveys. Types of Serveys; sampling
unit, pilot surveys; use of random numbers in drawing samples; collection, tabulation of
data and preparations of reports; sampling techniques: simple random sampling for
proportions; stratified random sampling; systematic sampling. Use of auxiliary variables for
increased precision
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. Robert Groves, et alia. Survey methodology (2010) Second edition of the (2004) first
edition ISBN 0-471-48348-6.
220

1. David S. Moore and George P. McCabe (February 2005). "Introduction to the
practice of statistics" (5th edition). W.H. Freeman & Company. ISBN 0-7167-6282X.
2. Freedman, David; Pisani, Robert; Purves, Roger (2007). Statistics (4th ed.). New
York: Norton. ISBN 0-393-92972-8.
STA 320 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS I
Purpose
Guide students in planning and design of experiments
3 CREDIT HOURS

At the end of this course the students should be able to plan, design and investigate
experimental procedure in a statistically design experimental analysis
Course content
Construction and analysis of common designs in research. Completely randomized design
(CRD). Complete Randomized Block Design (CRBD). Latin Square designs. Factorial
experiments. Split plot designs. Means separations. Duncan multiple range test (DMRT) and
Least significance difference (LSD). Analysis of covariance.
Prerequisites:
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Dean Angela & Voss Daniel. Design and Analysis of Experiments. Springer: Wiley. 1998
1. Kuehl, R O. Statistical Principles of Research Design and Analysis. Belmont,
California. 1994.
221
STA 321:
TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS
Purpose
Introduce students to testing of hypothesis
Define hypothesis testing
Understand Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test
Course content
Concept of Statistical hypothesis and Statistical test. Most Powerful Tests (MPT) and
uniformly Most Powerful tests (UMPT). Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test (GLRT) and
sequential tests. Properties of tests. Chi- square tests
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
1. Levine, Marvin (1975). A Cognitive Theory of Learning: Research on Hypothesis
Testing. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
1. Schick, Theodore; Vaughn, Lewis (2002). How to think about weird things: critical
thinking for a New Age. Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education. ISBN 0-76742048-9.
2. Trabasso, Tom; Bower, Gordon H. (1968). Attention in Learning: Theory and
Research. New York: John Wiley & Sons
STA 322:
APPLIED STATISTICAL INFERENCE
Purpose
Introduce students to applied statistical inference
Understand principles of statistics
Define hypothesis testing
Understand bayesian statistics
222
Course content
A mathematical development of the principles of statistics. Point and interval estimation,
hypothesis testing, asymptotic theory, Bayesian statistics, and decision theory from a unified
perspective. Application in Biology, Economics, medicine etc
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark
1. Levine, Marvin (1975). A Cognitive Theory of Learning: Research on Hypothesis
Testing. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
1. Schick, Theodore; Vaughn, Lewis (2002). How to think about weird things: critical
thinking for a New Age. Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education. ISBN 0-76742048-9.
2. Trabasso, Tom; Bower, Gordon H. (1968). Attention in Learning: Theory and
Research. New York: John Wiley & Sons
STA 323:
SURVEY RESEARCH METHODS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners on research methodologies in information
management.
Describe the concept of research

Distinguish between basic research and applied research
Choose a research topic and state aim and specific objectives for the topic
Conduct literature review for a selected topic
Present and analyze research data
Report research findings
Course content
Survey designs and estimation techniques used in simple surveys: simple random sampling,
stratification, cluster sampling, double sampling, post- stratification, ratio estimation.
Opinion polls, market surveys. Design of questionnaires and interview schedules. Methods
of research for qualitative studies. Non- response problems and measurements errors will
also be discussed
Mode of delivery
223

Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


2. John W. Creswell (2002). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed
Methods Approaches (2nd Ed). Sage Publications, Inc. ISBN: 0761924426
4. Paul D. Leedy and Jeanne Ellis Ormrod (2004). Practical Research: Planning
5. James E. Ford (2000). Teaching the Research Paper: From Theory to
Practice, From Research to Writing Publisher. The Scarecrow Press, Inc.
ISBN: 0810837773
6. Natalie L. Sproull (2003). Handbook of Research Methods: A Guide for
STA 324:
INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to mathematical modeling
Understand methods of modeling

Define stochastic models
Course content
Models and modeling. Methods of modeling, modeling using data and random numbers,
simulations, simulation packages and languages, models based on first and second order
differential equations, stochastic models
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:

224

1.
Gershenfeld, N. (1998) The Nature of Mathematical Modeling, Cambridge

University Press ISBN 0-521-57095-6 .

1. Bender, E.A. [ 1978 ] ( 2000 ). An Introduction to Mathematical Modeling, New
York : Dover. ISBN 0-486-41180-X
2.
Korotayev A., Malkov A., Khaltourina D. (2006). Introduction to Social

Macrodynamics: Compact Macromodels of the World System Growth.
Moscow : Editorial URSS ISBN 5-484-00414-4 .
STA 325:
ECONOMETRIC MODELS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to econometric models
Define econometric models

Understand GLM
Understand extensions of the GLM
Course content
Nature of econometrics, the General Linear Model (GLM), extensions of the GLM: dummy
variables, seasonal adjustment and covariance analysis; multicollinearity. Generalized least
squares, heteroscedastisity, autocorrelation in linear models
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1.
Granger, Clive (1991). Modelling Economic Series: Readings in Econometric

Methodology. Oxford University Press. ISBN 978-0-19-828736-0.

1. Davidson, Russell; James G. MacKinnon (1993). Estimation and Inference in
Econometrics. Oxford University Press. ISBN 978-0-19-506011-9.
225
2.
Adrian, Pagan; Aman Ullah (1999). Nonparametric Econometrics. Cambridge

University Press. ISBN 978-0-521-58611-5.
STA 326:
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL METHODS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to statistical quality control methods
Define quality control charts

Understand sampling
Course content
Theoretical basis for quality control charts. Quality control: Variation, chance causes,
Assignable causes, Process control, Product control Control charts: Control charts for
variables, Control charts for attributes, X, R, P and C charts. Cusum charts, Sampling plans:
Single sampling plan, Double sampling plan, Tolerance limits
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Shewhart, W A (1939) Statistical Method from the Viewpoint of Quality
Control ISBN 0-486-65232-7
1. Deming, W E (1982) Out of the Crisis: Quality, Productivity and Competitive
Position ISBN 0-521-30553-5
2. Oakland, J (2002) Statistical Process Control ISBN 0-7506-5766-9
STA 327:
OPERATIONS RESEARCH II
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to introduce learners to advance concepts in operation research
Define Optimality and degeneracy

Understand Critical Path methods and PERT method
226
Course content
Sensitivity analysis and parametric programming, Optimality and degeneracy, Rules for
basic feasible solution, balanced and unbalanced transportation problems, assignment
problem, Goal programming and its applications. Critical Path methods and PERT method.
Maximal flow algorithm, Maximal flow and minimum cut theorem, shortest path problem,
Dijkstra, Floods and Fullersion algorithms, network optimization, Dynamic and integer
programming
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Course Assessment:


1. Frederick S. Hillier & Gerald J. Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research,
McGraw-Hill: Boston MA; 8th. (International) Edition, 2005
1. Gerald E. Thompson (1982). Management Science: An Introduction to Modern
Quantitative Analysis and Decision Making. New York : McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co.
2. Saul I. Gass & Arjang A. Assad (2005). An Annotated Timeline of Operations
Research: An Informal History. New York : Kluwer Academic Publishers.
STA 328 APPLIED REGRESSION ANALYSIS I I
HOURS
CREDIT
Purpose
To introduce to learners the art of polynomial regression and other forms of regression
analysis
At the end of this course the students should be able to investigate non-linear relationship
between variables, apply simple logistic and Poisson regression models
Course content
Polynomial regression models: One predictor, Second order; one predictor, Third order one
predictor and higher order, Two and three predictor second order. Implementation of
polynomial regression models. Logistic regression models. Models with binary response
227
variables. Simple Logistic regression function, inference and Diagnostics. Poisson

regression; Model development and inferences.
Prerequisites:
Applied regression analysis I
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

Graybill F A. Regression analysis: Concepts and Applications. Belmont Califonia. Duxbury
Press.1994
1. N R Draper, H Smith. Applied regression analysis. New York: Wiley. 1998
2. S Chatterjee, B Price. Regression analysis by example. New York: Wiley. 1999
3. Kutner MH, Nachtsheim C J, Neter J. Applied Linear Regression Models.4th E.d.
McGraw Hill. 2004
228
STA 350:
INDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT
Purpose
The objective of the course is to provide a student with exposure to actual practices and
processes in the software industry whose operations are relevant to the programme of study.
Describe the process of problem identification and solution of software systems in

the industry.
Describe the maintenance of equipment and software he/she is exposed to in the

industry.
Describe the business processes, including responsibilities of different cadres, for

the activities he / she is involved in a plant.
Course content
The three-month Industrial Attachment aims to extend the knowledge gained throughout the
academic course, and to develop skills needed to work in an industrial environment. The
student should develop the social, technical and communication skills needed to work
effectively in a
Course Assessment:
Assessment will be based on a written industrial attachment report, student logbook, and
recommendation from the supervisor.
COM 318E: DATABASE SYSTEMS
HOURS
CREDIT
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to the design and implementation of database systems
Review of the essential principles that guide the design, implementation, and
management of systems capable of managing large amounts of data efficiently,
including Physical and Logical Database Architectures, integrity and security.
Tackles relational data models and the use of a query language.
Explores new directions in the field selected from topics such as object-oriented
databases, data warehousing, and data mining.
The secondary objective of the course is to learn how to research and review
advances in the field.
To explore new directions in the field.

229
Course content
Overview of database systems: managing data, file systems vs DBMS, Advantage of
DBMS, storing data in a DBMS, queries, transaction management, structure of a DBMS.
Database design: ER diagrams, entities, attributes, relationships, conceptual design.
Relational model: integrity constraints, querying relational data, logical database design,
views. SQL: queries, constraints and triggers. Security and authorization models.
Transactions, concurrency control, recovery protocols. Object-oriented and object-relational
databases. Data mining and data warehouse
Teaching Methodologies:
Computers, writing boards, writing materials, projectors etc.
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment: 40 % where 10 % shall be continuous assessment tests, 10

% shall be assignments, and 20 % shall be labs.

1. R. Ramakrishnan and J. Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2002, ISBN: 0-07-232206-3.
1. Elmasri, Ramez and Navathe, Shamkant B. Fundamentals of Database Systems. 5th
ed. Addison-Wesley, Reading MA, 2006.
2. Hector Garcia-Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Jennifer Widom. Database Systems:
The Complete Book Prentice Hall. 2002.
3. Michael Stonebraker and Joseph M. Hellerstein. Readings in Database Systems, 3rd
Edition 1998.
4. M. Kifer, A. Bernstein, and P.M. Lewis Database Systems, An application oriented
approach, second edition, Addison-Wesley, 2005, ISBN: 0-321-26845-8
MAT 312:
COMPLEX ANALYSIS I
The complex plane; limits continuity and differentiability of complex functions; Mapping
and integration; Cauchys Theorem and Cauchys integral formulae; Laurent and Taylors
series, singularities, residues, Cauchys residues theorem, poles
Teaching Methods
1. Lecture. Oral Presentation generally incorporating additional activities. e.g.
230

ASSESMENT
MAT 314:
ORDINARY DIFFERNTIAL EQUATIONS I
First order equation and applications, second order equations; Homogeneous equations with
constant coefficients; Equations with variable coefficients; Non- homogenous equations;
Undetermined coefficients; Variation of parameters; Differential operators and inverse
differential operators; Applications
Teaching Methods
ASSESMENT
MAT 317:
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS I
Number system; Introduction to errors; Lagrange interpolation; Interpolation based on finite
differences; Iterated interpolation; Numerical Differentiation; Extrapolation to the limit;
Numerical integration (Newton- Cotes- Gaussian Formulae); Solution of non- linear
equation (f(x)=0); Systems of non- linear equations (Gauss- Sidel) and Jacobi interation
only)
Teaching Methods
ASSESMENT
IRD 305:
ENTREPRENEURSHIP FOR SMALL BUSINESS
Definition of entrepreneurship: various schools of thought about entrepreneurship,
characteristics of entrepreneur, entrepreneurship for the graduate, small business plan,
setting a business in operation, Managing the business: finance supplies, production,
231
marketing and personal management; Cases studies of successful and unsuccessful

enterprises
Teaching Methods
ASSESMENT
YEAR IV
STA 418:
APPLIED TIME SERIES ANALYSIS
Purpose
Introduce to students applied time series analysis
Define stationary conditions
Understand spectral and harmonic
Course content
Stationary conditions, model identification and estimation. Spectral and harmonic analysis,
linear and non- linear time series models
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

232

STA 419:
INTRODUCTION TO MEASURE AND PROBABILITY
Purpose
Introduce to learners the concept of measure and probability
Define measure theory
Understand extension of measures
Understand modes of convergence theorems
Course content
Concepts of measure theory, Theory of integration with probabilistic and statistical
applications. Extension of measures, basic integration theorems. Conditional expectations
and conditional Probabilities. Modes of convergence theorems, law of large numbers,
central limit theorems, characteristics functions, weak convergences
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. An introduction to measure-theoretic probability by George G. Roussas 2004 ISBN
0-12-599022-7
1. course in mathematics for students of physics, Volume 2 by Paul Bamberg, Shlomo
Sternberg 1991 ISBN 0-521-40650-1 page 802
2. The concept of probability in statistical physics by Yair M. Guttmann 1999 ISBN 0521-62128-3
STA 420:
STATISTICAL DEMOGRAPHY
Purpose
Introduce to learners the concept of statistical demography
Define demographic
233
Understand statistical sampling to demographic surveys

Understand models of population growth
Course content
Sources of demographic data; demographic concepts and measures; applications of
principles of statistical sampling to demographic surveys; types of demographic sample
survey designs; Measurements of fertility, mortality and nuptiality; construction of life
tables; statistical properties of life table estimators; Models of population growth
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:

the total mark

1. hlenberg P.(Editor), (2009) International Handbook of the Demography of Aging,
New York: Springer-Verlag,
1. Preston, Samuel, Patrick Heuveline, and Michel Guillot. 2000. Demography:
Measuring and Modeling Population Processes. Blackwell Publishing.
2. Gavrilov L.A., Gavrilova N.S. 2010. Demographic Consequences of Defeating
Aging. Rejuvenation Research, 13(2-3): 329-334.
STA 421:
STATISTICAL COMPUTING
Purpose
The course aims at providing students with computing skills in statistics
Expected Learning outcomes
Having learnt the course students should be able to:
1. Use various statistical packages in solving problems
2. Be competent in the use of statistical software to perform statistical modeling tasks
Course content
The design of statistical software including special techniques for probability distributions.
Introductions to simulation, building and validation of stochastic simulation models useful
in computing, operations research, engineering and science. Methods of linear models and
multivariate analysis, and methods for non- linear models. Related design and estimation
problems. Variance reduction. The implementation and analysis of simulation results.
Application of computer simulation programs
Mode of delivery
234

and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
Statistical computing by Ronald Aaron Thisted , isbn=0412013711
Statistical Computing by William Jo Kennedy, James E. Gentle - 1980 , isbn=0824768981
Statistical Computing With R by Maria L. Rizzo 2008, isbn=1584885459
STA 422:
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENT II
Purpose
The course provides students with the experimental planning process and the ensuing
analysis of normally distributed data, emphasizing the practical considerations governing
the design of an experiment.
1. Use combinatorial methods in constructing various designs of experiments
2. Apply various techniques to perform fractional and factorial experiments
Course content
Combinatorial methods in the construction of designs; BIB and PBIB designs. Confounding
in 22 and 23 factorial experiments; complete and partial confounding. Fractional and
factorial experiments. Response surface designs, minimum aberration designs, robust
parameter designs
Mode of delivery
235

and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
Design and Analysis by Bernard Leupen 1997, isbn=9064502595
Statistical Consulting by Javier Cabrera, Andrew McDougall 2002, isbn=0387988637
The Statistical Consultant in Action by D. J. Hand, B. S. Everitt 2007, isbn=052104751X
STA 423:
BIOMETRY METHODS
Purpose
The course aims at introducing students to the science of identifying systems
1. Understand and apply measures of effectives, data collection and monitoring
2. Be able to perform experimental design for practical situations like randomized
clinical trials
Course content
Measures of effectiveness, sample size, randomization, data collection and monitoring.
Experimental designs for randomized clinical trial, sources of bias in clinical studies,
Informed consent and other ethical issues, logistics, interim monitoring procedures (group
sequential and Bayesian methods)
Mode of delivery
236

and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
Biometrics: Personal Identification in Networked Society by Anil K. Jain, Ruud M. Bolle,
Sharath Pankanti 1999, isbn=0792383451
1. Biostatistical Methods by Stephen W. Looney - 2001 , isbn=089603951X
2. Francis Galton: Pioneer of Heredity and Biometry by M. G. Bulmer - 2004 ,
isbn=0801881404
3. Multiple Comparisons, Selection, and Applications in Biometry: by Fred M. Hoppe,
Charles W. Dunnett - 1993 , isbn=0824788958
STA 424:
STOCHASTIC PROCESSES
Purpose
The course empowers students to perform analysis of time dependent processes
1. Apply Markov chains in classifying processes that recur
2. Use Markov chains in relevant engineering and business applications
Course content
Markov chains: classification, recurrence, transience, limit theory. Renewal theory, markov
processes, birth- death processes. Applications to queuing, branching, and other models in
science, engineering and business. Semi- markov processes
Mode of delivery
237

and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
Stochastic processes by Sheldon M. Ross - 1996
1. Stochastic Processes by Richard F. Bass 2011, isbn=110700800X
2. Stochastic Processes by Emanuel Parzen - 1987 , isbn=0898714419
3. Stochastic Processes by S. R. S. Varadhan 2007, isbn=0821840851
STA 425:
SAMPLING THEORY AND METHODS II
Purpose
The course aims at providing students with theories of sample surveys
1. perform ratio and regression estimates
2. Apply multistage analysis and designs
3. Perform survey analysis according to requirements by central bureau and Statistics
Course content
ratio and regression estimates. Probability proportional to sizes (PPS); Multistage designs;
multiphase designs. Sampling and non- sampling errors. Familiarization with various survey
programmes administered by Central Bureau of Statistics (CBS). Practical exercise
Mode of delivery
238

and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. Sampling Theory and Methods 2nd Edition by S. Sampath
Advanced Sampling Theory With Applications:
Sarjinder Singh
STA 426:
BAYESIAN INFERENCE AND DECISION ANALYSIS
Purpose
The course provides students with inference methods used to update the probability estimate
of a hypothesis as additional evidence is learnt.
1. infer prior and posterior information and distributions
2. Be able to use Bay's rule and perform confidence tests
Course content
Introduction to Bayesian inference, prior and posterior information and distributions, Bays
rule, Bays estimator, Decision rules, Risk and functions, Bayes Risk, minimal procedure.
Properties of Bayesian estimates, Bayesian test and confidence test.
Mode of delivery
239
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. Bayesian decision analysis: principles and practice by Jim Q Smith (2010)
2. An introduction to Bayesian inference and decision by Robert L. Winkler
3. Bayesian statistics 9 by Joseph M Bernado; M. J Bayani, James O Berger (2011)
STA 427:
SURVIVAL MODELS AND ANALYSIS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to introduce students to analysis of death in biological systems and
failure in mechanical systems
1. Predict the lifetime of both biological and mechanical systems
2. Estimate the reliability of a set of data
Course content
Lifetime distribution, hazards functions, competing-risks, proportional hazards
Censored data, accelerated-life models, Kaplan-meier estimator, stochastic models, renewal
processes, Bayesian methods for lifetime and reliability data analysis.
Martingales, Brownian motion.
Mode of delivery
240
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
Applied Survival Analysis: Regression Modeling of Time to Event Data in Probability and
Statistics by David W. Hosmer, Stanley Lemeshow, Susanne May
An Introduction to Survival Analysis Using Stata, Third Edition by
Mario Cleves, William Gould Roberto Gutierrez and Yulia Marchenko
STA 428
MATHEMATICAL APPLICATION IN FINANCE
Purpose
Aims at equipping students with computational skills required to perform financial
modeling.
Having finished the course the students should be able to:
1. Perform financial analysis to enable pricing and hedging
2. Apply relevant financial derivatives in real life
Course content
Introduction to financial analysis, mathematical techniques used to price and hedge
derivative securities in modern finance modeling, analysis and computations for financial
derivative products, including exotic options and swaps in all asset classes. Applications of
derivatives in practice
Mode of delivery
instructional material/equipment:
241
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. Financial statistics and Mathematical finance by Ansgar Steland (2012)
2. Mathematical control theory and Finance edited by Andrey Sarycher, Albert
Shiryaev (2008) ISBN 9783540695318
STA 429:
APPLIED MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS
Purpose
Aims at equipping students with skills required to analyze and observe more than one
statistical outcome at a time.
1. Design and analyze the techniques used to perform trade studies across multidimensional variables.
2. Design for capacity and analysis of alternatives to fulfill customer needs
3. Analyze concepts with respect to changing scenarios
Course content
Matrix algebra, random sampling, multivariate normal distributions, multivariate regression,
Multivariate analysis of Variance (MANOVA), Principal component analysis, factor
analysis, discriminant analysis. Applications using Statistical software, such as Statistical
Application Software (SAS), S- PLUS or Statistical Package for Social Scientists (SPSS),
will be utilized
Mode of delivery
242
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. An introduction to applied multivariate analysis with R by Brian Everet and Tosten
Hothon (2011) ISBN 978144199649-7
Applied multivariate analysis: Methods and Case studies by Neil H. Timm (2002)
ISBN 0387953477
STA 430:
NON- PARAMETRIC AND ROBUST METHODS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to equip students with techniques that do not rely on data not
belonging to any particular distribution.
1. Use statistical tools under nonrestrictive assumptions to establish applicable
distributions
2. Apply various tests and analyze contingency tables
Course content
Distribution free statistical procedures or methods valid under nonrestrictive assumptions:
basic tools; counting method; Order statistics, ranks; distribution free tests and associates
interval and point estimator; sing test; signed rank test; rank tests;
Mann-Whitney, Wilcoxon procedures; Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests; permutation methods;
methods for discrete data with zeros and ties; computer techniques and programmes;
discussions and comparison with parametric methods. Linear ranks tests. Analysis of
contingency tables. Robust estimation methods.
Teaching Methods
243
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. Nonparametric for dispersion by Wayne W Daniel 1979
2. Robust nonparametric statistical methods by Thomas P Hettman Sperger, Joseph W
Mckean (2011)
3. Advanced Robust nonparametric methods in efficiency analysis by Cinzia Daraio
and Leopold Simar (2007)
STA 431:
PRINCIPLES OF ACTURIAL SCIENCE
Purpose
Actuarial science enables students draw estimations for predicting the unexpected events in
insurance.
Having completed the course the students should be able to:
1. Assess risks involved in insurance industry
2. Calculate interest rates and amortization schedules
3. Estimate contingencies in life assurance
Course content
Basic principles of insurance and risks, Theory of interest and interest rates, compound
interest functions, nominal and effective interest, equations of value. Amortization
schedules and sinking funds; bonds and securities cash flows discounting methods of
investment appraisal, duration. Decremental rates and other indices, principles of life
contingencies in life assurance, values and premiums for annuities and assurances on one or
more lives.
Mode of delivery
244
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
4. Principles of actuarial science by Michael Sherris (2010) ISBN 0170188213
5. Actuarial Science and methodology by Hanji Shang and Shang Hanji (2006) ISBN
9812565051
STA 432:
STATISTICS FOR NATIONAL PLANNING
Purpose
The course aims at providing students with the statistical knowledge required for economic
planning in a country.
Expected Learning outcome
Having completed the course students are expected to:
i)
Understand the statistics as applied in education, health, agriculture, nutrition, labor
and infrastructure
ii)
Understand econometric models in data analysis
Course content
Statistics under the national statistical system, official statistics. Educational statistics,
Health statistics, Agricultural and nutrition statistics, Labor statistics. Infrastructure
assessment. Data sources and quality evolution statistics, Development determinants
associated with these statistics and econometric models in data analysis.
Mode of delivery
245
and projector.
Course Assessment:

the total mark
Staff performance
1. Understandable statistics: concepts and methods by Charles Henry Brace, Corrinne
Bellilo Iase

1. Town planning context, procedures, statistics for Hong Kong practice by Lawrence
Wai-chung Lai and Ki Fong. Hong Kong press 2000 ISBN 962209516X
246

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE: PHYSICS
1.0 Introduction
The Department of Physics, in accordance with the general objectives of the University offers
a programme of studies which it feels would satisfy the needs and aspirations of the society
from which its students are drawn. The programme is sufficiently flexible to permit and
encourage students to develop interest in relevant fields and specialist option topics which are
specifically oriented towards industrial applications and the overall pattern of employment
of physics graduates.
The degree program consists of four years with two semesters in each year. Written and in
some cases oral examination are given at the end of each semester. The first year is spent on
basic science courses. In the second year, the student starts to orient towards physical
sciences. The third and fourth years are devoted to an intensive study of theoretical and
experimental physics courses and allow for a certain amount of specialist option courses.
Laboratory practices throughout the study years, machine workshop practice and guided
research project is aimed at developing the graduates' practical skills. The programme
hopes to provide graduates not only with a specialized knowledge of the subject but also
a mind which has been trained and exposed to well established scientific and technological
procedures.
The Department also offers basic courses and service courses for science and
engineering oriented faculties.
With the ever-changing needs of the global economy, demands in science also changes. For
any technology to succeed, trained personnel is needed to sustain it through academic
rigour, partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Physics
programme is designed to respond to the dynamic demands of the world.
The department of Mathematics and Computer Science designed the Physics curriculum
with the flexibility to accommodate emerging challenges. Physics students at Narok
University combine theory with practice, gaining skills that produce results and improve
technology in a morally upright and ethical way. In class, students get the latest in both
247
theory and practical applications from dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are
complemented with hands-on laboratory experience.
In principle, Physics is a fundamental science from which other sciences are reduced down
from. For instance Chemistry can be thought of as applied Physics while Biology is applied
Chemistry. Science, technology and innovation has been identified as a central plank for
Kenya's development and a foundation for vision 2030. To drive the attainment of vision
2030, scientists would need to be trained, accordingly Physics as a fundamental science
would be crucial to the achievement of the outlined vision
The Physics program is designed to empower students with the mathematical, experimental
and Computational tools necessary in industry and allied fields such as medical and
environmental Physics, Biophysics, Renewable energy, Geophysics, Electronics and
Physics education. Also, students who complete the programme can pursue postgraduate
studies in a desired engineering discipline like computer science, electrical engineering,
mechanical and Civil engineering thus enhancing gaps that currently exist in the country
and the region.
The Physics programme is aimed at:
vii) Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of Physics and
acquisition of the necessary skills in order to use their knowledge in Physics in a
wide range of practical applications.
viii)
Developing creative thinking and the power of imagination to enable
graduates work in research in academia and industry for broader application.
ix) Accommodating their relevant fields in allied disciplines and to allow the graduates
of Physics to fit into an inter-disciplinary environment.
x) Relating the training of Science graduates to the employment opportunities within
the country.
xi) To equip students with a good understanding of the principles of Applied Physics,
xii) To produce Applied Physics graduates with the necessary skills for team work in an
industrial and scientific research environment.
e) Knowledge and understanding
The physics programme enables students develop competencies required to:
viii) Solve problems in Physics and offer relevant solutions using appropriate
mathematical tools.
ix) Understand physical phenomena and model their behaviour through analytical
and/or mathematical techniques.
x) Apply principles of operation of physical devices and instruments
xi) Know the environmental and social impact of a Physicists activities
xii) Understand business and management techniques relevant to a Physicist
248
f) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge

xi) Execute and critically analyze results of an investigation and make logical
conclusions.
xii) Use scientific principles in solutions of physical problems.
xiii)
Discuss various physics phenomena
xiv)
Analyze experimental data in Physics.
xv) Derive and analyze physical formulae
xvi)
Use computers in the treatment of physical results
xvii)
Prepare research proposals and write reports
The programme will be delivered mainly through face to face contact with students.
In situations of a distance approach of course delivery, students would be required to
have access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice.
v) Meet the minimum University admission criteria
vi) Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
CLUSTER A
CLUSTER B
BIOLOGY
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
GEOGRAPHY
OR MATHEMATICS
PHYSICS
GEOGRAPHY
The General University Examination Regulations and the special examination regulations set
by the school of Science shall apply. End of semester exams are written within 3-hour period.
The weighting for each course is as follows:
(a) Theory Courses
30%
70%
249

(c) Seminar Course (PHY 423E)
Continuous assessment based on verbal presentation of two seminars
and evaluation of the report 50%
20%
20%
60%
50%
(d) Workshop and Drawing (PHY 412)

Continuous assessment of Workshop exercises, Continuous assessment of Engineering
Drawing , Field trip and questionnaire development will be the mode of assessment of the
course
The grading system of courses and degree classification shall be the same as those contained
in the common rules and regulations for undergraduate examinations of 2010 of Narok
University found in section 5.3 .
undergraduate examination regulations of 2010 of Narok university.
external examiner.
To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Physics, a student shall satisfy all the
university requirements pertaining to the degree. Students shall take all the units offered in
the first, second, third and fourth year of study.
of the candidate. The duration of the oral presentation shall be limited to within 40 minutes.
After the oral presentation the board of examiners shall compile the scores and determine
the average score which shall be entered as the final mark in the project. The scoring shall
be split as shown below:
250

Oral examination
70%
30%

assessment. The latter may be taken from worked problem sheets, laboratory reports,
tutorial lessons, tests, quizzes, essays or small project exercises. However most of the
problem sheets supporting lectures will be formative as also may be some laboratory reports
and essays (particularly at the lower levels). Some of the lecture courses may be examined
primarily or completely by assignments, where the nature of the course is unsuitable for
assessment by examination,
251

YEAR I
Semester I
Course code Title
PHY
110 Basic Physics I
IRD
100 Communication Skills
IRD
101 Quantitative Skills
BOT
110 Basic Botany I
CHE
110 Basic Chemistry I
MAT
110 Basic Calculus I
ZOO
110 Basic Zoology I
TOTAL UNITS
Units
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
22
YEAR I Semester II
Course
PHY
IRD
IRD
BOT
CHE
MAT
ZOO
code
111
102
103
111
111
111
111
YEAR II
Course code
PHY
210
PHY
211
Title
Basic Physics II
National Development
Basic Botany II
Basic Chemistry II
Basic Zoology II
TOTAL UNITS
Semester I
Title
Electricity and magnetism
Vibration and Waves
252
Units
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
23
Units
4
3
MAT
MAT
MAT
CHE
CHE
IRD
210
212
214
210
211
200
Calculus
Linear Algebra I
Vector Analysis
Atomic Structure & Bonding
Basic Analytical Chemistry
State, society and development
TOTAL UNITS
253
3
3
3
3
3
3
24
YEAR II
Course
PHY
PHY
COM
MAT
MAT
CHE
CHE
Semester II
code
212
213
210
211
213
212
213
YEAR III
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
21
Semester I
Course
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
MAT
code
310
311
312
313
314
MAT
MAT
MAT
313
317
318
CHE
CHE
311
313
Title
Mathematical Physics
Solid State Physics 1
Optics
Electronics II
AND EITHER ANY TWO OF
Abstract Algebra
Numerical Analysis
Fluid Mechanics I
OR
Methods of Chemical Analysis
Surface and Colloid Chemistry
TOTAL UNITS
Semester II
YEAR III
Course
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
COM
Title
Modern Physics
Electronics I
Introduction to Computer science
Linear Algebra II
Introduction to Kinetics and Thermodynamics
TOTAL UNITS
code
314
315
316
317
310
Units
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
21
Title
Quantum Mechanics I
Electromagnetism
Introduction to Material Science
Classical mechanics
Computer Programming
254
Units
3
3
3
3
3
MAT
MAT
MAT
312
316
319
CHE
CHE
315
317
TOTAL UNITS
Semester I
YEAR IV
Course
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
code
410
411
412
413
414
code
415
416
417
3
3
3
3
3
21
Title
Quantum Mechanics II
Thermodynamics
Workshop & Drawing
Mathematical Physics II
Solid state Physics II
Units
3
3
3
3
3
TWO ELECTIVE COURSES

TOTAL UNITS
Semester II
YEAR IV
Course
PHY
PHY
PHY
AND EITHER ANY TWO OF

Complex analysis
Methods I
Advanced Calculus
OR
Instrumental Analysis
Electrochemistry
Title
Statistical mechanics
Atomic and Nuclear Physics
Research Project
6
21
Units
3
3
3
THREE ELECTIVE COURSES

TOTAL UNITS
9
21
YEAR IV ELECTIVE COURSES

YEAR IV SEMESTER I ELECTIVE COURSES
Course
PHY
PHY
code
420E
421E
Title
Renewable Sources of Energy
Digital Electronics
255
Units
3
3
PHY
PHY
PHY
MAT
MAT
422E
424E
425E
418
426
Applied Material Science and Polymer Physics

Measurement and Instrumentation
The Physics of Semiconductor Devices
P.D.E.
Methods II
3
3
3
3
3
YEAR IV SEMESTER II ELECTIVE COURSES

Course
code
Title
Units
PHY
426E
Microwaves
PHY
427E
Solar Energy Physics
PHY
428E
Geophysics
PHY
429E
Introduction to lasers
PHY
430E
Electronic circuits and Microprocessors
PHY
43 IE
Thermodynamics of Materials
PHY
432E
Vacuum Techniques
PHY
433 E
Computational Physics
PHY
434E
Fourier Optics
PHY
435E
Trouble Shooting digital Circuits
MAT
419
P.D.E.II
MAT
417
Fluid Mechanics II
256

YEAR ONE
PHY 110: BASIC PHYSICS 1
4 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the student to basic concepts in physics
i) Describe the various types of motion
ii) Explain the velocity of sound through media and
iii)Discuss expansion of matter and heat transfer mechanisms
Course content
Mechanics and Properties of Matter:
Vectors, Rectilinear motion. Newton's laws of motion and their applications. Composition and
resolution of forces. Uniform circular motion. Newton's law of gravitation. Gravitational
constant G and Acceleration due to gravity, g. Simple harmonic motion. Determination of g.
Conservation of energy and momentum. Flow of liquids. Viscosity. Surface tension. Elasticity;
elastic constants and their importance.
Thermal physics: Expansion of solids, liquids and gases. Scales of temperature, gas and
resistance thermometers. Perfect gas-absolute temperature. First law of thermodynamics,
specific heat capacities of gases at constant pressure and volume. Kinetic theory of gasesderivation of the relation for pressure. Mechanism of heat transfer; coefficient of thermal
conductivity. Black body, Stefan's law.
Sound: Equation of wave motion. Velocity of sound in solids and fluids. Waves on a string.
Relation between velocity and elasticity of the medium. Ultrasonics and their applications.
Practicals:
Measurements, error analysis, Determination of acceleration due to gravity by simple
pendulum & compound pendulum, Youngs Modulus and coefficient of static and dynamic
friction.
Lecturing, tutorial, class discussion, demonstrations
257
Chalkboard, handouts, overhead projectors, computers, Internet.
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Assignments, tests and experiments/ practicals and end of semester examinations.
Staff performance
Students response to questionnaires given at the end of the course, evaluation by Head
of Departments, informal feedback from class representatives, self-evaluation.
Textbooks and Journals for the Course:
1. Raymond A. Serway and J.W. Jewett (2006). Physics for scientists and Engineers 6 th edition.
Thomson.USA
2. Fredrick J.B, Eugene H. (1998). Theory and Problems in college Physics 9th edition.Schaums
series. NY. USA.
3. Kenya Journal of Science and Technology.
Textbooks and Journals for Further Reading:
1. Halliday, D., Resnik, R. and Walker, J. (2004). Fundamentals of Physics (extended). (6 th
Ed.) Singapore: Willey and Sons (Asia).
2. Nelkon and Parker. (1995). Advanced Level Physics. (7 th Ed.). Oxford: Heinemann
Muncaster R, A-Level Physics, (1993), Nelson Thornes
3. Physics Review A. General Physics. American Physical Society.
PHY 111: BASIC PHYSICS II
4 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the student to basic concepts in physics
i) Describe the behavior of R, L, and C on dc and ac currents
ii) Describe the working of nuclear reactor
iii) Describe applications of mirrors and lenses in optical instruments
iv) Explain the working of the CRO and X-Ray tube.
v) Describe applications of transistors in circuits
258
Course content
Electricity and magnetism: Properties of magnetic materials and their uses. Direct and
alternating current, behaviour of R.L and C (resistance, inductance and capacitance).
Measurement of R,L and C. Diode and rectification. Transistors: characteristics and
application. Working principle and application of the cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). Optics:
Review of mirrors and lenses. Detects in lenses. Different kinds of microscopes and telescopes.
Particle and wave theories. Phenomena of interference, diffraction and polarisation. Their
applications.
Modern physics: Bohr's theory and Heisenberg's quantum concept. Explanation of atomic
spectra, X-rays. Structure of the nucleus. Natural and artificial radioactivity and its applications.
Introduction to Nuclear fission, fusion and nuclear reactor.
Practicals:
Investigating conductors, the potentiometes, and measurements of potential difference,
resistance using a metre bridge, current Pd relationship, charge and discharge of a capacitor.
The cathode ray oscilloscope
Lecturing, tutorial, class discussion, demonstrations
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1. Halliday, D., Resnik, R. and Walker, J. (2004). Fundamentals of Physics (extended). (6 th
Ed.) Singapore: Willey and Sons (Asia).
2. Nelkon and Parker. (1995). Advanced Level Physics. (7th Ed.). Oxford: Heinemann.
3. Duncan, T. (1997). Electricity and Magnetism. (4th Ed.). John Murray.
4. Kenya Journal of Science and Technology.
1.
Duffin WJ, (2001), Electricity and Magnetism, WJ Duffin
259
2.
3.
4.
Edminister JA, (1996), Schaum's Outline of Electrical Circuits, McGraw-Hill

Journal of Applied Physics.
Proceeding of the Royal Society of London A: Mathematics and Physical Sciences.
YEAR TWO
PHY 210
ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
3 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
To provide understanding of electromagnetic phenomena in conductors and dielectrics and
thereby quantify the magnitudes of electric and magnetic fields associated with various coil
geometries as used in common electrical devices.
Having successfully completed the course, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge
and understanding of:
i) electric charge and current
ii) electric field and potential
iii) magnetic fields and associated calculations
iv) Current carrying loops
Course Content
Electric Charge and Current: Coulomb's law
Electric field: Electric dipole. Electric Field in Conductors and Dielectrics! Gauss's law for E,
Symmetric Charge Distribution
Electric potential: The Gradient of potential. Potential Difference, Divergence and Curl.
Capacitance: Electric energy, Forces and Torques, Combination of Capacitors. Dielectrics and
polarization:
Dipole moment. Permittivity, Electric Displacement, Boundary relationships and continuity.
Current and Circuits: Resistivity, Series and Parallel resistors, Kirchhoffs laws, Conductivity.
Magnetic field: Force between Current Elements; Properties of magnetic Fields, Bio-Savart law.
Static magnetic field of Steady Current. The Ampere, Current Carrying loop. Magnetic flux.
Torque, The Solenoid. Maxwell's 1st Curl Equation.
Mode of delivery
The course will be delivered mainly through lectures supported by tutorial sessions and
complemented with laboratory experiments. The lectures will include interactive elements in
260
which students are divided into smaller groups to apply simple principles in solving problems
to ensure their involvement and so gain understanding. Handouts will be provided so that
students can concentrate on the material of the lecture. Tutorial problems will be given out and
later solved and discussed in class for student's self assessment. Experiments and assignments
will require students to undertake some investigation on their own and to develop ideas and
apply them. They will also be required to write laboratory reports.
Laboratory space is needed for successful delivery of the course together with a computer
laboratory with relevant simulation software. Lectures should ideally be delivered using
projectors to enable illustration of concepts.
COURSE ASSESSMENT
Coursework (continuous assessment tests) which will normally contribute 30% of the
total mark
Staff performance
CORE READING MATERIAL FOR THE COURSE
Electricity and magnetism / MURUGESHAN, R. - 4 th. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company,
2002.
1. Electricity and magnetism / TEWARI, K.K. -- New Delhi: S Chand & Company,
2003. ISBN 81-219-0667-9.
2. Fundamentals of physics / HALLIDAY, David. -- 4 th. -- New York: John Wiley,
1993. ISBN 0-471-52461-1.
PHY 211: WAVES AND VIBRATIONS
5 CREDIT HOUR
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an appreciation and understanding for the
importance and applications of oscillations and waves in physics. This is especially true as
oscillations are used in the description of periodic phenomena and waves are used to describe
periodic phenomena in continuous media and the transmission of energy through media. The
language and concepts used will form the essence of description in areas such as electromagnetic
wave theory and even in quantum physics.
261
EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE COURSE

The aims above will be met by achieving the following objectives, i.e., by the end of this course
you should be able to:
i)
Define and distinguish between the terms oscillations and waves.
ii)
Define and describe the term simple harmonic motion.
iii)
Write down the differential equation for simple harmonic motion and its solution.
iv)
Characterize simple harmonic motion and thus be able to define terms such as
frequency, period, amplitude and phase.
v)
Characterize damped harmonic motion and thus be able to define terms such as damping
coefficient, damping ratio, damping frequency, under damping, over damping
and critical damping. Also characterise damped harmonic motion using energy and
define the terms logarithmic decrement and decay time.
vi)
Write down the differential equation for forced harmonic motion and to write down its
solution . To characterise forced harmonic motion and understand the terms driving
frequency and resonance.
vii)
Describe what a coupled oscillator is and describe the term normal modes .
viii)
Describe wave motion and thus be able to define terms such as frequency, periodic
time and wavelength.
ix) write down the one-dimensional wave equation and its general solution. Also understand and
define the terms wave number , phase velocity and group velocity.
x)
list the different types of waves and the different types of wave phenomena
COURSE CONTENT
Oscillations ,Periodic motion and simple harmonic motion, Representation of periodic
motion,Essential definitions;Superposition,Fourier analysis,Simple harmonic motion;Free
harmonic motion, Equation of motion, Solution to equation of motion, Kinetic, potential and total
energies of a simple harmonic oscillator, Damped harmonic motion,Equation of motion, solutions
to the equation of motion, Light damping,Heavy damping,Critical damping,Measures of
damping,Damping factor,Logarithmic decrement,Driven harmonic motion,solution to the equation
of motion,Resonance,Damped harmonic motion;Equation of motion,Solution to the equation of
motion,Resonance in harmonic motion;Simple harmonic motion,Damped harmonic
motion,Coupled harmonic motion;Degrees of freedom,Normal coordinates,Normal modes of
vibration,Waves;Essential definitions,Representation of wave motion,The one-dimensional wave
equation (for a stretched string),The solution to the wave equation,Characteristic impedance of
waves on a stretched string,Reflection and transmission coefficients,Wave
classifications;Longitudinal waves,Transverse waves,Wave phenomena,Superposition,Group and
phase velocity,Standing waves
MODE OF DELIVERY
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and practical exercises
INSTRUCTION MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, simple pendulum etc
262
COURSE ASSESSMENT
This course is based on course/ laboratory work and a final exam. The rest of the course work is
assessed using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two cats
given, in accordance with Narok University regulations. Please note that cats should be viewed as
a chance to test your understanding of the material you have been given. As such it should be
looked forward to and the more cats done the better. It will point out where your strengths and
your weaknesses lie. Course work forms 30 % of the total mark. The final exam gives 70 % of the
remaining total mark. Practicals - 10/30,Assignments- 5/30,Cats - 15/30, Final exam - 70/70.
STAFF PERFORMANCE
Pain, H.J. The Physics of Vibrations and Waves.(3rd ed). John Wiley and Sons. Chichester. 1985.
Problems but no solutions.
RECOMMENDED REFERENCE MATERIALS
Pain, H.J. The Physics of Vibrations and Waves.(3rd ed). John Wiley and Sons. Chichester. 1985.
Problems but no solutions.
Main, I.G. Vibrations and Waves in Physics. (3rd ed.) Cambridge University Press. Cambridge.
1995. Problems with solutions.
French, A.P. Vibrations and Waves: M.I.T. Introductory Physics Series. W.W. Norton & Co.
New York. 1971. Problems but no solutions.
Steidel, R.F. Introduction to Mechanical Vibrations. (3rd ed.). John Wiley and Sons. 1989.
Problems with solutions, but this edition has some errata.
Walshaw, A.C. Mechanical Vibrations with Applications. Ellis Horwood. Chichester. 1984.
Problems with solutions, this edition has many errata.
Rao, S.S. Mechanical Vibrations. Addison-Wesley, Reading. 1984. Problems with solutions.
Newland, D.E. Mechanical Vibration Analysis and Computation. Longman Scientific and
Technical. Essex. 1989. Problems with solutions.
Jenkins, F.A.and White, H.E. The Fundamentals of Optics(4th ed.). McGraw-Hill , Singapore.
1991. Problems with solutions.
Anderson, J.S.and M. Bratos-Anderson. Solving Problems in Vibration. Longman Scientific and
Technical, Harlow. 1987. Problems with solutions.
Meirovitch, L. Elements of Vibration Analysis. (2nd ed.) McGraw- Hill. New York. 1986.
Problems with solutions.
263
PHY 212: MODERN PHYSICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To enhance the students knowledge of concepts of modern physics and introduce basic
concepts of modern Physics.
i) Define the terminologies in modern Physics,
ii) Explain photoelectric effect.
iii) Explain the development of the Atomic model
Course Description:
Relativity: Michelson-Morley experiment. Postulates of special theory of relativity, Lorentz
transformations, relativistic momentum and energy, mass-energy relation, energy and
momentum of light.
Black body radiation, Stefan's-Boltzman law, Wien's displacement law, Rayleigh-Jeans
distribution, Planck's distribution. Photoelectric effect. X-ray diffraction, Compton effect,
emission and absorption spectra, Bohr's theory of the hydrogen atom, principal quantum
numbers,Pauli exclusion principle. Wave-particle duality, Heisenberg's uncertainty principle, De
Broglie waves. Scattering of alpha particles. Atomic models. Introduction to nuclear structure,
nuclear forces, binding energy, reactions. Radioactivity, fission, fusion, elementary particles.
Practicals:
Experiments on photoelectric effect, Franck Hertz experiment and determination of the
specific charge of the electron.
Lecturing, tutorial, class discussion, demonstrations.
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Assignments, tests and experiments/ practical and end of semester examinations.
Staff performance
264

1.
Michael D. Fayer (2001). Elements of Quantum Mechanics. Oxford University Press,
New York,Oxford University Press Inc.
2.
Bransden B.H., and Joachain D. J, (1990). Introduction to Quantum Mechanics.
Longman. London.
3.
Kroemer H., (1994). Quantum Mechanics. Englewood cliffs, N. J. Prentice Hall.
4.
Physica C: Atomic, molecular and plasma physics optics. Europhysics Journal.
Published by the Institute of Physics.
5.
European Journal of Physics
1.
Sakurai J. J., (1994). Modern Quantum Mechanics. Reading, M.A. Addison Wesley.
2.
Peter Landshoff, Allen Metherel and Gareth Rees, (1997). Essential quantum Physics,
3.
Park D., (1992). Introduction to Quantum theory, New York. Mc Graw-Hill.
4.
Green NJB, (1997). Quantum Mechanics 1: Foundations, Oxford University Press.
5.
Progress of Theoretical Physics.
6.
Physical Review letters.
7.
Physical Society Japan Journal.
PHY 213: ELECTRONICS I
5 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an appreciation and understanding for the
importance and applications of electrical networks and semiconductor theory in physics. The
language and concepts used will form the essence of description in design of electronic
networks,small signal amplifiers and how to determine the amplifier parameters.
The aims above will be met by achieving the following objectives, i.e., by the end of this
course you should be able to:
define and distinguish between the different electrical networks; Nodal analysis,Mesh analysis
i)
define and describe the various network theorems;Superposition theorem,Thevenin's
theorem and Norton's theorem
ii)
describe what semiconductor theory is and describe the term intrinsic and extrinsic
semiconductors
iii)
Describe the BJT-Bipolar junction Transistors and their characteristics.
iv)
To describe the small signal amplifies and describe the various functions of each
components used for its design.
265
COURSE CONTENT
Circuit analysis; nodal analysis, mesh analysis, superposition theorem, thevenins
theorem,norton's theorem ,semiconductor theory;intrinsic and extrinsic
semiconductors,junction diodes,zener diodes,light emitting diodes ,photoconductive
diodes,photo resistive diodes,application of diodes, fabrication and characteristics of B.J.T
,transistor biasing, load line, Q-Point ,transistor a.c equivalent circuits, small signal
amplifies;current voltage and power gain ,input and output impendence. Brief survey of other
electronic devices such as thyristors, diacs, triacs, FET, UJT.
MODE OF DELIVERY
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, transistors, LED, OSCILOSCOPE etc
COURSE ASSESSMENT
assessed using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two
cats given, in accordance with Narok University regulations. Please note that cats should be
viewed as a chance to test your understanding of the material you have been given. As such it
should be looked forward to and the more cats done the better. It will point out where your
strengths and your weaknesses lie. Course work forms 30 % of the total mark. The final exam
gives 70 % of the remaining total mark. Practicals - 10/30,Assignments- 5/30,Cats 15/30, Final exam - 70/70.
STAFF PERFORMANCE
CORE READING MATERIAL FOR THE COURS
Electricity and magnetism by Theraja
1. Electricity and magnetism by Theraja
2. Electricity and magnetism by Dr.Jason Chung
3. Fundamentals of Physics by Haliday and Rensick
4. Electronic Principles Devices and Circuits by M.L.ANAND
266
YEAR THREE
PHY 310: MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an understanding of mathematical
concepts and their applications in solving physics problems more so differentials calculus and
integration. Fourier series and its applications in waves and vibrations and electromagnet waves
will also be dealt with. Vector analysis and vector calculus will be of importance in the fields of
quantum physics, optics, classical mechanics and electrodynamics.
i)
define and describe vector fields and scalar fields
ii)
determine the curl, divergence and gradient of a vector field
iii) distinguish between solenoid and irrotational vector fields
iv)
describe and explain the differential equations applied in physics
v)
the use of the method of separation of variables in solving physics problems
COURSE CONTENT
The vector field and properties of vectors,The gradient,Divergence,Curl and laplacian
operators,Solenoid (non-solenoid),Rotational and irrotational vector,gausss and stokes
theorems,Orthogonal co-ordinate systems and generalized co-ordinate systems,Specific
orthogonal co-ordinate systems namely Cartesian, polar, cylindrical and spherical.Form for the
gradient ,divergence, curl and laplacian operators in these co-ordinate systems,Differential
equations: equations used in physics ,Laplace,Poisson Helmholtz,Schrodinger and other
equations used.Methods of solving separation of variables, integral solutions, use of integral
transforms and numerical methods,The Fourier series and integral transforms.The Fourier and
Laplace transforms application in solving differential equations.Special
functions,Legendre,Hermite,Laguerre,And Bessel functions,Application of these functions to
some specific problems in physics
MODE OF DELIVERY
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and exercises
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc
COURSE ASSESSMENT
267
This course is based on course work and a final exam. The rest of the course work is assessed
using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two cats given,
in accordance with Narok University regulations. Please note that cats should be viewed as a
chance to test your understanding of the material you have been given. As such it should be
your weaknesses lie. Course work forms 30 % of the total mark. The final exam gives 70 % of
the remaining total mark. ,Assignments- 5/30,Cats 25/30, Final exam - 70/70.
STAFF PERFORMANCE
Mathematical Methods for Physics and Engineering by K.F Riley and M.P Hobson
1. Mathematical Methods for Physics and Engineering by K.F Riley and M.P Hobson
2. Vector Analysis by Samson Thorofo
3. Vector analysis by schaums outline series
4. Mathematical physics by Gupta
PHY 311: SOLID STATE PHYSICS 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the student to macroscopic and microscopic properties of solids.
i.
Distinguish between crystal and crystal solid materials,
ii.
Define solid state terminologies,
iii.
Classify solid materials into conductors, insulators and semiconductors,
iv.
Describe the band structure theory of crystals.
Course Description:
Crystal Structure: Crystalline and amorphous solids. Lattice and basic unit cell. Wigner Seitz cell. Bravais lattices. Simple cubic, bcc (body centred cubic) and fee (face centred cubic)
structures, Miller indices.
Crystal Diffraction: Bragg's diffraction law. Incident beams of x-rays, electrons and neutrons.
Structure determination. Reciprocal lattice and Brillouin Zone.
Experimental methods. Crystals of inert gases, ionic crystals, covalent crystals and metals.
Lattice Vibrations: Vibrations of monoatomic and diatomic lattice. Phonon dispersion. Lattice
heat capacity - phonon density of states, Einstein's and Debye's models.
268
Free electron theory: Free Electron Gas: Effect of temperature on the Fermi-Dirac distribution.
Free electron gas in three dimensions. Heat capacity. Electrical and thermal conductivities;
Weidman-Franz law. Hall effect.
Band Theory of solids: Inadequacies of free electron theory. Bloch theorem. Kronig - Penney
model: allowed and forbidden bands. Effective mass of an electron in a band. Distinction
between metals, insulators and intrinsic semiconductors. The concept of holes.
Practicals:
No laboratory work.
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1.
Kittel, C. (1995). Introduction to Solid State Physics, (7th Ed.), New York: Wiley.
2.
Myers, H. P. (1990). Introductory Solid State Physics, Taylor and Francis.
3.
Physics Review B: Solid State Physics. American Physical Society.
4.
Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter.
1.
Christman, J. R. (1988). Fundamental of Solid State Physics, New York: Wiley.
2.
Rosenberg, H. M. (1988). An Introduction to the Physics of Solids for Students of
Physics, Materials Science and Engineering, (3rd ed.), Oxford: Oxford University Press.
3.
Solymar, L. & Walsh, D. (1988). Lecture on the Electrical Properties of Materials, (4th
Ed.), Oxford: Oxford University Press.
4.
Physics Status Solidi: Akademie.
5.
Journal of Physics C: Solid State Physics. Europhysics Journal
269
PHY 312: OPTICS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Optics aims to provide further understanding of the nature of light by studying phenomena such
as interference, diffraction and polarization of light. The ability of materials to reflect, absorb,
reflect, transmit and bend light will also be covered.
Having successfully completed the course, students should be able to demonstrate general
understanding of:
v) Interference
vi) Diffraction
vii) Polarization
viii) Optical instruments: interferometers, gratings, polaroids, polarimeters, lasers
Course content
The wave equation and its solutions, properties of waves, wavefront, the electromagnetic
spectrum, light sources (thermionic and atomic).
Characteristics of Light: Polarisation, polarisers. Coherence, coherence length interference.
Atomic theory of the refractive index: Maxwell's equations in matter - Polarisation of matter.
Absorption and Dispersion functions.
Geometrical Optics: reflection and transmission angles and coefficients, Brewster Angle,
principle of ray tracing, illustrations.
Diffraction: General Kirchhoff - Sommertleld theory, Fresnel and Fraunhofer approximations,
applications (slit and edge diffraction patterns).
Lasers: Einstein's constants, spontaneous and stimulated emissions, laser principle, properties of
laser light and some applications of lasers.
Mode of delivery
270
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
A textbook of optics / SUBRAHMANYAM, N; LAL, Brij. -- 2 nd. -- New Delhi: S. Chand &
Company, 2003. ISBN 81-219-0467-6
1 B. Sc Physics. Volume II including: Waves vibrations and sound 2, optics 3. atomic and
Molecular physics / ARORA, C.L. -- 1 st. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company, 2001. ISBN
81-219-0466-8.
2 Optics and spectroscopy / MURUGESHAN, A; Sivaprasath, Kiruthiga. 6th rev. ed.
New Delhi: S. Chand & Company LTD, 1997. ISBN 81-219-1441-8.
PHY 313: ELECTRONICS II
5 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an understanding of hybrid equivalent
electrical circuits, multistage amplifiers and their applications and the understanding of the
operation and working of oscillators and operational amplifiers OP AMP
course you should be able to: define and describe the hybrid parameters determine the hybrid
parameters for different transistor configurations
i)
determine the various gains given the h-parameters
ii)
describe and explain the operations of various multistage amplifiers
iii)
determine the gains of multistage amplifiers in number as well as in decibels
iv)
describe the differences between Audio, video and tuned amplifiers
v)
describe the feedback theory
vi)
describe the operation and working of oscillators and operational amplifiers and
their application
271
COURSE CONTENT
Hybrid equivalent circuits, Input impedance and output impedance, Current,Voltage,and power
gains Multistage amplifiers;RC coupled amplifiers, Transformer coupled amplifiers, Direct
coupled amplifiers. Audio, video and tuned amplifiers; Class A amplifier, Class B amplifier,
Class C amplifier, Feed back connections; Negative feedback, Positive feedback, distortion
gain, input and output impedance, phase shifts, wein bridge,collpitts ,Oscillator integrated
circuits fabrications ,Operational amplifiers, basic application of the op-amps
MODE OF DELIVERY
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, transistors, power supply
OSCILOSCOPE,R,C, etc
COURSE ASSESSMENT
This course is based on course/ laboratory work and a final exam. The rest of the course work
is assessed using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two
STAFF PERFORMANCE
Electricity and magnetism by Theraja
1. Electricity and magnetism by Theraja
2. Electricity and magnetism by Dr.Jason Chung
3. Fundamentals of Physics by Haliday and Rensick
4. Electronic Principles Devices and Circuits by M.L.ANAND
PHY 314
QUANTUM MECHANICS I
(3 CREDIT HOURS)
Purpose:
To introduce the student to the concepts of atomic and high energy physics.
(i)
Describe the basic experimental phenomena that led to the theory of quantum
mechanics.
272
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Explain the physical interpretation of the concept of a wavefunction in quantum

mechanics.
Apply the Schrdinger equation to obtain wavefunctions and energy eigenvalues for
simple quantum potentials
Explain the relationship between operators and measurable(observables)
Describe the postulates or formalism of quantum mechanics
Obtain wavefunction and energy eigenvalues for the quantum harmonic oscillator
Course Description:
The inadequacies of classical mechanics and need of quantum mechanics. Matter waves and
their statistical interpretation. Wave functions, state functions and their basic properties. Timedependent Schrodinger equation to operators. Superposition principle. Physical interpretation of
wave function and probability current density. Expectation values. Schwartz inequality and Proof
of uncertainty principle. Wave packets. Linear operators. Eigen functions and eigenvalues.
Orthogonal systems. Expansion in eigenfunction and completeness relation. Hermitian
operators. Simultaneous eigen functions, commutators. Parity operator. Commutation rule.
Equation of motion. Time independent Schrodinger equation and the concept of stationary
states. Problems in one dimension: (i) Zero potential (the free particle case), (ii) Infinite square
well potential (particle in a box), (iii) Potential step (reflectance and transmittance), (iv) potential
barrier, (v) Rectangular potential well (vi) Periodic potential, (vii) Linear harmonic oscillator. The
Schrodinger equation for spherically symmetric potential Angular momentum operators,
hydrogen atom
Practicals:
No laboratory work.
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
273

1.
Michael D. Fayer (2001). Elements of Quantum Mechanics. Oxford University Press,
New York,Oxford University Press Inc.
2.
Bransden B.H., and Joachain D. J, (1990). Introduction to Quantum Mechanics.
Longman. London.
3.
Kroemer H., (1994). Quantum Mechanics. Englewood cliffs, N. J. Prentice Hall.
4.
Physica C: Atomic, molecular and plasma physics optics. Europhysics Journal.
Published by the Institute of Physics.
5.
European Journal of Physics
1.
Sakurai J. J., (1994). Modern Quantum Mechanics. Reading, M.A. Addison Wesley.
2.
Peter Landshoff, Allen Metherel and Gareth Rees, (1997). Essential quantum Physics,
3.
Park D., (1992). Introduction to Quantum theory, New York. Mc Graw-Hill.
4.
Green NJB, (1997). Quantum Mechanics 1: Foundations, Oxford University Press.
5.
Progress of Theoretical Physics.
6.
Physical Review letters.
7.
PHY 315
ELECTROMAGNETISM
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course aims to provide understanding of electromagnetic phenomena commonly applied in
real life situations including generation of hydroelectricity, production and transmission of
communication signals and applications in devices like transformers.
Having successfully completed the course, students should be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of Maxwell's equations
2. Analyze and solve problems associated with electromagnetic phenomena
3. Derive and analyze relevant electromagnetic formulae
Course content
Magnetic Field of Ferromagnetic Materials: Magnetic Dipoles, Loops, Magnetization. The
magnetic vectors B, H and M. Magnetic Energy density. Boundary relations. Time varying
electric and magnetic fields: Faraday's law, Lenz's law, induction, Stoke's theorem. Inductance, self
and mutual. Introductions to Eddy current and their application in non-destructive testing. Boundary
relations. Maxwell's equations: Circuit and Field theory. Maxwell's Equations in Free Space.
Harmonically varying fields. Waves and transmission lines: Wave equation in free space and in
274
transmission line. Characteristic impedance. Travelling waves and standing waves. Conductors and
dielectrics. Lossy lines. Power and energy, Poynting Vector.
Mode of delivery
laboratory with simulation software like Matlab or appropriate software installed. Lectures
should ideally be delivered using projectors to enable illustration of three dimensional
phenomena.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Introduction to electrodynamics (3rd edition) by David J. Griffiths)
1. Fundamentals of Physics (5th Edition Part 3) by David Halliday,
Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker.
2. University Physics (8th Edition) by Hugh D Young
3. Electricity and magnetism by R Murugeshan
4. Physics for Scientists and Engineers (5th Edition) with Modern Physics
by Raymond A Serway.
275
PHY316:
INTRODUCTION TO MATERIAL SCIENCE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
In this course the students will learn about properties of materials used in various applications
like in electrical installations, in equipments and thermal insulation. The students should be
able to tell a magnetically soft material from and magnetically hard material by studying their
magnetic characteristics.
Having successfully completed the module, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge
i.
Band structures for electron energies in aggregates of atoms and explain the concept of
valence bands and conduction bands
ii.
Conduction in semiconductors by both electrons and holes
iii.
Electronic devices such as the pn junction.
iv. Polarization in materials and distinguish between ferroelectric and piezoelectric
materials.
v. Paramagnetism, diamagnetism and ferromagnetism
vi.
Magnetization and explain the terms remanance, coercivity and hysteresis
vii.
Magnetically soft and magnetically hard materials and explain the main factors
controlling the magnetic properties of a material.
Course content
Classification of materials: methods of classifying materials.
Atomic properties; bond types and associated properties, lattice energy calculations, crystalline
and amorphous materials, important crystal structures. Mechanical properties; plastic
deformation, mechanism of plastic flow, tensile fracture, ductile fracture, brittle failure,
fatigue and creep failure. Methods of testing materials strength and applications.
Thermal properties; Thermal energy, heat capacity, expansivity, conductivity, and
thermoelectric effects. Magnetic materials. Examples of paramagnets and ferromagnets.
Dielectric, piezoelectric and ferroelectric materials. Optical properties;
birefringence, dispersion, absorption. Microstructure, partial and solid solubility,
equilibrium phase diagrams and principles of diffusion.
Mode of delivery
laboratory with appropriate simulation software. Lectures should ideally be delivered using
projectors to enable adequate illustration of concepts.
276
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Material science / NARANG, B.S. -- 4th. -- Delhi: CBS, 1991. (Book), ISBN 81-2390014-7. 1 copy.
2. Material science / KHURMI, R.S.; Sedha, R.S. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company,
2005. (Book) VI-376 p. ISBN 81-219-0146-4. 2 copies.
1. Material science and metallurgy / WOODI, N.S. -- 1 st. -- Bangalore: Sudha Stones,
1983.
2. Solid state physis / PURI, R.K; Babbar, V.K. -- New Delhi: S.Chand & Company,
1997. (Book) XII-311 p. ISBN 81-219-1476-0.
PHY 317: CLASSICAL MECHANICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an understanding of mechanics of particles
and a system of particles. Further the learner will be able to use various principles to develop
equations of motion for a particular particle.
i)
define and describe mechanics of particles
ii)
describe the mechanics of a system of particles
iii) describe DAlemberts Principle and derive Lagranges equation of motion
iv)
distinguish between variation principles and Hamiltons principle
v)
To distinguish between holonomic constraint and non-holonomic constraints.
COURSE CONTENT
Survey of elementary principles;mechanics of a particle,mechanics of a system of
particles,constraints,dalemberts principle and lagranges equation,velocity-dependent
277
potentials and dissipation function,simple application of lagranges equation, variation

principles and lagranges equation,hamiltons principle,some techniques of the calculus of
variations,derivation of lagranges equation from hamilton principle, extension of hamiltons
principle to nonholonomic systems,advantages of variation principles formulation,conservation
theorems and symmetry properties,energy function and conservation of energy, central force
problem ,reduction of the equivalent one body problem,the equation of motion and first
integrals, the equivalent one dimension problem, and classification of orbits,the kepler
problem: inverse-square law of force,the motion in time in the kepler problem ,the kinematics
of rigid body motion,the independent coordinates of a rigid body,orthogonal
transformations,formal properties of the transformation matrix,the hamilton equations of
motion, legendre transformations and the hamilton equations of motion, cyclic coordinates and
conservation theorems ,the hamiltonian formulation of relativistic mechanics,derivation of
hamiltons equations from a variation principle,the principle of least action.
MODE OF DELIVERY
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc
COURSE ASSESSMENT
This course is based on course work and a final exam. The rest of the course work is assessed
using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two cats given,
in accordance with Narok University regulations. Please note that cats should be viewed as a
chance to test your understanding of the material you have been given. As such it should be
your weaknesses lie. Course work forms 30 % of the total mark. The final exam gives 70 % of
the remaining total mark. ,Assignments- 5/30,Cats 25/30, Final exam - 70/70.
STAFF PERFORMANCE
Classical Mechanics 3rd Edition by Goldstein ,Poole and Safko
1. Classical Mechanics 3rd Edition by Goldstein ,Poole and Safko
2. Solution Manual for Classical Mechanics by Goldstein
278
PHY 410:
QUANTUM MECHANICS II
(3 CREDIT HOURS)
Purpose:
To enhance the students knowledge in quantum mechanics.
i.
Define the time-independent Schroedinger equation to standard potentials,
ii.
Describe orbital and spin magnetic moments in atoms,
iii.
Explain how spin-orbit interactions affect the eigenvalue spectra,
iv.
Explain the importance of exchange forces in the theory of many-electron atoms,
v.
Describe the standard approximation methods used in the theory of atoms and
molecules,
vi.
Outline the applications of quantum mechanics to crystalline solids.
Course Description:
Angular momentum and spin: The Angular momentum operators. Eigenvalues of the Angular
Momentum operators and the Angular Momentum Eigenfunctions. Normalization of the
Angular Momentum Eigenfunctions. Spin and the Spin-orbit interaction. Addition of Angular
Momenta: The addition of two spins 2. Singlet and Triplet Eigenfunctions. Spin-orbital
angular momentum addition. The Paul! exclusion principle. Approximation methods: Time
independent perturbation theory: Application to non-degenerate states (e.g linear harmonic
oscillator perturbed by an anhannonic term). Interactions of charged particles with static
Electric and Magnetic Field. The Variational Method. JWKB Approximation
Many-particle systems: The schrodinger Equation for an N-particle system. Conservation of
momentum. Separation of centre of mass motion; reduced mass. Identical particles and
symmetry under their interchange. The Pauli Exclusion principle.
Fermions and Bosons in a Box; the Fermi Energy. Scattering: Collision cross section. Scattering
at Low Energies. The Born Approximation.
Practicals:No laboratory work
279
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1.
Liboff, (2003) Introductory Quantum Mechanics, 4th ed., Addison Wesley.
2.
Griffiths, (2005) Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall.
3.
Bransden, B. H. and Joachain, C. J. (1989). Introduction to quantum mechanics, Burnt
Mill: Longman Scientific and Technical.
4.
Progress of Theoretical Physics: Published for the Research Institute for Fundamental
Physics and the Physical Society of Japan.
5.
New journal of Physics
1.
Ballentive, L. E. (1989). Quantum Mechanics. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-hall.
2.
Green NJB, (1998), Quantum Mechanics 2: The Toolkit, Oxford University Press.
3.
French AP & Taylor EF, (1998), Introduction to Quantum Physics, Nelson Thornes.
PHY 411: THERMODYNAMICS
(3 CREDIT HOURS)
Purpose:
To introduce the students to the fundamentals of heat and mechanical energy.
Learning Outcomes:
(i)
Explain the relationship between the two specific heat capacities (cp, cv),
(ii)
Determine the work done by ideal gases at constant pressure and volume,
(iii)
Explain qualitatively the triple point of water,
(iv)
Define different terminologies of Thermodynamics and understand how they are
characterized,
(v)
State the laws of Thermodynamics and their applications.
(vi)
Explain the applications of thermodynamics in our daily life.
Course Description:
280
Heat; temperature and temperature scale; Zeroth law of thermodynamics. Gas laws; Boyles
law, Daltons law and Charles law, ideal gas equation. Thermodynamic systems: Adiabatic
welts and systems. Thermal equilibrium. Calorimetry: Specific heat, Thermal properties and
one dimensional hear flow. First law of thermodynamics: Adiabatic and Isothermal processes.
Black body radiation. Stefans-Boltzmann law. Spectral distribution of radiation and
electromagnetic spectrum. Review of First law of thermodynamics: the second law of
thermodynamics; Carnot Cycle, heat engines, refrigerators. Entropy. Thermodynamic
potentials. Gibbs and Helmholtz free energies. Maxwell relations and applications. Phase
transitions. Cryogenics: the third law of thermodynamics and its applications. Phase
equilibrium. Introduction to statistical mechanics. (Prerequisite PHY 110)
Practicals:
Determination of specific heat capacities, thermal conductivity measurements and Newtons
law of cooling
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1.
Halliday, D., Resnik, R. and Walker, J. (2004). Fundamentals of Physics (extended).
(6th Ed.) Singapore: Willey and Sons (Asia).
2.
Dilip Kondepudi and Ilya Prigogine (1998), Modern Thermodynamics: From Heat
Engines to Dissipative Structures. Wiley: Chichester, UK.
3.
Burshtein, Anatoli I. (1996). Introduction to thermodynamics and kinetic theory of
matter, New York: Wiley.
4.
Proceeding of the Royal Society of London A: Mathematics and Physical Sciences.
5.
Physics Review A. General Physics.
281
1.
2.
3.
4.
Jones J. B. and Hawkins G. A., (1986). Engineering Thermodynamics, John Wiley &
Sons,Inc.
Adkins, C. J. (1987). Introduction to Thermal Physics. Revised edition. Cambridge
C.U.P.
Physica A: Europhysics Journal.
Journal of Applied Physics.
PHY 413:
MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to develop advanced skills for formulating physical phenomena in
terms of vectors, multiple integrals, special functions and partial differential equations. It
covers the methods of analysis; expansion theory; solution of differential equations, special
functions and their use in solving physics problems.
i) functions of complex variables as used in
ii) tensors and their applications
iii) calculus of variation as applied in solving physical problems
iv) constraints and Lagrange multipliers as applied in dynamical problems
Course content
Functions of a complex variable: Summary of complex algebra. Complex differentiation and the
Cauchy-Reimann equations. Complex integration and Cauchy's integral theorem. Cauchy's
integral formula. The Laurent series and the residue theorem. Applications of the residue theorem
in the evaluation of integrals and series. Tensors: coordinate transformation and definition
of scalar and vector in terms of the transformations. Definition of tensor and rank of a tensor.
Definition of rank zero (scalar), rank one (vector) and rank two tensor. Tensor algebraaddition, subtraction, contraction, direct product and the quotient rule. Axial and polar
vectors and extension to definition of Pseudotensor. Calculus of variations: The concept of
variation leading to Euler's equations for one dependent and one independent variable.
Generalizations to (i) more than one independent variables, (ii) more than one dependent variables
and (iii) more than one of both dependent and independent variable. The subject of constraints and
introduction of Lagrange multipliers. Greens functions: Definition and properties of Green's
functions. Solution of differential equations using the Green's functions method. Introduction to
Green's functions in two and three dimensions.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and computer exercises.
282

Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Mathematical physics / DASS, H.K. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company, 2003.
5.
Mathematical Methods for Physics and engineering by K. F. RILEY, M. P. HOBSON, S.
J. BENCE
PHY 414: SOLID STATE II
(3 CREDIT HOURS)
Purpose:
To enhance the students knowledge in solid state physics by introducing the concept of
superconductivity and magnetic resonance spectroscopy.
Learning Outcomes:
i.
Describe the various optical electronic excitations in crystals
ii.
Explain electronic excitations in crystals and the physics of photoemission spectroscopy,
iii.
Explain the BCS theory of superconductivity and its inability to explain high
temperature superconduction,
iv.
Explain the magnetic properties of crystals and the uses of magnetic resonance
spectroscopy.
v.
Define lattice vibration, reciprocal lattice, paramagnetism, diagmatism, ferromagnetism,
superconductivity, superfluidity
vi.
State thermal properties of solids
vii. Explain quantum-mechanical free electron theory
Course Description:
283
Insulators and Semiconductors: Band theory of insulators and semiconductors. Models for
impurity semiconductors - n type and p type. Conductivity of the semiconductor and band gap.
Bond picture of semiconductors. Hall effect with two carrier types Superconductivity: Zero
resistivity. Transition temperature. Critical field. Critical current density. Meissner effect. Type
I and II superconductors. Heat capacity. Microwave and infrared properties. Thermodynamics
of superconducting transition. London's equations, penetration depth. Dielectrics and
Ferroelectrics: Dielectric properties of solids. Ferroelectric crystals, behaviour of dielectric
constant and polarization catastrophe.
Magnetism: dia-, para-, ferro-, ferri- and antiferromagnetic materials. Curie and Curie-Weiss
laws. Ferromagnetic domains, Neil temperature. Point defects and alloys: Schottky and Frenkel
defects. Colour centres and luminescence. Substitutional solid solutions. Order
disorder transformation - Superstructure lines. Elementary theory.
Practicals: Laboratory needed for experiments
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1.
Neil W. Ashcroft and N. David Mermin, (2003), Solid State Physics, Cambridge
University Press.
2.
BG Streetman and S Banerjee, (2000), Solid State Electronic Devices (5edn), Prentice
Hall
3.
Kittel, C. (1995). Introduction to Solid State Physics. (7th Ed.). New York: Wiley.
4.
Myers, H. P. (1990). Introductory Solid State Physics. Taylor and Francis.
5.
Journal of Physics C: Solid State Physics. Europhysics Journal
6.
International Journal of Modern Physics B: Condensed matter Physics
284
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Christman, J. R. (1988). Fundamental of Solid State Physics. New York: Wiley.

Rosenberg, H. M. (1988). An Introduction to the Physics of Solids for Students of
Physics, Materials Science and Engineering. (3rd Ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Solymar, L. & Walsh, D. (1988). Lecture on the Electrical Properties of Materials. (4 th
Ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Physica B: Physics of condense matter. Europhysics Journal.
Physics Status Solidi: Akademie.
Physics Review B: Solid State Physics. American Physical Society.
PHY 415: STATISTICAL MECHANICS
(3 CREDIT HOURS)
Purpose:
To enhance the students knowledge of statistical description of systems of particles.
Learning Outcomes:
i.
Define the terminologies of statistical physics;
ii.
Distinguish between Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics;
iii.
Explain the Equipartition theory;
iv.
Apply the distribution laws to perfect and quantum gases.
Course Description:
Second law of thermodynamics Direction of natural processes. Microscopic and macroscopic
systems. Statistical weight of a macrostate. Equilibrium of isolated system (microcanonical
Ensemble) and system in a Heat Bath (canonical Ensemble). Second law for infinitesimal changes,
clausius inequality.
Perfect classical gas: Partition function. Equation of state. Specific heat capacities, entropy etc.
Perfect quantum gas: Quantum Statistics. Partition function and its classical limit. Free
electron model of metals. Fermi-Dirac distribution. Bose-Einstein distribution. Black-body
radiation. Open systems: Grand Canonical Ensemble. Grand partition function. Partition
function of a classical and quantum gas. Fluctuations.
Practicals:
No laboratory work
285
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Staff performance
1 . Hoffmann, K-H; Schreiber, Michael (Eds.), (2002), Computational Statistical Physics,
Springer
2.
Agarwal B K and Eisner M, (1988) Statistical Mechanics Wiley
3.
4.
Journal of Statistical Mechanics: Theory and Experiment.
1.
Mandl, F. (1988). Statistical Physics, (2nd Ed.). Chichester: John Wiley.
2.
Baumann R P, (1992), Modern Thermodynamics with Statistical Mechanics
(MacMillan).
3.
Progress of Theoretical Physics: Published for the Research Institute for Fundamental
Physics and the Physical Society of Japan.
4.
Physical Review letters: American Physical Society.
PHY 416
ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course aims to provide understanding of atomic and nuclear phenomena required in
exploiting nuclear energy.
Having successfully completed the course, students should be able to:
4. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of nuclear transformations and associated
energy calculations
5. Analyze and solve problems linked to nuclear fission and nuclear fusion
286
6. Understand nuclear instruments and experimental techniques applied in medical field

like Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) measurements.
7. Understand dangers and precautions necessary for safe use of nuclear devices
Course content
Atomic structure, spectra, hydrogen spectrum. X-ray spectra, Moseley relations, interpretation
orbital spin, space quantization, spin-orbit coupling; Vector modtotal angular momentum;
vector coupling of X-ray spectra.. Alkali-metals spectra, tine structure, electron spin. V el of the
atom: magnetic moments;, LS and JJ coupling. Zeeman effect: normal, anomalous, Lande'
splitting factor, Zeeman splitting in high magnetic fields - Paschen-Back effect. Hyperfine
splitting. Stark effect. Nuclear models. Nuclear properties, reactions. Nuclear transformations,
Radioactive decay, alpha, beta & gamma decay theories. Introduction to fission, fusion and
Nuclear reactors. Neutron absorption, cosmic rays, pair production and annihilation.
Elementary particles. Introduction to nuclear instruments and experimental techniques.
Mode of delivery
laboratory with simulation software like Matlab or appropriate software installed. Lectures
should ideally be delivered using projectors to enable illustration of three dimensional
phenomena.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
287

1. Atomic physics : Modern physics / GHOSHAL, S.N. -- 2 nd. -- New Delhi: S.
Chand & Company, 2003. ISBN 81-219-1095-1.
2. Atomic physics / RAJAM, J.B. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company, 2002. ISBN
81-219-1809-X.
1. Atomic physics : Modern physics / GHOSHAL, S.N. -- New Delhi: S. Chand &
Company, 1991. ISBN 81-219-1095-1.
2. B. Sc Physics. Volume II including : Waves vibrations and sound 2 optics 3.
atomic and Molecular physics / ARORA, C.L. -- 1 st. -- New Delhi: S. Chand &
Company, 2001. ISBN 81-219-0466-8.
PHY 417: RESEARCH PROJECT
6 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the student to the methodologies of independent scientific investigation and report
writing.
Learning Outcomes:
a) Formulate a scientific problem and appropriate hypothesis
b) Conduct a literature search on a particular problem or question in physics
c) Design and implement a scientific research project and write a formal research proposal
d) Carry out independent research,
e) Submit a comprehensive scientific report,
f) Give a good oral presentation on the subject of the project.
Course Description:
The course covers introduction to research, library research techniques, independent research
projects, oral presentation techniques and oral presentations. Ideally students select a research
topic, carry out a literature search, design and execute appropriate research, submit
comprehensive scientific report, and deliver a good oral presentation to the class and science
faculty.
Teaching Methodologies
Demonstration, seminars, discussion, practical sessions involving data analysis using
computers and problem solving, brain storming group work self-analysis, peer and teacher
analysis field trip and independent study and internet searches.
Will be specific to each project in addition to computers hardware and appropriate software
288
Overhead and slide projectors.

Course Assessment:
Oral examination
70%
30%
Student performance
Assessment by the supervisor and through public defense of the project.
1. Kothari C.R. (2004). Research methodology 2nd Edition. New age international
Publishers. New Delhi. India.
2. Bird JO, (2001), Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology, Butterworth-Heinemann.
3. Edminister JA, (1996), Schaum's Outline of Electrical Circuits, McGraw-Hill
4. Bugg DV, (1991), Electronics, Circuits, Amplifiers and Gates, IOP
5. The Journal Electronics and Communications in Japan (Part II: Electronics)
1.
Tuck B. (1986). Physical Electronics. London: Edward Arnold.
2.
Lev, B. (1993). Semiconductors and Electronic Devices. (3 rd. ed.). New York: Prenticehall.
3.
Knoll, G. (1989). Radiation Detection and Measurement. J. Wiley & Sons.
4.
International Journal of Numerical Modeling: Electronic Networks, Devices and Fields
5.
International Journal of Circuit Theory and Applications
6.
International Journal of Operating systems
7.
AEU - International Journal of Electronics and Communications
PHY 420
RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
In this course, students will learn about renewable energy sources that include geothermal,
solar, wind and fossil fuel energy sources focusing on their harnessing technologies. Wind
energy assessment strategies and calculation will also be another focal point so students know
necessary characterization issues needed in the selection of a wind turbine.
.
and understanding in:
i Electricity production through geothermal, solar, wind and fossil fuels
289
ii Selection of turbines and generators

iii Hydropower potential calculations
iv Wind energy assessment strategies and calculation of wind potential
Course content
Renewable and Nonrenewable sources of Energy. World's and Kenya's production and reserves
of energy. Oil crisis. Need for renewable supplies. Alternative energy sources. Nuclear
energy. Advantages and disadvantages. Solar-Thermal Energy: Greenhouse effect. Flat-plate
and concentrating collectors.' Selective coating. Sensible heat storage.
Solar photovoltaics: P-N junction solar cells, solar panels Hydro-power: Principles, measurement
of head and flow rate, turbines. Hydro-electric systems. Wind-power: Principle of wind-mills,
coefficient of performance. Energy from Bioconversion and Biomass: Photosynthesis Energy
storage in plants, fuel wood, charcoal. Biogas, generation- plants - applications.
Geothermal Energy: Dry rock and hot aquifer analysis. Harnessing geothermal energy sources.
Principle of harnessing wave energy, tidal power and oceanic thermal energy. Possibilities of
superconducting power plant.
Mode of delivery
Energy modules like solar panels, solar heaters and photovoltaic systems would be necessary to
expose students to practical aspects of the course. A computer laboratory with appropriate
simulation software like Matlab or appropriate software installed. Lectures should ideally be
delivered using projectors to enable illustration of three dimensional phenomena.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
290

1. Solar and Geothermal Energy by John Tabak
1.
Geothermal Power Plants, Principles, Applications, Case Studies and Environmental
Impact, Third Edition By DiPippo.
2.
Wind and Water by John Tabak
PHY 421E: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
5 CREDIT HOURS
PURPOSE
The aim of this course is to develop the student with an understanding of digital electronics
more so logic gates for the purpose of designing electronic equipments.
i)
define and distinguish between different number system.
ii)
describe the elementary Boolean algebra ,Logic gates and logic symbols
iii)
describe truth tables and output wave forms for various logic gates
iv)
describe integrated logic network, structure and characteristics of diode logic.
v)
Distinguish between Diode-transistor logic, Transistor-transistor logic and
Complementary Metal oxide Semiconductor.
vi)
To Simplify logic circuits using Boolean theorems and K-maps
vii)
Describe Sequential Networks, counters ,decoders ,flip-flops.etc
viii) To learn Application of decision making circuits,Encoders,decoders,multiplexers and
demultiplexers and visual displays.
ix)
Differences between Digital to analogue conversion and Analogue to digital conversion
COURSE CONTENT
Number system;Decimal,Binary,Hexadecimal,Binary Coded Decimal,Conversion from one
system to other, Elementary Logic,Boolean Algebra,Logic gates,Logic Symbols, Truth tables ,
output wave forms and output expressions,Integrated logic networks,Structure and
characteristics of diode logic,Diode-transistor logic,Transistor-transistor logic and
Complementary Metal oxide Semiconductor,Fabrication of integrated logic networks,Digital
Schmidt trigger,Multivibrator,Combinatorial networks,Nand and NoR gates,Simplification of
logic circuits using Boolean theorems and K-maps,Sequential Networks,Flipflops,Counters,Shift registers, and their Application in parallel and serial transfer of
information,Application of decision making circuits,Encoders,decoders,multiplexers and
291
demultiplexers and visual

conversion.
displays.Digital to analogue conversion,Analogue to digital
MODE OF DELIVERY
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors,flip-flops,logic gates,counters etc
COURSE ASSESSMENT
assessed using cats (continuous assessment tests) and assignments. There will be at least two
STAFF PERFORMANCE
1. A complete digital design by March Balch
2. Basic Electronic by Cel_Phon
3. A complete digital design by March Balch
PHY 422 APPLIED MATERIAL SCIENCE AND POLYMER PHYSICS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course of material science and Polymer Physics is aimed to introduce the different classes
of materials and polymers, so as to describe the importance of their processing procedures in
determining their properties and performance. It also aims to identify practical materials used
engineering problems in polymer technologies, to learn of the role of polymers and polymer
technologies in a number of issues of current importance
292

i
Classification of polymer materials and their role in various materials
ii Types of polymerization
iii Properties of different kinds of polymers
iv Role of polymers and polymer technologies in a number of issues of current
importance in materials
Course content
Metallurgy: extraction and refining of metals. Ceramics: structure. Properties. Cement and
Concrete: Production structural properties and uses. Polymers: Thermosetting and
thermoplastic polymers. Mechanical and electrical properties of polymers, crystalline and
glassy polymers. Elastomers. Forming processes and uses. Composite Materials. Paints and
Coatings: metallic, organic and composite.
Mode of delivery
laboratory with appropriate simulation software like Matlab or appropriate software installed.
Lectures should ideally be delivered using projectors to enable illustration of three dimensional
phenomena.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
293

1. Material science / NARANG, B.S. 4th. Delhi: CBS, 1991. ISBN 81-239-0014Recommended reference materials
3. Material science / KHURMI, R.S.; Sedha, R.S. -- New Delhi: S. Chand & Company,
2005. ISBN 81-219-0146-4.
4. Polymer chemistry: An introduction / STEVEN, Malcolm. 3 rd. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1999. ISBN 0-19-512444-8.
PHY 424
MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course aims to provide students with knowledge and skills in measurement theory,
instrumentation, measurement systems, measurement computations, data accuracy and
precision necessary for accurate and reliable measurements. It also introduces principles of
measurements used in various equipments by covering topics like DC and AC bridges, Digital
measuring instruments, Waveform generators and Spectroscopy.
i) Estimation of errors inherent in a measurement system or device
ii) Basic measurement systems
iii) Variety of available transducers, their operating principles, strengths and
weaknesses
iv) Selection criteria of a transducer to enable students choose optimum transducer,
amplifier, recording and readout devices that can be used to build a measurement
system suitable for environmental and dynamic phenomena measurements
v) various spectroscopic techniques
Course content
Fundamental and derived quantities: Precision measurement of fundamental quantities.
Measurement of Errors: Relative, systematic and random. Methods of measurements; display and
recording of measurements (analogue and digital). Ammeters, voltmeters, ohmmeter, bridge.
Measurement of charge, direct current and alternating current potentiometers, cathode ray
oscilloscope, recording potentiometer, Power and energy measurements. Vacuum techniques.
Resistive transducers: strain gauges, temperature humidity measurements, Pirani gauge. Voltage
transducers: Thermopile, PH measurement. Capacitive and inductive transducers, pressure
transducers. Radiation transducers; phototubes, photodiodes and transistors, photoconductivity
cells, Geiger-Muller tubes, scintillation counters. Power supply, signal generators, temperature
control, optical measuring instruments. Brief survey of modern instruments. Infrared
294
spectrophotometer. Ultra violet/visible spectrophotometers. Nuclear magnetic resonance

spectrometer, mass spectrometer. Atomic absorption spectroscopy.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. A course in electrical and electronic measurements and instrumentation / SAWHNEY, A.K.;
Sawhney, Puneet. -- Delhi: Dhanpat Rai & Co. 2005. 681.2 SAW
2. Applied electronics and instrumentation / DHIR, S. M. -- New Delhi: Tata mc Graw-Hill,
1997. 621.381 CHA
3.
4.
Circuits for electronic instrumentation / O' DELL, T.H. -- Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press, 1991. 621.381 ODE
Instrumentation devices and systems / RANGAN, C S; SARMAR, G.R.; MANI, V S V.
-- New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 1997. 621.381 54 RAN
295
5.
Instrumentation measurement and analysis / NAKRA, B.C.; CHAUDHRY, K.K. -- New

Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001. 681.2 NAK
6.
Instrumentation, measurement and analysis / NAKRA, B.C. -- New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2004. 621.381 548
PHY 425
THE PHYSICS OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course aims to provide students with knowledge and understanding in the manufacture and
operation of semiconductor devices
i. manipulating carrier concentrations in a semiconductor device
ii.
calculating conduction processes in a semiconductor
iii.
the manufacture of various semiconductor devices like diodes and transistors
iv. differentiating the various types of diodes in terms of operation and manufacture
Course content
1. Carrier concentration in semiconductors
Energy bands
carrier transport
Recombination
injection level electric fields.
Donors and Acceptors
Fermi level , Ef
Carrier concentration equations
Classification of materials according to energy bands
2. Conduction in semiconductors
Carrier drift
Carrier mobility
Saturated drift velocity
Mobility variation with temperature
A derivation of Ohms law
Drift current equations
Semiconductor band diagrams with an electric field present
Carrier diffusion
296
The flux equation
The Einstein relation
Total current density
Carrier recombination and diffusion length
3. p-n junction
The p-n junction in thermal equilibrium
p-n junction barrier height
Depletion approximation, electric field and potential
One-sided, abrupt p-n junction
Applying bias to the p-n junction
Qualitative explanation of forward bias
The ideal diode equation
Reverse breakdown
Depletion capacitance
Bipolar transistors and multilayer devices
Metal-oxide semiconductor field effect transistors
Integrated devices
Charge transfer devices
4. Diode devices
The light emitting diode
Tunnel diode
Gunn diode
Avalanche diode
5. Fabrication processes:
wafer preparations
Epitaxial deposition
Oxidation
Masking and photoprocessing
Impurity introduction and redistribution
Chemical vapour deposition
Metallization
Non-silicon technologies.
Mode of delivery
297
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
3. Introductory Semiconductor Device Physics by Greg PARKERApplied electronics and
instrumentation / DHIR, S. M. -- New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, 1997. 621.381 CHA
1. The Art of electronics by Paul Horowitz and Winfield Hill
2. Electronic principles by Paul Malvino
PHY 427
SOLAR ENERGY PHYSICS 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course aims to educate students on solar systems that capture energy from the sun for
domestic or industrial use. Principles of thermal energy storage, flat plate collectors, solar
concentrators, solar pond and Solar photovoltaic design will be covered.
298
i.
The working of a solar thermal system
ii.
Solar tracking
iii.
Principles of Flat plate collectors
iv. Solar thermal energy storage
v. Solar photovoltaic systems
Course content
Energy and its various sources. The solar energy option. Direct and indirect conversion of solar
energy. Model for sun. Radiative emission from the sun. solar constant, solar time, solar
angles, solar radiation analysis.
Measuring equipments. Solar radiation data, solar radiation on a titled surface. Heat transfer
analysis for solar energy utilization. Optics of solar collectors, transmittance and reflectance.
Flat plate solar collectors, efficiency. Anti-reflective and selective coatings. Parabolic,
cylindrical and spherical concentrators. Materials and construction of collectors. Storage of
solar energy. Thermodynamic conversation of solar energy to work. Solar photovoltaic cells:
junction solar cell, spectral responsivity, characteristics, quantum efficiency. Quantum and
other losses in real solar cells. Some examples of solar cell improvements.
Mode of delivery
Energy modules like solar panels, solar heaters and photovoltaic systems would be necessary to
expose students to practical aspects of the course. A computer laboratory with appropriate
simulation software like Matlab or appropriate software installed. Lectures should ideally be
Course Assessment:
total mark
299
Staff performance

2. Solar and Geothermal Energy by John Tabak
3. Solar electricity / MARKVART, Thomas ed. -- New York: John Wiley & sons, 2005.
621.47 MAR
PHY 428: GEOPHYSICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to equip students with skills in seismology and methods of subsurface
exploration for exploitation of natural resources.

i
Quantification of earthquakes
ii Geophysical well logging
iii Techniques in geophysics data analysis
iv Gravity measurements
Course content
Earth: Earth as a planet, its shape and structure. Seismology Geomagnetism, geodynamics,
geochronology.
Geophysics: Gravity, magnetic, electromagnetic, electrical, seismic, radioactivity methods of
exploration for subsurface areas and natural resources. Geophysical well logging,
techniques of geophysics data analysis and interpretation.
Mode of delivery
300
Laboratory space and appropriate equipments will be needed to enable students perform
experiments to complement theory classes. Lectures should ideally be delivered using
projectors to enable illustration and demonstration of subsurface structures.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Applied Geophysics by W. M. Telford, L. P. Geldart, R. E. Sheriff
2. Principles of Applied Geophysics by D.S. Parasnis
3. Introduction to geophysical prospecting by Milton Burnett Dobrin
PHY 429
INTRODUCTION TO LASERS 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course of Laser Physics covers general concepts of stimulated and spontaneous emission of
radiation and develops knowledge of properties of laser beams, types of lasers, their
construction and application.
i) Spontaneous and stimulated emission
ii) Properties of laser beam
301
iii) Types of lasers, their construction

iv) Applications of lasers
Course content
Introduction: Interaction of light and matter, the laser principle and characteristics. The laser
resonator: flat mirror resonator, modes in confocal resonator, nonconfocal cavities, line
broadening, bandpass and laser modes. Gaussian light beams: Propagation, focusing, lens
transformation. Laser theory, balance equations. Steady-state operation: Population inversion,
output power parameters, transients. Pulsed operation Q-switching, mode locking, principle
and techniques). Laser types, principle, description and characteristics: Gas lasers: He-Ne, Ar,
neutral molecular lasers (CO ). Solid state lasers (Nd-Yag), dye lasers; semiconductor lasers.
Mode of delivery
experiments to complement theory classes especially in the interaction of lasers with matter.
Lectures should ideally be delivered using projectors to enable illustration of three dimensional
phenomena.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Physics. vol. 2 / HALLIDAY, David; Resnick, Robert; Krane, Kenneth S. 4th.
New York: John Wiley & sons, 2004. ISBN 9971-51-404-4.
302

2. Laser chemistry: Spectroscopy, dynamics and applications / TELLE , Helmut
H.; URENA , Angel Gonzalez; Donavan , Robert J. -- England: John wiley,
2007. ISBN 978-0-471-48571-1
PHY 430: ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND MICROPROCESSORS 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
This course students will be required to build a complete microprocessor system using various
digital modules with the help of an instruction set. Students will also assemble many basic
digital electronic circuits such as memory modules, Digital to Analog Converter, Analog to
Digital Converter, 555 timers, decoders and multiplexers.

i) Digital to Analog and Analog to digital converters
ii) Understand basic microprocessor system architecture
iii) Understand how to program a microprocessor and use it in digital circuits
iv) Understand the interfacing concepts
v) Connecting memory modules for larger data storage
vi) Design digital components to meet required specifications
Course content
Binary Operations: addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. Adder circuits. Memory
circuits; read only memory, random access memory and read/write memory. Introduction to
microprocessors: Architecture of the microprocessor. Some practical microprocessors.
Microprocessor programming (machine and assembly language). Interfacing the
microprocessor. Data handling and storage. Introduction to micro-computer.
Mode of delivery
303
experiments to complement theory classes especially in the design and implementation of
microprocessor systems. Lectures should ideally be delivered using projectors to enable
illustration and demonstration of electronic simulation.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
Microprocessors and interfacing : Programming and hardware / HALL, Douglas V.

-- Lake forest (Illinois) Macmillan, 1992. 005.26 HAL
Introduction to microprocessors and microcontrollers / CRISP, John. -- New York:
Elsevier, 1998. 004.16 CRI

Foundations of analog and digital electronic circuits / AGARWAL, Anant; LANG,
Jeffrey H. -- New York: Elsevier, 2005. 621.381 AGA
PHY 431: THERMODYNAMICS OF MATERIALS 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
The aim of the course is to enable students determine the effect of the environment on
materials.
i) Heat, energy and entropy
304
ii) Sintering in single and multiphase materials

iii) Corrosion and oxidation mechanisms in materials
iv) Electrochemistry and material protection
Course content
Thermodynamics: Heat and energy, entropy and free energy, direction of chemical change, free
energy of metallic compounds. Ellingham diagram.dissociation temperature and pressure,
activity.Diffusion: diffusion equations, types of diffusion, vacancy equilibria, effects of crystal
defects. diffusion in semiconductor technologies. Multicomponent system: allotropy, solid
solubility.Lever rule.phase rule,phase changes.structural changes. Iron-carbon
system.Sintering:single and multiphase materials, experimental observations, metal
sintering.ceramic sintering. Corrosion and oxidation: Electrochemistry, polarisation,passivity,
types of corrosion,corrosion rates, corrosion control methods, oxidation mechanisms, surface
films, protective oxides, rust, scales.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
305
1. Introduction to thermodynamics of materials (4th edition) by David R Gaskell

2. Thermodynamics in Materials Science, Second Edition by Robert T. DeHoff
3. Thermodynamics of materials by Qing Jiang Zi Wen
PHY 432:VACUUM TECHNIQUES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course aims to provide knowledge about vacuum technology applied in the development of
solid-state microelectronics and micromechanical devices.
Having successfully completed the course, students should:
1. Know vacuum fundamentals essential in operating, maintaining, designing, or using
vacuum systems.
2. Be knowledgeable about working principles and limitations of pumps, gauges, and
other vacuum system components.
3. Be skilled in procedures for operating and performing preventive maintenance on
vacuum systems, including analyzing and troubleshooting malfunctioning vacuum
systems and leak detection.
4. Provide the designs involved in matching equipment and instrumentation to
applications.
Course content
Introductory gas dynamics: Maxwellian gas, pressure and its units, mean free path, visions and
molecular transport. Interaction between gaseous and condensed phases; adsorption,
chemisorption, condensation, evaporation. Pump down and pumping speed. Rough, high and
ultra high vacuum.
Pumps: liquid and gas ejectors, liquid-ring, oil sealed rotary, roots blower, vapour diffusion and
their vapour traps, turbomolecular, cryo-. and ion getter. Vacuum sealing and meals.
Pressure measurement: membrane transducers, heat conduction ganges, ion. conductivity
gauges, mercury column and McCleod. Residual gas analysis. Leaks and leak detection.
Short overlook on vacuum applications: evaporation, freeze drying, electron stream/beam tubes,
electron/ion/particle beam systems, vacuum coalers.
Thin film coating systems and processes: evaporation, sputtering, principles and techniques.
Film formation: nucleation, islandic growth, amorphous films. Vacuum chemical vapour
deposition: thermal and plasma assisted.
306
Mode of delivery
Laboratory space is needed for successful delivery of the course. Lectures should ideally be
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Practical Vacuum Techniques by W.F. Brunner and T.H. Batzer
2. High Vacuum Techniques for Chemical Syntheses and Measurements by
P. H. Plesch
1. Vacuum Technique by L.N. Rozanov
2. Basic Vacuum Technology, 2nd Edition by Austin Chambers, R. K. Fitch, B. S.
Halliday
3. Modern Vacuum Physics by A. Chambers
307
PHY 433: COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The very nature of physics is to express relationships between physical quantities in
mathematical terms; an analytic solution of the resulting formulae is often not available.
Instead, numerical solutions based on computer programs are required to obtain useful results
for real-life physics problems. The course aims to apply computational techniques to solving
problems in different areas of physics, to develop an appreciation of the use of numerical
simulations in modeling physical processes
i
Scientific programming
ii
Structure of Physics problems and numerical approach to solving them
iii
Translation of Physical problems to their computational solutions
Course content
Introduction to MATLAB as a computational tool.
Introduction to numerical methods used in computational Physics:
Numerical solution of ordinary and partial differential equations.
Eigen value problem
Computational problems in Physics and their solution using numerical methods:
N-body problem
Fluid flow
Diffusion and heat transfer
Numerical solutions of the Schrodinger equation
Introduction to advanced methods used in computational Physics:
Monte Carlo Simulations
Molecular Dynamics
Evolutionary Methods
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and computer exercises.
308

Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Computational methods in physics and engineering / Wong, Samuel S.M. -- London
Mathematical Methods for Physics and engineering by K. F. RILEY, M. P. HOBSON, S. J.
BENCE
PHY 434: FOURIER OPTICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to equip students with skills in optical aberrations control and
holography and their applications.
v
Imaging properties of lenses
vi Spatial filtering
vii Interferometric methods
viii Effect of aberrations
Course content
Introduction: Describing two dimensional linear systems, the basics of scalar diffraction theory.
Imaging properties of lenses: Thin lens as a phase transformation device; Fourier transforming
properties of lens ion image formation: impulse response; relation between object and image.
Frequency analysis of optical imaging systems: The general model, diffraction, limited coherent
and incoherent cases, the coherent and optical transfer functions, the effect of aberrations of
frequency response. Measuring the optical transfer function as a figure of merit of optical
309
systems: slit, edge, grating, interferometric - methods. Applications: Spatial filtering,

holography.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Fourier Optics by Joseph W. Goodman
1. Coherent optics: Fundamentals and applications by W. Lauterborn, T. Kurz
2. Fourier Optics: An Introduction by E. G. Steward
310
DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE INFORMATION SCIENCE

2. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE: COMPUTER SCIENCE
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The mission of Narok university college department Computer and Information science is to
produce graduates with practical and intellectual skills appropriate to the needs of the present
and future Kenyan society. In line with the vision 2030 the department ensures that its students
acquire skills and knowledge that will enable them make a positive contribution to national
development. In this context the department will equip the students with skills appropriate for
the transfer of modern information technology.
The computer science curriculum reflects the multidisciplinary nature of science and contains
diverse courses ranging from basic physical sciences to applied courses in mathematics,
physics, communication, information technology, business and management, economics and
social science.
The curriculum encourages the students to acquire the important skills of self-directed learning,
problem solving and effective communication. The graduate is expected to be proficient in a
variety of setting, which shall include management of computer information systems, teaching
and undertaking research activities.
This curriculum is intended to provide the students with a sound basis for future postgraduate
work.
2.0
PHILOSOPHY OF THE PROGRAMME
technology to succeed, trained personnel is needed to sustain it through academic rigor,
partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Computer Science
programme is designed to respond to the dynamic demands of the world.
3.1
RATIONALE OF THE PROGRAMME
The department of computer and information science designed the BSC Computer Science
curriculum with the flexibility to accommodate emerging challenges. Computer Science
students at Narok University combine theory with practice, gaining skills that produce results
and improve technology in a morally upright and ethical way. In class, students get the latest in
both theory and practical applications from dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are
complemented with hands-on laboratory experience.
3.11 NEEDS ASSESSMENT/ MARKET SURVEY/ SITUATION
ANALYSIS
In principle, Computer Science is a fundamental science to technology and innovation and it
311
has been identified as a central plank for Kenya's development and a foundation for vision
2030. To drive the attainment of vision 2030, scientists would need to be trained, accordingly.
Computer science would be crucial to the achievement of the outlined vision.
3.12
JUSTIFICATION OF THE PROGRAMME
The Computer science program is designed to empower students with skills necessary to the
industry. Also, students who complete the programme can pursue postgraduate studies.
3.2
GOALS OF THE PROGRAMME
The computer science program at Narok University has many roles to play. A primary goal of
the program is the education of students to fulfill needs in industrial, commercial, government,
and university environments. Such a diversity of settings requires that the students have a
strong foundation in the field of computer science so as to be capable of productive work
anywhere.
3.3
EXPECTED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE PROGRAMME

By the completion of the prescribed programme, the Narok University College graduate
will be able to:
3.4
3.5
Meet the ever increasing demand of trained personnel computer science in various
fields
Have adequate knowledge and skills so as to be able to work independently as
computer hardware and software specialist
Participate in research and development of IT
Take up employment in computer industry, research institutions or any other
relevant private or public sector
Apply the process of critical reasoning in managing computer systems and
information
Venture into entrepreneurship and marketing
Capture process and disseminate information
Maintain the highest professional standards in information technology
Contribute effectively in the industrialization process of the Kenya nation
Adapt to, participate in and acts as agents of change in this age of information
technology
Effectively plan, supervise and mobilize human, financial, capital and information
technology for efficient achievement of the goals of an information technology
organization
MODE OF DELIVERY OF THE PROGRAMME

access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice.
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
312
3.5.1 ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

i)
Meet the minimum University admission criteria
ii)
Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
CLUSTER A
CLUSTER B
BIOLOGY
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
GEOGRAPHY
OR MATHEMATICS
PHYSICS
GEOGRAPHY
3.5.2
COURSE REQUIREMENTS

The General University Examination Regulations and the special examination regulations
set by the school of Science shall apply. End of semester exams are written within 3-hour
period. The weighting for each course is as follows:
(a)
Theory Courses
30%
70%
(b)
Theory and Laboratory based Courses

20%
20%
60%

313
To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Computer Science, a student shall satisfy all the
university requirements pertaining to the degree. Students shall take all the units offered in the
first, second, third and fourth year of study.
below:
Submitted Project Report
70%
Oral examination
30%
lessons, tests, quizzes, essays or small project exercises. Some of the lecture courses may be
examined primarily or completely by assignments, where the nature of the course is unsuitable
for assessment by examination,
YEAR I
314
SEMESTER I
CODE
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COM 110
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND COMPUTING
PHY 110
BASIC PHYSICS I
COM 111
COM 113
MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE I
MAT 110
BASIC CALCULUS
IRD 100
COMMUNICATION SKILLS I
IRD 101
QUANTITATIVE SKILLS I
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
CODE
DESCRIPTION
PHY 111
BASIC PHYSICS II
MAT 111
GEOMETRY AND ELEMENTARY APPLIED MATHEMATICS
COM 120
SYSTEM HARDWARE
COM 121
PROCEDURAL PROGRAMMING I
COM 123
MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE II
IRD 102
IRD 103
DEVELEOPMENT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS
TOTAL
YEAR II
SEMESTER I
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 210
PROCEDURAL PROGRAMMING II
COM 211
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
COM 212
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS I
COM 215
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
COM 217
ELECTRONICS I
IRD 104
MAT 211
CALCULUS AND ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY
MAT 216
INTERNET FUNDAMENTALS
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 220
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING I
COM 221
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
PHY 210
315
4
3
3
3
3
3
22
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
22
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
22
3
3
3
COM 222
COM 223
COM 224
STA 205
MAT 213
INTERNET APPLICATIONS
OPERATING SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS
DATA STRUCTURES
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
LINEAR ALGEBRA II
TOTAL
3
3
3
3
3
24
YEAR III
SEMESTER I
CORE COURSES
CODE
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COM 310
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
COM 311
COMPUTER SCEINCE PROJECT I
COM 312
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING II
COM 313
ELECTRONICS II
COM 315
ALGORITHMS
COM 330
INTERMEDIATE HYPER TEXT MARK-UP LANGUAGE
TOTAL
SOFTWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 316E NUMERICAL COMPUTATION
COM 318E DATABASE SYSTEMS
COM 319E ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3
3
3
3
3
3
18
3
3
3
HARDWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 309E ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
COM 314E DIGITAL ELECTRONICS II
COM 317E DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
3
3
3
SEMESTER II
CORE COURSES
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 320
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
COM 321
COMPILER DESIGN
COM 326
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
3
3
3
316
COM 329
FIELD/INDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT
TOTAL
6
15
SOFTWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 322E COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES OF OPERATION RESEARCH I
COM 323E INFORMATION SYSTEMS SECURITY
COM 325E COMPUTER APPLICATIONS II
3
3
3
HARDWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 324E MICROELECTRONICS
COM 327E DIGITAL ELECTRONICS III
COM 328E ELECTRONICS III
3
3
3
YEAR IV
SEMESTER I
CORE COURSES
CODE
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COM 410
USER INTERFACE DESIGN
3
COM 413
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
3
COM 415
HUMAN FACTORS IN COMPUTER AND INFROMATION SYSTEMS 3
COM 419
COMPUTER SYSTEMS DESIGN
3
TOTAL
12
SOFTWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 408E METRICS AND MEASUREMENT IN SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
COM 409E DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
COM 412E COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES OF OPERATION RESEARCH II
COM 417E COMPUTER GRAPHICS
COM 418E EXPERT SYSTEMS
COM 432E DESIGN TECHNIQUES FOR WEBSITES
HARDWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
317
3
3
3
3
3
3
COM 411E
COM 414E
COM 416E
SIGNAL PROCESSING I
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL MODULATION
3
3
3
SEMESTER II
CORE COURSES
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 421
ENGINEERING AND SOFTWARE LAW
COM 422
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND MICROPROCESSORS
COM 423
COMPUTER SCIENCE PROJECT II
COM 426
SIMULATION AND MODELLING
SOFTWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 420E ADVANCED COMPUTER GRAPHICS
COM 424E NEURAL NETWORKS
COM 425E ADVANCED ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
COM 431E HUMAN COMPUTER INTERFACE DESIGN
HARDWARE OPTION
CODE
DESCRIPTION
COM 427E DATA COMMUNICATION, ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION
COM 428E SIGNAL PROCESSING II
COM 429E MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
COM 430E ADVANCED COMPUTER SYSTEMS ARCHITECTURE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
YEAR I
COM 110: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND COMPUTING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to computer systems
At the end of the course the students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the
basic computer hardware and software.
318
Course Content
Introduction to computers; definition, History, computer hardware ,Input devices, output
devices, storage devices types (primary & secondary), capacity, CPU organization, Computer
Software:- system software : Introduction to operating systems, Utility programs, Editors,
Compilers, etc. Windows/ MS-DOS Introduction, Application software: Packages, word
processing, PowerPoint, spreadsheet (Instructor to give practical exercises on the mentioned
packages) programming languages: Low- Level, & High level languages. File organization
methods.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

(i)
(ii) Onunga J. (1999): Introduction to Micro-computers and Programming: Information
Systems Academy.
(iii) Szymanski R. A., Szymanski D. P., and Pulschen D. M. (1994): Computers and
COM 111:
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to the most commonly used modern computer application software
At the end of the course the student is expected to understand and to use the features of:
(1)
Modern word processing software to create and control the layout t of documents
such as essays, reports, theses, letters and CVs.
319
(2)
Spreadsheets software to organize numerical data, perform calculations on the data

and present the data graphically.
(3)
Database software to design a database to find particular groups of data and design
reports to present selected data in meaningful ways.
Course content
The course is designed to cover Ms Word, Ms Excel, Ms Access and Ms PowerPoint as
the major application software.
The course entails manipulation of text that involves keyboarding, editing, formatting,
saving and printing the document e.g. letters, reports, books proposals, articles etc.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Continuous Assessment: 40 % where 10 % shall be continuous assessment tests, 10 %

shall be assignments, and 20 % shall be labs.

1. http://www.bookboon.com Ms office manuals
1.
2.
A Balanced Introduction to Computer Science, David Reed, Prentice Hall.
2004
3.
Introduction to computers and windows by N. A. Saleemi and Ephraim Waruhiu,
N. A. Saleemi publishers, Nairobi, 2003. Computer Studies, by Dr. Onunga.
COM 113: MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to mathematics fundamental to computer science and also form a
foundation to digital electronics
320

Use the laws of propositional logic to simplify or analyze compound propositions; use
truth tables to establish logical equivalence and validity of arguments;
Use set operations and Venn diagrams; apply elementary counting techniques;
Use Boolean algebra and Karnaugh maps to simplify Boolean expressions; design,
analyze and/or simplify logic circuits;
Represent relations using graphs, ordered pairs and directed graphs; identify
equivalence relations; use modular arithmetic; use function notation; identify onto and
one-to-one functions; use composition of functions; find the inverse of a function;
Convert integers and fractions between decimal, octal, binary and hexadecimal number
systems; perform simple arithmetic in these systems;
Use 2s complement representation of integers; interpret addition operations using CCR

flags; perform BCD addition; use ASCII codes;
Identify isomorphic graphs and planar graphs; use matrix representation of graphs;
identify Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs;
Find sums and products of matrices; apply the algebra of matrices to simple exercises in
computer graphics and cryptography.
Course content
Propositions, connectives and truth tables; logical equivalence; laws of logic; arguments;
predicate logic. Sets and set operations; Venn diagrams; laws of sets; cartesian product,
counting techniques. Boolean algebra; logic gates; Karnaugh maps; simplification of Boolean
expressions; design and simplification of logic circuits; universality of NANDs. Relations and
their representations; equivalence relations and classes; modular arithmetic; application to
cryptography. Function as process, function as relation; onto and one-to-one functions;
composition and inverse functions. Decimal, octal, binary and hexadecimal number systems
and conversions of integers and fractions; arithmetic in these systems. Computer representation
of integers; addition and interpretation using CCR flags; addition of BCD numbers; ASCII
code. Null and complete graphs, complements; isomorphic graphs; matrix representation of
graphs; planar graphs; Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs. Addition and multiplication of
matrices; transpose; zero and identity matrices; laws of matrix algebra; inverse of a square
matrix; finding determinant and inverse of 22 matrix; application of matrices to computer
graphics and cryptography.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
321
total mark

1. Booth, D. J. (2000). Foundation discrete mathematics for computing. Melbourne:
Chapman & Hall.
1. Clark, F. J. (2001). Mathematics for programming computers. (3rd ed.). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
2. Graham, R. L., Knuth, D. E. and Patashnik, O. (2011). Concrete mathematics: a
foundation for computer science. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
3. Lipschutz, S. (2009). Essential computer mathematics, Schaum Outline series in
computers. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
4. Molluzo and Buckley - A First Course in Discrete Mathematics, Any publisher or
Coursepak.
5. L. Lovasz, J. Pelikan, K. Vestergombi - "Discrete Mathematics", Springer 2003
COM 120:
SYSTEM HARDWARE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on hardware part of the computer system. It provides an in depth
study of the processor, memory and input/output devices.
Explain the basic principles of processor structure

Identify various I/O devices and their diversity
Explain the principles underlying communications between computers at the physical
and data link levels
Course content
Processor structure, Data and instructions, Instruction Set Processor (ISP) level view of
computer hardware, assembly language level use. Memory systems RAM and disks,
hierarchy of memories. I/O organization, I/O devices and their diversity, their interconnection
to the CPU and memory. Communication between computers at the physical level. Network
and computers.
322
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Mac Ewen G. H. (1980). Introduction to Computer Systems. New York: McGraw-Hill.
1. William Stallings (1996). Computer Organization and Architecture (5th Ed.). Prentice
Hall
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum (2003). Structured Computer Organization (4th Ed). Prentice
Hall.
3. Hwang K. & Briggs, F. A. (1987). Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing. New
York
COM 121:
PROCEDURAL PROGRAMMING I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to procedural programming and general programming concepts
Define programming
Explain types of programming languages
Understand data types, control structures, algorithms and flowcharts
Write programs in C
Course content
Introduction to programming, Algorithms, flowcharts, Data types, Scanf and printf functions,
Variables and expressions, Promotion and typecasting, Operators and expressions, Control
structures: Conditional statements, For loop, Do and do-while loop, Break ,switch, continue
statements
323
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. KR Venugopal (1997).Programming with C (7th Ed).Tata McGraw.Hill
1. M. Brain (2002).introduction to programming in C
COM 123:
MATHEMATICS FOR COMPUTER SCIENCE II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to develop a strong foundation in the field of digital electronics.
- Define and analyze problems of propositional logic, predicate calculus and Boolean
algebra
- Interpret and validate 1st order logic
Course content
Proposition logic, language of propositional logic, simple semantics with truth table,
interdefinability of logic connectives. Gentzen proof theory. Consistency. Boolean algebra as
models. Soundness and completeness. Predicate logic, predicates, quantification, formalizing
English statements. Inference rules for quantifiers. Semantics of predicate calculus. Equality.
Mode of delivery
324
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Mathematical structure for computer science. W. H. Freeman & Co., 2007
1. Molluzo and Buckley - A First Course in Discrete Mathematics, Any publisher or
Coursepak.
2. L. Lovasz, J. Pelikan, K. Vestergombi - "Discrete Mathematics", Springer 2003
PHY 110
BASIC PHYSICS I
4 CREDIT HOURS
COURSE OUTLINE
Mechanics and Properties of Matter:
Vectors, Rectilinear motion. Newton's laws of motion and their applications. Composition and
resolution of forces. Uniform circular motion. Newton's law of gravitation. Gravitational
constant G and Acceleration due to gravity, g. Simple harmonic motion. Determination of g.
Conservation of energy and momentum. Flow of liquids. Viscosity. Surface tension. Elasticity;
elastic constants and their importance.
Thermal physics: Expansion of solids, liquids and gases. Scales of temperature, gas and
resistance thermometers. Perfect gas-absolute temperature. First law of thermodynamics,
specific heat capacities of gases at constant pressure and volume. Kinetic theory of gasesderivation of the relation for pressure. Mechanism of heat transfer; coefficient of thermal
conductivity. Black body, Stefan's law.
Sound: Equation of wave motion. Velocity of sound in solids and fluids. Waves on a string.
Relation between velocity and elasticity of the medium. Ultrasonics and their applications.
PHY 110: BASIC PHYSICS II
4 CREDIT HOURS
325
Electricity and magnetism: Properties of magnetic materials and their uses. Direct and
alternating current, behaviour of R.L and C (resistance, inductance and capacitance).
Measurement of R,L and C. Diode and rectification. Transistors: characteristics and
application. Working principle and application of the cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO).
Optics: Review of mirrors and lenses. Defects in lenses. Different kinds of microscopes and
telescopes. Particle and wave theories. Phenomena of interference, diffraction and polarisation.
Their applications.
Modern physics: Bohr's theory and Heisenberg's quantum concept. Explanation of atomic
spectra, X-rays. Structure of the nucleus. Natural and artificial radioactivity and its applications.
Introduction to Nuclear fission, fusion and nuclear reactor.
MAT 110
BASIC CALCULUS
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Understand geometric and analytic definitions of limits, continuity and differentiability.
Know the techniques used in solving differential calculus problems.
Apply concepts of differential calculus to day to day life situations such as optimization
problems, rate problems and curve sketching.
COURSE OUTLINE
Limits, continuity, differentiability and their properties. Applications: curve sketching,
optimization problems, related rates problems, Limits, continuity and differentiability of
functions of single variable: Parametric equations ans impilcity differentiation. Differentiation;
chain rule for derivatives, maxima and minima; Antiderivatives and its application to areas;
Application and differentiation; Rolles Theorem.
REFERENCES
Thomas, G. B. and Finney, R. L.: Calculus and Analytic Geometry; Narosa Publishing
House, 6th Edition, 1998.
Swokowski, E. W.: Calculus with Analytic Geometry, Alternate Edition, PWS

Publishers,
MAT 111
GEOMETRY AND ELEMENTARY APPPLIED MATHEMATICS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Plane analytic geometry ; polar coordinates and polar equations. Vectors in two and three
dimensions; Line and planes; Motion in straight line; relative motion of connected bodies;
friction; moments and couples; statics of particles and rigid bodies; centre of gravity; frame
works.
IRD 100
326
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
By the end of this course, the student should be able to:
To develop a better understanding of one self and others in the process of
communicating.
To recognize the necessity of communication for the implementation of an effective
profession.
To provide the basis for a greater degree of in depth evaluation and use communication
principles as they relate specifically to personal Christian growth and professional
effectiveness.
To discover careers in communication.
COURSE OUTLINE
Definition, elements, processes, and barriers to communication. Oral and written
communication. Public speaking, meetings, interviews, persuasion. Interpersonal
communication, public relations. Writing skills. Visual aids. Computer in communication.
Library user education, library orientation, organization and use of library resources. Types
of information sources. Understanding, teaching and learning processes. How to read and
learn efficiently, listening skills, understanding lectures, note taking and effective study habits.
REFERENCES
(i) Adler, R B.: Communication at Work; McGraw Hill Inc., New York, 1992
(ii) Samovar, L.A. and Mills, J.: Oral Communication: Message and Response; WM C
Brown, Iowa, 1983.
(iii)
Pearson, J. C. and Spitzberg, B. H.: Interpersonal Communication: Concepts,
Components and Contexts; 2nd Edition, WM C Brown, Iowa, 1990.
(iv)Muchiri, M. N.: Communication Skills: A Self-study Course for Universities and
Colleges; Longman, Nairobi, 1993.
IRD 101
QUANTITATIVE SKILLS
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
At the end of the course the learner will have attained the following:
i)
A broader knowledge and understanding of basic concepts learnt at secondary level.
ii)
A sound mathematical base for handling higher level mathematics
iii)
An overview of what was learnt at secondary level.
COURSE OUTLINE
Functions: domain and range, composite, odd, even, periodic, and inverses of functions,
Remainder and factor theorem, and Partial fractions. Trigonometry: radian measure, arc length
and area using radians, trigonometric identities; solution of trigonometric equations.
327
Logarithms Indices and surds. Combinations and permutations. Binomial expansion:

expansion of functions with positive, negative and rational indices. Series: geometrical and
arithmetic series. Quadratic equations. Complex numbers. Curve sketching. Set Theory; set
operations.
IRD 102
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
i) Communicate more effectively in the English language.
ii) Identify and avoid mannerisms that hamper effective communication.
iii)Develop good study habits and write good quality term papers and projects.
COURSE OUTLINE
The course discusses communication, its purpose and levels, principles and practice of both
written and oral communication; punctuation, capitalisation, paragraphing, sentence
construction, unity and coherence in writing, argumentation; reports and minutes, different
types of writing, such as argumentative, expository, descriptive, narrative, satirical writing and
reviews.
It also discusses speech, Public speaking and public reading. Study skill will include a good
study plan, following a lecture, active listening, note taking and making summaries, the use of
various sources likes encyclopedias, journals and efficient use of study groups.
REFERENCES
(i) Donders, G. Joseph (1980). How to Study. Nairobi: Uzima Press Ltd.
(ii) Dermond, W & E. People (1991). Communication and organization, 2nd ed. London:
Pitman Publishing.
(iii) Esat, R. et al. (1990). Get Sharp: Advanced Reading, Thinking & Writing Skills.
Nairobi & Kampala: E. A. Educational Publishers.
(iv) Lannon, J. M. (1988). Technical Writing. 4th ed. Massachusetts University: Scott,
Foreman & Co.
(v)Peter, C. B. (1994). A Guide to Academic Writing. Eldoret: Zapf Chancery.
(vi) R. Ludlow & F. Patterson (1994). The Essence of Effective Communication. London:
Prentice Hall.
(vii) Tarabian, K. L. (1996). A Manual for Writers of Term papers, Theses and Dissertations,
5th ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
IRD 103 : DEVELOPMENT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
At the end of the course a student is expected to:328
Explain concepts of development and apply them in the context of African country.
Discuss the gender issues in the context of development.

Discuss factors which affect development.
COURSE OUTLINE
Concepts of development, underdevelopment, Theories of development and underdevelopment.
Historical roots of African development and underdevelopment, Concept of Gender and
rationale for mainstreaming gender, Approaches to development. Development strategies,
indicators, problems and regional integration, population, resources and development,
agriculture and rural development, urbanization, industrialization and development, science,
technology and development, law, justice, politics and development, ethics, morality and
development.
REFERENCES
1. Introduction to Development Studies by Henie Swanepoel (Editor), Frik de Beer
(Editor) Oxford University Press Southern Africa; 2nd edition (May 31, 2001) ISBN-10:
0195718593
2. An Introduction to Sustainable Development by Jennifer A. Elliot, Publisher: Taylor and
Francis; 3 edition (March 14, 2007)
IRD 104
3 CREDIT HOURS
Record keeping: ledger, income, statement, balance sheet, assets and liabilities, analysis of
simple financial statement; interest, discount and commissions; simple and compound interests,
calculations of discount and commissions; Budgeting: personal and simple business budgets,
financial projection; simple investment analysis: cost of capital, working capital, capital
expenditure decision, return on capital invested; public accounts: revenue and expenditure,
balance of payments, balance of trade, Gross domestic products (GDP); Gross national
products (GNP); index numbers: simple determination and their uses, the concept of inflation;
taxation: purpose, principal types and calculation of personal income taxes, Value Added Tax
(VAT); Stock exchange: stocks, shares, bond, stock market ratios, share evaluation;
Demography: birth and death rate, growth rate, dependency ratio, population trend and
projections.
YEAR II
COM 210: PROCEDURAL PROGRAMMING 11
Purpose:
329
3 CREDIT HOURS
To introduce the learner to PROGRAMMING IN C++

At the end of the course students should be able to write and run programs in C ++
Course content
Introduction to programming IN C++ . Essential of problem oriented languages. Constants,
Variables, operators, expressions, data types, and library functions. I/O statements . Control
statements. Functions: Recursive functions, prototype functions. Arrays: Defining arrays,
processing arrays, and passing arrays to functions. Structures and unions. Pointers.
Course Assessment:


1. Deitel Deitel (2003). C++. How To Program (4th Ed). Prentice Hall India.
1. Kerningam Brian (1998). The C Programming Language. Prentice Hall.
2. Liberty Jesse (2001). SAMS Teach Yourself C++ (4th Ed). SAMS India.
COM 211:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on the software part of the computer system. It provides an in
depth study on the use of assemblers, compilers and interpreters.
Identify hardware and software interface of a system software

330
Explain the use of assemblers, compilers, loaders and linkers.
Interpret user-level view of operating systems.
Course content
Hardware-software interface, system kernel, system services, system evolution. Assemblers,
compilers, linkers and loaders. System component interfaces. User level view of operating
systems. Assembly language programming.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Onunga, John.Introduction to micro-computers and programming.(1999).Information
Systems Academy.
1. Mandell, Steven, L. (1998). Computers and Information Processing. Cincinnati: SouthWestern Publishing Company ISBN 0538682760
COM 212:
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to digital electronics
Explain the atomic structure of materials, electrical conduction
Design and detail electronic diagrams

331
Apply the theory of Boolean algebra to logic gates
Course content
Number systems: Place value notation, signed binary, Twos compliment BCD. Digital
arithmetic: addition, subtraction. Boolean Algebra: Boolean laws, minimization of terms by De
Morgans Laws. NOR, NAND, NOT, OR operations. Logic elements: Gates, Switches,
electronic realization of gates and switches. Diode switches, Transistor switches, DTL, TTL,
ECL, Buffers. Characteristics of logics; Logic circuit: Logic circuit analysis. Logic circuit
design. Minimization using K-maps. MSI logic circuit. Flip flops- RS , JK, DT, Data Latches.
Counters and registers
Mode of delivery
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors,
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Elijah Mwangi; Foundations of Digital Electronics, 1st Edition; University of Nairobi
press, 2009.
1. Douglas Lewin; Logical Design of Switching Circuits, 2nd Edition; Robert Hartnoll Ltd
2. James B & Robert, D; Digital Electronics, 5th Edition , Thompson Learning 2007,
COM 215:
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to electronics circuits
332
3 CREDIT HOURS
Define basic circuit elements and apply kirchoffs laws: in problem solving
Use nodal, mesh and superposition analysis and Thevenins theorem in circuit analysis
Course content
Basic definition of circuit elements and variables; kirchoffs laws: circuit elements in series and
in parallel. Circuit analysis; nodal analysis, mesh analysis, superposition theorem, Thevenins
theorem, Nortons theorem, compensation theorem, reciprocity theorem, maximum power
transfer; sinusoid excitation and phasors, admittance and conductance; average and effective
value of a.c waveforms, node and mesh cct steady state analysis, nodal analysis.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

2. University physics, by Hugh D. Young and Roger A. Freedman, Addison Wesley, 2007.
3. Physics for Engineers by Hans C. Ohanian and John Market, W. M. Norton and Co. Ltd,
2007
COM 216:
INTERNET FUNDAMENTALS
Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on the fundamentals of the Internet.
Explain what todays information superhighway is

333
3 CREDIT HOURS
Demonstrate ways to join the internet
Find and access information in the WWW
Course content
Overview of todays super highway Internet. History and technology, access providers and
ways to join the Internet. Basic applications e.g Email, USENET news, finding and accessing
information in the world wide web.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Onunga, John.The Internet.(1999).Information Systems Academy.
The Internet
COM 217:
ELECTRONICS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to electronics
334
Explain the working principles of p-n junction and transistors, and give their
applications
Work through the biasing of a transistor amplifier
Course content
Semiconductor theory; intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors; junction diodes, Zener, light
emitting, photoconductive, photoresistive diodes. Application of diodes. Fabrication and
characteristics of B.J.T Transistor biasing, load line, Q-point. Transistor a.c equivalent circuits.
Small signal amplifies: current voltage and power gain input and output impendence. Brief
survey of other electronic devices such as thyristors, diacs, triacs, FET, UJT.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 220:
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course introduces the student on the process of software development life cycle. (SDLC)

At the end of the course, the student should be able to
335
Understand and interpret the software life cycle
Use several methods of software development
Demonstrate an understanding of the important features of good design
Apply alternative methods to estimate the cost of a software project and understand the
limitations of these methods.
Course content
Software life cycle: from the requirement specification and design phases, through the
construction of actual software. Software engineering methodologies e.g. SSADM and JSD.
Management of programming teams; programming methodologies; debugging aids;
documentation; evaluation and measurement of software performance verification and testing
techniques. The problems of maintenance; modification and portability.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Sommerville, I. 2002. Software Engineering. 6th Ed. India: Pearson Education
1. Awad, E.M. 2002. Systems Analysis and Design. 2nd Ed. New Delhi: Galgotia
2. FitzGerald, J. and A. FitzGerald. 1987. Fundamentals of Systems Analysis: Using
Structured Analysis and Design Techniques. Singapore: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
336
COM 221:
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to computer organization
Be familiar with the characteristics and purpose of all the sub-units in a computer
system
Understand the sequence of internal events as a computer executes an instruction
Course content
Design of a simple arithmetic and logic unit (ALU). System Buses. Cache Memory. Internal
Memory. External Memory. Input / Output. Operating System Support. Arithmetic. RISC
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Computer Organization and Architecture Designing for performance 8ed William
Stallings
Hall.
York
337
COM 222:
INTERNET APPLICATIONS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course puts emphasis on the services of the Internet and the hypertext mark up language.
At the end of the course the student should be able to
Access and search sites eg FTP, Gopher sites
Transfer files to a host computer
Use a web browser
Organize mail, create and maintain an address book
Course content
Access and search FTP and gopher sites, transfer files to a host computer using FTP and telnet
to a host computer, to move and rename files; web browser; set preferences, download and
install plug-ins organize bookmarks and copy images. Organize email, create and maintain an
address book . Introduction to HTML; formatting links, Lists and Tables.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Onunga, John.The Internet.(1999).Information Systems Academy.
1. The Internet
PHY 210

338
Electric Charge and Current: Coulomb's law

Electric field: Electric dipole. Electric Field in Conductors and Dielectrics! Gauss's law for E,
Symmetric Charge Distribution
Electric potential: The Gradient of potential. Potential Difference, Divergence and Curl.
Capacitance: Electric energy, Forces and Torques, Combination of Capacitors. Dielectrics and
polarization:
Dipole moment. Permittivity, Electric Displacement, Boundary relationships and continuity.
Current and Circuits: Resistivity, Series and Parallel resistors, Kirchhoffs laws, Conductivity.
Magnetic field: Force between Current Elements; Properties of magnetic Fields, Bio-Savart law.
Static magnetic field of Steady Current. The Ampere, Current Carrying loop. Magnetic flux.
Torque, The Solenoid. Maxwell's 1st Curl Equation.
COM 223:
OPERATING SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to fundament concepts of operating systems and networks
Be familiar with the purpose of operating systems in a computer
Understand computer network principles and concepts
Course content
Processes, threads, SMP, and Microkernel; Concurrency; I/O and files; Computer network and
internet; Application, Transport, Network and link layer; LAN
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
339

1.
Computer networking: a top down approach 5th Edition by James F. Kurose and Keith
W. Ross, Pearson, 2010
2.
Operating systems internal and design principles 6th edition by William Stallings,
Pearson, 2009
Hall.
York
COM 224 :
DATA STRUCTURES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To equip the learner with the knowledge of data management and manipulation through
organized set of operations.
At the end of the course students should be able to explain the implementation of data
structures by algorithms.
Course content
Arrays and their implementation. Storage algorithms. Strings. Application and implementation
of stacks, queues, linked lists, trees:- Binary trees, Binary search tree, complete tree, forest, BTree, AVL tree, graphs:- Sparse and dense, graph representation, adjacency matrix and
adjacency linked list, Traveling sales person, Breadth First search and Depta first search .
Sorting algorithms: quick sort, bubble sort, binary sort, shell sort, merge sort, heap sort and
insertion sort.
Instructional materials / Equipment:
Computers, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
340
total mark

1. Dale, Nell, et al (1985). Pascal Plus Data Structures, Algorithms and Advanced
Programming. C. Health and Company.
1. Harel, D. (1987). Algorithmic: The Spirit of Computing. London: Addison-Wesley,
Reading.
2. Sedgewick, R. (1988). Algorithms. London: Addison Wesley.
3. 4.
Thomas, A. S. (1995). Data Softwares, Algorithms and Software Principles to
Computers. London: Addison Wesley.
4. 5.
Weiss Mark Allen (1997). Data Structures and Algorithmic Analysis in C. 2nd
Ed. Pearson Education Asia.
STA 205
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
By the end of the course, the student should be able to
Explain and perform arithmetic operations on probability

State and apply common theorems used in statistics
Apply statistical knowledge in solving problems in situations such as quality control
and analysis
COURSE OUTLINE
Additional and multiplication of probabilities, conditional probability, Bayes theorem.
Binomial, Poisson an Normal Distributions. Elementary treatment for large and small samples.
Chi squares, F and t-test. Correlation and regression analysis: linear, multiple. Method of least
square, curve fitting. Estimation. Testing of significance. Confidence bounds. Application of
statistics in Quality control. Stochastic processes. Statistical inference.
MAT 213
LINEAR ALGEBRA II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Inner product spaces, orthonormal basis, gram-Schmidt orthogonalization.

Linear
transformations and their matrices with respect to standard basis, Linear transformation with
341
respect to an abitrary basis. Change of basis, dimension theorem, eigen values and eigen
vectors, diagonalization, applications to differential equations and geometry.
YEAR III
COM 309E
ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Define and explain signal sources and do signal analysis
Apply signal modulation methods to problem solving
Explain the functions of transmitters and receivers in signal transmission
Use at least one information coding method
Course content
Signal sources; signal analysis, amplitude modulation, angle modulation, digital modulation,
pulse modulation; transmission path; transmitters and receivers; information and theory and
coding
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

342
1. Digital Designs, By Mano M. M., Ciletti M. D., 4Th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006
3. Digital systems: Principles and Applications, By TOCCI Ronald J., Widmer Neal S.,
Moss Gregory L., 10th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006ata Structures and Algorithm in Java
by Robert Lafore, Second Edition, Sams Publishers, 2001
COM 310:
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to computer architecture and related issues
Define what computer architecture is
Explain the bus system
Understand the memory structure
Describe computer addressing modes
Understand CPU architecture
Course content
Elements of computer, Electronic computer, System architecture, System inter-connection
methods, Bus design elements, System memory, Types of RAM, The Hard Disk Drive, The
Hard Disk: Data storage and organization, The Input and Output subsystem, Direct Memory
Access, CPU Architecture :Instruction Set Architecture.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
343
total mark

1. William Stallings(2008).Computer organization and Architecture ( 8th Ed.).Prentice
Hall
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum(2003).Structured computer organization (4th Ed).Prentice
2. Hwang K.&Briggs,F.A.(1987).Computer Architecture and parallel processing.New york
3. John P. Hayes(1998).Computer architecture and organization ( 3rd Ed.) McGraw-Hill.
4. Mac Ewen G.H.(1980).Introduction to computer systems .New York :McGraw-Hill
5. Nicholas carter adopted by Raj kamal (2006). Computer Architecture
COM 311
COMPUTER SCIENCE PROJECT I
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
By the end of the course,the students should have gained practical experience of
Project planning
Specification, design ,implementation and testing of a system to meet users
requirements.
Defining and meeting obligations
The benefits and problems encountered in the project
Application of technical knowledge to solve problems
COURSE OUTLINE
The student will work with the instructor in specifying ,designing and implementing a real
world project. It is expected that an industry or educational establishment will use the project.
COM 312: SOFTWARE ENGINEERING II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course puts an emphasis on aspects of software production and project management.
Explain the different phases a design passes through before being implemented.
Identify human factors affecting software engineering.
Illustrate the understanding of the important features of various design methods.
Describe the software testing techniques.
344
Course content
Review of software development life cycle. Human factors in software development.
Comparative study of requirements engineering methods, design methods, computer aided
design (CAD). Software testing techniques. Computer aided software engineering (CASE)
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluation by head of department and self
evaluation.
COM 313:
ELECTRONICS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to signal analysis and amplifiers
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
- Explain the principles of small signal analysis
- Design BJT and FET amplifiers
- Explain the working principles of A, B, and C amplifiers
345
Course content
Small signal analysis; BJT and FET amplifiers: d.c coupled amplifiers, chopper stabilized
amplifiers, class A, B and C amplifiers; principles of feedback; linear and switching mode
power supplies.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 314E: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Appreciate the role of digital systems in modern life,
understand the various number systems and where they are used in digital systems
explain the properties of various binary codes and their applications in digital systems
understand the laws of Boolean algebra
apply the Karnaugh map method to simplify Boolean expressions.
describe the characteristics of the different logic families
346
Course content
Modular design of combinational circuits; Multiplexers, demultiplexers, decoders, encoders,
comparators ;Arithmetic functions;Multipliers, dividers ; ALUs, Hierarchical design of
combinational circuits using logic modules.Sequential logic circuits: Finite state machines
(FSMs), clocked and unclocked ;Mealy vs. Moore models of FSMs ; Modeling FSM behavior:
State diagrams and state tables, timing diagrams, algorithmic state machine charts; Analysis of
synchronous and asynchronous circuits; Design of synchronous sequential circuits: State
minimization, state assignment, next state and output equation realization ;Sequential
functional units:
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

press, 2009.
COM 315:
ALGORITHMS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to a variety of computer algorithms and how to evaluate performance of
an algorithm
Evaluate performance of an algorithm or program using the O notation

347
Explain algorithm design techniques such as divide and conquer and greedy algorithm
Explain a variety of sorting algorithm
Course content
Evaluating the performance of algorithms: O notation, best, worst and average case analysis;
recurrent relations and their solution. Divide and conquer techniques, greedy methods, search
and traversal techniques. Sorting techniques.
Mode of delivery
Computers with java installed, writing boards, writing materials and projectors,
Course Assessment:


1.
1. Programming with Objects: A comparative presentation of Object Oriented
2. Mac Ewen G.H.(1980).Introduction to computer systems .New York :McGraw-Hill
3. Deitel Deitel (2008). Java. How To Program (6th Ed). Prentice Hall India.
COM 316E: NUMERICAL COMPUTATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
The purpose of the course is to equip the student with basic numerical techniques and
procedures for obtaining appropriate solution to engineering problems
348
Acquire skills in the use of modern numerical software

Have experience in the use of numerical techniques in solution of mathematical
modeling problems
Understand the estimation and control of approximation error
Course content
Approximation, truncation errors, application of numerical integration and differentiation
Course Assessment:
total mark

1.
Burden R. L,, Faires J. D., Numerical Analysis; 8TH Edition Publisher: Brooks Cole;
(2004) Language: (ISBN 10: 0534392008 ISBN 13: 978-0534392000)
1.
Numerical Methods Vedamurthy V. N., Iyengar N.; Sangam Books, 1998.
2.
Numerical Methods; Problems and Solutions by Jain, Mahinder Kumar, Iyengar, S. R.
K., New Age nternational Publishers, 2004
3.
Numerical Analysis by Richard L. Burden, J. Douglas Faires Brooks Cole; 2000
4.
Schaumss Outline of Numerical Analysis by Francis Scheid McGraw-Hill; 1989.
COM 317E:
DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to the principles of computer networks.
349

At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate knowledge of design and
implementation of computer networks.
Course content
Introduction to Computer networks History, defini+tions; types e.g. LANs, WANs, MANs, etc.
Network topologies, network architecture; protocols, interfaces; Internetworking hardware e.g.
bridges, routers, Brouters and gateways, Circuit switching vs. Packet switching, Factors to
consider during network design, Wireless networking. Protocols: OSI, TCP/IP
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Stallings, W. (2008). Data & Computer Communications. Prentice
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tanenbaum, A. S., (2006) Computer Networks. Prentice Hall.

Journal of Parallel Distributed system
Beyda W. (2000).Data Communications. Prentice Hall.
Fitzgerald, J. (1997), Business Data Communications and Networking. London: Wiley.
Halsal, F. (2000). Data Communication & Computer networks. Pearson Education
COM 318E: DATABASE SYSTEMS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to the design and implementation of database systems
350

Review of the essential principles that guide the design, implementation, and
management of systems capable of managing large amounts of data efficiently,
including Physical and Logical Database Architectures, integrity and security.
Tackles relational data models and the use of a query language.
Explores new directions in the field selected from topics such as object-oriented
databases, data warehousing, and data mining.
The secondary objective of the course is to learn how to research and review advances
in the field.
To explore new directions in the field.
Course content
Overview of database systems: managing data, file systems vs DBMS, Advantage of DBMS,
storing data in a DBMS, queries, transaction management, structure of a DBMS. Database
design: ER diagrams, entities, attributes, relationships, conceptual design. Relational model:
integrity constraints, querying relational data, logical database design, views. SQL: queries,
constraints and triggers. Security and authorization models. Transactions, concurrency control,
recovery protocols. Object-oriented and object-relational databases. Data mining and data
warehouse
Course Assessment:


1. R. Ramakrishnan and J. Gehrke, Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition, McGrawHill, 2002, ISBN: 0-07-232206-3.
1. Elmasri, Ramez and Navathe, Shamkant B. Fundamentals of Database Systems. 5th ed.
Addison-Wesley, Reading MA, 2006.
351
2. Hector Garcia-Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Jennifer Widom. Database Systems: The
Complete Book Prentice Hall. 2002.
3. Michael Stonebraker and Joseph M. Hellerstein. Readings in Database Systems, 3rd
Edition 1998.
4. M. Kifer, A. Bernstein, and P.M. Lewis Database Systems, An application oriented
approach, second edition, Addison-Wesley, 2005, ISBN: 0-321-26845-8
COM 319E: ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To explore the idea that computers can be programmed to emulate human-like intelligence.
Explain AI concepts and techniques
Demonstrate an initial understanding of the major branches of AI, especially heuristics

problem solving, expert systems and intelligent agents
Decide whether a problem posed is suitable for solution by heuristic problem solving
procedure
Course content
Areas and issues in AI; heuristic problem solving: problem formulation; hill climbing; depth
first and breadth first search; the combinatorial explosion and heuristics; best first search;
branch and bound search; A* and iterative; deepening A* algorithms; elements of Genetic
Algorithms.
Introduction to application oriented AI: main concepts of Expert Systems; production systems;
forward and backward chaining; initial ideas of knowledge representation and knowledge
engineering. Introduction to agent architectures and multiple agent systems; reactive versus
deliberate agent; Artificial life approaches including concepts of emergent behaviour; test-beds
and their use.
Course Assessment:
352


1. Ian Pratt (1994). Artificial Intelligence. Macmillam Press Ltd.
1. Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight (1991). Artificial Intelligence. McGraw Hill Publishers.
2. Bratko (1997), Programming in prolog (2nd ed.). Addison Wesley.
COM 320:
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to digital systems design
Use Boolean theory in problem solving
Distinguish between sequential and combinational circuits
Design combinational, sequential and counter circuits
Explain the working of the microprocessor
Course content
Logic gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOR, NAND) & application. Boolean algebra: Boolean
theorem, Karnaugh maps, minimization. Combinational logic circuits: adders, comparators,
decoders, encoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers & error control circuits. Number systems:
binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal, floating-point & operations, BCD & excess-3 codes.
Sequential circuits: latches and flip-flops. Memory components: counters, decoders, shiftregisters, BCD counters, data registers. Introduction to data transmission: synchronous and
asynchronous transfer. Microprocessors. Interfacing with external devices.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
353
total mark

press, 2009.
COM 321 : COMPILER DESIGN
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
This course aims at teaching students about compiler development methodology and its
associated technology to modern applications. The course contents include formal aspects,
lexical analysis, syntax analysis, syntax-directed translation, run-time environments,
intermediate code generation, code generation and code optimization.
represent language tokens using regular expressions and finite automata
write a lexical analyzer for a language and generate a lexical analyzer using Flex
implement type checking for a block-structured language using a symbol table
generate target code for a stack-based runtime environment
Understand how source programs are mapped to target platforms via the compilation
process, and write better source programs based on this understanding.
Course content
Compilers and Interpreters. Main phases of compilation: lexical analysis, syntax analysis,
semantic analysis, code generation. Issues in compiler design: symbol tables, program
compilation, loading and execution. One-pass and two-pass techniques. Storage allocation.
Object code for subscripted variables. A simple complete compiler: organization, subroutine
and function compilation, bootstrapping techniques, multi-pass compilation. Optimization:
techniques, local, expressions, loops and global optimization.
354
Computers, Writing boards, writing materials, projectors etc.
Course Assessment:
total mark

1.
Aho, A.V., Lam, M.S., Sethi, R., and Ullman, J.D. (2007). Compilers: Principles,
Techniques, and Tools, Second Edition, Addison-Wesley.
1. D.M.Dhamdhere: Compiler construction, principles and practices, Mcmillan Ltd; 1983.
2. Kenneth C. Louden, (1997). Compiler Construction: Principles and Practice, Course
Technology.
COM 322E: COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES OF OPERATIONAL RESEARCH I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to understand LP problems and solutions,
Understand the basic characteristics of LP problems
Apply varicose forms of simplex methods to the solutions of LP problems
Appreciate the need for and be able to use specialized methods for special prblems
Course content
Linear programming methods: Graph theory and methodology of solving simple LP problems;
LP algorithm simplex methods, dual simplex. Applications: special problems, Transportation
problem, assignment and other variations of the LP problems.
Mode of delivery
355

Course Assessment:
total mark

1.
1.
Numerical Methods; Problems and Solutions by Jain, Mahinder Kumar, Iyengar, S. R.
K., New Age nternational Publishers, 2004
2.
Numerical Analysis by Richard L. Burden, J. Douglas Faires Brooks Cole; 2000
COM 323E: INFORMATION SYSTEMS SECURITY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce students to security of information systems and related issues.
At the end of the course students should be able to explain, design and implement security
measures in Information systems.
Course content
Course Introduction, Classical Encryption Techniques, Block Ciphers and DES, Modular
arithmetic, Ecluids Algorithm, Advanced Encryption Standard, Security services,
Confidentiality Using Symmetric Encryption, Principles Public-Key Cryptosystems and RSA
algorithm, Key Management Deffie Hellman Key Exchange, Message Authentication and
Hash Functions, Digital Signatures, Authentication Applications- Keberos, EMail Security, IP
security, Web Security
356

Course Assessment:
total mark

1. William Stallings; Cryptography and network security, 4th Edition;
1. Brenton & Hunt. (2003). Network Security. (2nd Ed.). New Delhi: BPB Publications.
2. Hugh Mackay, et al (2003). Investigating Information Society. Routledge.
3. Maiwald (2002). Network Security. New York: McGraw-Hill
4. Norton & Stockman. (2003). Network Security Fundamental. New Delhi: SAMS Tech.
5. Journal of Information Systems Security.
COM 324E: MICROELECTRONICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to microelectronics
Explain the logical sequence in silicon planar fabrication process
Explain in detail the process of diffusion, epitaxy, ion-implantation, metallization and

photolithography and describe the equipment used in each case.
Course content
Semiconductor theory; intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors; junction diodes, Zener, light
emitting, photoconductive, photoresistive diodes. Application of diodes. Fabrication and
characteristics of B.J.T Transistor biasing, load line, Q-point. Transistor a.c equivalent circuits.
Small signal amplifies: current voltage and power gain input and output impendence. Brief
survey of other electronic devices such as thyristors, diacs, triacs, FET, UJT.
Mode of delivery
357
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 325E: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJCTIVES
At the end of the course students should be able to analyze statistical data using statistical
software.
COURSE OUTLINE
The course reviews Statistical software and their applications, data management, descriptive
statistical, regression analysis and Correlation Analysis. Cluster analysis, Non-parametric tests,
Survival analysis, Time Series analysis and Case study.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
358


1.
A Balanced Introduction to Computer Science, David Reed,
2004
Prentice Hall.

1.
2.
Introduction to computers and windows by N. A. Saleemi and Ephraim Waruhiu,
N. A. Saleemi publishers, Nairobi, 2003. Computer Studies, by Dr. Onunga.
COM 326:
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to cover software methodologies and requirements analysis.
Recognize a well engineered piece of software
Explain several software development models
Work with a client to capture and document software requirements.
Identify current formal methods for software specification.
Course content
Models of good software development: Exploratory programming, Software Life Cycle (or
waterfall model), prototyping, Incremental, formal methods; related human factors.
Requirements analysis: Clients view and requirements capture, validation; the requirements
definition document and contract. Specification; system modeling; the software specification
document, performance metrics, validation.
Mode of delivery
359

Course Assessment:
total mark

COM 327E: DIGITAL ELECRONICS III
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to the design of logic gates and the principles of diode logic, DAC,
ADC
Explain the working principle of diode logic, DTL, TTL and CMOS devices
Design circuit using logic gates such as NAND and NOR gates
Explain the process of DAC and ADC conversion
Course content
Integrated logic networks: structure and characteristics of diode logic, diode-transistor logic,
transistor-transistor logic and complementary metal oxide semiconductors. Fabrication of
integrated logic networks. Digital Schmidt trigger. Multivibrator.
Combinatorial networks; universality of NAND and NOR gates, simplification of logic circuit
using Boolean theorems and K-maps. Sequential networks: flip-flops, application of flip-flops,
360
counters, shift registers. Application in parallel and serial transfer of information. Applications
of decision making circuits, encoders, decoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers, visual displays.
Digital to analogue and analogue to digital conversions.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

press, 2009.
COM 328E: ELECTRONICS III
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to amplifiers
Explain the working principle of the long tail pair and use it as building block in the
amplifier design
Analyze the amplifier performance by examining the frequency response and stability
Course content
Long-tailed pair, op-amps; current sources and active loads; frequency response and stability of
amplifiers; noise and interference; high frequency amplifiers.
361
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 329
FIELD/INDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT
6 CREDIT
HOURS
The main objective is to provide the student with the opportunity to apply knowledge obtained
from the rest of the course to the solution of practical problems, subject to a typical life
situation in industrial ,educational ,scientific and commercial areas. The student will spend time
working through the completion of a chosen life project in either software or hardware
COM 330: INTERMEDIATE HYPERTEXT MARK-UP LANGUAGE 3 CREDIT
HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to give the student a deeper understanding on the creation of web sites.
Create web pages and websites
Format and use tags, client pull and server push concepts
Understand the big picture of web site design
Code form styles and style sheets
Course content
362
Formatting tags, essential head tags, lists, images; Meta tags: coding referencing; absolute,
relative and bas frames: client pull and server push concepts. Examine the big picture of web
site design, creation and advertising code forms, styles and style sheets, multimedia.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Onunga, John.The Internet.(1999).Information Systems Academy.
1. The Internet
YEAR IV
COM 408E: METRICS AND MEASUREMENT IN SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to metrics and measurement in software development
Explain the principles of software measurement and

metrics
Use measurement and metric techniques to simple

software systems
Estimate project parameters
Course content
Theory of measurement and metrics. Experimental design and data analysis. Operational
profiles and usage specifications. Statistical usage testing and reliability estimates. Estimation
of project parameters. Defect tracking; six sigma.
Mode of delivery
363

Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Bell, D. (2000). Software Engineering. (3rd Ed.). London: Addison Wesley.
1. Pressman Rodgers (2001). Software Engineering. A Practioneers Approach (5th Ed).
McGraw Hill.
2. Sommerville (1998). Software Engineering. (5th Ed.) London: Addison Wesley.
3. Van, J.C. (1997). Software Engineering: Principles and Practice. London: J. Wiley Co.
COM 409E DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
3 CREDIT HOURS
OBJECTIVES
At the end of the course, the learners should be able to:
Define distributed systems

Explain characteristics of a distributed systems
Understand the issues in the design of distributed systems
Describe the middleware
Understand Replication and transparency in distributed systems
COURSE OUTLINE
Define distributed systems and why distributed systems, Discuss Distributed operating systems,
Issues in design of distributed systems, Define Middleware and its services, Models of
communication in a distributed system,RPC, Directory services, Fault tolerance, Failure
Models, Replication in distributed systems, Replication control, Clocks, Mutual exclusion
REFERENCES

Hwang K.&Briggs,F.A.(2002).introduction to distributed systems.New york
William Stallings(2007).distributed operating systems ( 5th Ed.).Prentice Hall
COM 410:
USER INTERFACE DESIGN
364
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to give the student a deeper understanding on the creation of web sites.
- User current tools and techniques for user interface development effectively and
efficiently
- Apply principles, guidelines and tools including usability/design patterns, usability
standards, look and feel guidelines
- Plan and conduct usability evaluation and testing
Course content
The human side: I/O; memory; and information processing. Interaction: mental models; human
error; interaction frame-works and paradigms. Direct manipulation. User interface design:
principles; standards and design rationale; heuristic evaluation; iterative design; and
prototyping. Task-centered design. Rationalized design: usability engineering; dialogue
notations; user models; diagrammatic notation; and textual notations. Evaluation: with the user;
quantitative and qualitative. Implementation support. Help and documentation.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Dix, A., Finlay J. et al. Human Computer Interaction. 3rd edition. Prentice Hall.
1. Plyse R., Moore. Graphical User interface Design and Evaluation. Prentice Hall.
COM 411E: SIGNAL PROCESSING 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
365
To introduce the learner to digital signal processing and design

At the end of the course students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of signal
processing techniques and their classification.
Course content
Digital signal processing: continuous vs. discrete time and frequency domains s- and ztransforms and speech processing: speech sampling, spectrograms and format analysis. Image
processing: geometric and interpolate restoration, contrast enhancement, histogramming
techniques, spatial and frequency domain filtering, edge detection and line following. Pattern
classification: principle component analysis, cluster analysis and scatter plots and computer
vision: scene analysis segmentation, logic grouping and object recognition are also examined.
Course Assessment:
total mark

4. Edward, K. and Hech, B. (2000). Fundamentals of Signal and Systems. New Jersey:
Prentice Hall.
1. Lee, S. (2000). Computer Design. Prentice Hall.
2. Journal of Intelligent Systems.
COM 412E: COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES OF OPERATION RESEARCH II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to non-linear optimization methods DFP and BFGD algorithms
366

Know how a minimum/maximum point can be characterized
Understand the use of single approximation functions
Understand the need for a one- dimensional search procedures and how these
procedures are incorporated into multi dimensional optimezers
Use various classes of algorithm to solve problems and understand the advantage of
each class
Course content
Non linear optimization methods:steepest descent ,newtonss method and the quasi-newton
methods DFP and BFGS algorithms.
Mode of delivery
Computers with java installed, writing boards, writing materials and projectors,
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Handay, A. T (2000). Operations Research. New York: Macmillan publishing Co.
1. Fletcher, R (2000). Practical Methods of Optimization. New York: MC GrawHill.
2. Law Averill & Kelton David (2000). Simulation Modeling and Analysis. SAMS.
COM 413E
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
Purpose
367
3 CREDIT HOURS
The purpose of the course is to enable the student apply a high level language for solution of
simple scientific problems, and for this purpose to manipulate the inputs/outputs of a computer
Programme using Object Oriented Programming Techniques.
- Understand and write object oriented programs of some size
-
Analyze and design classes in the domain problem

Choose and re-use existing classes
Design classes for reuse by others

Be aware of the impact of the platform on the tools and their integration
Course content
Data abstraction in object oriented programming. Comparison with traditional programming
techniques. Concepts of classes, messages, instances, methods, inheritance, polymorphism,
encapsulation, class and instance variable in the context of small talk and java programming
and small talk object oriented languages
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:


1. Deitel Deitel (2008). Java. How To Program (6th Ed). Prentice Hall India.
1. Data Structures and Algorithm in Java by Robert Lafore, Second Edition, Sams
Publishers, 2001
2. Frank Nielson (2009). A concise and practical introduction to programming algorithms
in java. Springer
368
3. Programming with Objects: A comparative presentation of Object Oriented

COM 414E: SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
The course is designed to give the student an introduction to semiconductor devices
Explain the dynamics of generation and recombination of minority carriers in a p-n

junction
Explain the working principles of various semiconductor devices and solve design
problems related to these devices
Course content
Energy bands, carrier transport ,recombination, injection level electric fields :diffusion
;Fabrication processes;wafer preparations ,epitaxial deposition ,oxidation ,masking and photo
processing
,impurity
introduction
and
redistribution
,chemical
vapour
deposition,metallization,non-silicon technologies;The p-n junction and metal semiconductor
junction diodes;special diodes,light emitting diodes;bipolar transistors and transistors and multi
layer devices;junction and metal-oxide semiconductor field effect transistors;charcg transfer
devices;intergrated devices;Negative resistance devices;tunnel ,gunn and avalanche diodes.
Chalkboard, handouts, overhead projector.
Course Assessment:
total mark

369

2007
COM 415:
HUMAN FACTORS IN COMPUTER AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to put emphasis on Human Computer Interaction and study of how
users interact with computer technology.
Demonstrate in some detail, a clear understanding of human factors to computer and

information systems.
Explain the principles of interactive computer systems.
Identify current issues in information systems.
Course content
The psychological, social and technical aspects of interaction between humans and computers.
Human factors, issues in the development of software, the use of database systems, and the
design of interactive computer systems. Experimentation programming language control and
data structures, programming style issues, documentation program development strategies,
debugging, and readability. Interactive system design issues such as response time, display
rates, graphics, or speech input/output.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

370

1. Plyse R., Moore. Graphical User interface Design and Evaluation. Prentice Hall.
2. Preece, J, Sharp, H, & Rogers, Y. (2002) Beyond Interaction Design. New York: Wiley
ISBN 0471402494
3. Shneiderman B. & Plaisant C. (2005) Designing the User Interface: Strategies for Effective
Human-Computer Interaction. 4th Ed. Boston: Pearson/Addison Wesley ISBN 0321197860
4. Dix, A., Finlay J. et al. Human Computer Interaction. 3rd edition. Prentice Hall.
COM 416 E: ANALOGUE AND DIGITAL MODULATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to analogue and digital modulation
At the end of the course ,the student should be able to:
Use methods learned in analogue and digital modulation designing a modulation system
Analyze signal to noise ratio of any amplitude modulation system
Explain the concepts of amplitude modulation and frequency modulation as applied to

broadcasting and communication
Work through problems of PCM and delta modulation
Course content
Amplitude modulation as frequency shifting ;diode ring and active double-balanced
modulators ;signal-to-noise performance of double side-band amplitude modulation
(AM).signal side band modulation ,Hilbert transform ;filter ,phasing and third methods of
SSB generation ;comparison of spectral occupancy and signal to- noise performance with
other A.M sources.Spectral occupancy of narrow band and wide-band frequency modulated
signals and the effects of noise ,pre-emphasis and de-emphasis .comparison of amplitude (AM)
and frequency modulation (FM)for broadcasting of radio and video signals and
communications.Sampling and quantization of noise .Baseband signaling ,PCM and delta
modulation.Additive Gausssian noise and bit error rates
Mode of delivery
371
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 417E: COMPUTER GRAPHICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The course is designed to teach the students theoretical and applied aspects of computer
graphics.
- Understand the limitation of producing graphic displays both at the hardware and
software level
- Understand how the computer system use the hardware to produce graphical displays
- Understand how primitive graphical operations are produced and the operations needed
to ensure correct displays of those operations
- Produce their own very simple graphics package
- Understand as to why mathematical operations are needed when graphical information
is being manipulated before displaying that information
- Use and write programs for standard graphical packages
Course content
Display memory; generation of points, vectors, e.t.c. interactive versus passive graphics; CRT
devices and plotters, analog storage of images. Digitizing and digital storage. Pattern
recognition. Data structures and graphics software. The mathematics of three-dimensional
transformation; projections. Applications in computer-aided design and instruction.
Mode of delivery
372
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. J.D. Foley et al (1990) Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice (2nd ed.). Addison
Wesley.
1. Donald Hearn, M. Pauline Baker (1994). Computer Graphics. Prentice Hall.
2. Salmon Rod and Slater Mel (1993). Computer Graphics. Addison Wesley.
COM 418E: EXPERT SYSTEMS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
There has been a radical shift in the management parlance. Organizations can use Intranets and
Internets to analyze various aspects about the performance and predict the future. This course
aims at exposing the student to one of the important applications of the computer.
- Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of domain specific knowledge in
practical problem solving and the advantages of production systems for representing
such knowledge in a procedural form
- Demonstrate an understanding of the forward and backward chaining control
architectures
- Assess a candidate problem to determine whether it is suitable for solution by an expert
system, taking account of technical, economical and social factors
- Demonstrate an understanding of the reasons why it is necessary to represent uncertain
knowledge in many expert systems
Course content
Basic concepts and techniques. Knowledge representation in inferencing. Building a small
expert system. Knowledge engineering and large system development. Survey of tools and
373
expert systems. The expert system market. Examination of significance artificial intelligence
systems embodying these concepts.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Ian Pratt (1994). Artificial Intelligence. Macmillam Press Ltd.
1. Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight (1991). Artificial Intelligence. McGraw Hill Publishers.
2. Bratko (1997), Programming in prolog (2nd ed.). Addison Wesley.
COM 419 COMPUTER SYSTEMS DESIGN

Purpose
To introduce students to computer systems design
3 CREDIT HOURS

- Understand the design options and challenges which have led to several different styles
of parallel architecture
- Understand the metrics used to quantify computer performance
- Understand the different high performance requirements of scientific computing and
commercial data processing
Course content
Migration from Von Neumann to parallel processing architecture: fine grained and coarse
grained concurrency, multi-threaded computers, massively parallel computers, fundamental
problems in hardware architecture and memory consistency. Embedding of algorithms on
shared-memory and message-passing architecture. Parallel programming supports: a parallel
program model, embedding of parallel programs on multiprocessors and distributed systems.
Key concepts in distributed systems.
Mode of delivery
374

Course Assessment:
total mark

COM 420E
ADVANCED COMPUTER GRAPHICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to complex graphical images
Understand the underlying mathematical theory of transformations
Explain the manipulation of complex graphical images
Explain shading and fractal geometry
Course content
3D viewing transformations;object hierarchy and 3D graphics standards(GL,PHIGS and
others);parametric curves,surfaces and solid modeling ;visible surface determination ;colour
models and shading ;textures mapping and imaging;ray tracing and radiocity ;advanced
animation techniques.optional topics:virtual reality issues and VRML;advanced raster
algorithms and modeling techniques
Mode of delivery
375
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. J.D. Foley et al (1990) Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice (2 nd ed.). Addison
Wesley.
1. Donald Hearn, M. Pauline Baker (1994). Computer Graphics. Prentice Hall.
2. Salmon Rod and Slater Mel (1993). Computer Graphics. Addison Wesley.
COM 421 ENGINEERING AND SOFTWARE LAW
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To critically review of the issues relating to engineering and software law.
By the end of the course ,the student should be able to:
Prepare and present a research report on engineering and software law
Explain the current laws relating to computers ,ethics and social values
Understand the implications of computer crime and abuse
Course content
A review of laws in Kenya and elsewhere relating to engineering in general and software
systems in particular. Registration ,property right and restriction of ownership, contracts, civil
responsibility, copyright and patenting
Mode of delivery
376
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Sara Baase (2003) A Gift of Fire: Social, Legal, and Ethical Issues for Computing and
the Internet, Second edition, Prentice-Hall.
1. Bynum, TW and Rogerson, S (2004). Computer Ethics and Professional Responsibility.
Blackwell Publishing. ISBN: 1855548453
2. Thompson, N(2002). People Skills (2nd Ed.). Palgrave Macmillan. ISBN: 0333987462
3. Ayres, R (1999). The Essence of Professional Issues in Computing. Pearson Education.
ISBN: 0139087400.
COM 422:
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND MICROPROCESSORS

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Identify the internal registers and memory organization for assembly language
programming.
Design interface circuits for microprocessors.
Develop assembly language codes for microprocessor-based systems.
Interface controlling devices and data acquisition systems.
Course content
Overview of microcomputer architectures and operations, Microprocessor evolution and
internal architecture, Assembly language programming, Interrupt and interrupt applications,
Bus signals and interfacing, Digital interfacing, Analog interfacing, Direct memory access,
Synchronous and asynchronous serial data communications.
Mode of delivery
377
Course Assessment:
total mark

2007
COM 423:
COMPUTER SCIENCE PROJECT 11
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To enable the learner consolidate and integrate the understanding of computer systems design
by tackling and successfully computing a complex computer problem.
Objective:
At the end of the project the students should be capable of carrying out a computer systems
project independently.
Course Description:
Project Work: A substantial project carried out throughout the year, culminating in a written
report and presentations.
The student will proceed from initial investigation of requirements to an implementation of a
system prototype in the project period after which the student shall submit a project report
including
Introductory material on the choice of the project, the terms of reference, the plan and any
changes, the conduct of the study and the achievements,
The main results and recommendations for further activity,
378
A critique of what has been done including both an evaluation of the achievements of the
project objectives and a survey of literature relevant to the study.
Lectures, demonstrations and presentations, and group/class discussions.
Computers, projectors, white boards and writing materials.
Course Assessment:
Student performance
Assignments, tutorials, tests, practical exercises and a project report.
Textbooks for the Course:
1. Kendall P. A. (`1996). Introduction to Systems Analysis & Design. A structured Approach.
(3rd Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
2. Sommerville (2001). Software Engineering. (6th Ed.) London: Addison Wesley
3. Swarup, K., Gupta P. K. & Mohan M. (2001). Operations Research.(9th Ed.). New Delhi:
Sultan chand & Sons.
COM 424E: NEURAL NETWORKS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This unit introduces the student to the major classes of neural network models in use today.
Build computational models, from the equations governing them to the computer
programs used to simulate them.
Demonstrate practical knowledge of how to decide when different classes of models are
appropriate for different applications.
Course content
About the brain and brain-like models. Single neuron models. Sensory processing and filtering.
Linear feed forward pattern associators. Recurrent pattern associators: Hopfield networks.
Nearest neighbor models, and sparse coding in the human brain. The Perception and LMS
learning algorithms. The back-propagation learning algorithm. Representations and data
preprocessing.
Mode of delivery
379

Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Simon Haykin (1999). Neural Networks: A Comprehensive Foundation (2nd ed.). Prentice
Hall. ISBN: 0132733501
1. Laurene V. Fausett (1994). Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms
And Applications. Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0133341860
2. Leonid I. Perlovsky (2000). Neural Networks and Intellect Using Model-Based Concepts.
Oxford University Press. ISBN: 9780195111620
3. James A. Anderson (1995). An Introduction to Neural Networks. MIT Press.
COM 425E : ADVANCED ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To equip the learner with more advanced concepts of logical programming.
Objective:
At the end of the course students should be able to undertake advanced logical programming.
Course Description:
The course is designed to cover the non-von-Neumann programming paradigm, functional
Programming, pure functions, functional languages, primitives, composition, recursion and
Polymorphic data types, structures, functional types, higher order functions, combinations.
Lazy evaluation, infinite data structures, conceptual parallelism, interactive systems, advanced
LISP programming are also examined. It also deals with logic programming, logic axioms,
inference, proof. clause form, resolution, unification pattern matching, greens device and
Prolog. Horn clauses, constrained resolution, linear strategy, backtracking, modes, instantiation,
380
non-ground copulation, advanced prolog programming, new applications and developments are
also covered.
Instructional Materials/Equipment
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Brattco, I. (1997). Prolog programming for artificial Intelligence (3rd Ed.). London:
Addison Wesley.
1. Eugene C., McDermolidrew (1999). Artificial Intelligence. Pearson Education.
2. Nils N. J (1998). Artificial Intelligence. Harcourt Publishers.
3. Lloyd, J.W. (1993). Functions of logic programming. (2nd Ed.). Springer: Verlag Senes.
4. Joumal of Artificial intelligence.
COM 426E:
SIMULATION AND MODELING
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To equip the learner with techniques of simulation.
Objective:
At the end of the course students should be able to apply simulation methodologies to solve real
life problems.
Course Description:
Modeling: Various types of models. Properties of linear models. Model building techniques.
The black box approach. Role of models in a study. Financial modeling. Inter linked models.
Corporate modeling. Simulation: Simulation methodology. Use of simulation languages.
Generation of random variables. Pseudo-random number generators. Transformation of
381
random numbers. Tests of randomness. Parameter estimation. Maximum likelihood. Least

mean square error.
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Fletcher, R (2000). Practical Methods of Optimization. New York: MC GrawHill.
1. Handay, A. T (2000). Operations Research. New York: Macmillan publishing Co.
2. Law Averill & Kelton David (2000). Simulation Modeling and Analysis. SAMS.
COM 427: DATA COMMUINCATION ,ANTENNAS AND PROPAGATION

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
By the end of the course ,the learners should be able to:
Define the information rate, baud rate
Describe serial and parallel transmission modes of data
Describe error detection and correction methods in data transmission
Explain the working principles of various antennas types
Describe the working principle of a digital microwave link and plan a radio
communication circuit
Course content
382
Information rate,band rate,Hartley shanon,channel bandwidth,serial and parallel

transmission;synchronous and handshaking mode,simplex and duplex operations;standards for
parallel and serial data CCITTV21,V21,V23,X25,V29 etc.synchronous transmission ,line
codes,error detection and correction;FSK,MSK techniques.Antenna concepts ;gain ERP
,effective length.practical antennas,dipoles,collinear and broadside arrays;dish
antennas:satellite and terrestrial applications.Review of ionospheric and tropospheric
propagation of LF to microwave TEM waves.Planning of radio communication circuits
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Hwang K.&Briggs,F.A.(2002).introduction to distributed systems.New york
2. William Stallings(2007).distributed operating systems ( 5th Ed.).Prentice Hall
COM 428 SIGNAL PROCESSING II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to signal processing
Explain the techniques of data sampling
Apply spectral resolution techniques and interpolation to problems in signal processing
Use the z-transform methods in problem solving in signal processing
Design the digital filters for use in signal processing and design hardware structures to
support the digital filters
383
Course content
Properties of sampled data. Frequency domain :review of Fourier transformation applied to
periodic and a periodic, discrete and continuous signals. Power spectrum :window effects and
processes: leakages, spectral resolution and interpolation; fast convolution, fast correlation;
linear and circular processes. Discrete signal operations: the z-transform ;integer coefficient
filters; low pass; analogue to plane mapping; s-z transformations, bilinear transformation ,prewarping .Notch and emphasis filters designed on the z-plane .Hardware structures to support
digital filters ;impulse and pseudocode-random testing. software organization
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

press, 2009.
COM 429E MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION 3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to measurement and instrumentation
By the end of the course, the student should be able to
Explain the principals of precision measurement

384
Describe the methods of measurement and explain the working of some measurement
instruments
Use instrumentation skills required to design a transducer/censor
Course content
Elements of measurements systems: Accuracy, precision and sensitivity of instruments.
Calibration and errors in measuring instruments. Statistical analysis of measurement data.
Electrical and mechanical measurements. Analogue instruments and digital instruments.
Measurement of current, voltage, resistance, frequency and power AC/DC bridges.
Transducers: types-resistive, capacitive, inductive, optical, thermal and piezoelectric,
photovoltaic display devices. Measurement of mass, volume and area. Measurement of time,
displacement, speed, acceleration and frequency: strain, force, torque, power and pressure;
vibration; temperature: and fluid flow.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Alan S Morris 2001 Measurement and Instrumentation Principles. Meas. Sci. Technol.
COM 423E: COMPUTER SCIENCE PROJECT II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To enable the learner consolidate and integrate the understanding of computer systems design
by tackling and successfully computing a complex computer problem.
Objective:
385
At the end of the project the students should be capable of carrying out a computer systems
project independently.
Course Description:
Project Work: A substantial project carried out throughout the year, culminating in a written
report and presentations.
The student will proceed from initial investigation of requirements to an implementation of a
system prototype in the project period after which the student shall submit a project report
including
Introductory material on the choice of the project, the terms of reference, the plan and any
changes, the conduct of the study and the achievements,
The main results and recommendations for further activity,
A critique of what has been done including both an evaluation of the achievements of the
project objectives and a survey of literature relevant to the study.
Lectures, demonstrations and presentations, and group/class discussions.
Computers, projectors, white boards and writing materials.
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Kendall P. A. (`1996). Introduction to Systems Analysis & Design. A structured Approach.
(3rd Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
1. Sommerville (2001). Software Engineering. (6th Ed.) London: Addison Wesley
2. Swarup, K., Gupta P. K. & Mohan M. (2001). Operations Research.(9th Ed.). New Delhi:
Sultan chand & Sons.
COM 431E: HUMAN COMPUTER INTERFACE DESIGN 3 CREDIT HOURS
386
Purpose
At the end of the course the student should demonstrate knowledge in Human computer
interface development.
Course content
Introduction; History of HCI. The Human; Input/output channels, Human memory and
Thinking. Usability Paradigms and principles. Design process; identifying users and usability
requirement; Task analysis; user object modeling; Style guides; Dialog Notations and design.
Prototyping. Evaluation. Help and documentation. High level theories. Groupware; multi-user
interfaces architecture, cooperative application scenarios, students to develop interface using
Visual Basic
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. Shneiderman B. & Plaisant C. (2005) Designing the User Interface: Strategies for
Effective Human-Computer Interaction. 4th Ed. Boston: Pearson/Addison Wesley ISBN
0321197860
2. Preece, J, Sharp, H, & Rogers, Y. (2002) Beyond Interaction Design. New York: Wiley
ISBN 0471402494
COM 432: DESIGN TECHNIQUES FOR WEB SITES
Purpose
387
3 CREDIT HOURS
To equip the student with advanced concepts and techniques of web application development
At the end of the course the student should be able to develop web-based applications using
diverse programming and scripting languages such as PHP, CGI, Perl and Java.
Course content
Introduction to DreamWeaver. Creating Dynamic Web sites using CGI, Perl and PHP and
MySQL/SQL Server. Introduction to Java, creating interactive executable content. Advanced
Java Programming, AWT, Image animation, URL connections, JDBC. Virtual Reality Modeling
VRML. Cookies and Sessions
Chalkboard, handouts, overhead projector.
Course Assessment:
total mark

1. David M. Geary (1997)."Java - Mastering the AWT (Java 1.1)", SUN Soft Press Publishing,
Mountain View.
1. Deitel and Deitel. (1998)."Java - How to Program", Addison-Wesley Press, Reading, Mass.,
2. Jed Hartman and Josie Wernecke. (1996)."The VRML 2.0 Handbook, Building Moving
Worlds on the Web",SGI, Inc. and Addison Wesley, Reading, Mass.
3. Kelly, V. and Eunice F. (2004). Web Design & Development. Charles River Media Inc.
4. Larry Wall and Randall Schartz. (1994)."Programming Perl", O'Reilly and Associates
Publishing, Sebastopol, CA.
388
SCHOOL OF SCIENCE AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BOTANY
1.0 Introduction
The Department of Botany, in accordance with the general objectives of the University offers a
oriented towards industrial applications and the overall pattern of employment of Botany
graduates.
cases oral examination are given at the end of each semester. The first year is spent on basic
389
science courses. In the second year, the student starts to orient towards Botany The third and
fourth years are devoted to an intensive study of theoretical and experimental Botany courses
and allow for a certain amount of specialist option courses. Laboratory practices throughout the
study years, laboratory work, field course and guided research project is aimed at developing
the graduates' practical skills. The programme hopes to provide graduates not only with a
specialized knowledge of the subject but also a mind which has been trained and exposed to well
established scientific and technological procedures.
The Department also offers basic courses and service courses for science, agricultural
and research oriented faculties.
partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Botany programme is

The department of Biological Sciences designed the botany curriculum with the flexibility to
accommodate emerging challenges. Botany students at Narok University combine theory with
practice, gaining skills that produce results and improve technology in a morally upright and
ethical way. In class, students get the latest in both theory and practical applications from
dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are complemented with hands-on laboratory
experience and field course.
In principle, Botany is a fundamental science from which other sciences are reduced down
from. For instance Chemistry can be thought of as applied Physics while agriculture is applied
botany . Science, technology and innovation has been identified as a central plank for Kenya's
development and a foundation for vision 2030. To drive the attainment of vision 2030,
scientists would need to be trained, accordingly zoology as a fundamental science would be
The Botany program is designed to empower students with the biological, experimental and
Computational tools necessary in industry and allied fields such as agricultural, soil
conservation and environmental ecology , Renewable energy, and botanical education. Also,
students who complete the programme can pursue postgraduate studies in a desired biological
discipline like entomology, genetic engineering, medicine, biotechnology, agriculture and
environmental conservation thus enhancing gaps that currently exist in the country and the
region.
The Botany programme is aimed at:
390
i) Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of zoology and
acquisition of the necessary skills in order to use their knowledge in botany in a wide
range of practical applications.
botany to fit into an inter-disciplinary environment.
iv) Relating the training of Science graduates to the employment opportunities within the
country.
v) To equip students with a good understanding of the principles of Applied botany,
vi) To produce Applied botany graduates with the necessary skills for team work in an
g) Knowledge and understanding
The Botany programme enables students develop competencies required to:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Solve problems in botany and offer relevant solutions using appropriate tools.
Understand botanical phenomena and model their behaviour through analytical
techniques.
Apply principles of operation of botanical devices and instruments
Know the environmental and social impact of a botanical activities
Understand business and management techniques relevant to a botany
h) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge

At the end of the programme the learner should be able to:
i)
Execute and critically analyze results of an investigation and make logical
conclusions.
ii) Use scientific principles in solutions of botanical problems.
iii) Discuss various botanical phenomena
iv) Analyze experimental data in botany.
v) Use computers in the treatment of botanical results
vi) Prepare research proposals and write reports
access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice and field work.
391
vii) Meet the minimum University admission criteria

viii) Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
Biology
Chemistry
Geography
Biological sciences
Physical sciences
OR
Mathematics
Physics
Geography
mathematics
One other subject from Group 3

(a) Theory Courses
30%
70%
(c) Seminar Course (BOT 421E)
evaluation of the report 50%
20%
20%
60%
50% and

392

To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Botany, a student shall satisfy all the university
below:
70%
Oral examination
30%

393
examination,
Philosophy of the programme
With the changing demands of the global technology, the science environment demands have
also changed. For a technology to succeed, it requires personnel with the proper training to
move it forward through academic rigor, partnership with the industry world and research
institutions in the world.
School of science designed the BSc. Botany to meet these demands in the market place.
Graduates of our standard-setting BSc. Botany combine knowledge with action, gaining skills
that produce results and improve technology in amorally upright and ethical way. In the
classroom, students get the latest in both theory and practical applications from top lecturers
and scholars. In our BSc. Botany, lecturing is complemented with high-impact,
hands-on practicals in the area of study, field work and industrial attachement.
Rationale of the Programme
School of science at NU has been offering quality courses in Physics, Chemistry, Zoology,
Botany, Mathematics, computer science and information science. The undergraduate
programme trains and awards students with a Bachelor of Science degree in Physics,
Chemistry, Zoology, Botany, Mathematics, computer science and information science after a 4year period. This programs aim at providing a firm grounding in the basic concepts and
methods as well as offering a selection of special courses related to developing areas of the
subject, particularly those areas of premier importance to the development of the global.
Needs assessment/ market survey/ situation analysis
The review of the existent BSc. Botany curriculum was driven by the need to design a
programme that meets the changing needs in the science and technology fields. The growing
trend in re-organization of traditional science processes and the subsequent re-engineering of
science and technology processes has led to the need of more responsive personnel to manage
the change.
Goals of the Programme
Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of Botany and
acquisition of the necessary skills, in order to use their knowledge in Botany in a wide
range of practical application.
Developing creative thinking and the power of imagination to enable graduates work in
Accommodating their relevant fields in allied disciplines and to allow the graduates of
Science to fit into the inter-disciplinary environment.
Relating the training of Science graduates to the employment opportunities within the
country.
394
Botany, by its very nature, is the central science in today's world, and many graduates use their
degrees as a solid foundation for advanced study in Botany as well as for study in medicine,
pharmacy, veterinary medicine, forensic science, materials science, environmental medicine,
environmental science, medical technology, physical therapy, patent or environmental law,
education - all are possibilities for students with a Botany degree.
The graduands should:
possess fundamental and practical knowledge of unit calculations pertaining to

scientific reasoning.
Describe chemical phenomena at the cell and system level.
continue in the learning experience as their life proceeds.
Possess a command of the several sub disciplines of Botany and a knowledge of
the literature available in each.
possess the knowledge needed to interpret data presented by modern Botany
techniques
have the ability to understand and duplicate experiments given in the biological
literature.
have an understanding of their ethical and professional responsibilities as
a scientist and Botanist as well as an awareness of the contemporary societal
and global issues facing Botanist
Mode of Delivery of the programme

The course to be taught using lectures, tutorials, assignments, praticals, field work and,
industrial attachment.
COURSE DISTRIBUTION
YEAR ONE COURSES
Bachelor of science students intending to take botany programme are required to take 6 units
from Botany, Zoology and Mathematics, 8 units from physics and 7 units from chemistry, 6
units from communication skills, 3 units from national development and 3 units of quantitative
skills.
YEAR TWO COURSES
Students intending to major in botany are required to take at least 12 units each from the
department of Botany, chemistry and zoology, 3 units from national development, 6 units from
the following required courses; MAT 200: mathematics and statistics and CHE 214:
biochemistry
YEAR THREE COURSES
Students intending to major in botany in third year must take all core courses (24 units) offered
by the department, 3 units from national development, 12 units of science courses approved by
the department and up to 6 other units
395
.
YEAR FOUR COURSES
Students majoring in botany must take at least 36 units including a research project of 6 units
and 3 units from national development. Up to 6 other units may be offered on the
recommendation of the department.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted in the Bachelor of Science (Botany) programme a candidate must;
a. Meet the minimum university and faculty entry requirements
b. Have passed with a minimum average grade of B- (or as agreed by the university) in the
following group of subjects;
Biology
Chemistry
Geography
Biological sciences
Physical sciences
OR
Mathematics
Physics
Geography
mathematics
EXAMINATION
The general university semester examination regulation shall apply.
Each course taught during the semester will be examined at the end of that semester. All written
examinations will be of three hour duration. The end of semester examination and the continous
assessment shall be based on practicals, written tests and/or assignments.
That BOT 421 research project will be examined as follows; The viva (oral examination) shall
be weighted at 20% while the report at 80% with the breakdown as; introduction, statement of
the problem and literature review (15%), materials and methods (20%), results (20%),
discussion (15%), and Abstract (5%), Citation (5%).
That BOT 319 field course will be examined as follows; 4 weeks trip at 14 marks per trip
(56%), a coastal field trip at 40%
COURSE SUMMARY
YEAR ONE
SEMESTER ONE
CODE
COURSE
UNITS
BOT 110
BASIC BOTANY I
BASIC BOTANY II
BOT 210
CRYPTOGAMIC BOTANY
BOT 213
GENETICS AND EVOLUTION
SEMESTER TWO
BOT 111
YEAR TWO
SEMESTER ONE
396
SEMESTER TWO
BOT 211
PLANT STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
BOT 212
PLANT ECOLOGY 1
YEAR THREE
SEMESTER ONE
BOT 310
MORPHOGENESIS
DEVELOPMENTAL ANATOMY
AND 3
BOT 315
PLANT ECOLOGY II
BOT 316
GENETICS
BOT 319
BOTANY FIELD COURSE
BOT 311
PLANT TAXONOMY
BOT 312
MICROBIOLOGY I
BOT 313
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY I
BOT 314
PHYCOLOGY
BOT 3 17
CYTOGENETIS
BOT 318(ELECTIVE)
MORPHOLOGY OF HIGHER PLANTS
BOT 320
BIOSTISTICS
BOT 321
ATTACHMENT
BOT 411
MYCOLOGY
BOT 413
PLANT GEOGRAPHY
BOT 416
PLANT CELL BIOLOGY
BOT 417
ECONOMIC BOTANY
BOT 421
BOTANY RESEARCH PROJECT
BOT 410 (E)
ECOLOGICAL ANATOMY
BOT 412
BIOSYSTEMATICS
BOT 414
EVOLUTIONARY MECHANISM
BOT 415
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
BOT 418
POPULATION GENETICS
BOT 419
MICROBIOLOGY II
BOT 420
PHYTOPATHOLOGY
BOT 422E
Seminar Course
SEMESTER TWO
YEAR FOUR
SEMESTER ONE
SEMESTER TWO
397
COURSE DESCRIPTION
YEAR ONE
BOT 110: BASIC BOTANY I
3 UNITS
Brief introduction to botany, Tools and techniques, Plant cells structure and functions,
Plant cell physiological studies (plasmolysis, osmosis, diffusion, permeability etc),
Plant tissues and their anatomy, Introduction to major divisions of plant kingdom,
Micro-organisms and their economical importance, Preservatives, their uses and
precautions
BOT 111 BASIC BOTANY II

3 UNITS
Plants and their environment; Plant morphology, Plant physiology, Survey of the plant
kingdom. Environmental factors affecting plant growth; Physical environmental factors, Plant
nutrition, Soil profile. Collection, recording, analysis and interpreting data from ecological
studies. Measurement of environmental factors. Ecological survey of terrestrial and aquatic
habitats. Environmental pollution and its effects on plants; Desertification, Deforestation,
Quarrying, Solid waste disposal, Agricultural pollution.
YEAR TWO
BOT 210 CRYPTOGAMIC BOTANY
3 UNITS
Classification trends and life history of ;Bacteria, Cyanobacteria, Fungi, Algae, Bryophytes,
Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms. Their economic importance. Evolutionary trends within the
groups
BOT 211: PLANT STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

3 UNITS
Cell structure. Introduction to tissue systems. Anatomy of angiosperms root, stem and leaf.
Primary and secondary growth. Structure of fruit and seed. Seed dormancy and germination.
BOT 212 PLANT ECOLOGY I

3 UNITS
Introduction to ecology and types of ecological studies. Ecosystems; Definitions, ecosystem
components, ecosystem structures, types of ecosystems, temporal changes in ecosystems,
influence of climate and soils on global and local distribution of ecosystem types. Movement of
energy and materials; energy flow in ecosystems, biogeochemical cycles, trophic relations,
ecological pyramids, food chains and food webs. Growth and interactions between plant
398
populations and human populations. Plant germplasm conservation and the concept of gene
bank
BOT 213: GENETICS AND EVOLUTION

3 UNITS
Mendelism, Genetic material and its replication, Mitosis and Meiosis, Interaction of given
linkage, Crossing over, Sex chromosomes and sex linkage, Cytoplasmic inheritance, Mutation,
Lamarckism, Darwins theory of the survival for the fittest, De Vries theory and modern theory
of organic evolution.
YEAR THREE
BOT 310 MORPHOGENESIS AND DEVELOPMENTAL ANATOMY

3 UNITS
Organogenesis and structure of the shoot apex. Tissue differentiation. Structure of the
monocotyledonous stem, root and leaf. Primary and secondary structure of the dicotyledon.
Anatomy of fruit and seed. Anomalous secondary growth. Adaptation to habitats. Reproductive
morphology, the male and female gametophyte. Fertilization. Endosperm development and
applied embryology. Abnormal plant growth. Tissue culture
BOT 311: PLANT TAXONOMY

3 UNITS
Significance of taxonomy and relationship with other botanical disciplines, History of plant
classification and development of taxonomic units, Nomenclature, Taxonomic studies of
selected representatives families of East Africa, Herbarium techniques and management.
BOT 312 MICROBIOLOGY I

3 UNITS
Bacterial classification. Structure and replication of bacteriophage. Bacterial diseases- their
transmission and control. The immune response. Control of microorganisms. Industrial and
agricultural wastes
BOT 313: PLANT PHYSIOLGY 1

3 UNITS
Principal physiological processes of plants including water uptake, Photosynthesis:
Photosynthetic pigments, Mechanism of pigment function, Photochemical reaction of
photosynthesis, Mechanism of CO2 fixation (C3 AND C4 pathways), Photorespiration,
Glycogenesis and synthesis of storage compounds, Pathways of sugar catabolism: Oxydative
phosphorylation, Nitrogen metabolism,Synthesis and mechanism of plant hormones.
BOT 314: PHYCOLOGY
3 UNITS
399
Structure and classification of algae, Life histories and reproduction of major classes, Algae
habitats and distribution, Algae physiology including pigments, light absorption, photosynthesis
and respiration, Benthic algal ecology, Planktons, Economic importance of algae.
BOT 315 PLANT ECOLOGY II
3 UNITS
Macro and microclimate in relation to plant communities. Analytical and synthetic
characteristics of plant communities. Classification zones; secondary and primary forests,
wetlands, afro-alpine communities. Vegetation succession. Effects of man on plant
communities. Food chains.
BOT 316: GENETICS
3 UNITS
Mendelian genetics; Physical basis of inheritance, Particulate inheritance, Multiple alleles,
Multiple genes. Darwins theory and its implication for origin of species; Natural selection;
Isolation and species diversity. Chromosome variation and evolution relation of genes to
chromosome. Mutation. Gene function. Differentiation and development.Linkage. Proplastids;
Chloroplasts, Chromoplast,Leucoplast and Extra-chromosomal inheritance.
BOT 318 E: MORPHOLOGY OF HIGHER PLANTS
3 UNITS
Trends in the morphology of spermatophytes with special emphasis on the evolution of
observed external structures of all groups. Use of these structures in classification.
BOT 319: BOTANY FIELD COURSE
3 UNITS
Students will go on two weeks field course during the year three. They will be expected to
study plant communities, of various environments; make plant collections, prepare herbarium
specimens and provide a written report on the course.
BOT 320: BIOSTATISTICS
3 UNITS
Random variations; Survey and experiments; Sampling and experimental designs; Presentation
of information contained in a sample-figures and diagrams; Frequency, Mean, Medium ranking,
intervals; Comparisons of several samples; Distribution, U tests, Mann-Whitney tests, students
t test; Association, 2x2 contingency tables, Kruskal- Wallis statistic, Chi square, F values and
significance.
BOT 321 PRACTICAL ATTACHMENT
6 CREDIT
HOURS
All Botany major students must undertake this course.
The department will organize for placement of candidates in a research institutes/research
centre/organizationa/investigation Iaboratory/national park/game reserve/museum where they
will participate in programmes that are either on-going or proposed by the candidates.
The candidate will undertake a research project, the subject of which is to be arranged between
an official of the station and the supervisor.
The candidate is expected to work for up to 2 months under supervision from resident
400
Personnel and an appointed department of botany staff supervisor. The department supervisor
will visit the candidate at least four times to monitor progress.
YEAR FOUR
BOT 410 ECOLOGICAL ANATOMY
3 UNITS
Anatomical strategies of higher plants; Xerophytes, Mesophytes, Halophytes, Hydrophytes.
Ecoadaptive anatomy of obligate and facultative climbers. Leaf, stem, root and sporophyte
anatomy of mosses, liverworts, ferns, fern allies and gymnosperms
BOT 411: MYCOLOGY
3 UNITS
Characteristics of fungi-fine structures. Classification and systematic treatment of major groups
of fungi: morphology life cycle nuclear cycles life habitats. Sexuality and parasexuality in
fungi. Fungal physiology Fungi as: Saprophytes, Symbionts, and parasites of plants and
animals.
Lichens.
BOT 412 BIOSYSTEMATICS
3 UNITS
Factors controlling breeding systems. Amphimixix/pollination Biology. Interspecific and
intraspecific population variation and differentiation. The biological species concept. Natural
selection. Evolution of ecotypes and clines in species and speciation. Numerical taxonomy and
introductory palynology
BOT 413: PLANT GEOGRAPHY
3 UNITS
Vegetation of the earth. Major vegetation zones of Africa. Origin and dispersal of flowering
plants. Flora of tropical Africa with special reference to East Africa.
BOT 414 EVOLUTIONARY MECHANISM
3 UNITS
Synthetic theories of evolution and its development. Sources of variability. Organisation of
genetic variability in population, differentiation of populations. Reproductive isolation and
origin of species. Role of hybridization in evolution
BOT 415 PLANT PHYSIOLOGY II
3 UNITS
Metabolism and biosynthesis of carbohydrates, lipids, aminoacids and proteins. Nitrogen cycle.
Assimilation of organic and inorganic nitrogen by plants. Nature and function of enzymes,
coenzymes and vitamins. Plant organic acids.
BOT 416 PLANT CELL BIOLOGY
3 UNITS
Molecular organization, function and assembly of eukaryotic cell components. Structure and
function of membranes and membranous organelles. Metabolic energy and cellular dynamics.
Modern concepts relating to the plant cell. Recent advances in plant biotechnology.
401
BOT 417: ECONOMIC BOTANY

3 UNITS
The botany, origin cultivation and uses of tropical plants and their wild relatives with special
reference to East Africa economic plants e.g. Cinchona, Vinca, Rauvolfia, Azadirachta,
Coffee, Tea, Sisal, Pyrethrum, Cereals, Vegetables and forest trees(exotic and indigenous);
Natural and synthetic fibres. The botany of wild and semicultivated crops with special
reference to Kenya; Endangered plant species in Kenya; causes, status and conservation.
BOT 418 POPULATION GENETICS
3 UNITS
Effects of mutation, selection, genetic drift and gene flow; both their individual and combined
effects of gene frequency. Determination of allelic frequencies. Hardy-weinberg equilibrium.
The gene concept. Inbreeding and gene fixation in natural populations. Natural selection.
Fundamentals of ecological genetics. Quantitative genetic advance. Determination of
components of genetic variance. Analysis of data of nested and dialed crosses and their
interpretation. Coefficient of breeding, heterosis.
BOT 419 MICROBIOLOGY II
3 UNITS
Properties of soil microflora. Organic matter decomposition. Carbon, nitrogen, sulphur and
phosphorus cycles, symbiotic and non-symbiotic nitrogen fixation. Rhizosphere microbiology.
Mycorrhiza. Microorganisms as disease agents in animals, plants and insects. Host/pathogen
relationships. Bacteria motility and chemotaxis. Practical techniques, Media preparation,
Growth and monitoring of cultures, Use of selective media, Isolation of pure cultures
BOT 420 PHYTOPATHOLOGY
3 UNITS
Introduction to the concepts of plant pathology. Causes of diseases and host/parasite
relationships. Culture of fungi. Identification and control of major plant diseases in East Africa
BOT 421 BOTANY RESEARCH PROJECT
6 UNITS
A project will involve experimental work on a selected topic and will be written up as
dissertation and also presented orally. Each student shall submit three typed copies of the
report, which will be examined by a departmental board comprising of the supervisor, two other
members of staff including the head of department. The viva shall be weighted at 20% while
the report at 80% with the breakdown as; introduction, statement of the problem and literature
review (15%), materials and methods (20%), results (20%), discussion (15%), and Abstract
(5%), Citation (5%).
BOT 422: SEMINAR
3 UNITS
Students are expected to present seminar papers weekly.
402
COURSE OUTLINE
BOT 110: BASIC BOTANY I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to plant science
3. able to identify the major plant divisions
4. able to prepare temporary plant cell slides
5. able to know the importance of plant and micro-organisms
6. able to demonstrate the ability to work and use basic equipment effectively in the
laboratory.
Course content
Brief introduction to botany, Tools and techniques, Plant cells structure and functions, Plant cell
physiological studies (plasmolysis, osmosis, diffusion, permeability etc), Plant tissues and their
anatomy, Introduction to major divisions of plant kingdom, Micro-organisms and their
economical importance, Preservatives, their uses and precautions
Mode of delivery
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, microscopes, dissecting kits, incubators,
autoclave, fresh and/or preserved plant specimens
Course Assessment:
total mark

6.
Gordon et al. (2001). Principles of Botany
403
7.
8.
Noggle and Fritz. (2006). Introductory plant physiology

Kathleen Park Talaro.(2008) Foundations in microbiology 7th edition
BOT 111 BASIC BOTANY II
3 UNITS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to plant sciences
Expected learning outcomes:
At the end of the course, students should be able to identify the main divisions and subdivisions
of the plant kingdom, describe the principle characteristics of each group and estimate their
economic benefits.
Course content:
Plants and their environment; Plant morphology, Plant physiology, Survey of the plant
kingdom. Environmental factors affecting plant growth; Physical environmental factors, Plant
nutrition, Soil profile. Collection, recording, analysis and interpreting data from ecological
studies. Measurement of environmental factors. Ecological survey of terrestrial and aquatic
habitats. Environmental pollution and its effects on plants; Desertification, Deforestation,
Quarrying, Solid waste disposal, Agricultural pollution.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Demonstrations, Laboratory sessions, group discussions, field excursions
Instructional materials/equipment
Writing materials, writing boards, dissecting microscopes, light microscopes, fresh and/or
preserved plant specimen, Ecological kits, computer.
Course assessment
The course will be assessed in two parts; continuous assessment composed of tests,
assignments and laboratory sessions contributing to 30% of the total mark, and examination
contributing to 70% of the total mark
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluations by the head of department and self evaluation
Stern K. R (1997) Introduction to plant biology
Recommended reference material
Gordon et al (2001) Principles of botany
Noggle and fritz, 2006 introductory Plant Physiology
BOT 210 CRYPTOGAMIC BOTANY
3 UNITS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to cryptogams (spore-forming) species
404

At the end of the course, students should be able to identify the main divisions and subdivisions
of the spore-forming organisms, describe the principle characteristics of each group and their
phylogenetic relationships, and study their economic importance.
Course content:
Classification trends and life history of Bacteria, Cyanobacteria, Fungi, Algae, Bryophytes,
Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms. Their economic importance. Evolutionary trends within the
groups
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Demonstrations, Laboratory sessions, group discussions, tutorials.
preserved specimen, permanent slides, charts and posters, computer.
Course assessment
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluations by the head of department and self evaluation
Sadava et al (2009) Life. The science of Biology. Ninth Edition
Gordon et al (2001) Principles of botany
BOT 211: PLANT STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to plant cells, their organization and function
At the end of the course students will be able to demonstrate the competencies in the
following subjects:
1. Plant structure
2. Major plant tissue systems
3. Chloroplasts and mitochondrion.
4. Water transport and transpiration
405
5. Mineral nutrition
6. Photosynthesis, C4 vs C3 plants
7. Methods of breaking seed dormancy
Course content
Cell structure, Introduction to tissue systems, Anatomy of angiosperms root, stem and leaf,
Primary and secondary growth, Structure of fruit and seed, Seed dormancy and germination.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

Lincoln Taiz and Eduardo Zeiger. ( 2010). Plant Physiology, Fifth Edition
9.
10.
BOT 212: PLANT ECOLOGY I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to Ecology and ecological studies of plants
406
At the end of the course, students should be able to define the ecosystem, understand the
ecosystem components and structures and the relationships of living organisms with their
environment.
Course content:
Introduction to ecology and types of ecological studies. Ecosystems; Definitions, ecosystem
components, ecosystem structures, types of ecosystems, temporal changes in ecosystems,
influence of climate and soils on global and local distribution of ecosystem types. Movement of
energy and materials; energy flow in ecosystems, biogeochemical cycles, trophic relations,
ecological pyramids, food chains and food webs. Growth and interactions between plant
populations and human populations. Plant germplasm conservation and the concept of gene
bank
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Demonstrations, group discussions, Field excursions.
Writing materials, writing boards, computer, PowerPoint.
Course assessment
assignments and Ecological Excursion reports contributing to 30% of the total mark, and the
examination contributing to 70% of the total mark
Fundamentals of Ecology by Eugene Odum and Gary Barret
Essentials of Ecology by Tyler Miller
The science of Ecology by Richard Brewer
Elements of Ecology (5th Edition) by Smith et al.
BOT 213: GENETICS AND EVOLUTION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to principles of genetics and evolution
407
Able to identify and describe the process and purposes of the cell cycle, meiosis, and
mitosis, as well as predict the outcomes of these processes.
Able to solve transmission genetics problems, make accurate predictions about
inheritance of genetic traits, and map the locations of genes.
Able to identify the parts, structure, and dimensions of DNA molecules, RNA
molecules, and chromosomes, and be able to categorize DNA as well as describe how
DNA is stored.
Able to accurately diagram and describe the processes of replication, transcription and
translation.
Able to identify and classify mutations in DNA.
Able to understand principles of evolution
Course content
Mendelism, Genetic material and its replication, Mitosis and Meiosis, Interaction of given
linkage, Crossing over, Sex chromosomes and sex linkage, Cytoplasmic inheritance, Mutation,
Lamarckism, Darwins theory of the survival for the fittest, De Vries theory and modern theory
of organic evolution.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark

Snustad and Simmons. (2012). Principles of genetics
Goodenough. Genetics third edition

Robert and Tamarin. (1982). Principles of Genetics
Peter J Russeu. (2010). Genetics: A molecular approach third edition
408
BOT 310 MORPHOGENESIS AND DEVELOPMENTAL ANATOMY

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to the genesis and development of plants and plant organs.
At the end of the course, students should be able to understand; the origin and function of plant
tissues and organs, developmental anatomy and fundamental processes underlying the
development of plants and the techniques in Plant tissue culture.
Course content:
Organogenesis and structure of the shoot apex. Tissue differentiation. Structure of the
monocotyledonous stem, root and leaf. Primary and secondary structure of the dicotyledon.
Anatomy of fruit and seed. Anomalous secondary growth. Adaptation to habitats. Reproductive
morphology, the male and female gametophyte. Fertilization. Endosperm development and
applied embryology. Abnormal plant growth. Tissue culture
Mode of delivery
preserved specimen, permanent slides, charts and posters, computer.
Course assessment
Plant structure and function: Function and Development by J. A. Romberger
Introduction to plant biology by Stern K. R
Introductory Plant Physiology by Noggle and fritz,
BOT 311: PLANT TAXONOMY
3 UNITS
409
Significance of taxonomy and relationship with other botanical disciplines, History of plant
classification and development of taxonomic units, Nomenclature, Taxonomic studies of
selected representatives families of East Africa, Herbarium techniques and management.
BOT 312 MICROBIOLOGY I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to world of Microorganisms
At the end of the course, students should be able to classify microorganisms, understand the
transmission and control of bacterial diseases and the medical applications of microorganisms.
Course content:
Bacterial classification. Structure and replication of bacteriophage. Bacterial diseases- their
transmission and control. The immune response. Control of microorganisms. Industrial and
agricultural wastes
Mode of delivery
Autoclave, inoculating hood, incubating oven, refridgerator, chilling freezer, basic laboratory
apparatus, centrifuges, gas burners, heating blocks, Writing materials, writing boards. light
microscopes, permanent slides, charts and posters, computer.
Course assessment
Microbiology: An introduction (eighth edition) by Gerald Tortora et al.
Introduction to Microbiology by John Ingraham and Catherine Ingraham
Sherris Medical Microbiology by J. Ryan and George Ray
BOT 313: PLANT PHYSIOLGY 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
410
Purpose
This course provides an introduction to basic principles of plant function, primarily covering
physical processes in plants, metabolism, secondary products, and cell physiology
Able to demonstrate understanding of organelle function at the cellular level of

architecture.
Able to demonstrate understanding water potential and its effect on cellular function.
Able to demonstrate detailed understanding of the physiological mechanisms involved
in the uptake and transport of water and the translocation of food by plants.
Able to demonstrate understanding of the cellular establishment of membrane potential
and its role in solute transport.
Able to demonstrate understanding of the assimilation of mimeral ions by plants
particularly with respect to nitrogen and sulfur
Able to demonstrate understanding of the relationship of complementary metabolic
pathways such as photosynthesis and respiration in energy acquistionand use during
plant development
Able to demonstrate understanding of the environmental influences upon carbon
metabolism in plants (e.g.with respect to alternative fixation pathways, photoinhibition,
and photorespiration)
Able to demonstrate understanding of the major effects and physiological mechanisms
of growth regulators (hormones) in plants
Course content
Principal physiological processes of plants including water uptake, Photosynthesis:
Photosynthetic pigments, Mechanism of pigment function, photochemical reaction of
photosynthesis, Mechanism of CO2 fixation (C3 AND C4 pathways), Photorespiration,
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
411
Lincoln Taiz and Eduardo Zeiger. ( 2010). Plant Physiology, FithEdition

BOT 314: PHYCOLOGY

3 UNITS
Structure and classification of algae, Life histories and reproduction of major classes, Algae
habitats and distribution, Algae physiology including pigments, light absorption, photosynthesis
and respiration, Benthic algal ecology, Planktons, Economic importance of algae.
BOT 315 PLANT ECOLOGY II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to advanced ecological studies
At the end of the course, students should be able to identify the major ecological classification
zones, the major terrestrial and aquatic biomes, and apply concepts and theories from Biology
to ecological examples
Course content:
Macro and microclimate in relation to plant communities. Analytical and synthetic
characteristics of plant communities. Classification zones; secondary and primary forests,
wetlands, afro-alpine communities. Vegetation succession. Effects of man on plant
communities. Food chains.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, Demonstrations, group discussions, Field excursions.
Writing materials, writing boards, computer, PowerPoint.
Course assessment
assignments and Ecological Excursion reports contributing to 30% of the total mark, and the
examination contributing to 70% of the total mark.
412

Fundamentals of Ecology by Eugene Odum and Gary Barret
Essentials of Ecology by Tyler Miller
The science of Ecology by Richard Brewer
Elements of Ecology (5th Edition) by Smith et al.
BOT 316: GENETICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The objective of this course is to enable students to demonstrate an understanding of the
genetic basis of inheritance at the cellular and molecular level; the principles of gene
expression, regulation and interaction and common genetics laboratory and field techniques.
Able to apply the principles of inheritance as formulated by Mendel
Able to relate the structure and function of the DNA molecule to its functional role in
encoding genetic material
Able to apply the principles of extensions to Mendelian inheritance, including multiple
allelism, lethal alleles, gene interactions, and sex-linked transmission.
Able to explain and make deductions about gene regulation with emphasis on the lac
operon model.
Able to apply the Hardy-Weinberg Law in analyzing population genetics for gene
frequency
Course content
Mendelian genetics; Physical basis of inheritance, Particulate inheritance, Multiple alleles,
Multiple genes. Darwins theory and its implication for origin of species; Natural selection;
Isolation and species diversity. Chromosome variation and evolution relation of genes to
chromosome. Mutation. Gene function. Differentiation and development.Linkage. Proplastids;
Chloroplasts, Chromoplast,Leucoplast and Extra-chromosomal inheritance.
Mode of delivery
autoclave, fresh and/ or preserved plant specimens.
413
Course Assessment:
total mark

Snustad and Simmons. (2012). Principles of genetics
Griffiths, Wessler, Lewontin and Carroll. (2008). Introduction to Genetic Analysis, 9 th

Edition
Sean B. Carroll (2009), Into the Jungle: Great Adventures in the Search for Evolution
Goodenough. Genetics third edition
Robert and Tamarin. (1982). Principles of Genetics
Peter J Russeu. (2010). Genetics: A molecular approach third edition
BOT 317 CYTOGENETIC
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to cytological genetics
At the end of the course, students should be able to understand the structure of chromosomes,
cell division, karyotype arrangements and deficiencies brought about by variations in
chromosome numbers and structures
Course content:
Historical background. The cell and its organelles. The chromosome- an overview. The cell
cycle, cell division; Mitosis, Meiosis. Law of independent assortment. Segregation of
chromosomes, recombination and chiasmata. Special types of chromosomes; Polytene,
Lampbrush,
B-Chromosome.
Sex
chromosomes.
Variations
in
chromosome
numbers:Polyploidy, Aneuploidy. Variations in chromosomes structure: Deletions/deficiencies,
Duplications, Translocations, Inversions. Applications of Cytogenetics
Mode of delivery:
414
Instructional materials/equipment:
Writing materials, writing boards, light microscopes, permanent slides, PowerPoint/computer.
Course assessment:
Cytogenetics and genetics by Mahabal Ram
Plant cytogenetics by Bass et al.
Cell Biology by S.C Rastogi
Genes VIII by Benjamin Lewin
BOT 319: BOTANY FIELD COURSE
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the students to field based practicals with collection work and identification,
creating and maintaining a plant press, and conducting a lab based growing experiment with
fast plants.
Students who successfully complete this course should have the following knowledge and
skills:
Understand the structure, function, and evolution of plants, their relationship to the
environment and to humans.
How to collect and prepare research quality herbarium specimens
The diagnostic characteristics different plant families that are well-represented in

study area
How to use a field manual to identify the family, genus and species of native plants
415
Course content
Students will go on two weeks field course during the year three. They will be expected to
study plant communities, of various environments; make plant collections, prepare herbarium
specimens and provide a written report on the course.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and field trips.
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, fresh and/or preserved plant specimens
Course Assessment:
4 weeks trips @ 14 marks per trip (56%)

A coastal field exercise (40 %)

Walters, Dirk R. and David Keil. 1975. Vascular Plant Taxonomy, Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co
Harris, J.G. and M..W. Harris. 1994. Plant Identification Terminology: an illustrated
glossary; Spring Lake Publishing, Utah.
Brian Capon. Botany for Gardeners: An Introduction and Guide;
BOT 320 E: BIOSTATISTICS

.
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To acquaint the learner with the various biostatistics data analysis methods and be able to
analysis biological data using any of the methods with easy.
Upon completion of this course, the successful student should:
Be able to do survey and design an experiment
Be able to use frequency, mean, mean ranking for data analysis

416
Be able to use U-tests, Kruskal-wallis and chi and F to analysis her/his data
Course content
Random variations; Survey and experiments; sampling and experimental designs; presentation
of information contained in a sample-figures and diagrams; frequency, mean, medium ranking,
intervals; comparison of several samples; distribution, U tests, Mann-whiney tests, students t
test;Association,2x2 contingency tables, Kruskal-wallis statistics, chi (x) square, F values and
significance.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, video, group/class discussions and laboratory practicals.
Writing boards, laptop/TV, writing materials, projectors, Charts and Newpaper cuttings,
preserved and fresh specimen from the 5 classes etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests/laboratory practicals) which will normally

Fundamentals of Biostatistics, By Bernard A. Rosner,2006
Biostatistics: A Methodology For the Health Sciences, by Gerald van Belle, Lloyd
D. Fisher, Patrick J. Heagerty, Thomas Lumley
BOT 321: INDUSTRIAL ATTATCHMENT
6 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
supervision of a host and University supervisor.
417
Write a report on tasks accomplished, assessment of the specific tasks and analysis of
the knowledge acquired in their study to the specific job assignments.
Course content
All zoology major students must undertake this course.
Personnel and an appointed department of zoology staff supervisor. The department supervisor
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, field work and practical exercises.
Attachment to institutions
Course Assessment:
Coursework (assessment by university and external supervisor) which will normally

Final attachment report shall normally contribute 60% of the total mark

BOT 411: MYCOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
418
This course is to expose students to the major groups of fungi and their respective structure,
function, life cycle, physiology and classification of fungi. Its economic importance in
agriculture, food industry, and the importance of fungi to man.
Able to discuss the importance of fungi in various ecological roles

Able to demonstrate an understanding of how fungi impact human affairs
Able to outline the higher taxonomy of the fungi and how the fungi relate to other
organisms
Able to discuss the characteristics of the major classes and orders within the fungal
kingdom
Able to identify the major families and certain species of mushrooms and other
macrofungi
Able to demonstrate a working knowledge of how fungi grow and reproduce, and where
and how they can be isolated
Course content
Characteristics of fungi-fine structures. Classification and systematic treatment of major groups
of fungi: morphology life cycle nuclear cycles life habitats. Sexuality and parasexuality in
fungi. Fungal physiology Fungi as: Saprophytes, Symbionts, and parasites of plants and
animals.
Lichens.
Mode of delivery
autoclave, and fresh and /or preserved plant specimens.
Course Assessment:
total mark

Deacon J. (2006), Fungal Biology. 4th edition
Arora, D. (2004) A comprehensive guide to the fleshy fungi. Ten Speed Press 2nd edition.
419
Vashishta B.R. and Sinha A.K. (2010) Botany for degree students: Fungi.
BOT 413: PLANT GEOGRAPHY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course provides an introductory account to Phytogeography focusing on the major
vegetation zones of the world with a special reference to the flora of East Africa.
Expected Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students should be able to;
describe the structure, location and form tropical rainforests:
describe the attributes of the savanna grassland ecosystem
give an account of the desert scrubland vegetation
demonstrate the structure, form and location of the temperate vegetation
describe the afro-Alpine communities; a case study of East Africa
define wetlands and classify the various types
describe the major vegetation zones of Africa
describe the origin of flowering plants
demonstrate the methods of dispersal of flowering plants
describe the flora of tropical Africa with special reference to East Africa.
Course Content
Vegetation of the earth, Major vegetation zones of Africa, Origin and dispersal of
flowering plants, Flora of tropical Africa with special reference to East Africa.
Mode of Delivery
Course assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests and practicals) which will normally contribute
30% of the total mark
420
References
Barbour, M. G. (1987). Terrestrial Plant ecology. Benjamin publishers

Bradbury, T. K. (1991). The Biosphere. Belhaven Press.
Bugmann, H.K.M. and A.M. Solomon. (2000). Explaining forest composition and
biomass across multiple biogeographical regions. Ecological Applications 10:95-114.
Kormondy, E. J. (1996). Concepts of Ecology. Pranctise and Hall.
Richards P. W. (1975). Tropical rainforests. Cambridge University Press
Tivy, J. (1982). Biogeography: A study of plants in the Ecosphere
BOT 414 EVOLUTIONARY MECHANISM

3 UNITS
Synthetic theories of evolution and its development. Sources of variability. Organisation of
genetic variability in population, differentiation of populations. Reproductive isolation and
origin of species. Role of hybridization in evolution
BOT 415: PLANT PHYSIOLOGY II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course provides an analysis of the concepts of biosynthesis, metabolism and assimilation
of organic compounds by plants.
Demonstrate an understanding of the biosynthesis and metabolism of plant
carbohydrates.
Demonstrate an understanding of the biosynthesis and metabolism of plant lipids.
Demonstrate a clear understanding of the biosynthesis and metabolism of amino acids
and proteins.
Fully describe the nitrogen cycle and its influence in plant life.
Give an account of the assimilation of inorganic and organic nitrogen by plants
Outline the principles governing the nature and functions of enzymes
Outline the principles governing the nature and functions of co-enzymes
Outline the principles governing the nature and functions of vitamins
Outline the principles governing the nature and functions of plant organic acids
Course content
Metabolism and biosynthesis of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids and proteins. Nitrogen
cycle. Assimilation of organic and inorganic nitrogen by plants. Nature and function of
enzymes, coenzymes and vitamins. Plant organic acids.
Mode of delivery
421
Course assessment:
References
Alberts B., Johnson A. and Lewis J. (2002). Molecular Biology of the Cell. New York.
Garland Science.
Berg J. M., Tymoczko J. L. and Stryer L. (2002). Biochemistry. 5th edition. New York:
W H Freeman;
Cooper G. M. Sunderland M. A. (2000). The Cell: A Molecular Approach. 2nd edtn.
Sinauer Associates.
BOT 416 PLANT CELL BIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to plant cellular organelles and their function.
At the end of the course, students should be able to understand the structure and purpose of
basic components of the eukaryotic cells, especially macromolecules, membranes, and
organelles, understand how energy is used and generated in cells.
Course content:
Molecular organization, function and assembly of eukaryotic cell components. Structure and
function of membranes and membranous organelles. Metabolic energy and cellular dynamics.
Modern concepts relating to the plant cell. Recent advances in plant biotechnology.
Mode of delivery
422
preserved specimen, permanent slides, charts and posters, PowerPoint/computer.
Course assessment
Plant cell Biology by William Dashek and Marcia Harrison
Cell Biology by S.C Rastogi
BOT 417: ECONOMIC BOTANY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course provides an account of the botany, origin, cultivation and uses of tropical plants and
their wild relatives with special reference to East Africa.
Define Economic botany.
Outline the botany, origin and cultivation of Cinchona,Vinca, Rauvolfia, Azadirachta
economic plants.
Describe the botany, origin, cultivation and economic uses of cash crops of East Africa
e.g Coffee, Tea, Sisal, Pyrethrum etc
Demonstrate the economic benefits of African indigenous vegetables
Demonstrate the economic benefits of indigenous trees of East Africa
Demonstrate the economic benefits of exotic trees in Kenya
Describe the botany of some wild and semi-cultivated crops with special reference to
Kenya
Describe sources and economic uses of natural and synthetic fibres
Demonstrate the status of endangered plant species in Kenya; causes, status and
conservation.
Course content
423
The botany, origin, cultivation and uses of tropical plants and their wild relatives with special
reference to East Africa economic plants e.g. Cinchona,Vinca, Rauvolfia, Azadirachta,
Coffee, Tea, Sisal, Pyrethrum, Cereals, Vegetables, Forest trees (exotic and indigenous);
Natural and synthetic fibres. The botany of wild and semi-cultivated crops with special
reference to Kenya; Endangered plant species in Kenya; causes, status and conservation.
Mode of delivery
Course assessment:
Recommended references
Burrows C. J (1990). The process of vegetation change. Urwin Hyman. London

Acland J. D. (1971). East African Crops. An introduction to the production of field
and plantation crops in Kenya, Tanzania and Uganda. Longman publishers.
What is Economic Botany?" The Field Museum. 2009. The Field Museum. May
2009
Levetin, Estelle, and McMahon, Karen. (2008). Plants and Society. 5th ednt. New
York: McGraw Hill Publishing Company. 98-99
BOT 418: POPULATION GENETICS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course provides a detailed account of individual and combined effects of gene frequencies
on populations and the overall influence of ecological genetics on population variance.
Demonstrate a detailed understanding of the individual and combined effects of
mutation, natural selection and genetic drift on a population.
Describe in details the procedure for determination of allelic frequencies.
424
Demonstrate a clear understanding of the Hardy Weinberg equilibrium and its

influence on a population.
Give an account of the gene concept and its role in population genetics.
Demonstrate an understanding of the concepts of inbreeding and gene fixation in natural
populations.
Outline the principles and fundamentals of ecological genetics.
Demonstrate an understanding of the principle of quantitative genetic advance.
Demonstrate an understanding of determination of components of genetic variance.
Demonstrate an understanding of the analysis of data of nested and dialed crosses and
their interpretation.
Describe the concepts of coefficient of breeding and heterosis.
Course content
Effects of mutation, selection, genetic drift and gene flow; both their individual and combined
effects of gene frequency. Determination of allelic frequencies. Hardy-weinberg equilibrium.
The gene concept. Inbreeding and gene fixation in natural populations. Natural selection.
Fundamentals of ecological genetics. Quantitative genetic advance. Determination of
components of genetic variance. Analysis of data of nested and dialed crosses and their
interpretation. Coefficient of breeding, heterosis.
Mode of Delivery
Course assessment:
Griffiths A. J. F., Gelbart W. M. and Miller J. H. (1999). Modern Genetic Analysis. New York:
W. H. Freeman.
Griffiths A. J. F., Miller J. H.and Suzuki D. T, (2000). An Introduction to Genetic Analysis. 7th
edition. New York: W. H. Freeman.
BOT 419 MICROBIOLOGY II
3 CREDIT HOURS
425
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to Environmental Microbiology
At the end of the course, students should be able to understand the microbial diversity,
processes and applications in the environment and to be able to isolate, culture and sub-culture
microorganisms in the laboratory.
Course content:
Properties of soil microflora. Organic matter decomposition. Carbon, nitrogen, sulphur and
phosphorus cycles, symbiotic and non-symbiotic nitrogen fixation. Rhizosphere microbiology.
Mycorrhiza. Microorganisms as disease agents in animals, plants and insects. Host/pathogen
relationships. Bacteria motility and chemotaxis. Practical techniques, Media preparation,
Growth and monitoring of cultures, Use of selective media, Isolation of pure cultures
Mode of delivery
Autoclave, inoculating hood, incubating oven, refridgerator, chilling freezer, basic laboratory
apparatus, centrifuges, gas burners, heating blocks, Writing materials, writing boards. light
microscopes, permanent slides, charts and posters, computer.
Course assessment
Microbiology: An introduction (eighth edition) by Gerald Tortora et al.
Introduction to Microbiology by John Ingraham and Catherine Ingraham
The textbook of Microbiology (7th Edition) by Anantharayan nad Paniker
Textbook of Environmental Microbiology by Pradipta Mohapatra
Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and applications of Recombinant DNA by Glick
BOT 420: PHYTOPATHOLOGY

Purpose
3 CREDIT HOURS
426
This course provides an analysis of the basic concepts of plant pathology including
host/parasite relationship, culture of fungi and procedures for identification of some plant
diseases.
Demonstrate an understanding of the basic concepts of plant pathology.
Give a detailed account of the causes of plant diseases and the host/parasite
relationships.
Demonstrate an understanding of various procedures for fungi culture.
Describe the protocols for identification and control of major plant diseases in East
Africa.
Course content
Introduction to the concepts of plant pathology. Causes of diseases and host/parasite
relationships. Culture of fungi. Identification and control of major plant diseases in East Africa
Mode of delivery
Course assessment:
Staff performance
To be based on student evaluations, evaluation by head of department and self
evaluation.
Introduction to practical Phytobacteriology. (2000). A Safrinet Manual for

Phtobacteriology. SDZ Switzerland.
Bradbury J. F. (1986). Guide to plant pathogenic bacteria. CAB international.
Bergeys Manual of Systematic Bacteriology (1994). Editors; Craig N. R and Hholt j. G.,
volume 1. Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore, London.
Hattingh M. J. (1987). Phytobacteriology. Laboratory Guide. Department of Plant
pathology. University of Stellenbosch, Stellenbosch.
BOT 421:
BOTANY RESEARCH PROJECT

427
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To enable students to carryout original research using recent experimental techniques, and be
able to present the results in a logical way.
Able to carry out independent research.
Able to present results and findings logically and scholarly.
Able to carry out publications from the work.
Course content
members of staff including the head of department.
Mode of delivery
Demonstrations, group/class discussions and practical exercises.
Computer, writing boards, and writing materials
Course Assessment:
The viva shall be weighted at 20% while
The report at 80% with the breakdown as: introduction, statement of the problem and literature
Reference materials
WILL DEPEND ON THE RESEARCH TOPIC
ZOO422E: SEMINAR
3 CREDIT HOURS
ZOO 424: RESEARCH PROJECT
3 CREDIT HOURS
428
Purpose
To enable students to carryout original research using recent experimental techniques, and be
able to present the results in a logical way.
Able to carry out independent research.
Able to present results and findings logically and scholarly.
Able to carry out publications from the work.
Course content
Prerequisites: zoo 321 and 322
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Reference materials
429

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ZOOLOGY
1.0 Introduction
The Department of Zoology, in accordance with the general objectives of the University offers a
oriented towards industrial applications and the overall pattern of employment of zoology
graduates.
cases oral examination are given at the end of each semester. The first year is spent on basic
science courses. In the second year, the student starts to orient towards zoology. The third and
fourth years are devoted to an intensive study of theoretical and experimental zoology courses
and allow for a certain amount of specialist option courses. Laboratory practices throughout the
study years, laboratory work, field course and guided research project is aimed at developing
the graduates' practical skills. The programme hopes to provide graduates not only with a
specialized knowledge of the subject but also a mind which has been trained and exposed to well
established scientific and technological procedures.
The Department also offers basic courses and service courses for science and medical
oriented faculties.
partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The zoological programme is

The department of Biological Sciences designed the zoology curriculum with the flexibility to
accommodate emerging challenges. Zoology students at Narok University combine theory with
practice, gaining skills that produce results and improve technology in a morally upright and
ethical way. In class, students get the latest in both theory and practical applications from
dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are complemented with hands-on laboratory
experience and field course.
430

In principle, Zoology is a fundamental science from which other sciences are reduced down
from. For instance Chemistry can be thought of as applied Physics while zoology is applied
Chemistry. Science, technology and innovation has been identified as a central plank for
Kenya's development and a foundation for vision 2030. To drive the attainment of vision 2030,
scientists would need to be trained, accordingly zoology as a fundamental science would be
The Zoology program is designed to empower students with the biological, experimental and
Computational tools necessary in industry and allied fields such as medical, agricultural and
environmental ecology , Renewable energy, and zoological education. Also, students who
complete the programme can pursue postgraduate studies in a desired biological discipline like
entomology, genetic engineering, medicine, agriculture and environmental conservation thus
enhancing gaps that currently exist in the country and the region.
The Zoology programme is aimed at:
i) Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of zoology and
acquisition of the necessary skills in order to use their knowledge in zoology in a wide
range of practical applications.
zoology to fit into an inter-disciplinary environment.
iv) Relating the training of Science graduates to the employment opportunities within the
country.
v) To equip students with a good understanding of the principles of Applied zoology,
vi) To produce Applied zoology graduates with the necessary skills for team work in an
i) Knowledge and understanding
The zoology programme enables students develop competencies required to:
i) Solve problems in zoology and offer relevant solutions using appropriate tools.
ii) Understand zoological phenomena and model their behaviour through analytical
techniques.
iii) Apply principles of operation of zoological devices and instruments
iv)Know the environmental and social impact of a zoological activities
v) Understand business and management techniques relevant to a zoologist
431
j) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge

At the end of the programme the learner should be able to:
conclusions.
ii) Use scientific principles in solutions of zoological problems.
iii) Discuss various zoology phenomena
iv) Analyze experimental data in zoology.
v) Use computers in the treatment of zoological results
vi) Prepare research proposals and write reports
access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice and field work.
ix) Meet the minimum University admission criteria
x) Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
Biology
Chemistry
Geography
Biological sciences
Physical sciences
OR
Mathematics
Physics
Geography
mathematics

(a) Theory Courses
30%
70%
432

(c) Seminar Course (ZOO 424E)
evaluation of the report 50%
20%
20%
60%
50% and

To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in zoology, a student shall satisfy all the university
below:
433

Oral examination
70%
30%

examination,
Philosophy of the programme
With the changing demands of the global technology, the science environment demands have
also changed. For a technology to succeed, it requires personnel with the proper training to
move it forward through academic rigor, partnership with the industry world and research
institutions in the world.
School of science designed the BSc. Zoology to meet these demands in the market place.
Graduates of our standard-setting BSc. Zoology combine knowledge with action, gaining skills
that produce results and improve technology in amorally upright and ethical way. In the
classroom, students get the latest in both theory and practical applications from top lecturers
and scholars. In our BSc. Zoology, lecturing is complemented with high-impact,
hands-on practicals in the area of study, field work and industrial attachement.
Rationale of the Programme
School of science at NU has been offering quality courses in Physics, Chemistry, Zoology,
Botany, Mathematics, computer science and information science. The undergraduate
programme trains and awards students with a Bachelor of Science degree in Physics,
Chemistry, Zoology, Botany, Mathematics, computer science and information science after a 4year period. This programs aim at providing a firm grounding in the basic concepts and
methods as well as offering a selection of special courses related to developing areas of the
subject, particularly those areas of premier importance to the development of the global.
Needs assessment/ market survey/ situation analysis
434
The review of the existent BSc. Zoology curriculum was driven by the need to design a
programme that meets the changing needs in the science and technology fields. The growing
trend in re-organization of traditional science processes and the subsequent re-engineering of
science and technology processes has led to the need of more responsive personnel to manage
the change.
Goals of the Programme
Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of Zoology and
acquisition of the necessary skills, in order to use their knowledge in Zoology in a wide
range of practical application.
Developing creative thinking and the power of imagination to enable graduates work in
Accommodating their relevant fields in allied disciplines and to allow the graduates of
Science to fit into the inter-disciplinary environment.
Relating the training of Science graduates to the employment opportunities within the
country.
Zoology, by its very nature, is the central science in today's world, and many graduates use
their degrees as a solid foundation for advanced study in Zoology as well as for study in
medicine, pharmacy, veterinary medicine, forensic science, materials science, environmental
medicine, pharmacy, veterinary medicine, forensic science, materials science, environmental
science, medical technology, physical therapy, patent or environmental law, education - all are
possibilities for students with a Zoology degree.
The graduands should:
possess fundamental and practical knowledge of unit calculations pertaining to

scientific reasoning.
Describe chemical phenomena at the cell and system level.
continue in the learning experience as their life proceeds.
Possess a command of the several sub disciplines of Zoology and a knowledge of
the literature available in each.
possess the knowledge needed to interpret data presented by modern Zoology
techniques
have the ability to understand and duplicate experiments given in the biological
literature.
have an understanding of their ethical and professional responsibilities as
a scientist and Zoologist as well as an awareness of the contemporary societal
and global issues facing Zoologist.
Mode of Delivery of the programme
The course to be taught using lectures, tutorials, assignments, praticals, field work and,
industrial attachment.
435

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ZOOLOGY
BSc CURRICULUM
THE GOAL
The department of Biological Sciences aims to achieve excellence in teaching and research in
the area of animal sciences. It aims to equip the graduates with appropriate knowledge and
skills in animal sciences and to understand the animal function and relationship with other
animal sciences.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted into the BSc. Zoology programme, a candidate must:a) Meet the Minimum University and School of Sciences entry requirements.
b) Have passed with a minimum university requirement in the following group of
subjects:Biology
Chemistry
Geography
Biological sciences
Physical sciences
OR
Mathematics
Physics
Geography
mathematics
YEAR ONE
Bachelor of Science students intending to take the Zoology programme are required to take and
pass 6 units each from Zoology and Mathematics, 8 units from Physics and 7 units from
Chemistry, 6 Units of Communication Skills, 3 Units from National Development, and 3 units
of Quantitative Skills.
YEAR TWO
Students intending to take the Zoology are required to take and pass 12 units each of Botany,
Chemistry and Zoology, 3 Units from National Development and 6 units of Mathematics and
statistics- MAT 200 and Biochemistry-CHE 214
YEAR THREE
Students who wish to major in Zoology must take and pass 24 units os Zoology, 3 units of
national development, 12 units of other courses approved by the department and upto 6 other
units.
436
YEAR FOUR
Students majoring in Zoology must take and pass in at least 36 units of Zoology including a
research project of 6 units and 3 units of national development. Up to 6 other units may be
offered on the recommendation of the department.
EXAMINATION
The general University semester examination regulation shall apply. Each course taught during
the semester will be examined at the end of the semester. All written examinations will be of
three-hour duration. The end of semester examination and the continuous assessment shall be
based on practical, written tests and/or assignments.
YEAR ONE
SEMESTER I
CODE
UNITS
ZOO: 110
BASIC ZOOLOGY I
BOT : 110
BASIC BOTANY I
CHE : 110
BASIC CHEMISTRY I
PHY : 105
PHYSICS I FOR LIFE SIENCE I
STA : 110
INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS
IRD : 100
IRD : 101
QUANTITATIVE SKILLS I
SEMESTER II
ZOO: 111
BASIC ZOOLOGY II
BOT : 111
BASIC BOTANY II
CHE : 111
BASIC CHEMISTRY II
PHY : 106
PHYSICS I FOR LIFE SIENCE II
STA : 111
INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY THEORY
IRD : 102
IRD : 103
DEVELOPMENTCONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS
YEAR TWO
437
SEMESTER I
ZOO: 210
INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
ZOO: 211
ANIMAL GENETICS AND EVOLUTION
BOT : 210
CRYPTOGAMIC BOTANY
CHE : 210
ATOMIC STRUCTURE AND BONDING
CHE : 211
BASIC ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
COM: 110
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AND

COMPUTING
COM: 111
COMPUTER APPLICATION
IRD : 200
STATE SOCIETY AND DEVELOPMENTAL
SEMESTER TWO
ZOO: 212
VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
ZOO: 213
INTRODUCTORY ANIMAL ECOLOGY
BOT: 211
PLANT STUCTURE AND FUNCTION
BOT: 212
PLANT ECOLOGY I
BOT: 213
INTRODUCTION TO GENETICS AND

EVOLUTION
CHE: 212
ATOMIC STRUCURE AND BONDING
CHE: 214
BIOCHEMISTRY
COM: 210
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER
SCIENCE
YEAR THREE
SEMESTER I
ZOO 310 DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
ZOO 311 PHYSIOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY

ZOO 312 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
ZOO 313 EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY
ZOO 314 PHYSIOLOGY 1
BOT 310
MORPHOGENESIS AND DEVELOPMENTAL

ANATOMY
438
BOT 314
PHYCOLOGY
IRD: 305
ENTERPRENEURSHIP
SEMESTER II
ZOO: 315
ARTHROPOD BIOLOGY
ZOO: 316
MAMMALOGY
ZOO: 317
FIELD COURSE
ZOO: 314
ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY
ZOO: 318E
COMPARATIVE ENDOCRINOLOGY
ZOO: 319E
ANIMAL BEHAVIOUR
ZOO: 321E
INDUSTRIAL ATTACHMENT
ZOO: 322E
BIOSTATISTICS
YEAR IV
SEMESTER I
ZOO 410
IMMUNOLOGY 1
ZOO 411E
MARINE BIOLOGY
ZOO 412E
TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY
ZOO 413
ENTOMOLOGY I
ZOO 414
MICROBIOLOGY
DISEASES
ZOO 415E
PARASITOLOGY I
ZOO 416E
ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY
OF
INFECTIOUS
SEMESTER II
ZOO 417E
IMMUNOLOGY 11
ZOO 418E
APPLIED TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY
ZOO 419E
AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY
ZOO 420E
MEDICAL
AND
ENTOMOLOGY
ZOO 421E
PARASITOLOGY II
ZOO 422E
PHYSIOLOGY II
VETERINARY
439
ZOO 423E
ICHTHYOLOGY
ZOO 424E
SEMINAR
ZOO 425
RESEARCH PROJECT
IRD: 400
DEVELOPMENT PROJECT APPRAISALS
ZOO 110
BASIC ZOOLOGY I
3UNITS
Scientific Study of animals; Binomial nomenclature, Animal classification; Kingdoms of life;

Prokaryotes and eukaryotes, Origin of Metazoa: Levels of organization; Animal body plans and
animal symmetry; Evolution of body cavities; Metamerism and cephalization; General
characteristics and basic structural features of animals.
ZOO 111
BASIC ZOOLOGY II
3UNITS
The cell theory; Animal cell: Ultra structure and organization of cell organelles; Animal tissues;
Digestion; excretion, circulation, cellular, respiratory and reprodutive system; Neuro-endocrine
system and homeostasis.
ZOO 210
3 UNITS
Introduction to invertebrates with practical emphasis on East African animals:- Protozoa,
sponges, acoelomates ,pseudo-coelomates and coelomates. Their classification of the major
invertebrates; biology, adaptive radiation, phylogeny and functional significance of structural
components
ZOO 211
3UNITS
History: the continuity of life; Preformation and Epigenesis; Pangenesis and inheritances of
acquired characters; Chromosomes and heredity: cell division to include mitosis and meiosis;
Genes and inheritance; Mendelian and non-mendelian traits in man.
Evolution and the theory of natural selection: reproduction and spontaneous generation, the
fossil record and circumstantial evidence; Darwins theory of natural selection; The
fundamental evolutionary process; the genetic basis of evolution, sources of variation and the
role of natural selection in animal evolution; Evolutionary divergence, races, species and
isolating mechanisms to include reproductive,behavioural and geographical mechanisms.
440
ZOO 212:
Introduction to
modern fishes,
significance of
VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
3 UNITS
phylum chordata: Adaptability of the chordate body plan as exemplified by
amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals; Adaptive radiation and functional
Structural components.
ZOO213
INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL ECOLOGY
3 UNITS
The ecosystem and the concept of the biosphere; Interrelationships between biotic and abiotic
factors; Source of energy for living organisms, Autotrophy and heterotrophy; Trophic
dynamics, energy flow and law of thermodynamics; Mineral cycling and the participation of
micro-organisms in biogeochemical cycles
3. THIRD YEAR COURSES
ZOO 310: DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY 3 UNITS
Reproduction and reproductive systems, Gametogenesis, Fertilization, Cleavage, Gastrulation,
Differentiation and Organogenesis, presumptive fate maps; Hatching and Post embryonic
development; Morphogenesis and typical development
ZOO: 311
PHYSIOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY
3UNITS
Microscopical organization of tissues and organs; Interpretation of prepared sections,
reproduction, nervous and hormonal system.
ZOO 312:
MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
3UNITS
Cell organelle functions: transport across membranes; energy generation and protein
biosynthesis; Nucear-cytoplasmic interactions; Interactions to genetic engineering and
biotechnology
ZOO 313: EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY

3 units
Evolution and the theory of natural selection ; reproduction and spontaneous generation, the
fossil record and circumstantial evidence; Development of evolutionary theories, variation
selection, drift, founder principle, coevolution, speciation, complex adaptation, phylogeny and
evolution of man; The fundamental evolutionary process; The genetic basis of evolution,
sources of variation and role of natural selection in animal evolution; Evolutionary divergence,
races, species and isolating mechanisms.
ZOO 314- Environmental Physiology:
3 UNITS
441
Physiological adaptations of various body parts to environmental conditions; Effect of body

size on energy metabolism, body temperature regulation; Respiration, osmoregulation and
excretion; Hibernation, aestivation, diapauses; Biological Rhythms
Zoo 315: Arthropod biology
3 UNITS
General introduction to arthropods: identification and taxonomy of arthropods; morphology,
anatomy, physiology and life history of arthropod groups; arthropods of economic importance.
Zoo 316: vertebrate zoology II

3 UNITS
Classification, origins, zoogeography, diversity, and adaptation; functional morphology;
Emphasis on mammalian orders occurring in east Africa.
Zoo 317: field course

3 UNITS
A field course lasting approximately one week in the field at the end of third year is designed to
acquaint students with animals in their natural habitats and the methods used in the study; each
student will be expected to make collections and preservations of specimens and to provide a
written report on the course.
Z00 321: INDUSTRIAL ATTATCHMENT (YEAR THREE LONG VACATION)
2UNITS
ZOO 322 E: BIOSTATISTICS

3 units
significance.
442
Electives
Zoo 318E: comparative endocrinology
3 UNITS
A comparative study of endocrine systems; invertebrates: endocrine glands and neurosecretion:
control of reproduction, diapauses, growth, metamorphosis, pigmentation and osmoregulation;
vertebrates: endocrine glands and hypothalamohypophyseal complex: control of metabolism
growth, reproduction and hydromineral metabolism.
Zoo319E: animal behavior

3 UNITS
An evolutionary and quantitative approach to the study of animal behavior; simple and
complex behavior, orientation learning; the generic basis of selected East African animals.
4. YEAR FOUR COURSES

ZOO 410: IMMJNOLOGY 1
3 UNITS
Basic immunological terms and concepts; Brief history of development of immunology;
Adaptative and innate immunity; Cells involved in the immune response; Origin development
and mobility of the immune cells in the lymphoid system; Immunoglobulins: synthesis,
classification, structure arid function; Antibody- antigen interactions, Humoral and cell
mediated immune responses
ZOO 411 E: MARINE ECOLOGY
3 UNITS
The marine environment; Ocean basins and their circulation; Pelagic environment; Benthic
environment; Tides, Littoral and sub littoral ecosystems; Mangrove swamps, sea grass beds,
rocky shores, coral reefs; Estuaries and salt marshes; Deep ocean; Organic production in the
sea; Nutrien cycling; Benthos, Planktons, Phytoplankton, zooplankton and Fisheries;
Adaptations of the marine organisms; Marine pollution; Oceans and global climate change;
Applied marine ecology.
ZOO 412 E: TERRESTIAL ECOLOGY (YS41)

3 UNITS
Population ecology; growth and regulation of animal population, intraspecific and interspecific
interactions; Community ecology; determinants of structure and diversity; Deliminations;
Energy flow and its regulations.
ZOO 413 E ENTOMOLOGY

3 UNITS
The class insecta: classification, morphology and anatomy; Development and metamorphosis,
ecology, dispersal and migration; social insecta with emphasis on bees and temiites; insect
toxins, insect pollination of plants, insect communication; Insect population ecology.
443
ZOO 414 E: MICROBIOLOGY OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES

3 UNITS
Classification of microbes; Structure and replication of bacteriophage; role of microbes in
infectious diseases, their transmission and control. Underlying principles of host/parasite
relationship. Practical techniques; Media preparation, growth and monitoring of cultures, use of
selective media and isolation of pure cultures.
ZOO 415-Parasitology I:
3 UNITS
Animal relationships and the evolution of parasitism; Adaptations of parasites to parasitism;
The host-parasite relationships; The morphology, life cycles, physiology, pathogenesis and
pathology of protozoans; helminth and arthropod parasites of medical and veterinary
importance of E. Africa; Epidemiology, diagnosis and control of parasitic infections.
ZOO 416 E. ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY

3 UNITS
Physiological adaptations of various body systems to environmental conditions; Effects of body
size on energy, metabolism, body temperature regulation; respiration, osmoregulation and
excretion. Hibernation, aestivation, diapauses; Biological rhythms.
ZOO 417 E. IMMUNOLOGY II

3 UNITS
Prerequisite: ZOO 410
Biological aspect of immunologlobulin formation; cell co-operation in the immune response;
Regulation in the immune response; Genetic control of immunity; immunology;
Transplantation and graft rejection; Immunosuppression; Immunological techniquesprecipitation,
haemagglutination,
complement
fixation,
Immunoflouresence,
Radioimmunoassay, ELISA, Immunoblotting, Monoclonal antibodies; effectors cell assays.
ZOO 418 E. APPLIED TERRESTIAL ECOLOGY

3 UNITS
Application of ecological concepts to the following topics: management of animal populations,
agricultural ecosystems, the effects of disturbances on ecosystemsincludings pollution and
desertification; Human population ecology.
ZOO 419 E. AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY

3 UNITS
Prerequisite: Zoo 413
Biology of major insect pests of field crops including fruit trees and stored products; Insect
vectors of plant diseases; Principles of pest control; Insecticides classification, chemistry, Mode
444
of action and safety, precautions, Ecological effects of insecticides; Biological control;

Biological agents, genetic techniques; Cultural control; Host plant resistance to insects;
Integrated management.
ZOO 420 E. MEDICAL AND VETERINARY ENTOMOLOGY

3 UNITS
Prerequisite: zoo4l3 and zoo 415
The recognition biology and control of the arthropod parasites and disease vectors of man and
animals, the ecology and behavior of vectors in relation to disease transmission
ZOO 421 E PAR4SITOLOGY 11

3 UNITS
Prerequisttes zoo 415
The hosts response to protozoa and helminthes parasites, Immunology pathogeness and
pathology of parasitic infection, Principles of epidomology Emphasis on selected parasites of
medical and vetermary importance in east Africa.
ZOO 422 E. PHYSIOLOGY II

3 UNITS
Prerequisites: zoo 314
Mammalian physiology to include: the nervous system, sympathetic and parasympathetic coordination; sense organs of smell, vision and hearing; perspiration; Reproduction, excretion and
neuro muscular physiology integration.
ZOO 423 F. ICHTHYOLOGY

3 UNITS
Prerequisites: zoo 320 F and zoo 411
The biology of fishes, morphology, classification, feeding, growth, reproduction migration and
adaptation; Economic importance of fisheries, Aquaculture.
ZOO424: SEMINAR
HOURS
3 CREDIT
445
ZOO 425 : RESEARCH PROJECT

6 UNITS
Students will be required to carry out an individual study under supervision; they will then
submit a report written in a scientific manner. Students will be assigned projects at the
beginning of the first semester final year and they will normally be required to complete them
towards the end of the second semester.
ZOO 110
BASIC ZOOLOGY I
Purpose
To introduce the learner to the diversity of the animal kingdom
446
3 CREDIT HOURS

Able to demonstrate an understanding about the natural world and the animal
inhabitants of varied and changing environments
Identify and state the general characteristics of animals in various phyla and
classes in animal kingdom
Course content
Scientific Study of animals; Binomial nomenclature, Animal classification; Kingdoms of life;
Prokaryotes and eukaryotes, Origin of Metazoa: Levels of organization; Animal body plans and
animal symmetry; Evolution of body cavities; Metamerism and cephalization; General
characteristics and basic structural features of animals.
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, laptop/TV, writing materials, preserved specimen, projectors, Charts etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests/lab practicals& assignments) which will

normally contribute 30% of the total mark
.
Sylvia S. Mader (2007). Biology 9th Edition. Mc Graw Hill Companies
1. STARR C. AND STAGGART R. (2001). Biology the unity and diversity of life Zoology 5 th
Edition.Wadsworth Publishing Co.
2. Jr Cleveland and Hickman et. al.(2008). Animal Diversity 5th edition. Mc Graw Hill
THE INTERNET: You should visit the website regularly for pictures of the organisms and
further reading
447
ZOO 111 :BASIC ZOOLOGY II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to animal cells ,tissues and organ systems, their structure and
functions
understand, the cell theory concept, structure and functions of the cell of the animal,
be able to identify and describe the tissues in animals,
be able to describe the various organ systems of animals
Course content
The cell theory; Animal cell: Ultra structure and organization of cell organelles; Animal tissues;
Digestion; excretion, circulation, cellular, respiratory and reproductive system; Neuroendocrine system and homeostasis.
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, Dissecting kit, Small mammals, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, mannuals etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (2 continuous assessment tests, practical reports ) which will normally


1. STARR C. AND STAGGART R. (2001). Biology the unity and diversity of life Zoology 5 th
Edition.Wadsworth Publishing Co.
2. Jr Cleveland and Hickman et. al.(2008). Animal Diversity 5th edition. Mc Graw
ZOO 210
448
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The goals of this course are to give students an appreciation for the vast diversity of
invertebrate taxa, and to endow them with practical and conceptual tools that they can use to
classify these organisms and understand the origins of this diversity. The principles of
evolutionary history and theory will form the conceptual framework for the course.
At the end of the course students should:
Have a solid understanding of basic evolutionary principles.
Be able to construct and interpret simple phylogenetic trees.
Appreciate the evolutionary history of invertebrates.
Understand key morphological innovations of the major invertebrate taxa.
Have practical skills for identifying and classifying invertebrates.
Appreciate the vast diversity of invertebrate taxa
Have an appreciation for some of the evolutionary trends that exist among invertebrate
taxa.
Course content
Introduction to invertebrates with practical emphasis on East African animals:Protozoa,sponges, acoelomates ,pseudo-coelomates and coelomates. Their classification of the
major invertebrates; biology, adaptive radiation, phylogeny and functional significance of
structural components
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, field work and practical exercises.
Microscope, Dissecting kit, Actual invertebrates, field work, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests, practical work and reports) which will

1. E. E. Ruppert, R. S. Fox, and R. D. Barnes Invertebrate Zoology: A
Functional Evolutionary Approach, 7th ed. Thomson.
449

Biology of the Invertebrates (6th Ed.), J. A. Pechenik, McGraw Hill
ZOO 211
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose:
To introduce the learner to comprehensive study of the nature, transmission, and expression
of genetic information in animals as well as the concepts of evolution of animals
By the end of the course the learner should be able to:
Demonstrates understanding of the nature, transmission, and expression of genetic

information in animals
Describe areas and techniques of research in genetics
To solve simple genetic related problems using punnet square and pedigree
Describe the basic concepts of animal evolution and site evidence of evolution in action
Course content
Introduction and Milestones in genetics; Blending theories, Pangenesis and epigenesis;
Germplasm theory; Biogenesis Vs Abiogenesis.Mendels
monohybrid
and dihybrid
inheritance; Mendels 1st and 2nd laws , Punnet square. Intermediate inheritance, codominance,
partial dominance, lethal alleles, multiple alleles, pleiotropy, polygenic traits, epistasis
phenocopies, sex influenced traits, environmental influence. Sex determination. Pedigree.
Mitosis and meiosis. Chromosome, Gene structures and aberrations. Theories on origin of life;
History of evolution; Lamarkism; Theory of Natural Selection. Factors leading to change in
population. Neo-Darwinism and circumstantial evidence. Evolutionary divergence, races,
species and isolating mechanisms including reproductive,behavioural and geographical
mechanisms. Laboratory practicals: Statistical genetics, variation within species, Drosophilla
genetics Class project: Variation in humans,construction of genetic maps
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, beads, Charts and photomicrographs etc.
450
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests/laboratory practicals and assignments and

quizes) which will normally contribute 30% of the total mark
Eldon John Gardner (2003).Principles of Genetics 3 RD Edition. Simmons, Snustad

WileyIndia Publication
M. B. V. Roberts (2003): Biology: A Functional Approach 4th Edn. CBS Publishers and
Distributors Pvt. Ltd
Neil A. Campbell and Jane B. Reece et. al.,(2006) Campbell Biology Concepts and
Connections 7th Edition. Benjamin Cummings
You should visit the website regularly for further reading eg., www.mastering biology.com
ZOO 212:
ZOO 212:
VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To acquaint the learner with the identification, systematics, anatomy, and adaptive
strategies of the vertebrates and to field techniques used in their study
Be able to characterize and understand the classes of extant vertebrates; their

evolutionary history and phylogenetic relationships
Explain the Morphological, physiological and behavioral adaptations of vertebrates in

aquatic and terrestrial environment.
Describe areas and techniques of research in vertebrate biology;
Gain practical experience using dichotomous keys to identify E.African vertebrates.
Demonstrate the ability to identify many of the vertebrate species from Kenya
Course content
Overview of chordate hallmarks and general characteristics; Significance of course;
Protochordata and Vertebrata; Characteristics of vertebrates; Theories on ancestry and
451
evolution of vertebrates; Earliest and modern vertebrates. Evolution of Vertebrates. General

characteristics and classification of Fishes: Chondrichthyes Vs Osteichthyes; structural and
functional adaptaion of fishes; Migration, Homing and economic importance. Structural
adaptation for aquatic and terrestrial organisms. Ancestrry of amphibians: Modification of fish
body parts; Age of amphibians and their contribution to vertebrate evolution. Amphibians:
Classes; paedomorphosis, neoteny, migration and economic importance. Reptiles: Evolution of
amniote egg, general characteristics, classification, origin, adaptive radiation and economic
importance; venomous and non-venomous snakes. AVES: Avian- Reptilian similarities; general
characteristics, classification, origin, adaptive radiation; structural adaptations for flight and
economic importance, structural and functional unity in birds. Mammals: characteristics,
classification, origin, diversity and economic importance. Research methods for vertebrates
Mode of delivery
Lectures, video, group/class discussions and laboratory practicals, field trip.
Writing, boards, writing, materials,projectors, group/class, discussion, Charts, and Newp
aper cuttings, student presentation, dissection boards, preserved and fresh specimen
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
Jr Cleveland and Hickman et. al. (2008). Animal
Publishing company
Diversity 5 th edition. Mc Graw Hill
Sylvia S. Mader (2007). Biology 9th Mc Graw Hill Companies
Miller S.A. and Harley J.B. (2002). Zoology 5th Edition. Mc Graw Hill
Internet: Visit website for self directed learning and diagrams
ZOO213
INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL ECOLOGY

452
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of this course is to provide the students with a broad introduction to the
major, current themes in ecology.
At the end of the course students should :
Describe the basic principles of ecology, including population ecology, community

ecology, and ecosystem function.
Describe the characteristics of the major biomes and ecosystems of the Earth.
Describe the interrelationships between land, sea, the atmosphere and the living things
that occupy these environments.
Course content
The ecosystem and the concept of the biosphere; Interrelationships between biotic and abiotic
factors; Source of energy for living organisms, Autotrophy and heterotrophy; Trophic
dynamics, energy flow and law of thermodynamics; Mineral cycling and the participation of
micro-organisms in biogeochemical cycles
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, Dissecting kit, invertebrates, writing boards, writing materials, projectors,
etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (2 continuous assessment tests, field reports and practicals ) which will
Reece, J.B., L.A. Urry, M.L. Cain, S.A. Wasserman, P.V. Minorsky, and R.B. Jackson.
2011. Campbell Biology, Ninth Edition. Benjamin Cummings. San Francisco
453
Begon ME, Harper CA and Townsend JL (2006) Ecology: from individuals to
ecosystems. 4th edn. Blackwell Science
Townsend JL, Harper CA and Begon ME (2006) kologie. Springer Verlag
Quinn GP, Keough MJ (2002) Experimental design and data analysis for biologists.
Cambridge University Press
ZOO 310: DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The successful student in this course will develop a working knowledge animal development
from fertilization to morphogenesis. In addition, the successful student will demonstrate
proficiency in embryo dissection, developmental histology, morphology, and developmental
gene expression assays
At the end of the course students should :
Integrate knowledge of aspects of cell and developmental biology covered in this course
and demonstrate this understanding in the in-term assessments and final examination
Synthesize concise, clear laboratory reports incorporating a summary of your

experimental results.
In addition, the successful student will demonstrate proficiency in embryo dissection,

developmental histology, morphology, and developmental gene expression assays
Course content
Reproduction and reproductive systems, Gametogenesis, Fertilization,Cleavage, Gastrulation,
Differentiation and Organogenesis, presumptive fate maps; Hatching and Post embryonic
development; Morphogenesis and typical development
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, dissecting kit, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
454
Course Assessment:
Developmental Biology, Ninth Edition. Scott F. Gilbert (2010)
Gilberts Developmental Biology, Eighth Edition (2006)
Hamburger & Hamilton (1992) Dev Dyn 195: 229-30.Bellairs & Osmond (2005) Atlas
of Chick Development
Tyler (2000) Developmental Biology Guide for Experimental Study p. 137-161.Korn &
Cramer (2007) JOVE 307.
Lepilina (2006) Cell 127: 607-619.
ZOO: 311
PHYSIOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To provide the learner with basic knowledge of the anatomy, physiology and histology of
animals tissues and organs which is not covered in the sister course Physiology II (ZOO
422).
Course Content
Overviews of the study of cellular and tissue organization as the basis of function in the animal
body. Tissues and Tissue functions: Epithelial; Connective tissues, fluid connective tissues;
Muscular; Nervous reproductive tissues. General histology and function of the skin, liver, the
reproductive system, the brain and the gonads, sperms and ova. Histological techniques
including: collection, preservation, processing and storage of specimen. Interpretation of
prepared sections, reproductive, nervous and hormonal system. Identification and labelling of
diagrams relating to the topic areas covered. NB: Functions not to be discussed in detail.
At the end of the course students should:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of connective tissue, the liver, the reproductive system and the
brain.
455
2. Demonstrate an ability to relate physiology on a macroscopic level to the function of organs

and tissue.
3. Present assignments to demonstrate the students ability to employ a variety of methods of
study in investigating, recording and analysing material to apply the knowledge gained in
Learning
Mode of delivery
Lectures, video, group/class discussions and presentations and laboratory practicals, mini
projects.
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Charts ,photomicrographs, prepared
sections of tissues and organs eg., reproductive, nervous and hormonal system; live
animals and/or animal tissues etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests/lab practicals, assignments and quiz) which will
Staff performance
John Clancy and Andrew J. M. McVicar (2002). Oxford University Press. Physiology and
Anatomy: A Homeostatic Approach 2nd edition
1. Elaine N. Marieb and N. Hoehn (2006). Human Anatomy and Physiology. Benjamin
Cummings Publishing company
2. Sylvia S. Mader (2007). Biology 9th Edition. Mc Graw Hill Companies
Internet: Learner to visit the internet regularly for self directed learning
ZOO 312: MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To provide the learner with a good understanding of the key principles of Molecular Biology,
awareness of ethical issues and laboratory and research skills.
456

Upon completion of this course, the student should:
Gain a full appreciation of how molecular complexes interact to make a cell function
Be able to explain the basic techniques of molecular technology (DNA isolation,

restriction enzyme digestion and mapping, )
Be able to discuss the ethical and controversies arising on genetic engineered organisms
Course content
Introduction and and application of genetic engineering. DNA in eukaryotic vs prokaryotic;
Principles of cellular organization and function. , GERL complex, Peroxisomes and plant
vacuoles; Structure and function of mitochondrion and chloroplast; Biological cell membranes;
Fluid mosaic model; Facilitated diffusion, Active transport, Endocytosis, Receptor mediated
endocytosis. Energy generation:importance and purpose of respiration; phosphorylation,
glycolysis,pyruvate oxidation,krebs cycle, electron transport chain and chemiosmosis.
Transcription and translation . Structure and function of the nucear membrane, nuclear pore
complex, regulation and selective import of proteins to the nucleus; transport of RNAs.
Transgenic organisms; techniques which allow gene manipulation; restriction enzymes, DNA
ligases; Gene cloning, Use of vectors; Advantages and disadvantages of genetic engineering
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Charts, onions, grasshopper, prepared slides,
microscope, PCR, HPLC etc.
Course Assessment:

Eldon John Gardner (2003).Principles of Genetics 3 RD Edition. Simmons, Snustad

WileyIndia Publication

457
David P. Clark (2005). Molecular Biology: Understanding the genetic revolution

Elservier/Academic Press
Chemed.cheme.purdue.edu/genchem/topi
THE INTERNET: You should visit the website regularly for topics like genetic engineering,
GMOs , controversies in recombinant gene technology
ZOO 313: EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The goal of this course is to introduce students to Evolution and the theory of natural selection.
The fundamental evolutionary process.
At the end of the course students should able to:
Gain understanding of Evolution and the theory of natural selection
Explain reproduction and spontaneous generation
Indentify evidences of evolution and phylogeny and evolution of man;
Describe the fundamentals of evolutionary process
Explain divergence of animals
Course content
Evolution and the theory of natural selection ; reproduction and spontaneous generation, the
fossil record and circumstantial evidence; Development of evolutionary theories, variation
selection, drift, founder principle, coevolution, speciation, complex adaptation, phylogeny and
evolution of man; The fundamental evolutionary process; The genetic basis of evolution,
sources of variation and role of natural selection in animal evolution; Evolutionary divergence,
races, species and isolating mechanisms
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, and practical
exercises.
458
Microscopes, videos, writing boards, binoculars, clean bench, autoclave, centrifuge

writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (2 continuous assessment tests, field reports and practical which will
Evolutionary Biology by Douglas J. Futuyma and Futuyma (Jan 1997)
Evolution for Everyone: How Darwin's Theory Can Change the Way We Think About
Our Lives by David Sloan Wilson (Dec 26, 2007)
Only a Theory: Evolution and the Battle for America's Soul by Kenneth R. Miller (May
26, 2009)
Quantum Evolution: How Physics' Weirdest Theory Explains Life's Biggest Mystery
(Norton Paperback) by Johnjoe McFadden (May 17, 2002)
ZOO 314:ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course is designed to introduce the learner to the diversity of adaptations possessed
by organisms (including humans) enabling them to successfully interact with and survive
in the biotic and abiotic environmental.
Upon completion of this course, the student should:
To be able to detail thermo-reception and thermoregulation in humans
To realise the physiological underpinnings of response to extreme temperatures
To be able to describe kidney function and its role in fluid balance
To be aware of the limitations on performance posed by hypoxic situations and to

describe the physiological responses which seek to overcome lowered partial pressures
of oxygen, both in the short-term and long-term
To be able to account for the physiological adaptations observed in acclimatisation to

environmental stressors
459
Course content
Overviews of the mechanisms organisms use to balance energetics,homeostasis and metabolism
in environments varying in temperature, water availability, resourses and oxygen: factors
affecting oxygen dissociation. Thermoregulation: Endothermy vs exothermy; hyperthermia,
hypothermia. Physiological adaptations of various body parts to environmental conditions;
Effect of body size on energy metabolism, Energy generation, osmoregulation and excretion;
Hibernation, aestivation, diapauses; Cicardial Rhythms
Mode of delivery
Lectures, video, group/class discussions and laboratory practicals and mini project.
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Charts, live animals and/or animal tissues
etc.
Course Assessment:
Coursework (continuous assessment tests/laboratory practicals, assignment) which will

Staff performance
John Clancy and Andrew J.M. McVicar (2002). Oxford University Press. Physiology and
Anatomy: A Homeostatic Approach 2nd edition
Elaine N. Marieb and Katja N. Hoehn (2006). Human Anatomy and Physiology.
Benjamin Cummings Publishing company
Miller S.A. and Harley J.B. (2002). Zoology 5th Edition. Mc Graw Hill
ZOO 315: ARTHROPOD BIOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This course stresses the following material and principles:
460
Evolutionary history, relationships of terrestrial arthropod taxa and Relevance of

terrestrial arthropods to human welfare.

Student learning objectives include the following:
students will gain a general understanding of the evolution, ecology, and overall
importance of terrestrial arthropod animals
students will gain local field experience, thus increasing appreciation for the natural
history and diversity
students will learn principles of specimen collection, care and identification that are
applicable to all sub-disciplines of organismal Biology
Course content
General introduction to arthropods: identification and taxonomy of arthropods; morphology,
anatomy, physiology and life history of arthropod groups; arthropods of economic importance
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, Dissecting kit, arthropods, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, HPLC,
UV-visible, conductivity meter etc.
Course Assessment:
The Insects: An Outline of Entomology, 3rd (or 4th) edition

(Gullan and Cranston)
Berryman AA (1986) Population dynamics of forest insects In Forest Insects: principles

and practice of population management. Plenum Press, NY. Pp. 51-77 (Chapter 4).
461
Pedigo LP. (2002). Economic decision levels for pest populations in Entomology and
Pest Management. Fourth Edition. Prentice Hall, NJ. Pp. 255-287 (Chapter 7).
Peterson RK, Hunt TE (2003) The probabilistic economic injury level: incorporating
uncertainty into pest management decision-making. Journal of Economic Entomology
96(3): 536-542.
Gusmo MR et al. (2006) Economic injury level and sequential sampling plan for
Bemisia tabaci in outdoor tomato. Journal of Applied Entomology. 130(3): 160166
Pedigo LP (2002). Pest Management Theory in Entomology and Pest Management.

Fourth Edition.Prentice Hall, NJ. Pp 289-311 (Chapter 8).
Prasad RP, Snyder WE (2006) Polyphagy complicates conservation biological control

that targets generalist predators. Journal of Applied Ecology 43: 343352
Loesy JE, Vaughan M (2006) The economic value of ecological services provided by
insects. BioScience 56(4): 311-323
ZOO 316:
MAMMOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To acquaint the learners with the identification, systematics, life history and adaptive
strategies of the Mammalia.
able to have a detailed understanding of the biology, ecology and diversity of mammals.
Course content
Classification, origins, zoogeography, diversity and adaptation; functional morphology,
emphasis on mammalian orders occurring in East Africa.
Mode of delivery
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, videos, projectors, preserved specimens,
vehicles for field and Museum trips, microscopes, chemicals.
462
Course Assessment:
total mark
Vaughan, T.A., Ryan, J.M. and Czaplewski N.J. (2010). Mammalogy. Jones and
Bartlett.
Recommended reference materials Vessey S
Feldhamer, G.A., Drickamer, L.C., Vessey, S.H., Merritt, J.F. and Krajewski, C.K.
(2007). Mammalogy: adaptation, diversity and ecology. John Hopkins University
Press.
Zoo 317: FIELD COURSE
3 HOURS
Purpose
It is designed to acquaint students with animals in their natural habitats and methods
used in the study.
Understand the structure, function, and evolution of animals, their relationship

to the environment and to humans.
How to collect and prepare research quality animal specimens
The diagnostic characteristics different animal

represented in study area
How to use a field manual to identify the family, genus and species of native
animals
Write a report on field work.
species that are well-
Course content
A field course lasting approximately 4 weeks in the field at the end of third year. It is designed
to acquaint students with animals in their natural habitats and the methods used in the study;
each student will be expected to make collections and preservations of specimens and to
provide a written report on the course.
463
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions and field trips.
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, fresh and/or preserved animal specimens,
microscopes, binoculous, HPLC, UV-visible, conductivity meter
Course Assessment:
4 weeks trips @ 10 marks per trip (40%)

A coastal field exercise (10 %)
Field report (50 %)

Nybakken, J.W. 1997. Marine Biology an Ecological Approach 4th Edition, Harper
Collins College Publishers.
Fowler J., L. Cohen and P. Jarvis. 1998. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. Wiley,
New York.
Bradshaw, Emily (2002). Greenpoint Waterfront Bird List, with Emphasis on Bushwick
Inlet Area..
Burt, W.H., & Grossenheider, R.P. (1976). A Field Guide to the Mammals. Third
Edition.
Fowler J., L. Cohen and P. Jarvis. 1998. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. Wiley,
New York.
Zoo 318E: COMPARATIVE ENDOCRINOLOGY

3 CREDIT HOURS
.
Purpose
The goal of this course is to acquaint students to endocrinology and the role of the endocrine
system.
At the end of the course students should abe to:
Acquire knowledge on comparative study of endocrine systems
Describe the role of endocrine glands and neurosecretion of animal in different

physiological processes
464
Explain how the endocrine controls metabolism, growth, reproduction and

hydromineral metabolism.
Course content
A comparative study of endocrine systems; invertebrates: endocrine glands and neurosecretion:
control of reproduction, diapauses, growth, metamorphosis, pigmentation and osmoregulation;
vertebrates: endocrine glands and hypothalamohypophyseal complex: control of metabolism
growth, reproduction and hydromineral metabolism.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, techniques and
practical exercises.
Lamina flow, clean bench, autoclave, centrifuge, Microscopes, videos, insect species,
writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Danks, J.A. and Richardson S.J. Endocrinology and evolution: Lessons from
comparative endocrinology. In Oxford Textbook of Endocrinology, ed Wass J.H.,
Oxford University Press, Oxford. 2nd edn, 2011
Endocrinology,Basic and Clinical Principles,Editors: Shlomo Melmed MD, P. Michael

Conn PhD,ISBN: 978-1-58829-427-2 (Print) 978-1-59259-829-8 (Online)
Vertebrate Endocrinology by David. O. Norris , 3rd Edtion (1997)
Oxford Textbook of Endocrinology and Diabetes (2 ed.) , Edited by John A.H. Wass,
Paul M. Stewart, Stephanie A. Amiel, Melanie C. Davies , Jul 2011
Zoo319E: ANIMAL BEHAVIOR
3 CREDIT HOURS
465
Purpose
Course goals
An introduction to animal behavior with frequent reference to topics of current interest in
evolutionary ecology, with applications to wildlife conservation and human welfare
relate evolutionary and quantitative study to animal behavior
distinguish simple and complex animal behavior
describe animal orientation
Genetic basis of selected East African animals on behavior
Course content
An evolutionary and quantitative approach to the study of animal behavior; simple and
complex behavior, orientation learning; the genetic basis of selected East African animals.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field work and practical
exercises.
Microscopes, videos, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:

Alcock, J. 2005. Animal Behavior. 9th Edition. Sinauer Associates,
Sunderland, Massachusetts, 564 pp.
466
An Introduction to Behavioural Ecology 4th Edition by Nicholas B. Davies, John R.

Krebs and Stuart A. West (2 Mar 2012)
An Introduction to Animal Behaviour by Aubrey Manning and Marian Stamp Dawkins

(15 May 1998)
Z00 321: INDUSTRIAL ATTATCHMENT
6 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
supervision of a host and University supervisor.
Write a report on tasks accomplished, assessment of the specific tasks and analysis of
the knowledge acquired in their study to the specific job assignments.
Course content
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, field work and practical exercises.
Attachment to institutions
Course Assessment:
Coursework (assessment by university and external supervisor) which will normally

Final attachment report shall normally contribute 60% of the total mark
467
ZOO 322 E: BIOSTATISTICS

.
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To acquaint the learner with the various biostatistics data analysis methods and be able to
analysis biological data using any of the methods with easy.
Be able to to do survey and design an experiment
Be able to use frequency, mean, mean ranking for data analysis
Be able to use U-tests, Kruskal-wallis and chi and F to analysis her/his data
Course content
significance.
Mode of delivery
Writing boards, laptop/TV, writing materials, projectors, Charts and Newpaper cuttings,
preserved and fresh specimen from the 5 classes etc.
468
Course Assessment:

Fundamentals of Biostatistics, By Bernard A. Rosner,2006
Biostatistics: A Methodology For the Health Sciences, by Gerald van Belle,

Lloyd D. Fisher, Patrick J. Heagerty, Thomas Lumley
ZOO 410: IMMUNOLOGY I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Course goals demonstrate an understanding of basic immunological terms and concepts, for
better understanding of the body defense mechanism/ response to pathogens.
Define basic immunological terms and a brief history of development of immunology
List and describe the major molecules, cells, tissues and organs involved in cellular and
humoral immunity
Define important terms and concepts associated with immunology, including for
example: apoptosis, the clonal selection theory, monoclonal antibodies, antibodyantigen reaction, antibody-dependant cell-mediated cytotoxicity, and immunological
tolerance
Perform basic immunological procedures to detect or diagnose diseases/disorders
Course content
Basic immunological terms and concepts; Brief history of development of immunology;
Adaptative and innate immunity; Cells involved in the immune response; Origin development
and mobility of the immune cells in the lymphoid system; Immunoglobulins: synthesis,
classification, structure arid function; Antibody- antigen interactions, Humoral and cell
mediated immune responses
469
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, techniques and practical
exercises.
Microscopes, videos, HPLC, VU-visible, autoclave, centrifuge, writing boards, writing
materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Murphy, Travers, Walport, Janeway, Ehrenstein & Mauri. Janeways Immunobiology.

Garland Science;2008.
Kohler, G. and Milstein, C., Continuous cultures of fused cells secreting antibody of
Predefined specificity. Nature, 1975. 256: p. 495-7.
Rennard, B.O., et al., Chicken soup inhibits neutrophil chemotaxis in vitro. Chest,
2000.118(4): p. 1150-7.
Youn, J., et al., Metallothionein suppresses collagen-induced arthritis via induction of

TGFbeta and down-regulation of proinflammatory mediators. Clin Exp Immunol, 2002.
129(2): p.232-9..
Tortora. Microbiology : An Introduction, 10th edition. Menlo Park:

Benjamin/Cummings; 2010.
ZOO 411 E: MARINE ECOLOGY
3 HOURS
Purpose
The goal of this course is to introduce students to marine ecology for wildlife conservation and
research
470
Gain basic understanding of marine ecosystem
Identify the different types of marine ecosystems
Understand the adaptation of marine organisms
Explain the causes and effects of marine pollution
Practice Applied marine ecology.
Course content
The marine environment; Ocean basins and their circulation; Pelagic environment; Benthic
environment; Tides, Littoral and sub littoral ecosystems; Mangrove swamps, sea grass beds,
rocky shores, coral reefs; Estuaries and salt marshes; Deep ocean; Organic production in the
sea; Nutrien cycling; Benthos, Planktons, Phytoplankton, zooplankton and Fisheries;
Adaptations of the marine organisms; Marine pollution; Oceans and global climate change;
Applied marine ecology.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, and practical exercises.
Microscopes, videos, writing boards, quadrants, binoculars, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:

Nybakken, J.W. 1997. Marine Biology an Ecological Approach 4th Edition, Harper
Collins College Publishers.
Bertness, M.C. 1999. The Ecoloyg of Atlantic Shorelines. Sinauer Associates, Inc. 417
pp. Day, RA 1994. How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, 4th ed. Oryx Press. 223
pp.Fowler J., L. Cohen and P. Jarvis. 1998. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. Wiley,
New York.
471
ZOO 412 E: TERRESTIAL ECOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The goal of this course is to introduce students to Population ecology and animal interactions
for environmental and wildlife conservation.

Learn basic Mammalian physiology
Gain basic understanding of population dynamics
Explain factors that affect growth and regulation of animal population
Appreciate the importance of animal interactions in the ecosystem
Describe energy flow and its regulations in the terrestrial ecosystem
Course content
Population ecology; growth and regulation of animal population, intraspecific and interspecific
interactions; Community ecology; determinants of structure and diversity; Deliminations;
Energy flow and its regulations.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, and practical
exercises.
Microscopes, conductivity meter, pH meter, thermometer ,videos, field trips, writing
boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
472
Inlet
Area..
Edition.
Houghton Mifflin Co. Boston Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet and E.T. LaRoe.
1979. Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States. U.S. Fish
& Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services. FWS/OBS-79/31. December.
Golley, F.B. 1993. A History of the EcosystemConcept in Ecology: More Than the Sum
of the Parts.Yale University Press, New Haven, CT.
Fowler J., L. Cohen and P. Jarvis. 1998. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. Wiley, New York.
ZOO 413 E ENTOMOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Course goals
The goal of this course is to introduce you to the world of insects so
That you can gain a better appreciation for the role they play in the scheme of life.
General introduction to entomology, insects and their economic importance

provide a solid foundation in traditional economic entomology, emphasizing pest insect

population dynamics and aspects of pest management theory and insect control;
understand the life-history and ecology of the main economically important pest insects
in East Africa
juxtapose the impact of pest insects with the social, economic, and ecological value of
insects.
Appreciate the reasons why some insects become pests, and will understand the balance
between beneficial and harmful species.
473
Course content
The class insecta: classification, morphology and anatomy; Development and metamorphosis,
ecology, dispersal and migration; social insecta with emphasis on bees and temiites; insect
toxins, insect pollination of plants, insect communication; Insect population ecology.
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, videos, insect species, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
The Insects: an Outline of Entomology, 3rd (or 4th) edition (Gullan and
Cranston)
Pedigo LP. (2002). Economic decision levels for pest populations in

Entomology and Pest Management. Fourth Edition. Prentice Hall, NJ. Pp. 255287 .
Peterson RK, Hunt TE (2003) The probabilistic economic injury level:

incorporating uncertainty into pest management decision-making. Journal of
Economic Entomology 96(3): 536-542.
Gusmo MR et al. (2006) Economic injury level and sequential sampling plan
for Bemisia tabaci in outdoor tomato. Journal of Applied Entomology. 130(3):
160166
Pedigo LP (2002). Pest Management Theory in Entomology and Pest

Management. Fourth Edition. Prentice Hall, NJ. Pp 289-311 (Chapter 8).
Prasad RP, Snyder WE (2006) Polyphagy complicates conservation biological

control that targets generalist predators. Journal of Applied Ecology 43: 343352
Loesy JE, Vaughan M (2006) The economic value of ecological services

provided by insects. BioScience 56(4): 311-323
474
ZOO 414 E: MICROBIOLOGY OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
Course goals
The goal of this course is to introduce students to the role of microbe in infectious diseases,
their transmission and control.
provide a solid foundation on the role of microbes in infectious diseases, transmission

and control
Classification of microbes; Structure and replication of bacteriophage;
Understand Underlying principles of host/parasite relationship.
Apply Practical techniques on Media preparation, growth and monitoring of cultures,

use of selective media and isolation of pure cultures.
Course content
Classification of microbes; Structure and replication of bacteriophage; role of microbes in
infectious diseases, their transmission and control. Underlying principles of host/parasite
relationship. Practical techniques; Media preparation, growth and monitoring of cultures, use of
selective media and isolation of pure cultures.
Mode of delivery
Lamina flow, clean bench, autoclave, centrifuge, Microscopes, videos, insect species,
Course Assessment:
475
ZOO415E: PARASITOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to the common infectious parasitic pathogens of humans and
animals and their impact on the human condition, control and treatment in East Africa.
Be able to relate the aspects of the complex interactions between hosts, parasites and
the environments,with particular emphasis on current debates or controversies
Describe the factors responsible for the spread of disease and carry out control
measures
Be able describe diagnostic techniques for common parasites found in E. Africa
Course content
Introduction and definition of terminologies:Cclassification of parasites; Phoresis, mutualism,
commensalism, parasitism; Types of parasites, and hosts. Monoxenous and heteroxenous life
cyle. Evolution of parasitism, Adaptation of parasites to parasitism, Effects of parasites on host
; parasite and host factors and effects of host on parasite.
The morphology, life cycles, physiology, pathogenesis and pathology of protozoans and
helminthes including: Entamoeba histolytica, Giardia lamblia Trichomonus vaginalis,
Trypanosoma brucei complex, Leishmania donovani, L.aethiopica, L. Tropicana; Plasmodium
falciparum; Babesia bigemina; Toxoplasma gondii; Cryptosporidium; Ascaris lumbricoides;
Enterobius vermicularis, Trichuris trichuris, strongyloides stercoralis Trichinella spiralis;
Wuchereria bancrofti; Taenia solium and T saginata; Fasciola hepatica; Fasciolpopsis buski
and Schistosoma haematobium and S. mansoni. Parasitological techniques at the campus
dispensary and laboratory observation and identification
Mode of delivery
Lectures, group/class discussions and laboratory practicals.
476
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Charts and, preserved specimen, prepared slides,
Figures from Parasitology text books etc.
Course Assessment:


Burton Jerome Bogitsh, Clint E. Carter and Thomas N. Oeltmann (2005). Human Parasitology
3rd edition. Elsevier Inc.
Cheesebrough Monica Medical Laboratory Manual (1992) for Tropical countries Vol II.
London Tropical Health Technology
Chatterjee, K.D. (2009). Parasitology: Protozoology and Helminthology 13th ed. CBS
Publishers
NB: Visit the the internet regularly for further reading and diagrams on parasitism
ZOO 416 E. ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY
3 HOURS
Purpose
To introduce students to the Physiological adaptations of animals to various body systems to
environmental conditions.
Identify Physiological adaptations of various animal body systems to environmental

conditions
Explain the effects of body size on energy, metabolism and body temperature
regulation
Describe respiration in animals
Understand processes of osmoregulation and excretion.
State the role of animal Hibernation, aestivation and diapauses
Understand the role of Biological rhythms in environment .
477
Course content
Physiological adaptations of various body systems to environmental conditions; Effects of body
size on energy, metabolism, body temperature regulation; respiration, osmoregulation and
excretion. Hibernation, aestivation, diapauses; Biological rhythms.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, and practical exercises.
Microscopes, videos, small mammals, thermometers, pH meter,writing boards, writing
materials, projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Environmental Physiology of Animals by Pat Willmer, Graham Stone and Ian Johnston
(Dec 10, 2004)
Advanced Environmental Exercise Physiology (Advanced Exercise Physiology) by

Stephen Cheung (Nov 3, 2009)
Environmental Physiology of Plants, Third Edition by Alastair H. Fitter and Robert

K.M. Hay (Oct 31, 2001)
Ecological and Environmental Physiology of Fish by F. Brian Eddy and Richard D.

Handy (Jul 5, 2012)
Ecological and Environmental Physiology of Insects by Jon F. Harrison, H. Arthur

Woods and Stephen P. Roberts (Mar 24, 2012)
ZOO 417:
IMMUNOLOGY II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to current concepts of modern immunology and to develop an
appreciation of applied immunology in medicine, research and industry.
478

Demonstrate an understanding of the wide spectrum of applied immunology in research,
medicine and industry.
Course content
Biological aspect of immunoglobulin formation; cell co-operation in the immune response.
Regulation in immune response. Genetic control of immunity. Immunology. Transplantation
and graft rejection. Immunosuppression. Immunological techniques: precipitation,
haemaglutinatioin, compliment fixation, immunofluorescence, radioimmunoassay, ELISA,
immunoblotting, monoclonal antibodies, effector cell assays.
Mode of delivery
Computer, writing boards, writing materials, projectors, ELISA and PCR machines,
electrophoretic apparatus, chemicals, microscopes, autoclave, oven, microwave, microtitre
plates, clean rabbits, mice, rats etc.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Benjamini E. and Leskowitz S. (1991). Immunology. John Wiley and Sons.
Reeves W.G. (2000) Immunology, Blackwell.
ZOO 418 E. APPLIED TERRESTIAL ECOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Application of ecological concepts to the management of animal populations , agricultural
ecosystems and Human population ecology.
479

Application of ecological concepts in management of animal populations
Appreciate the role agricultural ecosystems in animal and crop production
Explain the effects of disturbances on ecosystems including pollution and

desertification
Understand Human population ecology.
Course content
Application of ecological concepts to the following topics: management of animal populations,
agricultural ecosystems, the effects of disturbances on ecosystemsincludings pollution and
desertification; Human population ecology.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips, techniques and practical
exercises.
Microscopes, telescopes, quatrates,videos, Field trips, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Inlet Area..
Edition.
Houghton Mifflin Co. Boston. Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet and E.T. LaRoe.
1979. Classification of Wetlands andDeepwater Habitats of the United States. U.S. Fish
& Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services. FWS/OBS-79/31. December.
480
Golley, F.B. 1993. A History of the EcosystemConcept in Ecology: More Than the Sum
of the Parts.Yale University Press, New Haven, CT.
Fowler J., L. Cohen and P. Jarvis. 1998. Practical Statistics for Field Biology. Wiley, New York.
ZOO 419 E. AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Introduce students to the fundamentals of insect biology and relationships
among insects, plants, and other organisms. Students will learn about the beneficial and
detrimental effects of insects on agriculture and their control.
.
Understand the Biology of major insect pests of field crops including fruit trees and stored
products
Identify Insect vectors of plant diseases
Apply different Principles of pest control and vector control methods
Carryout control measures of pest using Insecticides, cultural and Biological measures
learn about the beneficial and detrimental effects of insects on agriculture and their
control.
Course content
Prerequisite: Zoo 413
Biology of major insect pests of field crops including fruit trees and stored products; Insect
vectors of plant diseases; Principles of pest control; Insecticides classification, chemistry, Mode
of action and safety, precautions, Ecological effects of insecticides; Biological control;
Biological agents, genetic techniques; Cultural control; Host plant resistance to insects;
Integrated management.
481
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, videos, insect species, pesticides, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:

ZOO 420 E. MEDICAL AND VETERINARY ENTOMOLOGY 3 CREDIT HOURS

Purpose
Course goals
Introduce students to the fundamentals of insect biology and relationships
among insects, plants, and other organisms. Students will learn about the beneficial and
detrimental effects of insects on agriculture and their control.
.
Identify Insect vectors of animal and veterinary diseases
Understand life history of vectors and disease transmission
Apply different ecological Principles in vector control.
Carryout control measures of pest using Insecticides and Biological control;
482
Course content
Prerequisite: ZOO 413 and ZOO 415
The recognition biology and control of the arthropod parasites and disease vectors of man and
animals; The ecology and behavior of vectors in relation to disease.
Mode of delivery
Microscopes, videos, insect species, pesticides, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
The Insects: an Outline of Entomology, 3rd (or 4th) edition (Gullan and
Cranston)
Pedigo LP (2002). Pest Management Theory in Entomology and Pest

Management. Fourth Edition. Prentice Hall, NJ. Pp 289-311 (Chapter 8).
Prasad RP, Snyder WE (2006) Polyphagy complicates conservation biological

control that targets generalist predators. Journal of Applied Ecology 43: 343352
ZOO 421 E:PARASITOLOGY 11
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
483
To develop an understanding of the diverse nature and consequences of the interaction between
parasites and the host immune response and ways in which protection against these diseases
might be achieved by vaccination.
Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the various different types of immune
responses elicited by parasites and evaluate how such immune responses and the
balance between them are, or might be, controlled;
2. Distingish important immunological features relating to the major parasitic infections of
man
3. Explain why inappropriate immune responses can have undesirable immunepathological consequences.
4. Compare the mechanisms used by parasites to avoid/exploit the immune response;
5. Use current research to explain anti-parasite vaccination and immune diagnosis
Course content
Brief review of basic immunological principles and basic Parasitology; The nature of humoral
and cell-mediated immune responses to parasitic infections; The role of cytokines in the
modulation of anti-parasitic responses; Immune evasion strategies of parasites; Outcomes of
the interaction between the immune response and the parasite, for example immunopathology
and immunity to infection/disease; Immunology of: trypanosomatids; Toxoplasma; gut
protozoa; malaria; schistosomes, filarial worms and gut nematodes; Direction of current
research in this field; Immunodiagnosis of parasitic infections
Mode of delivery
Lectures, group-work,c lassroom discussions and student presentations, tutorials and laboratory
practicals.
Writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Charts and, preserved specimen, prepared slides,
Figures from Parasitology text books, lecture handouts etc.
Course Assessment:

Staff performance
484

Burton Jerome Bogitsh, Clint E. Carter and Thomas N. Oeltmann (2005). Human Parasitology
3rd edition. Elsevier Inc.
1. Cheesebrough Monica Medical Laboratory Manual (1992) for Tropical countries Vol II.
London Tropical Health Technology
2. Chatterjee, K.D. (2009). Parasitology: Protozoology and Helminthology 13th ed. CBS
Publishers
NB: Visit the internet regularly for further reading and diagrams on parasitism.
ZOO 422 E. PHYSIOLOGY II

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Course goals
The goal of this course is to introduce students to the general mammalian physiology
Learn basic Mammalian physiology
Gain basic understanding of the nervous system, sympathetic and parasympathetic coordination
Explain the explain the significance of sense organs of smell, vision and hearing
Perspiration
Describe physiological functions of organ systems e.g.reproduction, excretion
Identify the role of neuro muscular physiology integration.
Course content
485
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips,
exercises.
and practical
Microscopes, videos, fishes, small mammals, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (Tortora, Principles of Anatomy and Physiology)

by Gerard J. Tortora and Bryan H. Derrickson (Jan 4, 2011)
Anatomy, Histology, & Cell Biology: PreTest Self-Assessment & Review, Fourth
Edition (PreTest Basic Science) by Robert Klein and George Enders (Feb 18, 2010)
Functional Anatomy and Physiology of Domestic Animals by William O. Reece

(Mar 4, 2009)
Applied Anatomy & Physiology for Manual Therapists by Pat Archer MS ATC
LMP and Lisa A. Nelson BA AT/R LMP (Feb 13, 2012)
Histology and Physiology of the Cryptonephridial System Of Insects by R.S. Saini

(1964)
ZOO 423 F. ICHTHYOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
486
Purpose
The goal of this course is to introduce students to the world of fishes biology and Economic
importance of fisheries, Aquaculture
Learn basic external and internal anatomy of fish, and understand how fish biologists
use characters to identify and classify fish.
Gain a basic understanding of the ecology of fishes and aquatic ecosystems.
Appreciate the Economic importance of fisheries,
Apply the concepts learned into Aquaculture production.
Course content
Prerequisites: zoo 320 F and zoo 411
The biology of fishes, morphology, classification, feeding, growth, reproduction migration and
adaptation; Economic importance of fisheries, Aquaculture.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstrations, group/class discussions, Videos, field trips,
exercises.
and practical
Microscopes, videos, fishes, fish ponds, aquarium,, writing boards, writing materials,
projectors, etc.
Course Assessment:
Helfman G, Collette B, Facey D (1997) The Diversity Of Fishes. Blackwell
Science, 528pp
487
Bond Ce (1979) Biology of fishes. Saunders Company, W.B. Philadelphia, 514pp
Bone Q, Marshall Nb, Blaxter JHS(1995) Biology of fishes. 2nd ed.

Chapman & Hall, 332pp
Calliet Gm, Lore Ms, Ebeling AW (1986) Fishes: A field and laboratory
manual on their structure, identification, and natural history. Wadsworth Publishing
Company, Belmont , 194pp
Moyle Pb, Cech JJ (2000) Fishes: an introduction to Ichthyology. Prentice-Hall,

New Jersey, 593pp
ZOO424: SEMINAR
3 CREDIT HOURS
ZOO 425: RESEARCH PROJECT
3 CREDIT HOURS

Students will be required to carry out an individual study under supervision; They will then
submit a report written in a scientific manner. Students will be assigned projects at the
beginning of the first semester final year and they will normally be required to complete them
towards the end of the second semester.
Purpose
To enable students to carryout original research using recent experimental techniques,
and be able to present the results in a logical way.
1. Able to carry out independent research.
2. Able to present results and findings logically and scholarly.
3. Able to carry out publications from the work.
Course content
488
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
Reference materials
489

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE: MATHEMATICS
1.0 Introduction and Objectives
The department of Mathematics and Physical Science offers a four-year Bachelor of Science
Degree Course in Mathematics leading to the award of Bachelor of Science (Mathematics).
B. Sc (Mathematics) students major in Pure Mathematics, Applied Mathematics or Statistics
from their third year of study. However in first and second years of studies they do the
university-wide, school-wide and departmental common courses.
technology to succeed, trained personnel is needed to sustain it through academic rigour,
partnership with the industrial world and research institutions. The Mathematics programme is

The department of Mathematics and Physical Science designed the Mathematics curriculum
with the flexibility to accommodate emerging challenges. Mathematics students at Narok
University combine theory with Computation gaining skills required in solving a variety of
problems. In class, students get the latest in both theory and their real life applications from
dedicated staff and invited speakers. Lectures are complemented with hands-on computer
laboratory exercises.
Science, technology and innovation has been identified as a central plank for Kenya's
development and lays the foundation for attainment of vision 2030. To drive the attainment of
vision 2030, scientists would need to be trained in the desired fields. Mathematics is at the heart
of virtually all science disciplines and plays an important complementary role to the envisioned
490
targets.
The Mathematics program is designed to empower students with the mathematical, and
Computational tools necessary in industry and allied fields. Also, students who complete the
programme can pursue postgraduate studies in a desired discipline for further specialization.
The Mathematics programme is aimed at:
i) Producing graduates who are well grounded in the fundamentals of Mathematics and
acquisition of the necessary skills in order to use their knowledge in a wide range of
practical applications.
Mathematics to fit into an inter-disciplinary environment.
iv) Relating the training of Mathematics graduates to the employment opportunities within
the country.
v) To equip students with a good understanding of the principles of Pure and Applied
Mathematics, aspects of which will be at the leading edge of knowledge.
vi) To produce Mathematics graduates with the necessary skills for team work in an
k) Knowledge and understanding
The Mathematics programme enables students acquire competencies needed to:
i) Solve Mathematical problems and offer relevant solutions using appropriate
mathematical tools.
ii) Understand physical phenomena and model their behaviour through analytical
and/or mathematical techniques.
iii) Know the environmental and social impact of a Mathematicians activities
iv) Understand business and management techniques relevant to a Mathematician
l) Cognitive skills/Application of knowledge
conclusions.
ii) Use scientific principles in solutions of Mathematical problems.
iii) Analyze and draw logical conclusions on a given data.
iv) Use computers in the treatment of Mathematical tasks
491
v) Prepare research proposals and write reports

access to laboratory facilities for a hands-on laboratory practice.

xi) Meet the minimum University admission criteria
xii) Have passed the K.S.C.E with a minimum average grade of B- in the
CLUSTER A
CLUSTER B
BIOLOGY
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL SCIENCES
GEOGRAPHY
OR MATHEMATICS
PHYSICS
GEOGRAPHY
(a) Theory Courses
30%
70%
492
20%
20%
60%

To qualify for the award of a B.Sc. degree in Physics, a student shall satisfy all the university
below:
70%
Oral examination
30%
493
examination,
The duration of the programme shall normally be four academic years (8 semesters), unless
Senate on the recommendation of the School Board approves exemption.
Students shall be expected to choose a specialization area either in the pure mathematics or
applied mathematics at the beginning of third year.
In third and fourth year the students shall be expected to take the prescribed compulsory core
courses together with electives in either pure mathematics, applied mathematics or statistics
options.
COURSE DISTRIBUTION
Year 1
Semester I
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 110
Basic Calculus I
BOT 110
Basic Botany I
ZOO110
Basic Zoology I
CHE 110
Basic Chemistry I
PHY 110
Basic Physics I
IRD 100
Communications Skills I
IRD 101
Quantitative Skills I
COM 110
Introduction to computers and computing
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 111
Geometry and Elementary Applied Mathematics I
BOT 111
Basic Botany II
ZOO 111
Basic Zoology II
CHE 111
Basic Chemistry II
PHY 111
Basic Physics II
IRD 102
Semester II
494
IRD 103
Development Concepts and Applications
COM 111
Computer Application I
Year 2
Semester I
Double Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 210
Calculus
MAT 212
Linear Algebra I
MAT 214
Vector Analysis
STA 210
Probability and Statistics I
IRD 105
National Development II
Pre-requisites
Either
Course Code
Course Title
Units
PHY 210
Introduction to Mechanics
PHY 211
Vibrations and Waves
Or
Course Code
Course Title
Units
CHE 210
CHE 211
Elementary Analytic and Chemistry
Single Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 210
Calculus
MAT 212
Linear Algebra I
IRD 105
National Development II
PHY 210
Introduction to Mechanics
PHY 211
Vibration and Waves (lab)
CHE 210
CHE 211
Elementary Analytical Chemistry
MAT 214
Vector Analysis
Education Students
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 210
Calculus
STA 210
Probability and Statistics I
495
Semester II
Double Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 211
MAT 213
Linear Algebra II
MAT 215
Classical Mechanics
STA 211
Probability and Statistics II
COM 210
Software engineering I
Course Code
Course Title
Units
PHY 212
Electricity and Magnetism
PHY 213
Modern Physics
Either
Or
Course Code
Course Title
Units
CHE 212
CHE 213
Introduction to Kinetics and Thermodynamics
Education Students
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 211
STA 211
Probability and Statistics II
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 310
Real Analysis I
MAT 314
Ordinary Differential Equations I
IRD 106
National Development III
Year 3
Semester I
Core Courses
Options
B. Applied Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 315
Operations Research I
MAT 317
Numerical Analysis I
MAT 318
Fluid Mechanics I
MAT 320
Dynamics
C. Statistics
496
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 318
Computing Methods and Data Analysis
STA 317
Education Students (Single Math) 3

Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 212
Linear Algebra I
MAT 214
Vector Analysis
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 312
Complex Analysis I
MAT 313
Algebra
Semester II
Core Courses
PRE-REQUISITE units
Course Code
Course Title
Units
COM 325E
Computer Application II
Other units from A, B, or C appropriately
Options
A. Pure Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 311
Real Analysis II
MAT 319
Advanced Calculus
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 316
Methods I
PHY 310
Mathematical Physics
PHY 314
Introduction to Quantum Mechanics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 312
Regression Analysis and Analysis of Variance
STA 317
STA 314
Quality Control and Acceptance Sampling
C. Statistics
Education Students (Single Math)

Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 213
Linear Algebra II
MAT 215
Classical Mechanics
3
497
Year 4
Semester I
Core Courses
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 410
Rings and Modules
MAT 412
Measure Theory
MAT 413
Topology I
IRD 107
National Development IV
Other units appropriately chosen from A, B, or C

Options
A: Pure Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 421
Complex Analysis II
MAT 427
Ordinary Differential Equations II
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 417
Fluid Mechanics II
MAT 418
Partial Differential Equations I
MAT 420
Numerical Analysis II
MAT 422
Operations Research II
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 410
Tests of Hypothesis
STA 411
Time Series Analysis and Forecasting
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 411
Field Theory
COM 410
Data Processing
C. Statistics
Semester II
Core Courses
Other Units appropriately chosen from A, B, or C 15

Options
A. Pure Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 414
Topology II
3
498
MAT 415
Differential Geometry
MAT 416
Functional Analysis
MAT 425
Fourier Analysis
B: Applied Mathematics
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 419
Partial Differential Equations II
MAT 423
Operations Research III
MAT 424
Fluid Mechanics III
MAT 426
Methods II
Course Code
Course Title
Units
STA 424
Stochastic process
STA 420
Statistical Demography
STA 430
Non-Parametric Methods and Robust Methods
STA 415
Design and Analysis of Experiments
STA 418
Applied Time Series Analysis
STA 417
Multivariate Analysis
C: Statistics
Education students (Single Maths)

Semester I
Course Code
Course Title
Units
MAT 319
Advanced Calculus
COM 210
Introduction to Computer Science
Semester II
Course Code
Course Title
Units
COM 310
Computer Architecture
MAT 314

MAT 110: CALCULUS 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to Basic differentiation methods and their application
499
i)
Perform basic differentiation procedures ( Methods)
ii)
Compute problems related to displacement, velocity and acceleration
iii)
Determine antiderivatives and their application to areas
Course content
Sets, mappings and functions ,Limits , continuity and differentiability, Differentiation of
functions of single variable, Parametric equations and implicity , Chain rules for
derivatives , Maxima and minima, Antiderivatives and its application to areas,
Application of differentiation, Rolles theorem
Mode of delivery
writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Tutorials etc.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
i)
Tom M. Apostol(2007); Calculus volume 1,2nd Ed; Wiley
ii)
Alex (2003); Calculus Ideas and applications; John Wiley and Sons
iii)
Spiegel M.R (1974); Theory and problems in Calculus; McGraw Hill

i)
Bradley Smith (2004);Calculus; Prentice Hall-Gale
ii)
Walls R (1984); Differential and Integral calculus; London: Van Nostand Company
Ltd
iii)
Hocking J. G (1970); Calculus with linear Algebra; Rinehart and Winston London
500

CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To enable students understand the movement of a partial theory of various forms of lines and
curves and the application of algebraic and geometry with calculus.
iii)
iv)
Identify and find various shapes and equation on Cartesian and polar planes
for example equation of straight lines, circle, ellipse etc
Describe the movement of bodies via the universe
Course content
Plane analytic geometry, Polar coordinates and polar equations, Vectors in
2 and 3 , Lines and planes, Relative motion , connected bodies, Friction
,moments and couples, Statics of particles and rigid bodies, centre of gravity , frame
works
Mode of delivery
writing boards, writing materials, projectors, handouts etc.
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
501

ii)
Albert E. Church (2007); Elements of Analytical Geometry, Kessinger Publishing
iii)
Thomas G and Finney R. Calculus and Analytical Geometry (6th Edition); Wesley
iv)
v)
Swikowsky F.W (1975); Calculus with Analysis geometry; Masschuset Prinde

Vaebrg Dale (1992); Calculus with Analytic Geometry (4th Edition); Prentice Hall
MAT 210: CALCULUS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to Basic intergration methods and their application
i)
ii)
iii)
Perform basic intergration procedures ( Methods)

Calculate volumes, areas of various services and solids using intergration methods
Work out functions of several valuables
Course content
Methods of integration, functions of several variables, applications of integration to areas and
volumes.
Mode of delivery
writing boards, writing materials, projectors, Tutorials etc.
Course Assessment:
total mark
502
Staff performance
i)
Tom M. Apostol(2007); Calculus volume 1,2nd Ed; Wiley
ii)
Alex (2003); Calculus Ideas and applications; John Wiley and Sons
iii)
Spiegel M.R (1974); Theory and problems in Calculus; McGraw Hill

iv)
Bradley Smith (2004);Calculus; Prentice Hall-Gale
v)
Walls R (1984); Differential and Integral calculus; London: Van Nostand Company
Ltd
vi)
Hocking J. G (1970); Calculus with linear Algebra; Rinehart and Winston London
MAT 212: LINEAR ALGEBRA 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to abstract mathematical thinking embedded in algebra with great
interpretation in geometry
i)
Solve systems of linear equations
ii)
Able to perform matrix algebra, compute inverse, determinant
iii)
Define a vector in R2 and R3 , compute dot and cross product and their applications
iv)
Define linear dependence and independence of a set of a vector, spanning of sets

and basis and computations.
v)
Define and compute vector spaces
vi)
Define a linear transformation, matrices of linear transformations with respect to

standard basis, kernels , images and their computations.
503
Course content
Real number field axioms, Vectors in R2 and R3 , Introduction to real vector spaces
and subspaces as seen in R2 and R3 , Linear transformations and their matrices
,
( mainly std basis), Kernel and image, Matrix addition and multiplication by a scalar,
Linear equations and matrices using ,Row-echelon form ( Gauss elimination
method),Inverse method, Determinant method , ( cramers rule)
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Applied Linear Algebra ( 3rd edition ) by Ben Noble and James W. Daniel
11.
Linear Algebra ( 1989) by A.G. Hamilton
12.
Linear Algebra ( 2nd edition) by Stephen H.F , Arnold
13.
Matrices , Methods and applications ( 1990) by Stephen Barnet
14.
Linear Algebra ( Schaums outline series) by Seymor Lipschuz
MAT 213: LINEAR ALGEBRA II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
504
i.
Define and compute vector spaces
ii.
Define a linear transformation, matrices of linear transformations with respect to

standard basis, kernels , images and their computations.
iii.
Determine eigen values and eigen vectors
iv.
Determine a matrix which orthogonally diagonolizes the given matrix
v.
Put the quadratic equation into standard form and identify the surface
vi.
State and apply the Cayley Hamilton theorem
Course content
Vector space over R , Linear transformations and matrices, Change of bases,
Orthogonal diagonalization, Quadratic forms,Minimal polynomial, Cayley Hamilton
theorem
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
505
Staff performance
Applied Linear Algebra ( 3rd edition ) by Ben Noble and James W. Daniel
i) Linear Algebra ( 1989) by A.G. Hamilton
ii) Linear Algebra ( 2nd edition) by Stephen H.F , Arnold
iii) Matrices, Methods and applications ( 1990) by Stephen Barnet
iv)Linear Algebra ( Schaums outline series) by Seymor Lipschuz
MAT 214: VECTOR ANALYSIS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To appreciate the use of vector theory in applicable mathematics.
At the end of the course students should be able to use vector theory in applied problems of
displacement, velocity and acceleration and explain the concept of gradient divergence and curl
in real vector fields.
Course content
The course reviews of vector algebra, differentiation, ordinary & partial derivatives, application
to differential geometry and mechanics, vector operations, gradient, divergence Curl and
Laplacian and their physical interpretation. Integration of vectors, line, surface and volume
integrals, greens theorem, stoclus theorem, divergence theorem, rotational vector fields,
orthogonal curvilinear coordinates and vector operations in orthogonal curvilinear coordinates
will also be covered.
Mode of delivery
Lectures, demonstration, group/class discussions and library research.
506
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
Mathematical survey and monographs. American Mathematics Society.

Spiegel (1984). Schaum Outline Series: Vector Analysis. London: McGraw-Hill Book
Co.

1.
Discovery and Innovation. African Academy of Sciences. Nairobi, Kenya
2.
Erwin K. (1989). Advanced Engineering Mathematics. New York: John Wiley and
sons.
507
MAT 215: CLASSICAL MECHANICS

HOURS
CREDIT
Purpose
To study basic Newtonian Mechanics using the language of vectors.
- Define Newtons laws of motion,
- Use the Newtons law of motion in problems of particle motion
- Solve problems involving particle with changing mass.
Course content
The course focuses on kinematics, displacement, velocity & speed and acceleration, circular
motion, normal and tangeled accelaration. It discusses dynamic Newtons laws of motion,
work, energy, power; conservative force field, impulse and momentum, rotational dynamics. It
also examines projectiles constrained motion, simple Hermonic motion simple harmonic
oseillator, the simple pandalum, and the dumped harmonic motion.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
Berbert, G. (1980). Classical Mechanics. London: Addison - Wesley Publishing
Company.
2.
Moose, E. N. (1983). Theoretical Mechanics. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
508
3.
4.
Murky, R. S. (1967). Theoretical Mechanics. London: McGraw-Hill Company.

Sayer, F. P., and Bones, J. A. (1990). Applied Mechanics. London: T. J. Press Limited.
MAT 216 : REAL ANALYSIS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to the concept of real number system, set theory, types of convergence
and their calculus.
i)
Describe and use the real number systems
ii)
Explain the principal of convergence
iii)
Evaluate functions in metric spaces
iv)
Apply convergence test to numerical series
Course content
Real number system, Completeness axiom, extended real number system, Basic set theory:
finite, countable and uncountable sets, Metric spaces, Continuity and uniform continuity,
Numerical sequences and series
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
509

i)
Royden H (2008); Real Analysis; Dorling Kinderslye (india) Pvt Ltd
ii)
John M. Howie (2005); Real Analysis; Springer Verlag
iii)
Kirkwood (1995); An Introduction to Analysis; PWS - Publishing Boston
iv)
Gopta S. L. (1993); Fundamentals of Real Analysis; Vikas Publishing New York
MAT 310 : REAL ANALYSIS 1
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to the concept of real number system, set theory, types of convergence
and their calculus.
i)
Describe and use the real number systems
ii)
Explain the principal of convergence
iii)
Evaluate functions in metric spaces
iv)
Apply convergence test numerical series
Course content
Real number system, Completeness axiom, Extended real number system, Basic set theory :
finite, countable and uncountable sets, Metric spaces, Continuity and uniform continuity,
Numerical sequences and series
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
510
Staff performance
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Gopta S. L. (1993); Fundamentals of Real Analysis; Vikas Publishing New
York
MAT 311: REAL ANALYSIS 11
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learners to the concept of monotonic functions and the Riemann-stiltjes
integration
i)
Define and prove results on monotonic functions
ii)
Prove results on sequences and series of functions
iii)
Work out functions of several variables, Functions of bounded variation and total
variation
iv)
Apply Riemann-Stiltjes integration
v)
State and prove ( implicit function theorem, inverse mapping theorem)
Course content
Monotonic functions , Functions of bounded variation , Total variation ,Sequences and series of
functions, The Riemann-Stiltjes integration,Functions of several variables, Implicit function
theorem , Inverse mapping theorem.
Mode of delivery
511
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Gopta S. L. (1993); Fundamentals of Real Analysis; Vikas Publishing New York
512
MAT 312: COMPLEX ANALYSIS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To extend the idea of complex numbers to complex variables and to introduce complex series
and complex integration.
- Explain the concept of continuity and differentiability of complex functions and idea of
analytic functions.
- Describe functions of complex variables.
- Use Cauchy residue theorem to compute integrals and express a function in the form of
Laurent series.
Course content
The course focuses on the complex plane, limit, continuity and differentiability of complex
functions, analytic functions, elementary functions like exp(z) and trigonometric functions,
logarithmic functions, etc, mapping by elementary functions, Cauchy's theorem, integral
formula, Taylors series, laurent series, singularities, residues, Cauchy's residue theorem and
poles.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. James Ward Brown & Ruel V. Churchill (2008). Complex Variables and Applications
(8th Edition). MacGraw Hill. Education
513
2. John H. Mathews & Ressell W. Howell (2006) Complex Analysis for

Mathematics and engineering 5th Edition. New Delhi: Narosa Publishing
House.
3. Ian Stewart & David Tall (2006). Complex Analysis. Amazon.
1.
Churchill (1978). Introduction to Functions of Complex Variables. Oxford: Clarendon
Press.
2.
Herve M. (1984). Functions of Complex Variables. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
3.
Spiegel (1984). Schaum Outline Series, Complex Variables. London: McGraw-Hill
Book Company.
MAT 313: ALGEBRA
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
i)
Define and give examples some theory of elementary algebraic structures
ii)
Determine isomorphism and homomorphisms of groups
iii)
Define an ideal of a ring and give examples, show that intersection of ideals is an
ideal
iv)
Define an integral domain and eucledean rings and prove the related results
v)
Work out polynomial rings using unique factorization domain
vi)
Compare results related to unique factorization domain and principal ideal domain
Course content
Definitions , examples and elements of the theory of some standard algebraic
structures,Isomorphism and homomorphism , subgroups etc, quotient groups, Ideals and
quotient rings , Integral domains , Euclidean rings , Unique factorization domain, polynomial
rings
Mode of delivery
514
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
Allenby, R.B.J.T. (1991), Rings, Fields and Groups, Butterworth-Heinemann,
ii. Artin, Michael (1991), Algebra, Prentice Hall,
iii. Gilbert, Jimmie; Gilbert, Linda (2005), Elements of Modern Algebra, Thomson Brooks
I
iv. Sethuraman, B. A. (1996), Rings, Fields, Vector Spaces, and Group Theory: An
Introduction to Abstract Algebra via Geometric Constructibility, Berlin, New York
Springer varlag
i.

v. Herstein I, Topics in Algebra
MAT 314: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
In this unit the students will make use of the knowledge acquired in calculus to solve common
linear differential equations. Operations will be used to solve higher order differential
equations. The students will get power series solutions of second order ordinary differential
equations.
At the end of the course students should be able to
- Solve first order differential equations with constant coefficients,
- Apply the methods of solving first order differential equations in physical problems,
- Use operators to solve second and higher order differential equations, power series
solutions of second order differential equations with variable coefficients.
515
Course content
The course focuses on the classification of differential equations, solution of first order
ordinary differential equations, separation of variable, homogenous equations, exact equations,
linear equation, Bernallis equation and application of 1st order ordinary differential equations.
It also examines second order differential equations with constant coefficients, the method of
undetermined coefficient variation of parameters and the use of the differential operator.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
3.
Erwin Kneystig (1993). Advanced Engineering Mathematics. New York: John Wiley $
Sons.
Frank Ayres (1981). Differential Equations. London: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Gutauran and Nitecki (1991). Differential Equations. London: Bishop/Phototake Inc.

1. Richard Brouson (1989). Differential Equations. London: McGraw- Hill Book
Company.
2. Shepley L. Ross (1989). Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations. New York:
John Wiley & Sons.
516
MAT 315: OPERATIONS RESEARCH I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the unit is to introduce the students to mathematical techniques in the
determination of optimal allocation of resources. Some of the resources may be scarce while
others may be abundant. The techniques to be considered will include linear programming,
transportation networks and graphs.
- Formulate simple linear programming models in Agriculture and Economics for given
data and solve them to obtain optimal solutions,
- Draw and use networks to solve simple transportation problems and determine maximal
flow in networks,
- Solve simple problems involving allocation and planning through the use of graphs.
Course content
The course discusses formulation of linear optimization models, convex analysis in Euclidean
space, the simple algorithm, duality and sensitivity testing, graph theory fundamentals, classical
transportation problems and extensions, models from agricultural economics, regional planning
and resource allocation.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
517

1.
Boffey, T. B. (1982). Graph Theory in Operations Research. New York: Macmillan
Publishing Company.
2.
Brownson, G. (1985). Theory and Problems of Operations Research. London: McGraw
Hill Book Company.
Recommended materials for further reading
1. Hamday, A. T. (1982). Operations Research.
Company.
518
New York: Macmillan
Publishing
MAT 316: METHODS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To understand a variety of topics which arise commonly in problems of mathematical physics
and to introduce special functions which arise from integrals and second order linear
differential equations.
- Explain series solutions of selected second order differential equations,
- Analyze the properties of Bisselos, Legendre, Gamma and Beta functions,
- Solve elementary partial deferential equations, expand functions into fourier series.
Course content
The course discusses series solutions of selected second order linear differential equations,
Bessel, Legendre, Hypergeometric, Gamma and Beta functions. It focuses on the introduction
to partial differential equations, the method of separation of variables and its applications to
problems of vibration of string and heat flow, cononical forms of second order linear equations
with constant coefficients orthogonal functions, fourier series and its applications, Laplace
transform and its applications
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
519

1.
Kreysting, E. (1993). Advanced Engineering Mathematics. New York: John Wiley &
Sons.
2.
Ayres, Jr F. (1981). Differential Equations. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
3.
Brownson, R. (1989). Differential Equations. London: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
4.
Ross, L. S. (1989). Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations. New York: John
Wiley & Sons.
520
MAT 317:
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the students to numerical methods of solving non linear equations and show how
errors propagate. The students will also be introduced to standard numerical differentiation and
integration and how the attendant errors propagate.
-
Solve non- linear equations of the form f x 0
Describe the degree of accuracy in the results,

Fit suitable polynomial functions on a set of discrete data and be able to approximate a
complex function by a suitable polynomial.
Use these polynomial to differentiate and integrate functions given discretely and
complex functions.
Course content
The course discusses errors, sources of errors, errors due to round off and the method, errors
bounds of computer arithmetic, effects of error on the basic operations of arithmetic, statistical
treatment of errors, condition and stability; polynomial and their zeros, evaluation of
polynomials, methods of determining zeros of polynomials and the method of bisection. It
discusses Newton's method, the method of Bairstow and Lehmer's method, deflation, finite
differences, finite difference tables, fitting polynomials to given function values, finite
difference interpolation formulae, relationship between differences and derivatives. It
examines interpolation linear and quadratic interpolation, Newton's forward difference
formulae, Lagnangian interpolation, interpolation with equal intervals, convergence and
accuracy of linear, quadratic Lagnangian interpolation, interpolation elementary methods the
trapezoidal and Simpson's rule. It discusses the method of undetermined coefficients, Newton's
cotes and Euler-Maclaurin, types of formulae, finite difference method, iteration, simple
iteration, convergence and order of iterative process, rule of false position, Aitken's process,
Newton- Raphson method; and the solution of polynomial equation.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
521
total mark
Staff performance
1. Cheney, Ward (2004). Numerical Mathematics and Computing. Belmont, California:

Brooks/Cole.
2. Balagurusamy E. (1999). Numerical methods. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing.
3. Jain M.K. (2004). Numerical Methods ( problems and solutions). New Delhi: New
Age International.
1.
Atkinson, K. (1985). Elementary Numerical Analysis. New York: Wiley Eastern
Limited.
2.
Jain, M.K. and Iyengar, S. R. K. (1985). Numerical Method for Scientific and
Engineering Computation. New York: Wiley Eastern Limited.
3.
Church house, F. R. (1981). Numerical Methods. London: McGraw-Hill.
4.
Scheld, F. (1968). Shcaum's Outline of Theory and Problems in Numerical analysis.
London: McGraw-Hill.
522
MAT 318: FLUID MECHANICS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To extend the ideas learnt in classical mechanics and vectors in the study of motion. This unit
is to blend mechanics of simple fluids with advanced vector analysis.
- Analyze the physical properties of compressible and incompressible fluids,
- Determine how the variables, temperature, pressure and density affect fluid motion,
- Apply the skills acquired to surface waves and water waves.
Course content
The course introduces students to the physical properties of fluids, concept of fluids, continuum
hypothesis, surface and body forces, stress tensor, thermodynamics of fluids, liquids and gases,
compressibility, boundary conditions, dimensional analysis and important dimensionless
parameters. It discusses motion of real fluids, viscosity; fluid statics and applications, principle
of fluid motion, kinematics of flow field and equation of continuity. It examines Euler's
equation of motion in inertial and non-inertial reference frames, Bernoulli's equation and
applications, irrotational flow, vorticity; circulation and Kelvin's theorem, velocity potential
functions, application to surface waves and water waves.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
523

1.
2.
3.
4.
Vardy, A. (1990). Fluid Principles. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Allyn and Bacon (1985). Principles of Fluid Mechanics. Boston: Jan F. Kreider.
Hughes W. F. and Brighton J. A. (1991). Theory and Problems of Fluid Dynamics
(Schaum's
outline series). New York: McGraw-Hill.
Rathy R. K. (1996). An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. Oxford: Mohan Primlani..
524
MAT 319: ADVANCED CALCULUS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This unit aims at introducing other types of integration apart from Riemann integration.
Mainly, line integrals, surface integrals and related results.
- Apply Green's, Stoke's and Gauss theorems to evaluate surface integrals,
- Evaluate improper integrals,
- Establish the convergence of a series and/or a sequence.
Course content
The course discusses line integrals, surface integrals, Green's theorem, Stoke's theorem and
Ganss divergence theorem. It examines improper integrals, convergence and divergence of
sequences, power series; convergence and tests of convergence of the series and orthogonal
curvilinear co-ordinates.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
Ayres F. (1974). Scharms Outline of Theory and Problems of Calculus. London:

McGraw-Hill Inc.
Fulks W. (1969). Advanced Calculus. New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
525
3.
Thomas G.B. (1965). Calculus and Analytic Geometry. London: McGraw-Hill Inc.
Recommended materials for further reading

1. Spiegel M.R. (1974). Theory and problems in calculus. London: McGraw Hill Book
Company.
2. Gupta S.L. (1993). Fundamentals of Real Analysis. New Delhi Vilkas Publishing House
(PVT) ltd.
3. Spiegel (1984). Schaum outline series: Victor Analysis. London: McGraw-Hill Book Co
526
MAT 410: RINGS AND MODULES
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Determine free groups and their bases

State and prove Fundamental theory of finitely generated groups
Determine ideals of rings
Show that intersection of ideals is an ideal
Prove results on modules
Work out polynomial ring using UFD
Relate UFD and PID
Course content
Free groups and their bases, Finitely generated groups, Free a belian groups , Fundamental
theory on finitely generated groups, Ideals ,Sums and intersection of Ideals , Inner and outer
sums of direct rings, Unique Factorisation Domain ( UFD) and Principal Ideal Domain
(PID),Modules , submodules , finitely generated modules
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
527
Staff performance
A. J. Berrick and M. E Keating (2000); An Introduction to Rings and Modules; ambridge
University (UK)
i. Allenby, R.B.J.T. (1991), Rings, Fields and Groups, Butterworth-Heinemann,
ii. Artin, Michael (1991), Algebra, Prentice Hall,
iii. Gilbert, Jimmie; Gilbert, Linda (2005), Elements of Modern Algebra, Thomson Brooks
I
iv. Sethuraman, B. A. (1996), Rings, Fields, Vector Spaces, and Group Theory: An
Introduction to Abstract Algebra via Geometric Constructibility, Berlin, New York
Springer varlag
MAT 412: MEASURE THEORY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to measure theory and Riemann integration
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Define Lebesque measure on the real line

Show results on outer Lebesque measure
Define measurable functions and their results
State and show Lebesque Dominated convergence Theorem, Fatous Lemma,
Lebesque integral monotone convergence Theorem
Compare Lebesque and Riemann integral
Course content
Lebesque measure on the real line, outer Lebesque measure, Measurable functions, Lebesque
Dominated convergence Theorem, Fatous Lemma, Lebesque integral monotone convergence
Theorem, Comparison between Lebesque and Riemann integral
Mode of delivery
528
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
i)
Bartle R. (1964); Introduction to Measure theory; Wiley
ii)
Halmos Measure Theory
MAT 413: TOPOLOGY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the learner to topology , examples and application
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Define a topological space and give examples

Identify bases and subbases of a toipology
Define separation axioms , T-spaces
Show that every metric space is a hausdorff space
Compare Lebesque and Riemann integral
Course content
Topological space: definitions and examples, accumulation points , closed sets,closure, interior
and exterior of a set, Neighbourhood and neighbourhood system,coarser and finer topologies,
relative topologies, Continuity , continuous functions, open and closed maps, homeomorphic
spaces, Bases and subbases of a topology, Formation of new spaces , identification topology,
Separation axioms, T-space, Hausdorff space, regular spaces, normal spaces, Urysons Lemma,
dense sets ,nowhere dense sets, sets of the first category,
Mode of delivery
529
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
i)
Muller M.; Introduction to General Topology
ii)
Hu S.-T. (1969); Introduction to General Topology
MAT 415: DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The students will be able to handle general theory of curves and surfaces by differential
methods. Further, they will be able to blend vector analysis and the theory of curves and
surfaces.
At the end of the course students should be able to analyze the differentials of vector quantities,
determine the curvature and torsion for a given curve and evaluate curvatures of surfaces using
differential techniques.
Course content
The course introduces students to differential geometry, vector algebra, triple products and
vector quantities, vector functions of real variables, concepts of curves, curvature, torsion and
general theory of curves. Vector functions of vector variables, concept and general theory of
surfaces, first and second differential forms will also be covered.
530
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
3.
4.
Schult.,H. (1962). Solid Geometry. Boston: D.C. Heath and Company.

Hay G. E. (1983). Vector and Tensor Analysis. New York: Dover Publications.
Murray M. K. and Rice J. W. (1993). Differential Geometry and Statistics. London:
Chapman and Hall.
Narayan, S. (1977). Geometry via Transformations. New Delhi: Chand and Company
Ltd.
531
MAT 416: FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To blend topology and measure calculus and to introduce students to Banach spaces and
category theorems.
At the end of the course student should be able to describe the concept of completeness of a
metric space leading to the understanding of cantor's intersection theorem and the concept of
precompactness,
Discuss various equivalent versions of compactness in metric spaces
Analyze Banach spaces and Banach fixed point theorem.
Course content
The course focuses on the compactness of a metric space, cantor's intersection theorem,
precompactness, various equivalent versions of compactness in metric spaces, compactness and
continuity, Banach's fixed point theorem with application in classical analysis, inverse function
theorem, implicit function theorem, separability, nowhere dense sets and Baire's category
theorem and equicontinuous families.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
532

1.
Milne, D. D. (1980). Applied Functional Analysis. Boston: Pitman Advanced.
2.
Leigh, J. R. (1980). Functional Analysis and Linear Control Theory. London: Academic
Press.
3.
Collatz, L. (1966). Functional Analysis and Numerical Mathematics. New York:
Academic Press.
Recommended further material for reading
1.
2.
3.
4.
Kripke (1968): Introduction to analysis. London: W.H. Freeman and company.

Rudin, W. (1986): Principle of mathematical analysis. London: Mc Graw-Hill Book.
Kelley and John L. (1955). General Topology: D. Van Nostrand.
Halmos P. (1980). Functional Analysis Princeton: D. Van Nostrand company.
533
MAT 417: FLUID MECHANICS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
Students will be able to apply calculus and basic mechanics to study viscous flows; NavierStokes equations to be derived. Applications of Navier-Stokes equations to simple channels
and surfaces. Complex analysis will also be used in the study of the potential.
- Use the method of images to perform conformal transformations,
- Apply Blausius theorem to fluid flow problems,
- Use Navier Stokes equations to analyze flow through plates, pipes and annulus.
Course content
The course discusses potential flow, complex potential, basic singularities, some problems on
sources, sinks and doubles in two - and three - dimensional flows, flows with circulation,
moving cylinder, elliptic cylinder and aerofoil; method of images, conformal transformation,
Blasius theorem and applications. It examines dynamics of real fluids, viscosity and Reynolds
number, incompressible viscous fluid, equation of conservation of momentum and energy
equation and Navier -Stokes equations for an incompressible fluid. It examines some exact
solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations, steady flow through parallel plate and parallel porous
plates, immiscible fluids flow through parallel plates, flow through circular and elliptic pipes,
flow through an annulus and rotating annulus, steady and unsteady flow over a flat plate and
plane Poiseuille flow with variable viscosity.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
534

1.
2.
3.
4.
Vardy, A. (1990). Fluid Principles. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Chorlton, F. (1985). Textbook of Fluid Dynamics. New Delhi: CBS Publishers.
Hughes, W. F. and Brighton J. A. (1991). Theory and Problems of Fluid Dynamics. New
York: McGraw-Hill.
Rathy, R. K. (1976). An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. Oxford: Mohan Primlani.
Company.
535
MAT 424: FLUID MECHANICS III
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The ideas learnt in MAT 318 and MAT 417 are extended and applied to flows through porous
media. Lamina boundary layer theory will also be introduced.
- Transform the energy and Navier stoke's equations using dynamical similarity,
- Apply the theory of lubrications to bearings,
- Solve the boundary layer equations.
Course content
The course focuses on dynamical similarity and small Reynolds number flows, flow porous
media, Dancy's law, flow through porous slab, flow through a porous annulus, flow through a
spherical shell, seepage under a dam and the hydrodynamic theory of lubrication. It analyzes
slide bearing, step bearing, thrust bearing and journal bearing; boundary layer theory, basic
concepts of boundary layer theory, two dimensional boundary layer equations, displacement;
momentum and energy thickness for two-dimensional flows. The separation of boundary layer,
approximate methods for the solution of the two dimensional, steady boundary layer equations,
boundary layer control in laminar flow and thermal will also be covered.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
536

1.
2.
3.
4.
Vardy, A. (1990). Fluid Principle. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Chorlton, F. (1985). Textbook of Fluid Dynamics. New Delhi: CBS Publishers.
Hughes W. F. and Brighton J. A. (1991). Theory and Problems of Fluid Dynamics. New
York: McGraw-Hill.
Rathy R. K. (1976). An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. Oxford: Mohan Primlani.
537
MAT 425: FOURIER ANALYSIS
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This unit aims at introducing a way of representing periodic functions as a sum of harmonies of
sines and cosines functions.
- Represent any smooth or piecewise smooth function as a trigonometric series,
- State sufficient condition for convergence of a Fourier series at an arbitrary point in the
domain
- Use Fourier series of specific functions to find a sum to a certain infinite series,
- Calculate the power in a circuit when a voltage and/or current is expressed as a Fourier
series.
Course content
The course discusses periodic functions, trigonometric polynomials and series, absolutely
integrable function, orthogonality of sines and cosines, Fourier series for functions of period II,
jump discontinuities smooth and piecewise smooth function, even and odd functions, complex
form of Fourier series, functions of period II and orthogonal systems. It examines Fourier series
with respect to an orthogonal system, square integrable functions, the Schwarz inequality, the
mean square error and its minimum, Bessel's inequality and complete orthogonal systems. The
criterion for completeness, convergence of trigonometric, Fourier series, Riemann - Lebesgue
Lemma, the integral formula for the partial sum of a Fourier series, right hand and left hand
derivatives, a sufficient condition for convergence of a Fourier series at a point of continuity
and at a point of discontinuity are discussed. It also examines the convergence of a Fourier
series of a piecewise smooth function, absolute and uniform convergence of the F-series of
piecewise smooth function of period II, uniform convergence of a Fourier series of a
continuous function of a period II with an absolutely integrable derivatives with generalization,
localization principle, convergence of trigonometric series with monotonically decreasing
coefficients, summation of trigonometric series and the method of arithmetic means of partial
sums of a F-series.
Mode of delivery
538
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
3.
Jackson D. (1969). Fourier Series and Orthogonal Polynomials. New York: John Wiley
& Sons.
Spiegel M. R. (1974). Schain's Outline of Theory and Problems of Fourier Series.
London: McGraw-Hill, Inc.
Stround K.A. (1984). Fourier Series and Harmonic analysis. London: Stanley Thornes
(publishers) Ltd.
539
MAT 427: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
This unit will extend the knowledge acquired in ordinary differential equations I to advance
differential equations. The theory of existence and uniqueness of solutions will also be studied.
The student will be introduced to non-linear ordinary differential equations.
- Use the Wionskian to determine the independence or dependence of solutions,
- Reduce the order of a differential equation;
- Explain the properties of the Legendre and Besel's differential equations
- Use the Sturm and Boltawo-Wereystrass theorems in solving differential equations.
Course content
The course focuses on Wrouskian, reduction of order of differential equations and solutions,
transformation of differential equations to the normal form, total differential equations,
Legendre and Bessel's differential equations, Sturn theory, self adjoint equations of the second
order, existence and uniqueness of solutions of differential equations, Boltano - Liouville
problems, non-linear differential equations, phase plane and paths and critical points.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
540

1. Guterman and Nitecki (1991). Differential Equations. London: Bishop Phototake Inc.
2. Brouson, R. (1989). Differential Equations. London: Mc Graw- Hill Book Company.
3. Ross, L. S. (1989). Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations. New York: John

Wiley & Sons
541
MAT 421: COMPLEX ANALYSIS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The students should be able to understand the calculus of residues and its application in the
evaluation of integrals. They should become conversant with both the conformal mapping and
the Schwarz-Christoffel transformation and their applications.
- Explain the conditions, under which a complex function is conformed,
- Determine a complex function that would transform a given figure in the Z-plane to a
given figure in the W-plane.
- Evaluate difficulty real integrals by converting them to contour integrals,
- Estimate the divergences and convergences of infinite products of complex numbers.
- Study potential theory in fluid dynamics with ease.
Course content
The course focuses on the calculus of residues, evaluation of integrals, conformal mapping and
its application, the Swarz-Christoffel transformation, uniform convergence and infinite
products, analytic continuation, uniqueness and the principle of reflection.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
542

1. James Ward Brown & Ruel V. Churchill (2008). Complex Variables and Applications
(8th Edition). MacGraw Hill. Education
2. John H. Mathews & Ressell W. Howell (2006) Complex Analysis for
3. Mathematics and engineering 5th Edition. New Delhi: Narosa Publishing House.
4. Ian Stewart & David Tall (2006). Complex Analysis. Amazon.
1. Churchill (1978). Introduction to Functions of Complex Variables. London: McGrawHill Book Company.
2. Spiegel (1984). Schaum Outline Series, Complex Variables. London: McGraw-Hill
Book Company.
543
MAT 418:
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
In this unit the student will be introduced to the concept of partial differential equations. The
student will be exposed to different types of partial differential equations which require
different methods to solve.
- Form partial differential equations arising from natural phenomena,
- Use different methods to solve first order partial differential equations of the first
degree,
- Use the methods of Cauchy, Charpit and Jakobi in solving non-linear partial differential
equations of the first order,
- Apply the methods learned to solve partial differential equations arising in physical
problems.
Course content
The course discusses surfaces and curves in three dimensions, simultaneous partial differential
equations of the first order, methods of solution of dx/P=dy/q-dt/R, orthogonal trajectories and
systems of curves on a surface, Pfaffian differential equations, linear, semi-linear and quasilinear equations of the first order, integral surfaces passing through a given curve, use of the
methods of Cauchy, Charpit and Jacobi in solving non-linear partial differential equations of
the first order.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
544
Staff performance
1.
2.
3.
Kneystig, E. (1993). Advanced Engineering Mathematics. London: McGraw-Hill Book

Company.
Ayre's Jr. F. (1981). Differential Equations. London: McGraw- Hill Book Company.
Duchateau P. and Zachmann W. D. (1986). Partial Differential Equations. London:
McGraw-Hill Book Company.
545
MAT 419: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
In this unit the students will be introduced to the classical partial differential equations,
different methods of solving second and higher order partial differential equations will be
studied.

- Analyze the characteristics of linear, semi-linear partial differential equations of the
second order,
- Use Mongie's method to solve partial differential equations, solve boundary and initial
value problems.
Course content
The course discusses the characteristics of linear and semi-linear partial differential equations
of the second order, canonical forms, Mongie's method of integrating Rr+Ss+Tt= , Mongie's
method of integrating Rr+Ss+Tt+U(rt-s)=, Boundary and initial value problems, equations of
the hyperbolic type, Riemann's method, the equation of ware notions, equations of the elliptic
type and the heat equations.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
Kneystig, E. (1993). Advanced Engineering Mathematics. New York: John Wiley &
Sons.
546
2.
3.
Ayres, F. Jr. (1981). Differential Equations. London: McGraw-Hill Company.

Duchateau, P. and Zachmann W. D. (1989). Partial Differential Equations. London:
McGraw-Hill Book Company.
1. Richard Brouson (1989). Differential Equations. London: McGraw- Hill Book
Company.
547
MAT 426: METHODS II
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To prepare the student for various methods of advanced applied mathematics as a continuation
of the first unit in methods. The students will be able to understand preparatory courses in
methods offered at graduate level.

- Explain certain tensors and second order differential equation which give rise to special
function
- Solve a variety of integral equations.
Course content
The course discusses cartesian tensors; definition, algebra of tensors, quotient law, metric
tensor, transformation laws of Christoffel's formula, applications to fluid mechanics and
differential geometry. It examines special functions, further concepts in special functions,
generating functions; modified Bessel function, Ber-Bei, Kei functions, associated Legendre
functions laguerre polynomial, classification of integral equations in one dimension, Green's
functions, Singular Kernels, Neumann and Fredholm series and a brief study of
multidimensional integral equations which arise in different fields and potential theory and
fluid mechanics.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
548
1.
2.
3.
4.
Akwabi, G.O. (1990). Methods of Applied Mathematics. Nairobi: University of Nairobi

Press.
Spiegel, M. (1974). Theory and Problems of Fourier Series. London: McGraw-Hill
Book Company.
Spiegel, M. (1981). Theory and Problems of Vector Analysis. London: McGraw-Hill
Book Company.
Stepherson, G. (1982). Mathematical Method for Science Student. Nairobi: Longman.
549
MAT 422: OPERATIONS RESEARCH II

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The purpose of the course is to extend optimization ideas learnt in MAT 315 to other areas of
application
- Determine the shortest path connecting two points and the shortest itinerary,
- Draw a project network for given project data clearly identifying activities and events
and obtain the critical path,
- Crash some critical activities to meet the project deadline wherever possible,
- Schedule vehicles, such as buses and lorries for a transport company so as to minimize
operational costs.
Course content
The course discusses optimization in networks, shortest paths including Floyd's algorithm,
critical path method and project evaluation and review techniques (PERT), maximal flow,
dynamic programming, transhipment model, service tours, vehicles scheduling, saving and
other heuristic methods, urban transport planning with emphasis on bus mode and traffic flows.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
Boffey, T. B. (1982). Theory in Operations Research. London: Macmillan Publishing
Company.
2.
Brownson, G. (1985). Theory and Problems of Operations Research. London: McGraw
Hill Book Company.
3.
Hamday, A. T. (1982). Operation Research. New York: Macmillan Publishing
Company.
550
MAT 423: OPERATIONS RESEARCH III
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To extend the concepts learned in Operations Research I and II to modeling of hierarchical
systems.
- Model hierarchical systems in both deterministic and stochastic set ups,
- Apply integer-programming techniques to resource scheduling problems,
- Solve non-linear programming problems.
Course content
The course discusses multiobjectives, goal programming, utility and elements of decision
theory, markov chains, manpower planning, Leslie-Roger population models, further concepts
in economics for example, consumer surplus, pareto optimality, elements of input-output and
cost benefit analysis, demo-economic modelling, non-linear programming, language
multipliers, Luhn-Tucker analysis, quadratic and integer programming.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1. Dantzig, G. B. (1963). Linear Programming and Extensions. Princeton: University
Press.
551
2. Derman, C. (1970). Finite State Markovian Decision Processes. New York: Academic
Press.
3. Harndy, A. T. (1982). Operation Research: An Introduction, (3rd edition). London:
MacMillan Publishers.
552
STA 111: INTRODUCTION TO PROBABAILITY AND STATISTICS I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce descriptive statistics and basic probability theory.
At the end of the course students should be able to ( perform advanced work in statistics).
Course content
The course focuses on the presentation of statistical (data by graphs, charts, table, etc, arranging
data into frequency distributions) mean, median, mode and other central tendency, the standard
deviation, mean deviation and other measures of dispersion, moments, skewness and Kurtosis.
Bivariate frequency distribution, scatter diagram, linear and regression, product-moment
correlation, rank correlation, least squares and curve fitting, contingency and association tables,
classical and axiomatic approach to probability, compound and conditional probability, Bayes
theorem on probability.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
James I. Mclare and Frank H. Dietrich II (1985). Statistics, (3rd edition). London:
Collier Macmillan Publishers.
Murray R. Spiegel (1972). Theory and Problems, (1st edition). Schaums outline series.
London: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
553
Recommended material for further reading

1. Sheldon M. Ross (1984). A First Course on Probability, (2nd edition). New York:
Macmillan
2. Sheldon M. Ross (1989). Introduction to Probability Models, (4th edition). New York:
Academic Press Inc
554
STA 112: INTRODUCTION TO PROBABAILITY AND STATISTICS I

3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
To introduce the concept of random variables and their probability distributions; both univariate
and bivariate.
At the end of the course students should be able solve problems involving random variables,
their probability distributions, and cognate areas of learning.
Course content
Random variables; discrete and contionous, probability functions of random variables.
Expectations and variance; momemts and moment generating functions. Probability
distributions and distribution functions: Bernoullli, Binomial, Poisson, Normal Exponential,
Hypergeometric, Beta, Gamma, e.t.c
.
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
John, E. Freund (1971). Mathematical Statistics, (2nd edition). New Jersey: PrenticeHall Inc.
Kapur J. N. and Saxena H. C. (1976). Mathematical Statistics, (8th edition). New
Delhi: S. Chad and Company Ltd.
555
3.
4.
Mclave J. T. and Dietrich F. H. II (1985). Statistics, (3rd edition). London: Collier

Macmillan Publishers.
Sheldom M. Ross (1989). Introduction to Probability Models, (4th edition). New York:
Academic Press Inc.

1. Mood, A.M; Graybill, F. and Boes, D.C. (1974). Introduction to the Theory of Statistics.
London: Mc Graw-Hill series in Probability and statistics.
2. DeGroot, M.H. (1986). Probability and Statistics London: Addison Wesley
556
STA 317: THEORY OF ESTIMATION
3 CREDIT HOURS
Purpose
The aim of the course is to introduce the student to the concept of Point Estimation and various
techniques of finding best estimators.
At the end of the course students should be able to carry out point estimation problems using
various methods like maximum likelihood estimation.
Course content
The course focuses on point estimation, methods and properties, maximum likelihood, method
of moments, sufficient and complete statistics, minimum variance unbiased estimators,
consistent and efficient estimators. Cramer-Rao inequality for a single parameter, interval
estimation, elements of the theory of decision functions will also be covered. .
Mode of delivery
Course Assessment:
total mark
Staff performance
1.
2.
Freund J.E. and Walpole R. E. (1980). Mathematical Statistics. Englewood Cliffs. N.J:
Prentice-Hall
Larsen R. J. and Marx M. L. (1986). An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics and its
Applications. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc, Englewood Cliffs.
557
3.
Mood A.M Graybil F. A. and Boes D. C. (1974). Introduction to the Theory of Statistics.
London: McGraw-Hill Series in Probability and Statistics.

1. De Groot, M.H. (1986). Probability and Statistics. New York: Addison Wesley.
2. Hogg, R.V. and Claig, A.T. (1978). Introduction to Mathematical Statistics. London:
Macmillan Publishers and Collier Macmillan.
558

School of Science

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

School of Science

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

NAROK UNIVERSITY

ACCREDITATION REPORT VOLUME 2

3.11 Needs assessment/ market survey/ situation analysis

iv) Use computers in the treatment of results

3.5.4 Grading system

3.8 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

chemical equilibria and

experiments and data. Chemical equilibria: Reversible chemical reaction, equilibrium

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

the introductory concepts of structures of organic molecules,

empirical and molecular formulae determinations,

IUPAC nomenclature for organic molecules,

existence of structural and geometric isomerism, and

basic reactions of these compounds .

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

2. Graham H & John H. (2004). Chemistry in Context.5th edition.

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 211: BASIC ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

Gravimetric and titrimetric analysis: precipitation, acid-base and oxidation-reduction

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 212: BASIC ORGANIC CHEMITRY

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 213: BASIC THERMODYNAMICS

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

Recommended reference materials

CHE 214: BIOCHEMISTRY

structure and main fuctional groups of biological molecules.

Reaction partways and processes of these molecules

Link between reactions and biological activities.

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

At the end of the course students should be:

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 312: CHEMISTRY OF ALICYCLIC AROMATIC COMPOUNDS

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE313: SURFACE AND COLLOIDAL CHEMISTRY

Colloidal state: classification, preparation and purification of its systems. Kinetic

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 314: THERMODYNAMICS AND PHASE EQUILIBRIA

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

Core reading material for the course

CHE 315: ALICYCLIC AND HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY

Name non-aromatic, 5-, 6- membered heterocyclic and fused ring heterocyclic

Draw the shapes, conformations and configurations of cyclic molecules.

Describe resonance of heterocyclic compounds.

Describe preparation and chemical reactions of non-aromatic and heterocyclic

State the importance of heterocyclic compounds in day todays life.

- Condensed ring systems: examples of condensed ring systems, structures, their

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

Main examination shall contribute 70% of the total mark.

able to demonstrate an understanding of the instrumental methods for molecular structure

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE 317: CHEMICAL KINETICS

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

Core reading material for the course

CHE318: ORGANO-METALLIC AND CO-ORDINATION CHEMISTRY (3

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE319: STEREOCHEMISTRY AND CONFORMATIONAL STUDIES (3 UNITS)

cycloalkanes. Stereochemical and other effects in nucleophilic substitution, elimination

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)

CHE320: IDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY I

Expected Learning outcomes of the course

Coursework (continuous assessment tests, Laboratory reports and assignments)